ATM SelfServ 23 and 27 ATMs

Service Manual

B006‐7265‐A000

February 2016


Use pursuant to Company Instructions


Revision Record

Revision Record

Revision Date

Chapter

Reason for change

February 2014

All

 

Initial release

March 2014

All

 

New structure

 

Preventive Maintenance Currency Dispenser

 

Updated

 

Preventive Maintenance Receipt Printer

 

Updated

 

USB IMCRW

 

Updated

 

Receipt Printer

 

Updated

 

S1 Dispenser

 

Updated

April 2014

N/A

 

Corrected product ID from B006‐7625 to B0067265.

May 2014

Miscellaneous Interface

 

Removed Mini Misc I/F and replaced with Midi Misc I/F.

January 2015

Introduction

 

Updated: added 6627

 

Preventive Maintenance Schedule

 

Updated: added S2 dispenser.

 

Preventive Maintenance S2 Currency Dispenser

 

New

 

6623 Product Cabling

 

Updated: added S2 dispenser

 

6627 Product Cabling

 

New

 

Mini Core

 

Updated: Lanier II

 

15 Inch Touchscreen

 

New

 

15 Inch Display

 

New

 

S2 Dispenser

 

New

 

S2 Dispenser Cassette

 

New

 

USB Barcode Reader

 

New

 

SelfServ 27 Module Removal

 

New

April 2015

Preventive Maintenance Security Enclosure Heaters

New

 

Preventive Maintenance Barcode Reader

New

 

Uninterruptible Power Supply

New

 

USB Hub

New

 

USB Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo)

New

 

China EPP

New

 

UEPP3

New

 

Backlight Displays

New

 

Thermally Managed 15 Inch Display

New

 

Alarms

New

 

SATA DVD

New

 

Product Environment Heaters

New

 

SelfServ 23 Module Removal

Updated: display and facia sections

 

SelfServ 27 Module Removal

New

February 2016

USB IMCRW

Update

 

Dynamo Display

Update

Revision Record

               Revision Date      Chapter                                                      Reason for change

Table of Contents

Section 1 ‐ Introduction

Reference and Safety

REFERENCE DOCUMENTS.......................................................................................1

SAFETY INFORMATION...........................................................................................1

Electronics Boards ...........................................................................................1

ATM Cash Security...........................................................................................1

Access ..............................................................................................................2

Barcode Reader ...............................................................................................2

Fluorescent Lamps...........................................................................................2

Section 2 ‐ Preventive Maintenance

Preventive Maintenance Overview

OVERALL SYSTEM CHECKS......................................................................................1

LUBRICATION .........................................................................................................1

Lubricants ........................................................................................................2

TEST TOOLS ............................................................................................................2

CLEANING MATERIALS ...........................................................................................3

CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITY ..................................................................................3

Preventive Maintenance Schedule

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

POWER ON CHECKS ...............................................................................................2

POWER OFF CHECKS...............................................................................................

3 FLUIDITI CHECKS.....................................................................................................6

POST PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS ...........................................................7

Card Readers

DIP CARD READERS ................................................................................................1

SWIPE CARD READERS............................................................................................1

USB IMCRW............................................................................................................2

Clean Read Heads and Smart Contacts............................................................2

Clean Rollers....................................................................................................3

S1 Currency Dispenser

SUMMARY CHECKLIST............................................................................................1

 INSPECT THE PICK MODULE ...................................................................................2

PICK MODULE INTERNAL TIMING (D WHEEL TIMING)...........................................6

PICK MODULE TO PICK MODULE TIMING ..............................................................8

INSPECT THE PRESENTER .......................................................................................9

INSPECT CASSETTES................................................................................................9

DIAGNOSTICS .......................................................................................................11

S2 Currency Dispenser

SUMMARY CHECKLIST............................................................................................1

CLEANING MATERIALS ...........................................................................................1

INSPECT THE PICK MODULE ...................................................................................1


Pick Module to Pick Module Timing ................................................................3

INSPECT THE PRESENTER .......................................................................................4

INSPECT THE CASSETTES ........................................................................................5

DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................5

Pick Valve.........................................................................................................5

Belt alignment .................................................................................................5

Note Skew........................................................................................................5

Bunch Splay .....................................................................................................5

Facia alignment................................................................................................6

Shutter.............................................................................................................6

Security Enclosure

GENERAL CHECKS...................................................................................................1

DOOR HINGE LUBRICATION ...................................................................................1

USB Receipt Printer

Transport Sensors............................................................................................1

Thermal Print Head..........................................................................................2

Security Enclosure Heaters

SECURITY ENCLOSURE HEATER TEST......................................................................1

Pre–requisite ...................................................................................................1

Test Frequency and Timing..............................................................................1

Security Enclosure Heater Test Procedure ......................................................1

ROOM HEATER TEST...............................................................................................2

Room Heat Low ...............................................................................................2

Room Heat Timed............................................................................................2

Room Heat Faulty ............................................................................................2

Room Heat OK .................................................................................................2

USB 2D Bar Code Reader (UBAR)

CLEANING...............................................................................................................1

Section 3 ‐ Diagnostics Overview

Diagnostics Overview

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

SYSTEM APPLICATION ............................................................................................1

Entering System Application............................................................................1

Device Diagnostics...........................................................................................4

Device Self Tests ..............................................................................................7

Event Logs........................................................................................................7

Service Tallies ..................................................................................................8

Device Status List.............................................................................................9

Device Servicing.............................................................................................10

Save Module Life Counts ...............................................................................10

Self Service Configuration..............................................................................11

Transaction Counters.....................................................................................13

LEVEL 0 DIAGNOSTICS..........................................................................................13

Power‐up Diagnostics....................................................................................13

Switch Selectable Diagnostics........................................................................14

Extended Diagnostics.....................................................................................14

TEST TOOLS ..........................................................................................................14

Bootable System Application.........................................................................15

KEY SYSTEM APPLICATION MENUS ......................................................................16

Section 4 ‐ Product Cabling

6623 Product Cabling

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DISTRIBUTION DIAGRAMS......................................................................................2

DC Distribution ................................................................................................2

AC Distribution.................................................................................................4

USB Distribution ..............................................................................................5

USB Distribution without HUB.........................................................................6

HARNESSES.............................................................................................................7

AC Harness Assy...............................................................................................7

Alarms Harness................................................................................................8

Audio................................................................................................................9

Auto Supervisor Safe harness........................................................................10

DC/USB Tray Harness (View 1 of 3) ...............................................................11

DC/USB Tray Harness (View 2 of 3) ...............................................................12

DC/USB Tray Harness (View 3 of 3) ...............................................................13

Facia Harness (View 1 of 2)............................................................................14

Facia Harness (View 2 of 2)............................................................................

15 LVDS...............................................................................................................16

Mode Switch Harness....................................................................................17

PSU Intel Harness...........................................................................................17

S1 Dispenser Harness (View 1 of 2) ...............................................................18

S1 Dispenser Harness (View 2 of 2) ...............................................................19

S2 Dispenser Harness ....................................................................................20

Speaker Harness ............................................................................................21

SPS Harnesses................................................................................................22

USB Touch Screen Cable Assembly................................................................24

6627 Product Cabling

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DISTRIBUTION DIAGRAMS......................................................................................2

DC Distribution ................................................................................................2

AC Distribution.................................................................................................3

USB Distribution ..............................................................................................4

USB Distribution without HUB.........................................................................5

HARNESSES.............................................................................................................6

AC Harness Assy...............................................................................................6

Alarms..............................................................................................................7

Audio................................................................................................................9

Auto Supervisor Safe harness........................................................................10

DC/USB Tray Harness (View 1 of 3) ...............................................................11

DC/USB Tray Harness (View 2 of 3) ...............................................................12

DC/USB Tray Harness (View 3 of 3) ...............................................................13

Facia Harness (View 1 of 2)............................................................................14

Facia Harness (View 2 of 2)............................................................................15

Heaters Harness.............................................................................................15

LVDS...............................................................................................................16

Mode Switch Harness....................................................................................17

PSU Intel Harness...........................................................................................17

S2 Dispenser Harness ....................................................................................18

Speaker Harness ............................................................................................19

SPS Harnesses................................................................................................20

Upper Advert Harness ...................................................................................23

USB Touch Screen Cable Assembly................................................................23

Section 5 ‐ Power Supplies

Standard Power Supply (300W)

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1

Power Requirements.......................................................................................2

TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................................3

Restart after Shutdown ...................................................................................3

ERROR MESSAGES..................................................................................................3

DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................3

STRAPPING.............................................................................................................3

ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................4

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT.......................................................................4

CABLING .................................................................................................................4

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS....................................................................4

Input/Output Pins............................................................................................4

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS.....................................................................................4

Uninterruptible Power Supply

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1

Definitions .......................................................................................................1

Specification ....................................................................................................1

Indicators.........................................................................................................2

Indications During Operation ..........................................................................2

TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................................3

1150VA Module...............................................................................................4

DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................4

Level 0..............................................................................................................4

Level 1..............................................................................................................4

Level 3..............................................................................................................5

STRAPPING.............................................................................................................5

ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................5

Configuring The UPS ........................................................................................6

MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT...............................................................7

Battery Care And Replacement .......................................................................8

CABLING ...............................................................................................................11

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS..................................................................11

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS...................................................................................11

Section 6 ‐ Terminal Core and Communications

Mini PC Core

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................2

Motherboards..................................................................................................2

PCI PCCM Board (Optional) .............................................................................3

PCI Riser Board (Optional) ...............................................................................3

Disk Drives .......................................................................................................3

TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................................4

DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................6

Power on Self Test...........................................................................................6

Beep Codes......................................................................................................6

STRAPPING ............................................................................................................7

Motherboard Jumpers.....................................................................................8

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT.....................................................................10

Removing the PC Core Lid..............................................................................11

System Core Fan ............................................................................................11

PCCM Board (Optional Feature) ....................................................................12

PCCM Riser Card (Optional Feature) .............................................................13

External DVD..................................................................................................14

Audio Breakout Cable....................................................................................14

USB Breakout Assembly.................................................................................15

Hard Disk Drive (HDD) ...................................................................................16

Motherboard .................................................................................................18

Memory Board (SODIMM).............................................................................20

CPU Cooler.....................................................................................................22

Processor .......................................................................................................23

I/O Shield .......................................................................................................25

CABLING ...............................................................................................................26

Interconnection Diagrams .............................................................................26

Cables ............................................................................................................30

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS..................................................................33

Motherboard Connectors..............................................................................33

HDDs and Optical Drive S–ATA Connector ....................................................37

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS...................................................................................37

USB 7 Port Hub

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................10

 Power Requirement.........................................................................................2

Maximum Cable Lengths .................................................................................2

TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................................2

DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................4

Level 1 Diagnostics...........................................................................................4

STRAPPING.............................................................................................................4

ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................4

MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT...............................................................4

Top Box Mounted Hub.....................................................................................4

Safe Mounted Hub...........................................................................................4

CABLING .................................................................................................................5

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT....................................................................................6

Hub Board........................................................................................................6

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS.....................................................................................7

Section 7 ‐ Card Readers

USB IMCRW

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1

UIMCRW Firmware..........................................................................................2

Card Detection and Pre‐head Detection..........................................................2

Card Transport.................................................................................................2

Security ‐ Long and Short Card Detection........................................................3

Reading and Writing To Magnetic Stripe Cards...............................................3

Reading and Writing to Smart Cards ...............................................................3

Sensor Locations..............................................................................................4

Optional Features ............................................................................................4

TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................................8

Removing Clamped Cards..............................................................................12

DIAGNOSTICS .......................................................................................................13

Level 0 Diagnostics.........................................................................................13

Level 1 Diagnostics.........................................................................................20

Level 3 Diagnostics.........................................................................................24

STRAPPING...........................................................................................................27

ADJUSTMENTS......................................................................................................27

Pre‐head ........................................................................................................27

Heartbeat.......................................................................................................28

Card Detect Microswitch...............................................................................28

FRU MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT .....................................................29

Anti‐Eavesdropping Kit ..................................................................................30

MEIs...............................................................................................................32

IC Contact Block.............................................................................................33

Throat ............................................................................................................34

 Battery...........................................................................................................35

Base Transport...............................................................................................35

Card Clamping Module..................................................................................35

CABLING ...............................................................................................................44

CIM Harness...................................................................................................44

MM HARNESS ................................................................................................45

CARD CAPTURE BIN HARNESS .......................................................................45

CONNECTORS.......................................................................................................46

Main Control Board .......................................................................................47

CIM/MM PCB.................................................................................................49

CIM/MM With Security PCB ..........................................................................50

IC Block PCB...................................................................................................52

Card Clamping PCB ........................................................................................53

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS...................................................................................54

CIM/MM Turnaround Plug ............................................................................54

Cards..............................................................................................................55

USB Smart Dip Card Reader

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1

Magnetic Stripe Reading..................................................................................2

Smart Card Reading.........................................................................................2

Security Feature...............................................................................................2

TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................................3

DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................3

Level 0 Diagnostics...........................................................................................3

Level 1 Diagnostics...........................................................................................3

Level 3 Diagnostics...........................................................................................4

STRAPPING.............................................................................................................5

ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................5

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT.......................................................................5

CABLING .................................................................................................................5

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS....................................................................6

USB mini‐B connector......................................................................................6

Power connector .............................................................................................6

 TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS.....................................................................................6

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE..................................................................................6

USB Contactless Card Reader

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1

Antenna Unit Connectors ................................................................................3

Control Unit Connectors..................................................................................3

TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................................4

DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................4

 HW_DIAGNOSTICS Property............................................................................4

HW_SELF_TEST Property .................................................................................5

 

HW_MAINTENANCE PROPERTY .............................................................................6

HW_CONFIGURATION PROPERTY..........................................................................6

STRAPPING.............................................................................................................7

LEDs and MEEIs................................................................................................7

Control Board ..................................................................................................7

ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................7

MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT...............................................................7

CABLING .................................................................................................................8

Harnesses.........................................................................................................8

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS....................................................................8

+24V Power .....................................................................................................8

USB ..................................................................................................................8

AUX..................................................................................................................9

R.F. Out............................................................................................................9

LED/Buzzer.......................................................................................................9

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS...................................................................................10

USB Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo)

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................2

Operation.........................................................................................................2

Power...............................................................................................................2

Interface Connections......................................................................................2

LED...................................................................................................................2

ERROR MESSAGES..................................................................................................3

DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................3

STRAPPING.............................................................................................................3

ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................3

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT.......................................................................3

CABLING .................................................................................................................3

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS....................................................................4

USB connector (J10).........................................................................................4

DC power supply connector (J6)......................................................................4

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS.....................................................................................4

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE..................................................................................4

Card Recycler Module

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1

SPECIFICATIONS .....................................................................................................2

TROUBLESHOOTING AND DIAGNOSTICS................................................................2

MAINTENANCE AND CONFIGURATION..................................................................2

STRAPPING AND ADJUSTMENTS............................................................................3

CAPTURED CARD REMOVAL...................................................................................3

CABLING .................................................................................................................8

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS....................................................................8

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS.....................................................................................8

Section 8 ‐ Keyboards and Eatm Notesyptors

Universal Eatm Notesypting PIN Pad (II)

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1

Keyboard..........................................................................................................2

USB Mainboard................................................................................................2

Removal Switches............................................................................................2

USB Interface...................................................................................................2

TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................................3

DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................3

Level 0 Diagnostics...........................................................................................3

Level 1 Diagnostics...........................................................................................4

Level 3 Diagnostics...........................................................................................5

Self Tests..........................................................................................................5

CONFIGURATION....................................................................................................5

Configuration Options .....................................................................................5

STRAPPING.............................................................................................................6

ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................6

MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT...............................................................7

 Assembly Replacement....................................................................................7

Defective Assembly Disposal...........................................................................7

CABLING .................................................................................................................7

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS....................................................................7

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS.....................................................................................7

China Eatm Notesypting Pin Pad (USBCPIN)

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1

Keyboard..........................................................................................................2

USB Mainboard................................................................................................2

Removal Switches............................................................................................2

USB Interface...................................................................................................2

Power Requirements.......................................................................................2

Mechanical Characteristics..............................................................................3

ERROR MESSAGES..................................................................................................3

DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................4

Level 0 Diagnostics...........................................................................................4

Device Diagnostics...........................................................................................4

Device Self Test................................................................................................7

Tallies...............................................................................................................7

CONFIGURATION....................................................................................................8

Configuration Options .....................................................................................8

STRAPPING.............................................................................................................8

ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................8

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT.......................................................................9

 Assembly Replacement....................................................................................9

Defective Assembly Disposal...........................................................................9

CABLING .................................................................................................................9

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS..................................................................10

USB mini B .....................................................................................................10

Heater............................................................................................................10

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS...................................................................................10

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE................................................................................10

Universal Eatm Notesypting Pin Pad (III)

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................2

Keyboard..........................................................................................................2

USB Mainboard................................................................................................2

Removal Switches............................................................................................2

USB Interface...................................................................................................3

Power Requirements.......................................................................................3

TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................................3

DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................4

Level 0 diagnostics...........................................................................................4

Device Diagnostics...........................................................................................4

Device Self Test................................................................................................6

Tallies...............................................................................................................7

STRAPPING.............................................................................................................7

ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................7

Configuration Options .....................................................................................7

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT.......................................................................8

Damaged Assembly Disposal...........................................................................8

Assembly Replacement....................................................................................8

Key Loading......................................................................................................9

CABLING .................................................................................................................9

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS..................................................................10

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS...................................................................................10

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE................................................................................10

Section 9 ‐ Display

15 inch USB Projected Capacitive Touch Screen

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1

Glass Sensor.....................................................................................................2

Two–Part Controller (Controller Board and A/D Board)..................................2

 Projected Capacitive Technology.....................................................................3

Power Requirements.......................................................................................4

USB PCAP Touch Screen Feature Driver ..........................................................4

ERROR MESSAGES..................................................................................................4

DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................4

Level 0 Diagnostics...........................................................................................4

Device Diagnostics...........................................................................................4

Device Self Test................................................................................................6

STRAPPING.............................................................................................................6

ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................7

Touch Screen Configuration ............................................................................7

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT.......................................................................8

Touch Screen Glass..........................................................................................8

Controllers .....................................................................................................13

CABLING ...............................................................................................................17

Flex Circuit ‐ 10 Circuit Cable.........................................................................17

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS..................................................................18

Glass Sensor...................................................................................................18

Controllers .....................................................................................................20

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS...................................................................................23

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE................................................................................23

Backlight Displays

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1

Interface Connections......................................................................................1

ERROR MESSAGES..................................................................................................2

DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................2

STRAPPING.............................................................................................................3

ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................3

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT.......................................................................3

CABLING .................................................................................................................3

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENTS/PINOUTS ..................................................................4

7.0 Inch Display................................................................................................4

10.4 Inch Display..............................................................................................4

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS.....................................................................................5

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE..................................................................................5

15 Inch Dynamo Displays

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1

15 Inch Dynamo Displays.................................................................................1

Thermal Management Module (TMM)............................................................2

Power Requirements.......................................................................................2

Warm‐up Time.................................................................................................3

Configuration...................................................................................................3

ERROR MESSAGES..................................................................................................3

DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................3

STRAPPING.............................................................................................................3

ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................4

Dynamo Display...............................................................................................4

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT.......................................................................5

Thermal Management Module (TMM)............................................................5

Defective Assembly Disposal...........................................................................7

CABLING .................................................................................................................8

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS....................................................................8

Dynamo Display...............................................................................................8

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS...................................................................................12

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE................................................................................12

Section 10 ‐ Printers

USB Receipt Printer

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................2

Power Requirements.......................................................................................2

Paper Specification..........................................................................................2

Printable area ..................................................................................................2

Sensor Locations..............................................................................................3

TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................................5

LEDs Location and Meanings...........................................................................5

Module Error Messages...................................................................................7

General Checks ................................................................................................8

DIAGNOSTICS .......................................................................................................10

Level 0 Diagnostics.........................................................................................10

Device Diagnostics.........................................................................................10

Service Tallies ................................................................................................12

STRAPPING...........................................................................................................13

Fuse................................................................................................................13

ADJUSTMENTS......................................................................................................13

Printer Sensor Re–calibration Procedure ......................................................14

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT.....................................................................20

Transport .......................................................................................................20

Dual Feed Mechanism (Standard) .................................................................21

Dual Feed Assembly (Stamp).........................................................................23

Print Engine ...................................................................................................23

Fuse................................................................................................................26

Front Hopper .................................................................................................27

Rear Hopper...................................................................................................29

Hopper Low Sensor Harness..........................................................................30

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENTS/PINOUTS ................................................................31

Logic Board ....................................................................................................31

Single Roll Drive Board...................................................................................33

Dual Roll Control Board .................................................................................34

CABLING ...............................................................................................................34

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS...................................................................................34

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE................................................................................34

USB Journal Printer

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1

Power Requirements.......................................................................................1

Environmental Requirements..........................................................................2

Paper Specification..........................................................................................2

Sensor Locations..............................................................................................3

TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................................3

LEDs Location and Meaning.............................................................................3

Module Error Messages...................................................................................4

General Checks ................................................................................................4

DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................5

Level 0 Diagnostics...........................................................................................5

Level 1 Diagnostics...........................................................................................9

LEVEL 3 DIAGNOSTICS....................................................................................10

STRAPPING...........................................................................................................10

Switches.........................................................................................................10

ADJUSTMENTS......................................................................................................11

MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT.............................................................11

Head Assembly ..............................................................................................11

CABLING ...............................................................................................................14

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS..................................................................14

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS...................................................................................14

Section 11 ‐ Dispense

S1 Bill Alignment Dispenser

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

S1 Variants.......................................................................................................1

Pick Modules....................................................................................................1

Single and Dual Configuration .........................................................................2

Operational Environment................................................................................2

Variants............................................................................................................2

Containers........................................................................................................3

Specifications...................................................................................................3

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................5

Path of Notes...................................................................................................5

Pick Module.....................................................................................................9

Presenter Module............................................................................................9

Firmware Description ....................................................................................25

TROUBLESHOOTING.............................................................................................27

Module State Table .......................................................................................27

Troubleshooting Procedures .........................................................................29

DIAGNOSTICS.................................................................................................32

Level 0 Diagnostics.........................................................................................32

Level 1 Diagnostics.........................................................................................33

Level 3 Diagnostics.........................................................................................38

STRAPPING...........................................................................................................41

Currency Dispenser Control Board ................................................................41

ADJUSTMENTS......................................................................................................43

Drive Belt Tension..........................................................................................43

Currency Evaluation Qualification Procedure................................................44

Calibrating the Dispenser ..............................................................................44

Establishing Singularity and Size....................................................................46

Calculation of Reject Rate..............................................................................49

Error Messages ..............................................................................................49

Cleaning Serial Number Read Transport Cameras.........................................52

MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT.............................................................53

Removing the Electronics Box (Rear Access).................................................53

 Replacing the Electronics Box........................................................................57

Removing the Control Board .........................................................................58

Removing the Main Motor ............................................................................61

Removing the LVDT .......................................................................................62

Replacing the LVDT........................................................................................65

Pick Module Timing .......................................................................................65

CABLING ...............................................................................................................66

Internal Cables...............................................................................................66

Dispenser Main Motor...................................................................................66

Dispenser Interconnection Diagram..............................................................67

 Front Access Presenters Cabling (Sheet 1 of 4) .............................................68

Front Access Presenter Cabling (Sheet 2 of 4)...............................................69

Front Access Presenters Cabling (Sheet 3 of 4) .............................................70

Front Access Presenters Cabling (Sheet 4 of 4) .............................................71

Rear Access Presenter Cabling (Sheet 1 of 4)................................................72

Rear Access Presenter Cabling (Sheet 2 of 4)................................................73

 Rear Access Presenter Cabling (Sheet 3 of 4)................................................74

Rear Access Presenter Cabling (Sheet 4 of 4)................................................75

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT..................................................................................76

 USB Connector...............................................................................................76

Transport LEDS and Sensors ..........................................................................76

Pick Modules..................................................................................................77

Note Thickness Sensor/ LVDT........................................................................77

Stepper Motors..............................................................................................77

 Intelligent Cassette Interface.........................................................................78

Clamp Middle Position Sensor.......................................................................78

Motor Sensors ...............................................................................................78

+24V Connector.............................................................................................79

+24V_Interlock Connector.............................................................................79

Fascia Shutter I2C Connector.........................................................................79

TTL Shutter Connector...................................................................................79

 TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS...................................................................................80

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE................................................................................80

Aria Pick Module

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

Specifications...................................................................................................2

Functions of the Pick Module..........................................................................2

ADJUSTMENTS......................................................................................................10

Pick Module Timing .......................................................................................10

Presenter Timing ...........................................................................................13

PIck Module to Presenter Timing ..................................................................13

TEST TOOLS ..........................................................................................................16

INTERNAL CABLES ................................................................................................16

Aria Single Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 1 of 2)...................................................17

Aria Single Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 2 of 2)...................................................18

Aria Double Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 1 of 2).................................................19

Aria Double Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 2 of 2).................................................20

STRAPPING...........................................................................................................21

Fuse FS1.........................................................................................................21

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT..................................................................................22

Connector J1..................................................................................................22

Currency Cassettes

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1

Cassette Variances...........................................................................................2

1000 Rupee Wide Cassettes Distinguishing Features......................................2

Standard Security Currency Cassettes.............................................................4

Tamper Indicating Currency Cassettes ............................................................4

Fluiditi Currency Cassettes ..............................................................................5

 Cassette Components......................................................................................7

 Cassette Operation..........................................................................................9

Power Requirements.....................................................................................14

TROUBLESHOOTING.............................................................................................14

 DIAGNOSTICS .......................................................................................................14

 STRAPPING...........................................................................................................14

ADJUSTMENTS......................................................................................................14

Currency Length Adjustment.........................................................................14

Currency Width Adjustment..........................................................................16

Currency Length, Note Guide and “E” Spacer Codes.....................................18

MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT.............................................................22

Currency Loading...........................................................................................22

Opening The Cassette....................................................................................22

 Removing Unused Currency ..........................................................................25

 Resetting The Tamper Indicating Cassette ....................................................28

Loading The Cassette.....................................................................................28

Closing The Cassette......................................................................................31

Setting The Cassette Identification Code.......................................................32

 Changing Cassette Identification Code..........................................................34

Mechanical ....................................................................................................36

Currency Length Adjustment.........................................................................37

Currency Width Adjustment..........................................................................45

Note Low Sensing Adjustment.......................................................................52

CABLING ...............................................................................................................53

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS..................................................................53

TOOLS...................................................................................................................53

S2 Currency Dispenser

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................2

Presenter Core.................................................................................................3

Nose.................................................................................................................3

 Carriage............................................................................................................4

Bill Aligner Module (BAM) ...............................................................................5

Single Note Transport (SNT) ............................................................................5

Main Motor and Pump Assembly....................................................................6

Double Pick Module.........................................................................................7

Single Pick Module...........................................................................................8

Currency Cassette............................................................................................8

Purge Bin..........................................................................................................9

Status Indicator Lights ...................................................................................10

 Vacuum System .............................................................................................11

Main Control Board .......................................................................................12

5/6 Hi Expansion Board .................................................................................13

Serial Number Read.......................................................................................14

Electrical System............................................................................................15

Sensors...........................................................................................................17

TROUBLESHOOTING.............................................................................................18

Error Messages ..............................................................................................18

Troubleshooting Procedures .........................................................................35

DIAGNOSTICS .......................................................................................................41

Level 0 Diagnostics.........................................................................................41

Level 1 Diagnostics.........................................................................................41

Action Requests.............................................................................................43

Diagnostics Tests ...........................................................................................47

Error Codes....................................................................................................54

Tallies.............................................................................................................54

STRAPPING...........................................................................................................55

ADJUSTMENTS......................................................................................................56

Pick Module Timing Procedure......................................................................56

Cleaning Serial Number Read Transport Cameras.........................................61

JAM CLEARANCE...................................................................................................62

How to move the Carriage to the Closed position.........................................62

HETS CALIBRATION...............................................................................................63

SETTING NOTE PARAMETERS...............................................................................63

CURRENCY EVALUATION QUALIFICATION PROCEDURE.......................................66

Establishing Singularity and Width ................................................................66

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT.....................................................................70

Carriage Umbilical Harness............................................................................72

Carriage..........................................................................................................74

Nose...............................................................................................................77

Bill Aligner Module (BAM) .............................................................................79

Single Note Transport (SNT) ..........................................................................82

Main Motor and Pump Assembly..................................................................86

Double Pick Module.......................................................................................88

Single Pick Module.........................................................................................92

Main Control Board .......................................................................................94

5/6 Hi Expansion Board .................................................................................94

Pick Support Frame........................................................................................95

Presenter Core...............................................................................................96

Presenter Assembly.......................................................................................99

CABLING .............................................................................................................100

Presenter Harness .......................................................................................100

Interface Harness.........................................................................................102

S2 Double Pick Module Harness..................................................................103

Single Pick Module Harness.........................................................................105

Carriage Position Sensor Harness................................................................107

Dual Cassette ID Harness.............................................................................107

Single Cassette ID Harness...........................................................................108

SNT Harness.................................................................................................109

BAM CIC Harness .........................................................................................111

Purge Bin LEDs Interface..............................................................................111

Purge Bin Interface Harness ........................................................................111

State of Health Harness...............................................................................112

TEST AND ADJUSTMENT TOOLS.........................................................................112

GLOSSARY OF TERMS .........................................................................................112

S2 Dispenser Cassette

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

 Tamper Indicator .............................................................................................2

Cassette Identification Code............................................................................2

Cassette Body and Lid Marking .......................................................................3

Cleaning...........................................................................................................3

CASSETTE CONFIGURATION...................................................................................4

Cassette Height................................................................................................4

Cassette Width ................................................................................................7

REPLENISHING CASSETTES ...................................................................................10

Preparing Currency........................................................................................10

Loading the Cassette .....................................................................................11

Section 12 ‐ Shutters

Shutters

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1

Stepper Motor Driven Shutters .......................................................................1

Solenoid Driven Shutter...................................................................................3

TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................................4

DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................4

STRAPPING.............................................................................................................5

ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................5

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT.......................................................................5

Stepper Motor Driven Shutters .......................................................................5

CABLING ...............................................................................................................11

Stepper Motor Driven Shutter ‐ Internal Cabling ..........................................11

Solenoid Driven Shutter ‐ Internal Cabling ....................................................11

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS...................................................................................12

Section 13 ‐ Security

Skimming Protection Solution (MCRW)

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1

Capacitive Sensing ...........................................................................................2

 Magnetic Field ‘Jammer’ .................................................................................2

Electrical ..........................................................................................................3

TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................................5

Module Error State Messages .........................................................................5

DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................7

 Diagnostic LEDs................................................................................................7

Device Diagnostics...........................................................................................8

Post Repair Test: Run Sequence Test 1............................................................9

Service Tallies ................................................................................................12

Device Self Test..............................................................................................12

CONFIGURATION..................................................................................................12

STRAPPING...........................................................................................................13

ADJUSTMENTS......................................................................................................13

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT.....................................................................13

SPS Bezel Moulding and Harness Assembly ..................................................14

Drill Mat.........................................................................................................14

SPS Control Box..............................................................................................15

Interconnecting Harnessing...........................................................................18

CONNECTORS ASSIGNMENTS ..............................................................................19

SPS Control PCB Connectors..........................................................................19

Daughter PCB Connectors .............................................................................19

CABLING ...............................................................................................................20

IFD2 (SPS) Control PCB to IMCRW Linker Harness (J12 SPS Control PCB) .....20

IFD2 (SPS) Harness ‐ IMCRW Short Linker Harness (on IMCRW)...................20

IFD2 (SPS) Control PCB to Coil Linker Harness (J1 Daughter PCB).................21

IFD2 (SPS) Ctl PCB to IMCRW Electrode Linker Harness (J9 SPS Ctl PCB) ......21

Penetration Mat Harness (J4 SPS Control PCB) .............................................21

SS ASM (SPS) Replenishment Harness (J6 SPS Control PCB)..........................22

ASM (SPS) Replenishment Harness (J6 SPS Control PCB) ..............................22

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS...................................................................................22

Skimming Protection Solution (Dip Card Reader)

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1

Functional Elements ........................................................................................2

Power Requirements.......................................................................................2

SPS Control PCB ...............................................................................................3

ERROR MESSAGES..................................................................................................4

DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................6

Diagnostic LEDs................................................................................................6

Device Diagnostics...........................................................................................7

Device Self Test................................................................................................8

Tallies...............................................................................................................8

CONFIGURATION....................................................................................................9

Post Repair Test: Re‐Baseline Sensor/Run Sequence Test 1 .........................10

STRAPPING...........................................................................................................12

ADJUSTMENTS......................................................................................................12

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT.....................................................................12

SPS Bezel and Driver Assembly......................................................................13

Interconnecting Harnessing...........................................................................13

Drill Mat.........................................................................................................14

SPS Control Box..............................................................................................15

CABLING ...............................................................................................................16

SPS DIP Driver PCB to Control PCB Linker Harness .......................................16

Low Power DC Distribution Harness .............................................................16

USB Type A to Type Mini B High Speed Cable Assembly ..............................16

Penetration Mat Harnesses...........................................................................17

SS ASM (SPS) Replenishment Harness...........................................................17

Bezel Assembly ..............................................................................................18

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS..................................................................19

SPS Control PCB Connectors..........................................................................19

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS...................................................................................19

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE................................................................................19

Alarms

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

Location ...........................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................3

TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................................3

DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................4

Level 0..............................................................................................................4

Level 1..............................................................................................................4

Level 3..............................................................................................................4

STRAPPING.............................................................................................................4

ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................5

MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT...............................................................5

CABLING .................................................................................................................5

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS....................................................................6

Alarm Termination Panels ...............................................................................6

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS...................................................................................10

Section 14 ‐ Miscellaneous Devices and Interfaces

Media Entry/Exit Indicators

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1

TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................................1

DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................1

STRAPPING.............................................................................................................2

ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................2

MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT...............................................................2

Standard MEEI .................................................................................................2

MEEI With Carrier Moulding............................................................................2

CABLING .................................................................................................................4

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS....................................................................4

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS.....................................................................................4

Midi Miscellaneous Interface

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1

Board Layout....................................................................................................1

Power Requirement.........................................................................................2

TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................................2

DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................2

Diagnostic LED .................................................................................................2

STRAPPING.............................................................................................................2

ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................3

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT.......................................................................3

CABLING .................................................................................................................3

Interconnect Diagram......................................................................................3

In‐Circuit Debug Cable.....................................................................................3

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS....................................................................4

Midi‐Misc Board Connectors ...........................................................................4

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS.....................................................................................8

USB DVD RW Slimline Drive

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................2

Dimensions ......................................................................................................2

Mounting Orientation......................................................................................2

Disk Clamp System...........................................................................................3

Tray Ejecting ....................................................................................................3

Supported Disk Types ......................................................................................3

Read and Write Speed.....................................................................................4

Power Requirements.......................................................................................4

ERROR MESSAGES..................................................................................................5

DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................5

STRAPPING.............................................................................................................5

ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................5

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT.......................................................................5

CABLING .................................................................................................................5

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS....................................................................5

USB Mini Interface...........................................................................................6

DC 5 V In Connector.........................................................................................6

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS.....................................................................................6

Slim DVD SATA Super Multi Drive

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................2

Dimensions ......................................................................................................2

Tray Ejecting ....................................................................................................2

Supported Disk Types ......................................................................................3

Read and Write Speed.....................................................................................3

Power Requirements.......................................................................................3

ERROR MESSAGES..................................................................................................4

DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................4

STRAPPING.............................................................................................................4

ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................4

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT.......................................................................4

CABLING .................................................................................................................5

Kiosk eSATA Core Breakout .............................................................................5

Kiosk DVD eSATA + Power to Slimline SATA....................................................6

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS....................................................................7

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS.....................................................................................7

DView Camera

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................2

Dimensions ......................................................................................................2

Camera Specifications .....................................................................................3

Lens Properties................................................................................................3

Lens Focus........................................................................................................4

Power Requirements.......................................................................................4

Temperature Requirements ............................................................................5

ERROR MESSAGES..................................................................................................5

DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................5

STRAPPING.............................................................................................................5

ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................5

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT.......................................................................5

CABLING .................................................................................................................6

Harness – CCTV Colour Camera – Safe ............................................................6

Harness Camera Power Top Box......................................................................6

Harness Camera PWR 12V Fascia ....................................................................6

Harness 24V EXT..............................................................................................7

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS....................................................................8

Camera.............................................................................................................8

Dual Power Board............................................................................................8

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS.....................................................................................8

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE..................................................................................8

USB 2D Bar Code Reader

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

Safety Compliance ...........................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1

Power Requirements.......................................................................................2

TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................................3

Module States..................................................................................................3

DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................3

Reporting.........................................................................................................3

Self Test ...........................................................................................................3

Level 3 Diagnostics...........................................................................................3

STRAPPING.............................................................................................................4

ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................4

MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT...............................................................4

CABLING .................................................................................................................4

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS....................................................................5

UBAR Illumination IR LED Driver Board ...........................................................6

UBAR Interface PCB .........................................................................................7

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS.....................................................................................8

Section 15 ‐ Audio

Public/Private Audio with Volume Control

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1

STRAPPING.............................................................................................................1

ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................1

TEST TOOLS ............................................................................................................1

CABLE INFORMATION ............................................................................................2

DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................2

Level 3 Diagnostics...........................................................................................2

S_DATA ............................................................................................................2

TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................................3

Section 16 ‐ Environmental Management

Product Environment Heaters

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................1

Temperature Control.......................................................................................1

TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................................2

DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................2

STRAPPING.............................................................................................................2

ADJUSTMENTS........................................................................................................2

MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT...............................................................2

CABLING .................................................................................................................2

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS.....................................................................................2

Section 17 ‐ Special Procedures

SelfServ 23 Module Removal

ACCESS TO LOWER FACIA ITEMS............................................................................1

REMOVE KEYPAD....................................................................................................2

KEYPAD MEI............................................................................................................3

MCRW MEI/FACIA INSERT/DECAL INSERT .............................................................4

RECEIPT FACIA INSERT & MEI.................................................................................7

MISCELLANEOUS INTERFACE .................................................................................8

DISPLAY ..................................................................................................................9

TOUCHSCREEN .....................................................................................................11

FDKS AND SCREEN................................................................................................16

FACIA....................................................................................................................18

FACIA SHELF .........................................................................................................19

PC CORE................................................................................................................20

DISPENSER............................................................................................................22

S1 Bill Alignment Dispenser Removal and Replacement

INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................1

Presenter Options............................................................................................1

Pick Modules....................................................................................................1

MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT...............................................................1

Removal of In Service Replenishment Covers .................................................2

Removal of Lower Pick Module .......................................................................2

Replacing the Lower Pick Module ...................................................................3

Removing the Electronics Box (Rear Access)...................................................3

Replacing the Electronics Box..........................................................................8

Removing the Control Board ...........................................................................8

Removal of Fluiditi Security Module..............................................................10

Dispenser Control Board ‐ Front Access ........................................................10

Removal of Upper Pick Module.....................................................................12

Replacing the Upper Pick Module .................................................................15

Removing the Presenter Module...................................................................15

Replacing the Presenter Module...................................................................15

Control Board Authorisation..........................................................................16

Control Board Authentication .......................................................................18

Dispense Protection Configuration................................................................21

Currency Evaluation Qualification Procedure................................................23

Calibrating the Dispenser ..............................................................................23

Establishing Singularity and Size....................................................................26

Calculation of Reject Rate..............................................................................29

Error Messages ..............................................................................................29

Pick Module Timing .......................................................................................32

DIAGNOSTICS .......................................................................................................32

STRAPPING...........................................................................................................32

ADJUSTMENTS......................................................................................................32

Drive Belt Tension..........................................................................................32

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT..................................................................................33

SelfServ 27 Module Removal

ACCESS TO FASCIA ITEMS.......................................................................................1

KEYPAD...................................................................................................................2

KEYPAD MEI............................................................................................................3

MCRW MEI/FASCIA INSERT/DECAL INSERT............................................................3

RECEIPT FASCIA INSERT & MEI...............................................................................5

MIDI MISCELLANEOUS INTERFACE.........................................................................6

PC CORE..................................................................................................................6

PSU.........................................................................................................................9

SHUTTER.................................................................................................................9

CCTV CAMERA......................................................................................................11

FASCIA..................................................................................................................11

DISPLAY ................................................................................................................15

TOUCHSCREEN .....................................................................................................16

FDK BEZEL.............................................................................................................19

FASCIA SHELF........................................................................................................22

CASH DISPENSER ..................................................................................................23


 SelfServ 23 and 27 ATMs Service Manual Section 1: Introduction

Section Divider

Section 1 - Introduction

February 2014

SelfServ 23 and 27 ATMs Service Manual Section 1: Introduction Section Divider

February 2014

 SelfServ 23 and 27 ATMs Service Manual Section 1: Introduction

                                                                                                                                           Reference and Safety                                                                                                                                                                            1

Reference and Safety

Chapter Contents

REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

This manual covers the devices used in the SelfServ 23 ATM (class number 6623) and SelfServ 27 ATM (class number 6627) and should be read in conjunction with the following documentation.

l  B006‐7237‐x000 atm Notes SelfServ 23 ATM Parts Identification Manual

l  B006‐7198‐x000 atm Notes SelfServ 23 ATM Operator Overview

l  B006‐7244‐x000 atm Notes SelfServ 23 ATM Site Preparation

l  B006‐7199‐x000 atm Notes SelfServ 23 ATM Installation Guide

l  B006‐7373‐x000 atm Notes SelfServ 27 ATM Parts Identification Manual

l  B006‐7196‐x000 atm Notes SelfServ 27 ATM Operator Overview

l  B006‐7328‐x000 atm Notes SelfServ 27 ATM Site Preparation

l  B006‐7197‐x000 atm Notes SelfServ 27 ATM Installation Guide

SAFETY INFORMATION

Electronics Boards

WARNING

This equipment uses Lithium Batteries. There is a danger of an explosion if a battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to local environmental guidelines.

ATM Cash Security

WARNING

This system uses mercury in the tilt switches located on the back of

January 2015

SelfServ 23 and 27 ATMs Service Manual Section 1: Introduction

2        Reference and Safety

the currency dispenser module. Care should be taken when handling the tilt switches to avoid a spillage.

Access

WARNING

To prevent strain or injury when carrying out tasks on the inner facia area of rear access terminals adjust your position to ensure that your waist is at the level of the top of the security enclosure, allowing your chest and abdomen to lie flat on the top of the security enclosure. Your feet should be supported on a firm base.

Barcode Reader

The Barcode Reader Module uses a class 2 laser emitter that may be uncovered if the scanner engine is interfered with in any way.

WARNING

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Fluorescent Lamps

WARNING

Fluorescent Lamps in display and fascia assemblies contain small amounts of mercury. Dispose of according to applicable laws.

January 2015


Section Divider

Section 2 - Preventive Maintenance

February 2014

Section Divider

February 2014 Preventive Maintenance Overview 1

Preventive Maintenance Overview

Chapter Contents

OVERALL SYSTEM CHECKS

CAUTION

Make sure that ESD precautions are observed.

l  Investigate any errors that may require immediate action

l  Power off the terminal and vacuum the entire inside of the unit, paying special attention to:

l  Power supply unit

l  Core

l  Check all fans for correct operation and clean out any accumulations of dust, especially the power supply and core

l  If the face of the display, or vandal glass is dirty, drop the monitor back from the vandal glass and clean the display face and the inside of the vandal glass. Ensure that the dust seal is present and in good condition

l  Using a vacuum cleaner, remove all accumulations of dust residue from the facia jack socket

l  Ensure that camera facia windows are clean. If, for any reason, the camera is removed from the terminal, the opportunity should be taken to clean the inside of the facia window and the camera lens

l  Use the Customer Confidence Test or Level 2 diagnostics to make sure that all modules are functioning correctly

l  Clear all Device Status List messages

l  Make sure your CSS Key Disk has been removed from the unit.

LUBRICATION

Satisfactory operation of mechanical components depends upon proper lubrication.

1.     Use clean lubricants from properly labelled containers.

2.     Avoid excessive lubrication. Apply only that amount which will provide a thin coating on the entire bearing area or surface, unless otherwise specified.

3.     All parts to be lubricated must be free from dust, corrosion and metal chips.

4.     Lubricate bearing areas and surfaces during assembly, unless conditions caused by subsequent handling are detrimental (for example, accumulation of chips, grit, and so

January 2015

2       Preventive Maintenance Overview

on) to the proper operation of the part. In those cases lubrication should be applied after assembly.

5.     Apply lubricants using the most convenient method when none is specified, that is by brushing, dipping, or oil can. Spraying is not recommended.

6.     Lubricate all spring hooks and spring studs with lubricant B.

7.     Working clipped or riveted assemblies should not be lubricated before riveting but only after all processes, handling, or storage involving exposure to dirt or serious atmospheric contamination are past.

8.     On assemblies that have shafts on which one or more moving parts are assembled, lubricate both the shaft and the hub areas on each part with the specified lubricant.

9.     Lubricants can cause serious deterioration of rubber. Avoid contamination of drive belts and drive rolls.

Lubricants

The lubricant ID letter in the table below is referred to in the appropriate device preventive maintenance chapters in this section.

Lubricant

atm Notes Reference No. *

Recommended Alternative(s)

ID

Type

 

 

A

atm Notes No.2 General Purpose Oil

see below

Shell Oil Co. Donax T‐6

Mobil Oil Co. Mobile ATF 220

Exxon Oil Co. ATF or Esso ATF

B

Synthetic Lubricating Grease

009‐0004618 (100gm containers)

None

C

atm Notes No.3 Special Purpose Grease

603‐8000150

None

D

Solid Lubricant Paste

009‐0009020

Molykote DXTM paste

E

General Electric Silicone Fluid, SF‐96 (50) TM

603‐8000482

None

F

Head Cleaning Fluid

603‐8000539

None

The atm Notes Reference Numbers in the above table are quoted from publication RM0300, atm Notes Tool Catalogue.

TEST TOOLS

The following pin extraction tool is suitable for power connectors.

Manufacturer

Type

Manufacturer’s Part No.

Molex

Mini‐Fit Jr.

11‐03‐0044 (HT 60630 B)

January 2015


                                                                                                                       Preventive Maintenance Overview                                                                                                                                                                  3

CLEANING MATERIALS

The following table details the recommended cleaning materials:

Cleaning Materials

atm Notes Reference No. *

Cleaning kit

009‐0004633

MCR/MCRW cleaning card

998‐0052929

Cheque Processing Module cleaning pack

009‐0018796

CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITY

It is the responsibility of the customer to clean the following modules (refer to the relevant Operator Manual).

l  Cash Deposit Module Sensors

l  Keyboard surfaces

l  Monitor surface

l  MCRW/MCR

l  Printers.

January 2015

4       Preventive Maintenance Overview

January 2015


Preventive Maintenance Schedule

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

This chapter describes the preventive maintenance schedule for the atm Notes SelfServ 23 and SelfServ 27 ATMs.

Preventive maintenance should be carried out during repair calls.

 

CABINETRY & FACIA

 

 

Every Visit

Observe the general appearance of the ATM cabinet and clean as necessary

Every Visit

Verify all fans are operating correctly and are not noisy, including the safe, LCD and power supply fans.

Yearly

Clean CD/DVD‐ROM drive with cleaning CD.

Yearly

Verify correct operation of AC interlock switches; ensure there is not excessive float on the door when in the closed position that would allow the switch to operate intermittently.

Yearly

If fitted verify correct operation of auto supervisor by opening/closing of fascia, security enclosure or top‐box as appropriate. Listen for the click, verify that there is not excessive float on the fascia or cabinetry when in the home position that would allow the switch to operate intermittently.

POWER ON CHECKS

 

GENERAL CHECKS

 

 

Every Visit

Discuss performance of the ATM with the custodian/operator/first line maintainer and make notes of any entries in the logbook, which require resolution. Inspect for vandalism and damage and advise the customer or customer representative of any findings requiring repair.

Every Visit

Visually check for FRAUD/TAMPERING around the Keyboard, Fascia and Card Reader. Check for foreign devices and extra wires or harnessing. Report such activities to your Territory or Service Account Manager. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE A DEVICE, THERE MAY BE PERSONAL RISK ‐ PLACE THE ATM OUT OF SERVICE.

Every Visit

For remote sites, check for lighting around the building area. atm Notes is not responsible for building lighting but does need to inform the proper persons (help desk or branch persons) of any safety infractions or issues.

Every Visit

Report poor installation of Alarms/Comms cables to your territory manager. For example excess cable loops lying in base of safe or cables interfering with moving parts etc. Where possible tidy the installation to avoid ongoing interference with moving parts.

Every Visit

Remove media stored within both top‐box and security enclosures (paper rolls, envelopes, statement paper etc.) Remove currency storage bags and any rubbish lying inside the ATM.

Every Visit

Once the machine has been opened visually inspect the modules before you get started. Check the cables and rails on all modules to ensure smooth operation.

Every Visit

Review error and tally logs either on‐screen or printed and investigate any errors that may require attention. Always print the tally logs and keep the last copy in the logbook. There may be many Track 3 read errors on the MCRW and many communication errors; these do not require any action.

Yearly

If the ATM is replenished by branch staff, ask them to remove all currency containers and the currency from the currency cassettes, and return cassettes for examination. Check correct operation of the cassette doors, brushes, spring fingers, pusher plate, and pusher plate pressure. Check cassette note height and width guide settings are correct, check for high spots in the settings.

 

S1 CURRENCY DISPENSER

 

 

Every Visit

Use an air can and vacuum to remove dust from all areas of the dispenser.

Every Visit

Replace all suction cups (277‐0009574). Check pick line for broken nozzles. Replace the pick line if broken, cracked, or bent. Clean all sensor and LED board assemblies.

Every Visit

Check for worn or broken gears or belts. If worn or broken belts are found, module replacement should be scheduled and noted in the log book.

Every Visit

Verify that the pick and presenter modules are correctly timed (D Wheel, Pick ‐ Pick). If you do re‐time the dispenser, check timing several times to be sure no teeth are missing on any gears and timing stays true. As each pick module "D" lines up with the sensor, check that the half round wheel is ready to contact the full circular wheel inside the pick module. Worn or broken gears may warrant pick module replacement.

Yearly

Ensure that the note flicker at the purge bin is present, replace broken flickers or cable ties with a new flicker.

POWER OFF CHECKS

 

GENERAL CHECKS

 

 

Yearly

Where it is safe (incoming power to the ATM from the building supply is switched off, and there is no danger to yourself or others from the electrical power), carefully check the tightness of the power ground connection at the ATM.

Yearly

Check the power ground (and polarity) at the wall outlet using a Circuit Tester (if available). The outlet cover should not be removed ‐ any issues should be escalated to the customer for resolution. This is normally outside the scope of atm Notes Service Contracts, but it is important for ATM performance.

 

CABINETRY & FACIA

 

 

Yearly

Using a vacuum cleaner and (if necessary) air can, vacuum ALL internal surfaces of the ATM including the PC core and fan, power supply, fans, and filters (where applicable).

Yearly

Verify correct operation of the fascia and appearance door locks, verify locks are securely fastened and locking nuts have not backed off. Ensure fascia is latching into position and door latch plates are adjusted correctly.

Yearly

Ensure all fascia mounted shutter doors are aligned and move freely, clean if necessary. Be sure that the shutters have a covering over the circuit board portion of the shutter. Ensure shutter assemblies are fully tightened onto the fascia.

Yearly

Lubricate the safe door hinges with lubricant A (or similar low viscosity oil) as described in the Preventive Maintenance Overview.

Yearly

Verify harnessing is not being snagged/damaged during door opening/closing operations and ensure harnessing has been tied back properly after part replacement. Make sure all ground straps are fitted to shutter assemblies, facias and to keyboards. Check harnessing is not being snagged/damaged during module racking.

Yearly

Ensure retract and slide assemblies are securely bolted in place.

Yearly

If applicable, check condition of rain management components, ensure Mylar guides aren't torn.

 

 

S1 CURRENCY DISPENSER

 

 

Yearly

Disconnect the vacuum tube from the bottom pick solenoid; replace the vacuum filter (445‐0612449). When you disturb the air filter some dust will drop down the tubing be sure to clean this out.

Yearly

Clean the LVDT sensor wheels with cotton buds and alcohol.

Yearly

Check the stacker wheels for damage and schedule module replacement if required.

Yearly

Check purge bin micro switch for damage.

Yearly

Ensure pick frame cassette latches operate correctly and lock cassette into position.

Yearly

Check presenter to safe door cam ramp height setting.

N/A

Lubrication ‐ Lubrication is only required on 66XX dispenser products when components are being replaced.

 

S2 CURRENCY DISPENSER

 

 

Every Visit

Remove any foreign objects, note fragments or paper clips.

Use an air can and vacuum to remove dust from all areas of the dispenser.

Remove note debris throughout the transport.

Every Visit

Remove obvious dust build‐up on any optical sensors and prisms in the following areas:

l  Pick Sensors

l  Width Sensor

l  Stack Entry Sensor

l  Divert Entry Sensor

l  Carriage Bunch, Pre‐Exit and Exit Sensors

l  Carriage positions sensor and flags

l  Purge Sensor (Reject Bin)

l  Retract from Present (RFP) Entry Sensor

l  Media deflector sensors

Every Visit

Check pick line for broken nozzles.

Check pick line and replace if broken, cracked, or bent.

Every Visit

Check belts are correctly seated.

Check belts for wear and damage. If worn or damaged belts are found, module replacement should be scheduled and noted in the log book.

Every Visit

Check gears for tooth damage.

Every Visit

Clean HETS rollers and line 2 if required.

Every Visit

Inspect, and if required, clean the cassettes.

Check the holes in the cassette pusher plate are clear of debris.

Yearly

Check suction cups and replace if necessary.

Yearly

Check that the pick modules are correctly timed.

If you need to re‐time the dispenser, check timing several times to be sure no teeth are missing on any gears and timing stays true.

Worn or damaged gears may require a pick module replacement.

Yearly

Check the SNT Flicker Pads and SNT Note Deflector for damage or wear.

 

PRINTERS

 

 

Every Visit

Ensure receipt/statement slots are free from obstruction, paint, moulding flash, burrs etc.

Every Visit

Ensure receipt/statement/passbook transports align correctly with fascia.

Every Visit

Ensure printer PCB covers are fitted.

Yearly

Clean receipt printer thermal print head. (More frequently if stamp media used).

Yearly

Use an air can and vacuum to remove dust from all areas of the printers.

 

S2 CURRENCY DISPENSER

Yearly

Disconnect the vacuum tube from just below the air filter to prevent dust from dropping down into the tubing and replace the filter.

If some dust does drop down into the tubing it must be cleaned out.

Yearly

Check the HETS rollers for debris build‐up and clean if necessary.

Yearly

Check purge bin micro switch for damage.

Yearly

Check the smooth insertion of cassettes and purge bins and that latches engage easily.

Yearly

Check the nose and carriage metalwork is not damaged or bent.

Yearly

Check harnesses and parts that may contact the safe for damage.

Yearly

Look at tallies, SOH and enhanced diagnostics telemetry to see if any FRUs are out of spec.

Yearly

Run appropriate diagnostics for actions performed.

Yearly

Check BAM edge register slides freely and BAM rack slides without interference.

Yearly

Check carriage umbilical for wear or damage.

Yearly

Clean scanner in serial note read transport using compressed air or a soft thin brush or cotton bud. A build‐up of dirt can be removed using a lint free cloth moistened with soapy water or with an alcohol free wipe. Cleaning should be more frequent in units with high note volume or which are installed in dusty locations.

 

 

MOTORIZED CARD READER/WRITERS

 

 

Every Visit

The shutter and pre‐head are the most vulnerable parts of the card reader and subject to the most dirt ingress and wear. These parts should be inspected and cleaned as required on each service visit. Pre‐head wear will not be visible without removal of the pre‐head from the card reader mouth. If Customer Failure reports that 'cards are not accepted,' then replacement of the card reader would be appropriate.

Every Visit

The shutter mechanism should be checked and adjusted for the shutter open and width switch positions.

Every Visit

Verify MCRW transport aligns correctly at fascia.

Every Visit

Clean dip reader. Check that the dip debris access through the dip chassis is clear and can allow the passage of dust and debris to clear the transport.

Yearly

The MCRW is to be replaced after every 383K transactions to minimize downtime and improve reliability. This value should be reduced if the MCRW is located in a "dirty hostile environment." If the MCRW was not swapped on the previous PM (refer to log book), swap it with one that has been thoroughly refurbished.

 

LCD MONITOR & KEYBOARDS

 

 

Every Visit

Check that the customer keyboard is centrally aligned in the aperture and no obvious damage or leaks are present, this should be checked at installation or repair of a keyboard and on each visit.

Yearly

If the face of the LCD or the vandal glass is dirty drop monitor back from the vandal glass and clean the LCD face and the inside of the vandal glass. Ensure that the dust seal is present and in good condition.

FLUIDITI CHECKS

The Yearly PM checks/tests for Fluiditi require ATM power to be both on and off. Every visit check can be completed with the system armed however any repairs require the system to be disarmed.

 

FLUIDITI - ICS & CS

 

 

 

Before completing the yearly checks/tests or any repairs, disconnect the battery and disarm the system as described in the SAMM Fluiditi ATM Security and Fluiditi Replenishment Security documents.

Every Visit

Check (and repair if necessary):

Wiring Harnesses

All connectors on Alarm and PDS boards to see if cables are seated properly

Check battery voltage: under normal conditions 8.7 Volt minimum when the ATM is switched on and minimum 11.2 when switched off. If the voltages are lower than these limits when the ATM has been operating in normal conditions (i.e no prolonged period without power), the battery pack should be replaced.

On ICS solutions, check the metal tangs or holding points on the cassette latches are intact

Yearly

Check Switching Internal to External Status Led indicators, Shunt Switch, Door Timer.

Yearly

Perform the following tests:

Test cassette position

Test ICS Servos

Test Cassette Tamper Position

Test Battery

Test Penetration Mats

Test tilt switches

l  Power on to disconnect the battery

l  Power off to disarm the system

l  Power on the run tests

l  Power off to arm the system

l  Power on to reconnect the battery

 

S2 CURRENCY DISPENSER

 

 

Every Visit

Check that all interlock switches operate properly.

Every Visit

Perform the SOH task.

Every Visit

Load the ATM with customer engineer test currency.

Test dispensers to ensure proper operation of all dispense modules.

Every Visit

Dispense 1 bill to the front of the ATM; ensure proper delivery and firm grip.

Every Visit

If there have been excessive purged notes or incorrect amounts dispensed, dispense 40 bills to ensure no bills are catching on (clipping) the shutter.

If clipping has occurred, verify correct operation of the shutter.

If clipping persists, then a module replacement should be scheduled and noted in the log book.

If applicable, adjust the presenter height guide within the safe or on the safe door for correct dispensing.

POST PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS

 

GENERAL CHECKS

 

 

Every Visit

Let the custodian/operator/first‐line maintainer run a test transaction.

 

CABINETRY & FASCIA

 

 

Every Visit

On units that have Audio feature, ensure that the feature is working by using a head phone set.

Every Visit

Ensure that all Media Entry Indicators are operational.

 

S1 CURRENCY DISPENSER

 

 

Every Visit

Check that all interlock switches operate properly.

Every Visit

Perform the SOH task saying the suction cups have been replaced.

Every Visit

Load the ATM with customer engineer test currency. Test dispensers to ensure proper operation of all dispense modules.

Every Visit

Dispense 1 bill to the front of the ATM; ensure proper delivery and firm grip.

Every Visit

If there have been many rejected amounts or complaints about ATM keeping money, dispense 40 bills to ensure no bills are catching on (clipping) the shutter. If clipping has occurred, verify correct operation of the shutter. If clipping persists, then a module replacement should be scheduled and noted in the log book. If applicable, adjust the presenter height guide within the safe or on the safe door for proper dispensing out the

ATM.

 

FINAL CHECK

 

 

Every Visit

Mark the completed activities in the log book, and schedule any follow‐up module replacements required.

 

MOTORIZED CARD READER/WRITERS

 

 

Every Visit

Using the appropriate speed test card, run card reader speed test.

Every Visit

Ensure speed is 24 +/‐3%. ‐(not appropriate on VE or IMCRW Card Reader).

Every Visit

Where applicable check reading of track 1, 2 & 3 using diagnostics. ‐ No Errors reported.

Every Visit

Where applicable check Smart card operation using diagnostics.

 

 

PRINTERS

 

 

Every Visit

Check print quality for fully formed and legible characters and that receipts and statements are delivered correctly, check knife operation and black dot being correctly cut. Check for correct operation of paper low switch.

Every Visit

Clear fitness. Clear SOH and ensure that state of health indicates "Terminal Healthy.

 

LCD MONITOR & KEYBOARDS

 

 

Every Visit

Verify touch‐screen calibration accuracy within diagnostics.

 

Check that all keys on both the fascia and FDK keyboard assemblies are functioning properly.


                                                                                                                                                                      Card Readers                                                                                                                                                               1

Card Readers

DIP CARD READERS

If required, prepare the cleaning card (998‐0052929) by spraying lightly with head cleaning fluid (603‐8000539).

1.     Insert the cleaning card, with the felt side down, into the card reader.

2.     Remove the card from the card reader.

3.     Repeat steps 1 and 2 five times.

Note:   Before using the card reader, wait five minutes for the cleaning fluid on the reading head to evaporate.

SWIPE CARD READERS

If required, prepare the cleaning card (998‐0052929) by spraying lightly with head cleaning fluid (603‐8000539).

Swipe the cleaning card through the reader five times.

If the cleaning card you have is single sided, swipe it through the reader five times with the cleaning face to the right and five times with the cleaning face to the left.

Note:   Before using the card reader, wait five minutes for the cleaning fluid on the reading head to evaporate.

May 2013

2        Card Readers

USB IMCRW

At each service call, the read heads and the rollers should be cleaned (see below). In addition, perform the following tasks as needed:

l  Remove the shutter assembly and clean the housing thoroughly

l  Check throat to main transport alignment and adjust where necessary

l  Check the width switch and shutter switch operation

l  Make sure that the shutter operates freely

l  Clean all sensors and LEDs

l  Clean drive belt with alcohol and swabs.

Clean Read Heads and Smart Contacts

The read heads, and smart contacts where configured, should be cleaned at every UIMCRW service call. Use the MCRW cleaning card (atm Notes part number 998‐0052929 or equivalent) to clean the heads, as follows:

1.     If required, prepare the cleaning card by spraying lightly with head cleaning fluid (such as part numbers 603‐8000539 or 603‐9014721).

2.     Select the Maintenance option from the System Application Main Menu.

3.     Select the MCRW option from the Maintenance Menu.

4.     Select the Cleaning Cycle Test option.

5.     Insert the card to start the cleaning cycle.

6.     When the cycle is finished, remove the cleaning card. If it is not removed, the card is captured.

7.     If the card readers supports smart cards, select the SC Cleaning Cycle Test option and repeat the procedure.

May 2013

                                                                                                                                                                      Card Readers                                                                                                                                                               3

Clean Rollers

At each service call, use a cloth moistened with iso‐propyl alcohol to clean the three rubber rollers indicated in the following illustration.

May 2013

4        Card Readers

May 2013


S1 Currency Dispenser

Chapter Contents

SUMMARY CHECKLIST

Perform the following at each service call:

Inspect the pick module for wear or damage to:

l  Pick cups and pick arm assembly

l  Vacuum hoses and T‐connections

l  Vacuum filter

l  Gears and belts

l  Ribbon cables to pick interface boards

l  Sensors

l  Reed switches.

Check D wheel timing within each pick module.

Check pick to pick timing between pick modules.

Inspect the presenter for wear/accumulation of dirt on:

l    Sensors l Belts

l    Rollers.

Inspect cassettes and check how well cash is loaded.

Perform diagnostics to verify correct operation.

INSPECT THE PICK MODULE

Single Pick Module

Double Pick Module

l  Check pick vacuum hoses, replace if broken, cracked or bent.

l  Measure the vacuum at each pick valve and at the filter (see Vacuum test in Diagnostics section). It should measure >800mb (23.5 InHg) and be held for more than 60 seconds after the motor stops.

l  Check the hose T connectors for leaks, replace if damaged.

l  Check the vacuum filter above the top pick module and clean out if necessary: heavy dust contamination of the filter could reduce the vacuum and cause mis‐picks.

Notes:

l  When you disturb the air filter some dust will drop down the tubing to the lowest pick module. Disconnect the tube from the lowest pick valve and clean out the dust from the tube and valve.

l  Annual replacement of the filter is recommended. When replacing the filter, a good fit with the vacuum hose tube can be achieved by either securing the connection with a cable tie, or by cutting approximately 8 mm (0.3 to 0.4 in.) off the end of the tube (leaving a little of the flared end of the tube makes it easier to fit over the new filter). Do not use heat or chemicals to soften the pipe on top of the filter in order to fit the tube over it: this will result in leaks.

l  Check the pick arm assembly for cracks or wear, replace if necessary.

l  Check the pick suction cups. Replacement is based on the number of bills picked per pick module: replace when SOH Replace Soon message is displayed. The 66XX threshold is 103 000 bills.

l  Check for worn or broken gears and belts on the side and rear of the pick module.

Replace if necessary. (If gears are worn, check that all circlips on the associated shaft are in place. Circlips which may have fallen off can cause lateral movement of shafts, accelerating gear wear).

To prolong gear life, the pick module orientation can be swapped. i.e. on the four high dispenser, the top and bottom modules can change places, as should the middle two modules.

l  Check for wear in the ribbon cables connecting the pick module interface boards to each other and to the presenter control board. Replace if necessary.

l  Check the alignment of the pick sensors and clean any accumulations of dirt/dust.

l  Check that the cassette inserts fully and latches into place. If not, check for fouling with pick sensor or bent keyplate.

l  Check that the cassette low sensor reed switch housing on the pick arm is not cracked. Replace if necessary. A damaged housing can lead to a Note Low condition not being identified.

PICK MODULE INTERNAL TIMING (D WHEEL TIMING)

To adjust a double pick module you must first isolate the gear trains of the two pick units by removing the timing belt shown in the following figure. Retain the timing belt for refitting at the end of the adjustment.

The relationship to be set within the pick unit is between the pick wheel and the cam driven vacuum arm line.

Note:  In a double pick unit make the adjustment on the upper pick unit first.

1.     Position the teeth mesh between the drive segment and pick line so that the upper

tooth of the drive segment is above the upper tooth of the pick line.

2.     Take off and retain the 26T idler gear directly below the pick line (left side of the module looking from the currency cassette).

3.     Rotate the gears of the pick module transport until the pick D wheel is free of its mating tension wheel.

4.     Rotate the drive cluster in a clockwise direction until the D timing mark on the timing disk lines up with the timing sensor body.

5.     Rotate the gears of the pick module transport until the interrupted part of the pick D wheels is away from the pick arms. Turn the gears until a gap of 0.5 mm  0.5 mm (0.02 in.  0.02 in.) exists between the leading edges of the pick D wheels and the tension wheels as shown in the first figure above.

6.     Replace the idler gear removed in step 2. Be careful not to dislodge the setting.

7.     Carry out steps 1 to 6 on the lower pick unit in a double pick or on the next single pick module.

8.     Check the D wheel timing by inserting a note between the D wheel and drive roller then, using finger pressure, pull on the note to test the pinch. Check both sides: if there is a difference in the pinch is could indicate a bent frame which requires the pick module to be replaced. If the pinch is equal but not sufficient for drive, replace the pick line.

PICK MODULE TO PICK MODULE TIMING

When the internal timing of both pick units of a double pick module has been set, the pick units have to be locked in a fixed timing relationship:

1.     Rotate the gear train of the first (top) pick unit to move the timing disk in a clockwise direction until the 1 timing mark on the drive cluster timing disk lines up with the timing sensor body.

CAUTION

Always rotate the gear train in its normal direction of travel. The pick timing disks should turn clockwise. Do not move the gear train backwards and forwards.

2.     Rotate the gear train of the second pick unit until the 2 timing mark on the drive cluster timing disk lines up with the timing sensor body. Continue as necessary, setting the timing disk to 3 on the third pick unit and to 4 on the fourth.

3.     Replace the timing belt removed earlier around the pulley wheel of the lower pick position and put it on as many teeth as possible of the pulley wheel of the upper pick position, taking care not to dislodge the settings. Turn the upper gear train in the normal direction of travel (see Caution above) to ride the timing belt fully on to the pulley wheel.

Note:  The S1 dispenser does not require any timing relationship to be set between the action of the pick modules and the presenter.

INSPECT THE PRESENTER

l  Check for worn or broken belts. Replace if necessary.

l  Check for worn or dirty rollers. Replace or clean if necessary.

l  Check the alignment of the presenter sensors and clean any accumulations of dirt/ dust using compressed air. S1 Front Access sensors

S1 Rear Access sensors

INSPECT CASSETTES

l  Inspect the cassettes for damage, dirt, sticky tape or residue. Replace damaged cassettes. Clean inside and out if they are dirty, paying particular attention to the cassette door and note height guide.

l  Check that the pusher plate and the truck door sliding guides move freely.

l  Check that the cassette id magnets, note width guides and cassette height spacers are correct for the notes being dispensed.

l  Inspect how well cash has been loaded. Poorly loaded or over‐stuffed cassettes will result in mis‐picks and dispenser jams. The maximum stack size is indicated by the label on the inside of the cassette.

l  Check for obvious defects such as:

l  Adhesive tape, staples, pins or any foreign matter

l  Torn or limp notes with pin holes l Two or more notes stuck to each other l Corner folds or folded notes.

Any notes considered to be unacceptable should be removed.

l  Check for bowed notes caused by elastic bands or other packaging on currency which can cause the notes to jam in the dispenser. Notes bowed across the width have been specifically identified as causing jams in the Personas 86 dispenser and it is recommended that these notes should be processed through a counting machine

where possible or at least manually fanned and flattened several times. Bowed notes should be loaded in bundles of 100 notes, in alternating orientation to counter the bow:

For notes bowed along their length,           For notes bowed across their width, load with the bow towards the pusher.     load with the bow away from the pusher.

DIAGNOSTICS

Perform the following diagnostic tests to verify proper operation of the dispenser.

Vacuum:

l  Perform a Diagnostic Clear command System Application to run the main motor and drive the vacuum pump. Measure the vacuum with a gauge at each pick valve in turn, starting at the lowest. The vacuum should measure >800mb (23.5 InHg) and be held for more than 60 seconds after the motor stops. If the vacuum is below this level, measure again at connections progressively higher up the vacuum hose until the section with the leak is isolated (it will be directly below where you first get a good vacuum reading). Replace the damaged hose then test again.

l  Perform the test again at the air filter. If it fails at the filter, the problem is either the pump or one of the tube connections between it and the air filter. Belt alignment:

Mark the dispenser drive belts with a straight line, run a note dispense test then check to see if the belts are still in alignment. If not, check for dirt and clean as necessary. Check for wear and replace as necessary.

Note skew:

Run a single dispense test from each pick module repeatedly while checking for note skew in the stacking area. If notes are skewing, inspect the belts and roller in the pick module and the presenter. If they are clean but the test continues to fail, the presenter needs to be replaced.

Facia alignment:

Run a 40 bill dispense test through the facia to verify alignment of the dispenser to the safe door opening and shutter. If the test fails, check the presenter to facia alignment.

Shutter:

Run the dispenser shutter test with halt on error enabled in the control menu, looping 50 times with the facia closed to verify shutter alignment. If the test fails, replace the shutter.


S2 Currency Dispenser

SUMMARY CHECKLIST

Perform the following at each service call:

Inspect the pick module for wear or damage to: l Pick cups and pick arm assembly

l  Vacuum hoses and T‐connections

l  Air filter

l  Gears and belts

l  Sensors

Check pick to pick timing between pick modules.

Inspect the SNT for wear/accumulation of dirt on:

l  Sensors

l  Belts

l  Rollers

Inspect the carriage for wear/accumulation of dirt on:

l  Sensors

l  Belts

l  Rollers

Inspect cassettes and check how well cash is loaded.

Perform diagnostics to verify correct operation.

CLEANING MATERIALS

The following cleaning materials are the only authorized materials for use on the S2 Currency Dispenser:

l  Canned air (10 oz. ‐ atm Notes stock number 526487), or a soft brush. l Damp, lint‐free cloth.

Only use these approved cleaning methods as use of other cleaners could damage the module. Cleaners containing alcohol or other solvents and degreaser (such as Fedron) can damage the plastics used in the sensor lenses and in the belts. This results in clouding of the sensor covers and prisms, and also degrades the belts causing them to become sticky.

INSPECT THE PICK MODULE

Refer to the S2 Dispenser service chapter for sensor location diagrams.

l  Check pick vacuum hoses, replace if broken, cracked or bent. l Carry out a Pick Valve Diagnostic Test.

l  Check the hose T connectors for leaks, replace if damaged.

l  Check the air filter above the top pick module and clean out if necessary: heavy dust contamination of the filter could reduce the vacuum and cause mis‐picks.

Note:  When you disturb the air filter some dust will drop down the tubing to the lowest pick module. Disconnect the tube from the lowest pick valve and clean out the dust from the tube and valve.

Note:  Annual replacement of the filter is recommended. When replacing the filter, a good fit with the vacuum hose tube can be achieved by either securing the connection with a cable tie, or by cutting approximately 8 mm (0.3 to 0.4 in.) off the end of the tube (leaving a little of the flared end of the tube makes it easier to fit over the new filter). Do not use heat or chemicals to soften the pipe on top of the filter in order to fit the tube over it: this will result in leaks.

l  Check the pick arm assembly for cracks or wear, replace if necessary.

l  Check the pick suction cups. Replacement is based on the number of bills picked per pick module: replace when SOH Replace Soon message is displayed. The threshold is 1 800 000 bills.

l  Check for worn or damaged gears and belts on the side and rear of the pick module. Replace if necessary. (If gears are worn, check that all circlips on the associated shaft are in place. Circlips which may have fallen off can cause lateral movement of shafts, accelerating gear wear).

If gears on the upper pick module appear worn, gear life can be prolonged by swapping the two the pick modules, i.e., on the four high dispenser, the two pick modules can change places.

l  Check for wear in the ribbon cables connecting the pick module interface boards to each other and to the presenter control board. Replace if necessary.

l  Check the alignment of the pick sensors and clean any accumulations of dirt/dust.

l  Check that the cassette inserts fully and latches into place. If not, check for fouling with pick sensor or bent keyplate.

l  If Serial Number Read (SNR) is fitted, clean the scanners in the SNR transport using compressed air or a soft thin brush or a cotton bud. A build‐up of dirt can be removed using a lint free cloth moistened with soapy water or with an alcohol free wipe. Cleaning should be more frequent in units with high note volume or which are installed in dusty locations.

Note:  After cleaning the sensors, use SysApp to reset all pick, SNT, carriage and presenter sensors.

Select Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media Dispenser > Calibrate Sensors.

Pick Module to Pick Module Timing

When the internal timing of both pick units of a double pick module have been set, the pick units have to be locked in a fixed timing relationship. Follow the S2 Double Pick Module Timing Procedure as described in the S2 Dispenser service chapter.

Note:  The S2 dispenser does not require any timing relationship to be set between the action of the pick modules and the presenter.

INSPECT THE PRESENTER

Refer to the S2 Dispenser service chapter for sensor location diagrams.

l  Remove obvious dust build‐up on the following:

l  Carriage Position Sensor

l  Purge Bin Sensors

l  Pick Sensors

l  Stack Entry Sensor

l  Width Sensor

l  Divert Entry Sensor

l  Media Deflector Sensors

l  Carriage Bunch, Pre‐Exit and Exit sensors

l  Carriage Position Flag

l  Check for worn or damaged belts. Replace if necessary. l Check for worn or dirty rollers. Replace or clean if necessary.

l  Check the alignment of the presenter sensors and clean any accumulations of dirt/ dust using compressed air.

Note:  After cleaning the sensors, use SysApp to reset all pick, SNT, carriage and presenter sensors.

Select Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media Dispenser > Calibrate Sensors.

INSPECT THE CASSETTES

Refer to the S2 Dispenser Cassette service chapter for cassette cleaning, currency preparation and currency loading instructions.

l  Replace damaged cassettes.

l  Inspect the cassettes for damage, dirt, sticky tape or residue. Clean inside and out if they are dirty.

l  Inspect how well cash has been loaded.

DIAGNOSTICS

Perform the following diagnostic tests to verify proper operation of the dispenser:

Pick Valve

Refer to the S2 Currency Dispenser service chapter for the Pick Valve Diagnostics Test instructions.

Belt alignment

There are three sets of drive belts:

l  Pick Transport Belts l SNT Transport Belts

l  Carriage Belts

Mark the belts with a straight line, run a note dispense test then check to see if the belts are still in alignment. If not, check for dirt and clean as necessary.

Check for wear and replace as necessary.

Note Skew

Run a single dispense test from each pick module repeatedly while checking for note skew in the stacking area.

If notes are skewing, inspect the following areas and replace if necessary:

l  Cassettes

l  Pick Modules

l  SNT

l  BAM

l  Carriage

Bunch Splay

Dispense a maximum bunch size from the lower cassette.

If the bunch is purged or an issue with purged notes has been reported, this may be due to excessive splay detected in the bunch and the following areas must be inspected:

l  BAM

l  Carriage links l SNT exit

Splay at Present

If there is an unacceptable amount of splay when the bunch is presented, possibly preventing all the notes from being taken, check the nose for a concave lower plate or damage to the interface bridge.

Facia alignment

Run a 40 bill dispense test through the facia to verify alignment of the dispenser to the safe door opening and shutter. If the test fails, check the presenter to facia alignment.

Shutter

Run the dispenser shutter test with halt on error enabled in the control menu, looping 50 times with the facia closed to verify shutter alignment. If the test fails, replace the shutter.


Security Enclosure

Security Enclosure

Chapter Contents

GENERAL CHECKS

l Check the security enclosure interlock switch function by closing the security enclosure door and running a motor test in diagnostics. Pull the security enclosure door handle firmly while the motor is running l If applicable, lubricate door hinges.

DOOR HINGE LUBRICATION

Lubricate the security enclosure door hinges with lubricant C, or a similar Special Purpose Grease, at each (annual) preventive maintenance call.

Proceed as follows:

1.     Open the security enclosure door.

2.     Raise the door to the full height of the adjustment screw located in the hinge block. Care must be taken when raising the door as damaged pins could fracture during this process.

3.     Clean the hinge pins. All corrosion or old lubricant should be removed from the pins.

4.     Apply a small amount of grease to the hinges and wipe off the excess. Raise and lower the door on the Allen screw to spread the lubricant over the surface of the hinge pin. Realign the door to the security enclosure body. Make sure that there is an equal gap between the door and the body at both the top and bottom of the door.

January 2015

Security Enclosure

January 2015

USB Receipt Printer

USB Receipt Printer

Chapter Contents

Perform the following tasks as necessary:

l  Clean transport sensors

l  Clean thermal print head

Transport Sensors

Clean the two pairs of transport sensors using compressed air to remove dust from the surface of each sensor.

CAUTION

Sensors should not be removed from chassis for cleaning. If for any reason sensors needs to be removed, they must be recalibrated.

March 2014

USB Receipt Printer

Thermal Print Head

Clean the print head by wiping the black strip five times with a cleaning pen.

               Description                                                    Part Number

                  Thermal Head Cleaner (box of 10)                 497-0472684

When the printer is loaded with stamp sheets or other adhesive media, the thermal print head should be cleaned on a regular basis as the adhesive may cause a build up of dust on the head.

CAUTION

Do not clean the print head or any other area inside the printer with detergent or alcohol as this may damage the print head and electronics.

March 2014

Security Enclosure Heaters

Security Enclosure Heaters

Chapter Contents

Terminals that are installed through the wall (TTW) into the outside world, are fitted with a heater in the security enclosure. This heater is designed to keep the internal temperature of the terminal above 10 degrees Celsius or 50 degrees Fahrenheit.

The terminal room is required to be at or above 10 degrees Celsius, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, as defined by the atm Notes Site Preparation and Requirements.

atm Notes recommends that an annual check of security enclosure heaters and terminal room heating systems is performed and reported back to the account support team.

SECURITY ENCLOSURE HEATER TEST

Pre–requisite

A Non–Flammable Freezer Aerosol propellant.

Below is a typical product, a local variant can be acquired to reduce cost.

Product Description

Manufacturer Details

Ambersil, Freezer Spray—Fault Detection on Electronics

AMBERSIL

Tel: +44 (0) 1278 727200

Fax: +44 (0) 1278 425644

E–mail: sales.uk@crcind.com

Web: www.ambersil.com

Test Frequency and Timing

Perform the security enclosure heater test annually, 2 months prior to the start of normal cold temperature period.

Security Enclosure Heater Test Procedure

Perform the procedure below during a regular service visit in which the security enclosure door is required to be opened, typically this would be on a Currency Dispenser service visit:

1.     Open the security enclosure door.

2.     Retract the currency dispenser module or BNA to gain access to the security enclosure heater, typically, this is mounted on either the back wall or the floor of the security enclosure.

3.     Ensure that the AC Interlock is overridden, ensuring that the heater has mains power applied.

4.     Locate the security enclosure heater thermostat, normally close to the heater May 2013

Security Enclosure Heaters

assembly.

5.     Using your hand or fingers, check the airflow above the heater to ensure the heaters are not on.

6.     Spray the freezer aerosol onto the thermostat for 10 seconds.

7.     Check the airflow above the heater to ensure the heater comes on.

8.     In a few minutes it should get too hot to touch.

9.     Record this in the WO remarks as SECURITY ENCLOSURE HEATER TESTED OK.

10.  If the heater does not function. Does not come on or gets warm but not hot. Record SECURITY ENCLOSURE HEATER TESTED FAIL. This action permits the material to be ordered and a future WO set‐up to investigate and correct the issue.

ROOM HEATER TEST

The air surrounding the terminal is required to be at a minimum temperature of 10 degrees Celsius 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. Assuming the terminal operates for this same period.

Use the remarks below for an existing Work Order to indicate the site conditions to the account team. These remarks permit the account team to address any room heater issues with the customer.

Room Heat Low

Use this remark to describe installations that set down the room heat to 1 to 3 degrees Celsius in order to protect against water freezing level. This temperature is not enough to ensure that our products operate correctly.

Room Heat Timed

Use this remark to describe installations with timed heaters to ensure Branch Staff are warm during their working hours. This system is good and correct, but the heater switches off at 17:00, and the temperature drops off during the evening and early morning.

Room Heat Faulty

Use this remark to describe installations where the room heater occasionally fails and the estates management team is unaware of this.

Room Heat OK

Use this remark to describe a site where the heating system operates at 24 hours a day, seven days a week with the temperature continuously at or above 10 degrees Celsius.

May 2013

USB 2D Bar Code Reader (UBAR)

USB 2D Bar Code Reader (UBAR)

Chapter Contents

CLEANING

On every service visit clean the viewing window on the outside of the facia with a soft cloth or lens tissue dampened with water (or a mild detergent ‐ water solution). If a detergent solution is used, rinse with clean lens tissue dampened with water only.

CAUTION

Do not touch the imager lens. If necessary, only use compressed air to clean the lens.

May 2013

USB 2D Bar Code Reader (UBAR)

May 2013


Section Divider

Section 3 - Diagnostics Overview

February 2014

Section Divider

February 2014


Diagnostics Overview

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

Note:  This chapter provides an overview of the diagnostic aids available on terminals running APTRA XFS software. For terminals running APTRA Base software, refer to the APTRA Base User Guide (B006‐7071) for ATM diagnostics.

The main route to fault finding and diagnosis is System Application, which is described in general terms in this chapter. The details of the tests available for each device are described in the device chapters of this manual. Also refer to the Diagnostic Status Code Notebook (B006‐6237) for M_STATUS and M_DATA test results.

System Application also provides other functions, such as pro‐active device servicing and configuration of the terminal and devices, which are described in detail in Self Service Support ‐ System Application User Guide (B006‐6167).

This overview chapter covers the following areas of diagnostics:

l  System Application

l  Level 0 Diagnostics

l  Test Tools, including Bootable System Application

SYSTEM APPLICATION

The APTRA XFS System Application provide access to the functions required to carry out runtime configuration, diagnostics and maintenance. See the illustration at the end of the chapter showing the some of the key menus in System Application.

Entering System Application

Access to diagnostic routines is only offered if a valid atm Notes USB Service Key is inserted when System Application (Sys App) is started. To enter diagnostics, proceed as follows:

1.     From the Supervisor menu, select Diagnostics (or the owning organisation’s equivalent).

2.     Insert your atm Notes USB Service Key in the PC module.

3.     Select System Application.

4.     Follow the on‐screen prompts and enter your 6‐digit PIN.

The system application main menu will appear as shown below.

USB Service Key

Access to the various areas of System Application is determined by the level of permission on the individual’s Service Key. For example a key could allow access to Diagnostics and Self Tests only or could allow access to all areas of Sys App, except the ability to validate the replacement of certain spare parts.

The functions to which a key does not provide access, will either not appear on the System Application menus, or will appear but be unavailable.

If System Application is started without a USB key, or three unsuccessful attempts at entering a key PIN have been made, the main menu screen will appear as shown below: with certain options not available and the option ‘Maintenance’ in place of ‘Diagnostics’. The Maintenance option gives access to card reader cleaning tests and UEPP2 details such as firmware version.

Functions on System Application Main Menu

The following functions on the System Application main menu are accessed through FDKs or areas on the touchscreen.

Transfer Interface ‐

transfers the System Application interface between the operator panel and the front interface on a rear access terminal.

After the transfer option has been selected at the rear, press any key at the front interface, then at the prompt enter the password 2468 and press OK. This is to ensure that only authorised users can access the System Application from the front interface. A password is not required to transfer from the front to the rear interface.

Save NT Information ‐

saves the Windows application, system and security Event Logs to a removable memory device. A prompt will be displayed if more than one storage device is needed to store this information.

System Shutdown ‐

initiates the Windows operating system shutdown process. Once the system has written unsaved data to the disk, a message appears indicating shutdown is complete. The terminal can then be powered off.

If the user does not have the access rights to perform an operating system shutdown then a prompt will be displayed indicating this and the Sys App main menu is redisplayed.

Exit ‐

terminates System Application and returns control to the software that was running when Sys App was started.

Device Diagnostics

The Device Diagnostics option on the Sys App main menu provides access to all device diagnostic test functions via the menu shown below. When this option is selected, an information log entry is made to record the fact that diagnostics has been accessed.

Select the touchscreen area or numeric key for a device to access its diagnostic tests. See the appropriate device chapter in this manual for details of the tests possible for each device.

Control Menu

The Control Menu can be accessed from the Device Diagnostics menu or from the individual device tests menus. It permits you to view or modify the current control settings. The following settings are provided:

Control Option

Description

Possible

Values

Default

Halt On Error

Determines whether or not a test continues regardless of any error returned from any action (loop mode or run-to-run only)

ON/OFF

OFF

Delay Test Times

Delays each test for a duration defined by the operator when run in loop or run-to-run mode (the individual device tests are run sequentially as one test).

0 - 99 seconds

0

Log Updates and

Tallies

Used to enable/disable log and tally updating during the operation of diagnostic tests.

ON/OFF

ON

Hardware Information and Recovery

The functions under this Sys App main menu option are:

Replace Device (Power Devices Down) ‐

This option allows all devices to be powered down except the PC core, so that a device can be replaced without re‐booting the whole terminal. After selecting this option, you will be prompted to confirm you wish to power down all devices, and you can then do so using the CE service switch, located behind a cover beside the main on/off switch. A narrow probe, such as the shaft of a screwdriver, is required to access the button. On powering the devices back on, a result screen will display which devices are still present from before the power down, and which devices have been added.

Replacing one of the following devices will trigger a status of “Device not authorised” on the device status list:

l  USB EPP2

l  USB PPD

l  USB iMCRW

l  USB Smart Dip Card Reader

l  USB Cash Dispenser l USB GBRU.

The ‘Device not authorised’ status can be cleared from the list as usual provided a USB Service Key with Parts Replacement permission is present in the PC core.

Reset Device (Cycle Power) ‐

This powers down all devices except the PC core, and then immediately restores power, effectively resetting all devices. When the devices are powered back on, a results screen displays which devices are still present from before the power down, and which devices have been recovered by the reset.

Reset USB Ports ‐

This resets all USB ports, and displays a results screen listing which devices are still present from before the reset and which devices have been recovered. This function allows recovery of USB functionality, without re‐booting the terminal, in situations where a USB connection is lost for an undetermined reason while the device is still physically connected.

USB Viewer ‐

Lists all devices with functioning USB connections, and to which port they are attached on which hub. Selecting a device from the list displays the detail of the connection, allowing the USB cable to be identified and the connection to be traced from device to hub(s) to core. This option provides an initial check whether or not the system is ‘seeing’ a device. Physical removal and replacement of a USB connector will be reflected in USB Viewer almost immediately./

Device Manager ‐

Similar to Microsoft Windows Device Manager, this option allows the user to view the status of the PC devices attached to the system, such as modems, comms ports and networks cards.

Troubleshooting Example ‐

a device is reporting a loss of USB communications:

1.      Check the USB connections at the device, the hub and the pc core. Re‐connect the cables if they are disconnected. If they are connected correctly, proceed to the next step.

2.      Use USB Viewer to determine if the terminal is ‘seeing’ the device, now that the cables have been checked. If not, proceed to next step. If the terminal has found the device but the fault is still being reported, proceed to step 4.

3.      Use Reset USB Ports to attempt to recover the USB connection. If this does not work, proceed to next step.

4.      Use Reset Device to attempt to recover the device driver. If this does not work, proceed to next step.

5.      Use Replace Device to power off all devices without re‐booting the pc core. Replace the faulty FRU (field replaceable unit) on the device.

Device Self Tests

This option from the Sys App main menu provides access to device self tests which can be run to check whether or not a device is operational, or to diagnose the cause of a fault.

Use either the touchscreen or keypad to select one or more test, or choose the ‘Select All’ option. Tests can be de‐selected by pressing the touchscreen area or numeric key again. Then select ‘Run Test(s)’ to run the chosen test(s).

The self tests are run in the order in which they appear on the Device Self Tests menu. During some self tests, prompts may be displayed requesting that an action is performed. If these actions are not performed the test may not be completed successfully.

After the tests have been run, a screen will display the results, showing which tests failed, passed or were incomplete.

Event Logs

The Event Logs which can be selected from this option are:

l  Software

l  Communications l Device.

A summary screen is displayed, listing all events in the selected log. From this screen, detailed information can be displayed by selecting an event in the log, or the whole log can be saved to a removable memory device.

Choosing the option ‘Filter’, allows you to display only the events for a particular device or reason code, as appropriate. The software events include:

l  Sequence Number and Date/Time

l  Source File Name

l  Line Number

l  Physical Process Name

l  Logical Process Name l Logical Thread Name l String Data.

The communications events include:

l  Sequence Number and Date/Time

l  Service Name

l  Severity

l  M_Status.

The device events include:

l  Sequence Number and Date/Time

l  Service Name

l  Device Name

l  M_Status

l  M_data l T_code.

Service Tallies

The Service Tallies function provides access to a menu where a list of Tallies can be displayed, cleared and saved to a removable memory device.

Device Status List

This function displays a list of all device states requiring attention.

The following information is provided for each device state:

l  Device Name ‐ the name of the device that requires attention.

l  Description ‐ a short description of the problem.

l  Attention ‐ whether the state requires attention “now” or will require attention “soon”.

l  User category ‐ this specifies what type of user is able to deal with the state, a Customer Engineer or an Operator. (A user category of “CE may be required” indicates that an operator can attempt to deal with the state and if the operator fails to clear it a CE should be called).

l  Self Clearing ‐ whether the device state is self‐clearing or not. A self‐clearing device state is automatically removed from the list when the user takes the required action. For a non‐self‐clearing device state the user must indicate to System Application that action has been taken, by clearing the state.

l  Status ID ‐ the unique status id identifies the status at a system level and can be useful when reporting and tracking faults.

Clearing a Device State

The user can choose to clear individual device states or to clear all the states at once. A device state should only be cleared after the user has performed the actions required to clear the device state.

Clearing an Individual State

1.     Select the device state to be cleared.

2.     If the selected device state can be cleared by more than one action, a screen will be displayed for the user to indicate which action has been performed to clear the state.

3.     If clearing a device state affects a device’s life counts then a prompt is displayed asking the user to confirm that the action has been performed.

4.     The device self test is run to check that the device is operational.

5.     Select the ‘Previous’ FDK to return to the Device Status List screen.

Clear All

The Clear All option should only be used if all of the reported device states have been dealt with.

1.     Select the ‘Clear All’ FDK.

2.     The device self tests are now run to check that the devices are operational.

3.     Select the ‘Previous’ FDK to return to the Device Status List screen.

Device Servicing

This menu option should be used to report that a device servicing action (for example replacing the cash handler suction cups) has been performed when the Device Status List is not reporting that the action is required.

The user should only select an action on the menu after they have actually performed that servicing action. Selecting an action will run a self test on the device, to check that the action has been successfully performed and that the device is operational.

Save Module Life Counts

The Save Module Life Counts option saves the following module variable types to a removable memory device:

l  Tallies with no thresholds l Life counts with single thresholds

l  Life counts with double thresholds.

For each module variable, a record containing the following information is saved:

l  Device Name

l  Module Name

l  Variable Name

l  Variable Value

l  Threshold 1 Value (only if variable has single or double thresholds) l Threshold 2 Value (only if variable has a double threshold).

Self Service Configuration

Provides a set of options that are used to configure the terminal or display configuration information. These options are:

l  Display Hardware Details

l  Display Software Details

l  Set Device Configuration

l  Set Date and Time

l  Set Active Language

l  Set Active Printer l Set terminal Properties.

Display Hardware Details

Select the Display Hardware Details option to display the hardware configuration. This information includes:

l  Product Class

l  Serial Number

l  A list of all the fitted devices fitted.

This information can be saved to a removable memory device.

Display Software Details

Select the Display Software Details option to display the software configuration. This information includes:

1.     The Operating System name, version and build numbers.

2.     The Self Service software name, version and build numbers. This information can be saved to a removable memory device.

Set Device Configuration

Select the Set Device Configuration option to configure devices. A list of devices which can be configured is displayed. See atm Notes publication “Self Service Support ‐ System Application User Guide”, B006‐6167 for details of the configuration of devices.

The following devices have only a basic configuration parameter:

l  Alarms

l  Remote Relay

l  Remote Status Indicator

l  Proximity Detector

l  Advert light

l  Fascia Light.

These basic configuration parameters can be toggled between PRESENT and NOT PRESENT for each device. Setting the parameter to NOT PRESENT will “hide” the presence of a device from any software which requests details of the devices fitted to the terminal. Setting the parameter to PRESENT will allow any software which requests details of the devices to be made aware that this device is present. Changes to the parameters for any of the devices require the terminal to be reset before the changes take effect.

The following further options are available under Set Device Configuration:

Hardware Information and Recovery displays the following menu choices:

l  Firmware version ‐ displays device firmware versions

l  Device Recovery Wait Time ‐ allows the user to configure how long Sys App waits for devices to be seen after power is either cycled or switched off and on, using Reset Devices or Replace Device from Hardware Information and Recovery option under the Device Diagnostics menu. Default value is 90 seconds.

l  PC Information ‐ allows the user to perform PC troubleshooting by displaying PC hardware and network information, such as details of bios, core, operating system, disk drive, disk space remaining, communication ports.

l  GBRU Power Off ‐ allows the user to specify whether or not the GBRU power supply is included in the 24V power down or reset functions in the Hardware Information and Recovery option under the Device Diagnostics menu. This option is only displayed if a GBRU is configured in the terminal.

General Device Configuration ‐

allows device start‐up error logging to be enabled or disabled. Disabling logging reduces the number of unnecessary event log entries, however, temporarily enabling device startup error logging can be useful, for example to debug a startup error.

Set Date and Time

Modifies the settings of the operating system date and time. The date format is DDMMYYYY and the time format is HHMMSS.

If the user does not have Windows access rights to change the operating system date and time, then a prompt will be displayed indicating this and the user will be returned to the Self‐Service Configuration menu.

Set Active Language

All terminals are supplied with at least one language, used by the System Application for all text which it displays and saves to a removable memory device. Select the Set Active Language option to view or modify the language used.

Set ATM Properties

The following properties are displayed:


Product Class

l  Manufacturing Plant Code

l  Serial Number

l  Tracer Number

l  Geographic Address

l  Location of Operator Panel.

Transaction Counters

The transactions on certain devices (dispensers, depositories, printers) are logged every hour. These counters can either be viewed or saved to removable memory device via this menu option, providing data for analysis by second level support, e.g. tracking transaction trends and service level agreements.

The information displayed includes:

l  Device name and id number

l  Instance ‐ how many of this device have been installed

l  Variable ‐ what is being counted

l  Current Device Value ‐ transaction count for this instance of the device

l  Number of Previous Devices

l  Previous Devices Value ‐ total number of transactions counted for all previous instances of the device.

LEVEL 0 DIAGNOSTICS

The Level 0 Diagnostics are contained in EPROM/ROM on most of the devices. The tests are grouped into three types as follows:

l  Power‐up diagnostics

l  Switch selectable diagnostics l Extended diagnostics.

The diagnostics tests for each device are detailed in the relevant device chapter in this manual.

Power‐up Diagnostics

The central processing unit has diagnostic routines stored in an area of on‐board ROM. These tests run at power‐up or reset and any errors found are indicated by beeper tones on the speaker, messages on the monitor screen, and hexadecimal codes on a bank of LEDs. The diagnostics are completed before loading the operating system and there is no way of changing the order of the tests or of selecting individual tests.

Power‐up diagnostics are found on:

l  Processor boards

PC Communications Module

l  Dispenser Control Board

l  Depository Control Board.

The tests operate in four phases:

Initial Processor Diagnostics

Initial processor diagnostics make basic checks on the timers, the system I/O port, ROM and RAM memory, the bus logic, DMA, Interrupt Controller and Peripheral Interface ICs to verify that the board is functioning properly.

System Test And Initialization

After the initial diagnostics, the routines determine what system hardware is installed and test and initialize that hardware. Progress is shown by test messages.

System Configuration Verification

When initialization is complete, the routines compare actual hardware found with the definition of expected hardware held in battery‐protected CMOS memory. If these agree then the level 0 phase is complete. If they differ, an error message is displayed and the SETUP message is given.

Extended Rom Bios Diagnostics

Checks each of the boards present within the PC core to ensure that it is functional.

Switch Selectable Diagnostics

Switch selectable diagnostics can be accessed by operating a switch. This type of test is found on the printers.

Extended Diagnostics

Extended diagnostics can be selected to run individually and the mode of operation can also be selected by switches.

Some electronics boards are provided with an extended diagnostics test facility. ROM resident diagnostic routines can be accessed by setting on‐board switches to select individual tests. Test results are given in hexadecimal codes displayed on LEDs on the boards.

TEST TOOLS

The following tools are required for diagnostic testing:

l  atm Notes USB Service Key ‐ Product ID G531‐1004‐0000

l  Bootable System Application ‐ Product ID G531‐1050‐0000

Card reader test cards:

l  Cleaning card (Sankyo No. EGCMC01881, atm Notes No. 998‐0052929)

l  ST‐SW Card (throat microswitch SW1 adjustment) (Sankyo EGCMC0119)

l  ISO Contact Position Smart Card Test Card (atm Notes No. 009‐0017008) l Passbook.

Bootable System Application

The purpose of the Bootable System Application for APTRA is:

l  To allow the diagnosis of hardware or APTRA XFS software faults, if System Application cannot be accessed from within Supervisor or the terminal is in a persistent restart state.

l  To provide a reliable and consistent software platform to speed up analysis and issue resolution, when it is not clear if the problem is caused by a hardware or a software fault

l  To provide diagnostics without using software on the hard disk.


KEY SYSTEM APPLICATION MENUS

Section Divider

Section 4 - Product Cabling

February 2014

Section Divider

February 2014


6623 Product Cabling

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

This chapter covers the Power Distribution, Interconnect Diagrams and Functional Electrical Drawings.

DISTRIBUTION DIAGRAMS

DC Distribution

With S1 Dispenser

With S2 Dispenser

AC Distribution


With S1 Dispenser

With S2 Dispenser

USB Distribution

USB Distribution without HUB

HARNESSES

AC Harness Assy


MAINS SWITCH

FUSE

                                                                 5B       2A          4B       1A

Alarms Harness

Audio


Private Audio Athena Cab Harness

Private Audio Harness

Auto Supervisor Safe harness

FEMALE_NO SW2_COM


1

2

3


Facia Harness (View 1 of 2)

Facia Harness (View 2 of 2)

LVDS


LVDS Harness

LVDS Power Harness

                              P1                                                                                                                                       P2


Mode Switch

GPIO

COM


NO

PSU Intel Harness

+

PSU

-

PSU_INTEL

S1                                  (View 1 of 2)

S1                                  (View 2 of 2)

S2

DC_SHUTTER


Speaker Harness

SPS Harnesses

Dual DC Power

IFD2 Control PCB to Coil Linker Harness

IFD2 Control PCB to IMCRW Electrode Linker Harness

IFD2 Control PCB to IMCRW Linker Harness


IFD2 MCRW Short Linker Harness

USB Touch Screen Cable Assembly

                                    P1             P2

                                                    P1                                                                                                     P2


6627 Product Cabling

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

This chapter covers the Power Distribution, Interconnect Diagrams and Functional Electrical Drawings.

DISTRIBUTION DIAGRAMS

DC Distribution

AC Distribution

USB Distribution

USB Distribution without HUB

HARNESSES

AC Harness Assy


MAINS SWITCH

FUSE

                                                                 5B       2A          4B       1A

Alarms

Alarms to Midimisc Harness

Alarms Harness

Audio


Private Audio Athena Cab Harness

Private Audio Harness

Auto Supervisor Safe harness

FEMALE_NO SW2_COM


1

2

                                 DC_PSU_OUT          

3


Facia Harness (View 1 of 2)


Facia Harness (View 2 of 2)

Heaters Harness

                         AC_OUT            HEATER

LVDS


LVDS Harness

LVDS Power Harness

                              P1                                                                                                                                        P2

Mode Switch Harness

GPIO

COM

NO

PSU Intel Harness

+

PSU

-

PSU_INTEL

S2 Dispenser Harness

Speaker Harness

SPS Harnesses

Dual DC Power

IFD2 Control PCB to Coil Linker Harness

IFD2 Control PCB to IMCRW Electrode Linker Harness

IFD2 Control PCB to IMCRW Linker Harness

IFD2 MCRW Short Linker Harness

Upper Advert Harness

USB Touch Screen Cable Assembly

                                    P1             P2

                                                    P1                                                                                                     P2

 


Section Divider

Section 5 - Power Supplies

February 2014

Section Divider

February 2014 Standard Power Supply (300W)      1

Standard Power Supply (300W)

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

This is a switch mode power supply, with +24V DC output and a maximum output power rating of 300W.

DESCRIPTION

The power supply is capable of operating with a single phase input voltage; 90Vrms min, 264Vrms max, 47 to 63 Hz. The power supply auto ranges ‐ external voltage range selection switching is not required.

The unit can withstand power line transients as specified in CES 2‐11‐02 and EN61000‐411 without degradation of performance. It also incorporates Power Factor Correction circuitry meeting the requirements of EN61000‐3‐2 to Class A limits for the harmonic content of the input current, and EN61000‐3‐3, for magnitude of voltage fluctuations.

Note:  There is no on/off switch, or fuse, within the power supply. They are product specific and may be located either close to the supply or elsewhere in the product.

August 2011

2        Standard Power Supply (300W)

Power Requirements

PSU AC Input Connector

The ac is connected to the PSU via the three screw terminals: Live, Neutral and Ground.

Input Specification

Voltage

The PSU can operate with a single phase input voltage ranging from 90 V to 264 V rms and 47 Hz to 63 Hz. Voltage range selection is automatic.

Input Current

The maximum input current under normal operating conditions is as follows:

Range

Input Voltage Range Frequency Range

(V rms)                  (Hz)

Maximum Input Current (A)

115

90 ‐ 136                   47 ‐ 63

5.0

230

180 ‐ 264                 47 ‐ 63

2.5

Inrush Current

The inrush current, measured at full output load (during a cold or warm start and for a max of one cycle):

l 40 A peak maximum at 257 Vrms input; warm start, measured at TA = 20 deg C

DC Output Specifications

The following table defines the dc output specification of the PSU:

Performance Requirements

                     Nominal Voltage                                +24 Vdc

August 2011

                                                                                                                           Standard Power Supply (300W)                                                                                                                                                                    3

Performance Requirements

 

Current Static ‐ Continuous

Minimum 0Adc, Maximum 13A dc

Maximum Output Power

300W

Voltage Dropout

A 100% input voltage drop out for 16.6mS at full load will not cause the output voltage to go outwith specified limits.

Subsequent to any input under voltage, outage, dip or interruption the power supply will automatically restart and function normally when the input voltage returns to within its operating range.

Overload Protection

The PSU will shut down to prevent damage in the event of:

l  Overvoltage: trigger level is 27.6V min, 33V max

l  Overcurrent

l  Short circuit

l  Overpower

l  Abnormal temperature rise.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Restart after Shutdown

If the power supply shuts down due to overcurrent, short circuit or overpower protection, it will automatically attempt to restart. If the fault condition continues; the power supply will go into "tick mode" and will continue to shut down and attempt to restart until the power or the fault is removed.

If the power supply shuts down due to overvoltage protection it will stay shut down until input power is cycled.

ERROR MESSAGES

None.

DIAGNOSTICS

None.

STRAPPING

None.

August 2011

4        Standard Power Supply (300W)

ADJUSTMENTS

None.

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

There are no field replaceable parts in the power supply.

CABLING

None.

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS

Input/Output Pins

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

None.

August 2011


Uninterruptible Power Supply

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

This chapter describes the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) unit, including: Operation, Setup and Storage.

The UPS monitors the mains supply and provides a stabilised supply to the ATM. If the mains supply fails, the UPS will supply the ATM from its integral battery‐backed power supply. This supply duration is limited and is intended to provide for orderly termination of any active transactions before the ATM shuts down.

DESCRIPTION

Definitions

Line Boost Capability

Line Boost Capability is the minimum voltage deviation below nominal that must be handled via boosting without going on battery, while maintaining the output voltage within the required output voltage range

Boost Mode

A shift to boost mode occurs during voltage variations in the AC input power. The boost function maintain the output voltage supplied by the UPS within close tolerances around the rated value even if significant voltage variations occur in the AC input power. This avoids calling on battery power.

The values defining the voltage range are pre‐set and vary depending upon the nominal voltage selected.

Specification

Model: UPS 230V and UPS 120V (where different):

l  Nominal Frequency: 50/60 Hz auto‐selecting.

l  Power Level: 1150VA, 770W

l  Static Regulation (Battery Mode): ‐10% to +7% of nominal

l  Boost: maintain output within 198‐273V (90‐153V)

l  Battery Configuration: Internal batteries provided as one assembled part.

Indicators

The illustration and table below explain the functions of the indicators on the UPS front panel:

               Item   Description      Specification

1

On/Off button     To start/stop the UPS

Off--------------------------------------

Solid green--------------------------

Illuminated and locking button

System off

Power On

2

Load Pro- Off-------------------------------------tected LED Solid green--------------------------

No output enabled Output enabled

3

Downgraded          Solid yellow--------------------------

Operation LED       Flashing yellow ---------------------

Mains failure Battery failure

4

Non Protected Off-------------------------------------Load LED Solid red -----------------------------

Normal load Overload

5

Programmable Off-------------------------------------Outlet 1 Solid green--------------------------

Plug #1 not powered Plug #1 powered

6

Programmable Off-------------------------------------Outlet 2 Solid green--------------------------

Plug #2 not powered Plug #2 powered

7

Percentage        0 - 25% (LED 1 lit)

Load bar graph 26% - 50% (LEDs 1 + 2 lit)

LED                  51% - 75% (LEDs 1 + 2 + 3 lit)

76% - 100% (All four LEDs lit)

LED 1 is to the left of the display

8

Battery Charge 0 - 25% (LED 1 lit)

level bar graph   26% - 50% (LEDs 1 + 2 lit)

51% - 75% (LEDs 1 + 2 + 3 lit)

76% - 100% (All four LEDs lit)

LED 1 is to the left of the display

Indications During Operation

This section describes the indications of the following UPS phases of operation:

l  Start‐Up

l  Shift to Booster Mode

l  Operation on Battery Power.

The numbers in the text refer to the front panel diagram.

Start‐Up (1150VA)

Start‐up commences when the ON/OFF (1) button is pressed:

l  The buzzer beeps and all the LEDs come on.

l  The buzzer beeps two times during the self test, then button (1) remains ON, indicating that the outlets are supplied with power.

Either:

l  AC power is present, LED (2) is ON and LED (3) is not ON, and the protected equipment is supplied by the AC power source.

or:

l  AC power is absent, LED’s (2) and (3) are ON, and the protected equipment is supplied by the UPS operating on battery power.

l  All the connected equipment is supplied with power.

If button (1) is not ON, or if LED (4) is ON, there is a fault (see “Troubleshooting”).

Note:   The battery is charged as soon as the UPS is connected to the ac power source, even if button (1) is in the OFF position.

Boost Mode

When the boost mode is in operation the LED’s do not change to indicate that the operation is active to show that there is a significant voltage variation in the ac input power.

Operation on Battery Power

Operation on battery power takes place when AC input power has failed or is outside the Boost range.

Transfer to Battery Power (1150VA) While operating on battery power:

l  LED (3) is illuminated

l  The equipment connected to the UPS is supplied by the battery.

Threshold for the Low Battery Warning

The low battery warning threshold (Battery Low Threshold) is set via the self service configuration menu and shows that there is very little remaining battery backup time. The indications that the threshold has been reached are:

l  The ATM application specification will close because UPS does not have automatic shut down.

When the battery reaches the end of its backup time:

l  The UPS shuts down and all the LEDs go OFF

l  Equipment connected to the UPS is no longer supplied with power.

TROUBLESHOOTING

The LED numbers in the following tables appear on the diagrams in the “Indicators” section.


1150VA Module

Indication

All LED’s go ON and LED

(3) remains ON

LED’s (2) and (3) are ON and and LED (7) flash

LED (4) goes ON Solid Red and LED (7) flashing.

LED (4) ON and LED (8) flashing.

LED (4) goes ON.

DIAGNOSTICS

Level 0 None

Level 1

Meaning

Action

The Remote Power Off contact has been activated to shut down the UPS. Preventing a restart

Set the contact to normal position and restart

The percent load greater than set overload or UPS capacity.

Check power drawn by connected devices and disconnect non priority devices. Check the overload setting.

UPS overload. The power drawn by the connected equipment exceeds UPS capacity.

If LED (4) goes on permanently, check the power drawn by the attached devices and disconnect any non priority devices.

A battery fault was detected Replace the battery module during the automatic battery test.

UPS internal diagnostics       Replace the UPS.

have detected an internal fault. The connected devices are no longer supplied.


Level 1 diagnostics tests available on the Uninterruptible Power Supply are:

l  Test

l  Report

Test

Selection of TEST from the UPS diagnostic test menu tests the UPS and reports its status.

Report

The REPORT test returns the present status of the UPS

Level 3

S_DATA

The level 3 diagnostics returned for the Uninterruptible Power Supply are:

               S_Data         Meaning

00                     Good (Operation successful)

01                     Routine (Command not supported, RS232 turnaround failure)

02                     Warning (Battery low)

               04                Fatal (Device failure, Battery failure, Command failure, Comms error,

Device inoperative)

Tallies

The tallies recorded for the Uninterruptible Power Supply are:

               Tally               Mnemonic

               OUTAGES       Number of times the UPS reported a power outage.

MSKD OUT     Number of times that a power outage exceeded the time specified by the outage mask time.

STRAPPING

None.

ADJUSTMENTS

The Self Service Configuration Menu for the UPS enables adjustment of following UPS parameters:

l  Mode

l  Voltages

l  Shut down Delay

l  Startup Delay

l  Battery Low Threshold

l  Outage Mask time

l  Battery Test Day

l  Battery Test Hour

A description of each parameter, together with the permitted range of inputs and the default settings, is shown in the table below.

Parameter

                                   Description                                             Range          Default Value

Name

               Mode           This string identifies the mode (Control or    000 or 001    “000” - Control

                                   Data) of the UPS and the device type.                            “001” - Data

Parameter

Name

Description                                             Range

Default Value

Voltages

Identifies the level of the control voltages     000 - 111

for serial control lines, in order, CTS (Power Fail), DCD (Battery Low), DTR (Shut down).

“0” means negative voltage

“1” means positive voltage

Note: “Voltages” has no effect for USB

UPS.

111

Shut down Delay

This specifies the delay time in seconds of 0 - 999 the interval between the issue of a shut down command and the shut down of the UPS.

120 seconds

Startup

Delay

If mains has returned during shut down the 0 - 999 Startup Delay is introduced after the Shut down Delay. If mains is not present during the Shut down Delay then the UPS will restart as soon as mains returns.

15 seconds

Battery Low This is the capacity remaining threshold        0 - 1000

Threshold     that indicates a low battery condition. If the

(BL)             reported charge remaining is less than or equal to this value then the Battery Low indicator is True. The parameter is given in 1/10 percent units.

900

(90%)

Outage         This is the duration that the mains outage    0 - 99

Mask Time    must exceed before the supply out indicator is set true.

15 seconds

Battery Test This specifies the day on which the weekly 0 - 6 Day               battery test should be performed.

2

(Monday)

Battery Test This specifies the hour at which the weekly 00 - 23 Hour battery test should be performed.

04

(4am)

Configuring The UPS

Normal Operation

Under normal operation, the UPS will supply standard mains power to the terminal. Supply voltage deviations within the line boost will result in the UPS boosting (stepping up) of the voltage via its internal transformer. This ensures that the voltage supply to the rest of the product remains within the acceptable ranges of 198 ‐ 273 V for 230 V units or 90 ‐ 136 V for 120 V units. If necessary, the UPS internal batteries will be charging to maintain 100% charge.

Short Term Outage Or Voltage Variation

In the event of a short term outage or input voltage variation (lasting less than the configured Outage Mask Time), the UPS will automatically switch to supplying the terminal from its integral batteries. On restoration of the normal mains supply the UPS will automatically switch back to supplying a stabilised supply to the terminal from mains power. The internal batteries will be charged to maintain 100% capacity when mains is present.

Long Term Outage Or Voltage Variation

In the event of an outage or input voltage variation (outside the line boost and buck capability) lasting longer than the Outage Mask Time, the UPS will automatically switch to supplying the terminal from its integral batteries. At this point, under the control of the application program, the terminal will take one of the following actions:

l  Immediately initiate a shut down

l  Go into standby mode until mains returns or until the battery capacity falls below the

Battery Low Threshold, at which point it will initiate a shut down

l  Continue offering transactions until mains returns or until the battery capacity falls below the Battery Low Threshold, at which point it will initiate a shut down.

The shut down is controlled, terminating any active transactions and leaving the terminal in a safe and secure state. A control message is sent to the UPS to disengage.

Restart After Controlled Shut down

On restoration of the mains supply and restart of the terminal, the customer application may either bring the terminal immediately back into service or wait until the battery capacity is above the Battery Low Threshold before doing so.

A Low Battery condition will be displayed until the calculated battery capacity is equal to the Battery Low Threshold

UPS Self Test

The UPS will carry out a self test on demand by selecting DEVICE SELF TEST from the System Application Menu and UPS from the Device Self Test Menu.

If the battery is fully charged this test will verify battery health and that it is correctly connected. If the battery capacity is less than 100% then the test will only verify the connection.

MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

WARNING

Before removing the UPS: Switch off the ATM on/off switch.

Switch the UPS off using the UPS on/off button.

Disconnect the ATM external power cord. (For hard‐wired products turn the mains isolation switch to off.).

The UPS module is heavy. Be sure that you have a clear path to where you intend to set it down.

The UPS module can be installed in a number of locations depending on the ATM product variant. (inside the safe, outside the safe and also in horizontal and vertical placements).

1.      Access the UPS module in the ATM.

2.      Remove any retaining bracket(s) and screw(s)

3.      Disconnect the AC In, AC Out and USB cables at the rear of the module

4.      Remove the UPS and lay on a flat surface.

Replacement of the UPS module is the reverse of the above procedures.

Battery Care And Replacement

Storing the UPS Batteries

If UPS batteries are stored for a long period, recharge them every 6 months by plugging the UPS into a power outlet. The batteries charge to 90% in approximately 3 hours. However, it is recommended that the batteries charge for 6 to 24 hours after long time storage.

Replacing Batteries

The hot swappable battery feature allows the UPS batteries to be replaced without turning off the UPS, or disconnecting the load.

If it is preferable to remove input power to change the batteries, press the ON/OFF button to switch off the UPS and unplug the UPS from the power outlet shown in the previous section.

WARNING

Batteries can present a risk of electrical shock or burn from high short circuit current. The following precautions should be observed:

1.     Remove watches, rings or other metal objects

2.     Use tools with insulated handles.

3.     Do not lay tools or metal parts on top of batteries.

4.     Do not attempt to alter any battery wiring or connectors as this can cause injury.

5.     Replace batteries with the same number and type as originally installed in the UPS

6.     Do not disconnect the batteries while the UPS is in battery mode.

Battery Access

1.     Remove and retain the two screws holding the left hand side of the front panel of the UPS module.

2.     Remove the left‐hand side of the front panel by sliding it slightly to the right and then pulling it forward.

Battery Removal

Remove the battery for all model types as follows:

1.     Disconnect the battery module by separating the two parts of the connector. Do not pull on the cables.

2.     Unhook the tangs of the metal cover plate by sliding it to the right and then lift it off over the battery connector.

3.     Hold the UPS part of the connector aside and pull out the battery by the plastic tag. Do not pull the battery by its connector.

Battery Replacement

Replacement of the battery is the reverse of the above procedure. Take care to hold the UPS connector aside so the it is not broken or the wires cut when sliding the new battery into place.

Testing New Batteries

Run the Device Self Test from the System application menu and UPS from the Device Self‐Test menu.

Recycling Used Batteries

Contact your local recycling or hazardous waste centre for information on proper disposal of the used batteries.

WARNING

Do not dispose of the batteries in a fire. Batteries may explode. Proper disposal of batteries is required. Refer to your local codes for disposal requirements

CABLING

None.

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS

No Information Available.

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

No Information Available.

 


Section Divider

Section 6 - Terminal Core and Communications

February 2014

Section Divider

February 2014


Mini PC Core

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

The Mini PC Core may be fitted with either one of the following motherboards:

l  a Lanier 945GSE motherboard providing Intel® ATOM N270 processor

l  a Kingsway GL40 motherboard providing either Celeron 900‐ 2.2GHz/800/1M Cache or Performance Core 2 Duo T7500‐2.2 GHz/800MHz/4M Cache processors

l  a Riverside Q67 motherboard providing either Intel® Core i3–2120T,

Core i5–2500T, Core i5–2390T, or Celeron G530T processors

l  a Lanier II NM10 motherboard providing an Intel® ATOM D2550 processor Note:  The illustration below shows the Mini PC Core with the Lanier Board.

DESCRIPTION

Motherboards

The Mini PC Core consists of a PC processor on the following motherboards with additional Self Service functionality:

Features

Lanier 945GSE

Kingsway GL40

Processor

ATOM 1.6 GHz N270

l Celeron 900

l Core 2 Duo T7500

Chipset

Intel 945GSE

Intel GL40

Memory

One DDR2 SO–DIMM

Two DDR3 SO–DIMM

Video

Integrated display adapter, DVI, VGA out

Integrated display adapter, DVI, VGA out

SATA

 Two SATA ports

Three SATA ports

Expansion Slots

l One PCI connector for PCCM

l One PCI connector for PCCM

l One PCIe x1 connector (riser needed)

Serial

Two RS 232 interfaces

Two RS 232 interfaces

USB

l Four USB ports on rear IO

l Four on breakout

l Four USB ports on rear IO

l Four on breakout

                LAN support One Ethernet 10/100                                           One Ethernet 10/100

                                      Base–T network interface                                   Base–T network interface

Audio

Line out for embedded audio

Line out for embedded audio

DVD‐ROM

Optional external DVD ROM

Optional external DVD ROM

PCCM

Optional PCCM communications system on separate plug–in card

Optional PCCM communications system on separate plug–in card

 

 

 

Features

Riverside Q67

Lanier II NM10

Processor

l Core i3–2120T

l Core i5–2500T

l Core i5–2390T

l Celeron G530T

ATOM D2550

Chipset

Intel Q67

Intel NM10 with Intel 82NM10 PCH

Memory

Two DDR 3 SO–DIMM

Two DDR 3 SO–DIMM

Video

Integrated display adapter, DVI, VGA out

Integrated display adapter with DVI and VGA outputs

SATA

l One SATA 2 port

l Two SATA 3 ports

Two SATA 2 ports

Expansion Slots

l One PCI connector for PCCM

l One PCIe x1 connector (riser needed)

l One PCI connector for PCCM

l One PCIe x1 connector (riser needed)

Serial

Two RS 232 interfaces

Two RS 232 interfaces

USB

l Four USB ports on rear IO

l Four on breakout

l Four USB ports on rear IO

l Four on breakout

LAN support One Ethernet 10/100/1000

Base–T network interface

One Ethernet 10/100

Base–T network interface

Audio              Line out for embedded audio

Line out for embedded audio

DVD‐ROM       Optional external DVD ROM

Optional external DVD ROM

PCCM            Optional PCCM communications system on separate plug–in card

Optional PCCM communications system on separate plug–in card

PCI PCCM Board (Optional)

The PCI PC Communications Module (PCCM) board is an add‐in adapter that provides a Band 3 communications interface. The PCI PCCM board has a level 0 diagnostic LED (green).

PCI Riser Board (Optional)

This board is connected to the Lanier 945GSE, Lanier II NM10 ,Kingsway GL40, or Riverside Q67 motherboard providing a PCI slot.

Disk Drives

The PC Core contains the following disk drives:

l S‐ATA DVD‐ROM optical drive (connected to S‐ATA channel 0) ‐ external to the core l S‐ATA hard disk drive (connected to S‐ATA channel 1).

Note:  An optional secondary S‐ATA hard disk drive is available for the Kingsway GL40 board and Riverside board.

S‐ATA DVD‐ROM Optical Drive

This optical storage drive is a DVD‐ROM drive (16X min.) and CD‐ROM drive (48X min.) and has a Serial ATA interface supporting ATAPI commands. The drive has DVD video and CD audio playback capability. The drive can play any standard DVD‐ROM and CD‐ROM disks complying with the ECMA‐267 standard.

The table below lists the power requirements of the S–ATA DVD–ROM Optical Drive.

Voltage

Current

+5VDC

2.0A

+12VDC

1.0A

S‐ATA Hard Disk Drive

The primary drive is an industry standard 3.5‐inch HDD that supports the ATA interface standard and operates on a Serial ATA interface.

The optional secondary drive for the Kingsway and Riverside motherboards is an industry standard 2.5‐inch HDD that supports the ATA interface standard and operates on a Serial ATA interface.

The table below lists the power requirements of the S–ATA Hard Disk Drives.

S–ATA HDD

Voltage

Current

3.5–inch HDD

+12 Vdc +5 Vdc

0.56 A

0.72 A

2.5–inch HDD

+5 Vdc

0.46 A

TROUBLESHOOTING

Error

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

Loss of configuration data

Motherboard battery failure

The system date and time

are excessively inaccurate.

Replace battery.

No boot up

HDD failure

Use BIOS Setup Utility to determine disk’s presence.

Replace.

Loose or incorrectly connected cabling

Check power and S‐ATA cables.

Reconnect or properly connect cables to correct sockets. Replace if worn.

RAM not seated correctly

Check RAM

Re‐seat correctly

RAM not configured

Check RAM is configured through BIOS Setup.

 

 

Error

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

System does not start up

Memory refresh timer error

 

Reseat the memory, or replace with known good modules

Parity error in base memory (first 64Kb block)

 

Base memory read/write test error

 

Motherboard timer not operational

 

Fatal error indicating a serious problem with the system. Before replacing the motherboard, eliminate the possibility of interference by a malfunctioning add‐in card. Remove the expansion card then insert it back into the system. If this does not solve the problem, the cause may be a malfunctioning card.

Processor error

 

8042 Gate A20 test error (cannot switch to protected mode)

 

General exception error (processor exception interrupt error)

 

AMIBIOS ROM checksum error

 

CMOS shutdown register read/write error

 

Cache memory test failed

 

Display memory error (system video adapter)

 

If the system video adapter is an add‐in card, replace or reseat the video adapter. If the video adapter is an integrated part of the system board, the board may be faulty.

Motherboard has not powered on

Has the system fan started?

Check that pins 1 & 2 at JP3 are at power on. If they are then check the short circuit pins 2 ‐ 4 on PANEL header for 1 second to see if the fan starts and the motherboard powers up.

Applies to Kingsway GL40 Motherboard only Processor faulty. Could be the fan is blocked and the processor is overheating.

 

Replace the fan or processor.

DIAGNOSTICS

For general diagnostic information see the Diagnostics Overview chapter in the Diagnostics Overview section.

Power on Self Test

There are no beep codes and no diagnostic LEDs on the Mini PC Core.

Beep Codes

There are no beep codes on the Mini PC Core.

STRAPPING

                                H          I     D                       E                                                   H                     E

Diagram 1 - Plan view of the Motherboard

Key  Description

Key  Description

A       Processor

F            Powered serial port strap x 4

B       SODIMM Slot s

G          RSD/FSD mode strap

C       PCI Slot (1 off)

H          A_ON1 ‐ Auto power on strap

D       Lithium battery

I           CMOS clear strap

E       Internal audio header ‐ line out

Diagram 2 - Side View of External Ports

J           USB headers

Key

Key  Description

1       LAN

5          Serial x 2

2       Front USB (2 ports)

6          Front USB (2 ports)

3         VGA display output

4         DVI display output

7           Audio ‐ line out

Motherboard Jumpers

Serial Port Power Jumpers

Lanier and Kingsway Motherboards

The table below lists the serial port power jumpers for the Lanier, Lanier II, and Kingsway board.

Serial Port

Lanier

Kingsway

Lanier II

COM1

JP1

JCOM A

J7

COM2

JP2

JCOM B

J8

COM3

JP3

JCOM C

J15

COM4

JP4

JCOMD

J16

The table below list the strapping settings of the serial power port jumpers.

               Function           Jumper on Pins

5V          1 and 2 12V              3 and 4

                RI (default)           5 and 6

The jumpers on the serial power ports must be positioned on Pin 5 and Pin 6 as shown below.

Pin 1Pin 2 Pin 3Pin 4

Pin 5Pin 6

Riverside Motherboard

The J39 header provides the strapping options for the serial power ports of the Riverside board.

The table below lists the strapping settings of the serial power port jumper, J39.

Jumper on Pins Jumper on Pins Jumper on Pins Jumper on Pins Function

 

COM D

COM C

COM B

COM A

5V

3 and 6

9 and 12

15 and 18

21 and 24

12V

2 and 5

8 and 11

14 and 17

20 and 23

RI (default)

1 and 4

7 and 10

13 and 16

19 and 22

The jumpers in the J39 header must be positioned on pins 1 and 4, 7 and 10, 13 and 16, 19 and 22 as shown below.

 

 

 

5V

12V

RI

                                                                       COMD        COMC      COMB       COMA

CLR CMOS

CAUTION

Ensure that the core is powered off before moving this jumper.

The table below lists the jumper settings for the CLR CMOS jumper on the motherboards.

               Function                                                                   Lanier          Lanier II       Kingsway  Riverside

Clear CMOS memory (jumper must be returned to    2 and 3   2 and 3   1 and 2   1 and 2 normal position before power‐on)

                Normal operation (default)                                          1 and 2         1 and 2        2 and 3        2 and 3

WARNING

Do not use a metal or conductive implement to remove the battery. A short circuit between the battery’s positive and negative terminals can cause it to explode.

A_ON1–Auto Power On Jumper

Financial terminals do not provide an external power button for the motherboard. The Auto Power–On jumper allows the motherboard to automatically power–on when power is applied.

The table below lists the strapping settings of the auto power–on jumper.

             Jumper on Pins  Function

1  and 2  Auto power–on enable (FSD default).

2  and 3  Auto power–on disable

RSD/FSD Strap

The RSD/FSD Strap indicates whether the motherboard is installed in a Retail or Financial system. The table below lists the strap settings of the RSD/FSD strap.

             Jumper on Pins  Function

1  and 2  FSD mode (default)

2  and 3  RSD mode

With strap in correct position, enter BIOS setup and load defaults.

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

The field replaceable units in the Mini PC Core are:

l  System core fan

l  Riser card and PCCM (optional feature)

l  Hard Disk (HDD)

l  Audio breakout cable

l  USB breakout assembly

l  External DVD

l  Motherboard

l  Memory (SO‐DIMM)

l  I/O shield

l  Processor (Kingsway and Riverside boards only)

l  CPU Fan (Kingsway and Riverside boards only)

Removing the PC Core Lid

To remove the PC core lid, perform the steps below.

1.     Remove the two screws that secure the lid to the core chassis. Keep the screws for replacement of the lid.

2.     Slide the lid towards the I/O panel and lift up from the chassis.

System Core Fan

To remove the core fan, disassemble in the following order:

1.     Disconnect the power harness from the motherboard.

2.     Take note of the connection of the fan harness on the motherboard and disconnect the harness.

3.     Remove and retain the two screws that secure the fan to the back of the core chassis.

4.     Remove the existing fan from the chassis.

CAUTION

The correct direction of the air flow is out of the PC box. To replace the fan in the correct position use the arrow marked on one of the sides of the fan to make sure the air is blowing out of the PC box.

5.     Locate the airflow arrow mark on the new fan and make sure it points out of the PC core chassis.

6.     Use the two screws to secure the fan to the core chassis 7.        Connect the fan harness to the header on the motherboard.

PCCM Board (Optional Feature)

To remove the riser card and PCCM board, disassemble in the following order:

1.     Disconnect the external cable from the PCCM board.

2.     Insert a screwdriver through the hole at the side of the pc core chassis and remove the screw securing the board to the chassis. Keep the screw for the replacement of the PCCM board.

3.     Pull the PCCM board out, detaching it from the riser card.

4.     Insert the new PCCM board to the PCI slot on the riser card. Make sure that the tab on the PCCM board bracket is inserted into the slot on the chassis.

5.     Secure the board to the chassis with the screw.

PCCM Riser Card (Optional Feature)

To replace the PCCM riser card, perform the steps below.

1.     Disconnect the external cable from the PCCM board.

2.     Remove PCCM board as described above.

3.     Remove the screw that secures the riser board bracket to the back of the core chassis. Keep the screw for the replacement of the riser board.

4.     Carefully detach the existing riser board from the PCI slot on the motherboard and remove the card and bracket from the chassis.

5.     Connect the new riser board to the PCI slot on the motherboard.

6.     Secure the riser board bracket to the core chassis with the screw.

External DVD

To remove the external DVD, disassemble in the following order:

1.     Disconnect the SATA harness from the DVD drive.

2.     Remove the two screws that secure the right‐hand DVD bracket to the core chassis. Keep the screws for replacement.

3.     Slide the DVD backward to release the tangs of the left–hand DVD bracket.

4.     Remove the screws that secure the brackets to the DVD. There are two screws for each bracket.

5.     Secure each bracket to the sides of the new DVD drive.

6.     Fit the tangs of the left–hand DVD bracket to the slots on the core chassis and slide the DVD forward to secure the left–hand bracket to the core chassis.

7.     Use two screws to secure the right–hand DVD bracket to the core chassis.

Audio Breakout Cable

To remove the audio breakout cable, disassemble in the following order:

1.     Take note of the connection of the audio cable on the motherboard and disconnect it from the header.

2.     Loosen the nut that secures the audio cable to the I/O panel and then remove the cable.

3.     Fit the audio connector to the hole in the rear I/O panel and secure it with the nut.

4.     Connect the audio breakout cable header to the appropriate header on the motherboard.

USB Breakout Assembly

To remove the USB breakout assembly, disassemble in the following order:

               1.    If fitted, remove the PCCM board.

1.     Remove the three screws that secure the breakout assembly to the front of the core chassis. Keep the screws for the replacement of the breakout assembly.

2.     Note the positions and connections of all the USB cables.

3.     Disconnect the cables then remove the USB breakout assembly.

4.     Connect the headers of the new USB breakout assembly to the appropriate headers on the motherboard.

Note:  The plastic key in the USB breakout headers should be at the bottom when connected to the motherboard headers. The ports will then be numbered 4, 5, 6, 7 from left to right.

5.     Use three scews to secure the USB breakout assembly to the front of the core chassis.

Hard Disk Drive (HDD)

Single Hard Disk Drive

To replace the hard disk drive, perform the steps below.

1.     If fitted, remove the PCCM board.

2.     Remove the USB breakout cable.

3.     Remove the external DVD.

4.     Disconnect the SATA power and data harness from the HDD.

5.     Remove the four screws that secure the existing HDD to the bottom side of the core chassis. Keep the screws for the replacement of the HDD.

6.     Fit the new HDD to the core chassis and secure it the four screws.

Dual Hard Disk Drive

To replace the hard disk drive, perform the steps below.

1.     If fitted, remove the PCCM board.

2.     Remove the USB breakout cable.

3.     Remove the external DVD drive.

4.     Disconnect the SATA power and data harness from the HDDs.

5.     Remove four screws that secure the hard disk drives to the bottom of the core chassis. Keep the screws for the replacement of the HDDs.

6.     Loosen the four screws (two on each side) of the HDD that needs replacement.

7.     Slide out the HDD along the key hole slots and remove.

8.     Slide in the new HDD along the key hole slots and secure it to the brackets with two screws on each side.

9.     Fit the hard disk drives to the core chassis and secure it with four screws.

Note:  When replacing the hard disks, make sure to connect hard disk 1 into SATA 1 and if dual disk, hard disk 2 into SATA 2. Tidy up all cables using rivet ties where necessary.

Motherboard

To remove the motherboard, disassemble in the following order:

Note:  The following illustrations show the Lanier motherboard, however the method of removal is the same for other motherboards.

1.     Disconnect the internal and external cabling from the existing motherboard.

2.     Remove the memory modules from the defective motherboard. If re–usable, fit the memory modules to the new motherboard. Refer to the “Memory Board (SODIMM)” section of this chapter for the removal and replacement procedure.

3.     For the Riverside and Kingsway board, remove the following modules from the defective mother board and fit them to the new motherboard if they are still re–usable:

l  CPU cooler, refer to the “CPU Cooler” section for the removal and replacement procedure

l  processor refer to the “Processor” section for the removal and replacement procedure

Note:  Make sure to fit the processor socket protector of the new motherboard to the defective motherboard socket to prevent damage to the socket pins during handling or shipping.


Remove the four screws that secure the motherboard to the core box, then remove the board by moving it back towards the fan before lifting clear of the I/O shield.

CAUTION

When removing and re‐fitting the motherboard, do not use the heatsinks to leverage the board into the I/O shield. Handle the board by the edges or LAN and PCI slot only.

5.     Fit the new motherboard to the core chassis and I/O shield and secure it with the four screws.

6.     Fit the necessary modules and connect the necessary cables to their appropriate connectors on the new motherboard.

Memory Board (SODIMM)

CAUTION

Hold the memory modules at the sides only. Never hold more than one module at a time. Never bend or twist the memory modules as this can seriously damage the contacts.

Lanier and Lanier II Motherboards

To remove the memory board on the Lanier and Lanier II motherboards, proceed as follows:

1.     Pull the plastic retention clips outwards to unlock and release the existing memory board from the SO–DIMM slot

2.     Remove the existing memory board from the motherboard.

3.     Match the notch on the new memory module with the notch on the SO–DIMM connector.

Insert the memory module at an angle towards the connector.

5.    Lightly press down each end of the memory board until the plastic retention clips snap and lock the memory module in place.

Note:  It may be necessary to manually close the clips.

Kingsway GL40 Motherboard and Riverside Motherboards

To remove and replace the memory board on the Kingsway GL40 and Riverside motherboards, proceed as follows:

1.     Flip open the plastic retention clips outwards and remove the memory board.

2.     Match the notch on the new module to the notch on the SO–DIMM slot.

3.     Insert the module without using undue pressure. Use both hands to press down on each end of the module until the plastic retention clips snap shut, (it may be necessary to manually close the clips).

4.     Dual‐channel operation requires a pair of modules to be inserted. The first module goes into the Channel A SO‐DIMM1 slot and the second module goes into the Channel B SO‐DIMM2 slot.

CPU Cooler

To replace the CPU cooler, perform the steps below.

1.     Loosen the four spring–loaded captive screws that secure the existing cooler to the motherboard.

Note:  Follow a sequential rotating pattern when loosening the spring–loaded screws. Gradually loosen each screw to evenly raise the CPU cooler.

2.     Remove all old thermal grease from the cooler heat sink and processor spreader plate with a tissue or paper towel. Do not use a knife or screwdriver as this could damage the surface of the spreader plate.

3.     Apply thermal grease to the processor spreader plate in the pattern shown below.

Riverside Processor

                                       (Apply approximately one-half of the                                             Kingsway Processor

contents of the thermal grease syringe)

CAUTION

Do not use the entire contents of the syringe. Too much grease could degrade the performance of the cooler.

Fit the new cooler to the mounting holes with the back plate on the motherboard and secure with the spring–loaded captive screws.

               5. Connect the cooler power cable to the CPU fan connector on the motherboard.

Note:  Make sure that the cooler cable does not obstruct the fan blades.

Processor

To replace the processor, perform the steps below.

1.     Remove the CPU Cooler from the motherboard.

2.     Remove all old thermal grease from the cooler heat sink and processor spreader plate with a tissue or paper towel. Do not use a knife or screwdriver as this could damage the surface of the spreader plate.

3.     Unlock and remove the processor from its mounting as shown below.

CAUTION

Hold the processor by the edges only. Take care not to drop anything into the processor socket. The pins are very delicate and are easily damaged. If the pins are damaged, the motherboard will have to be replaced.

a       For the Riverside processor, unlatch the arm of the metal frame that secures the processor to the motherboard, raise the metal frame, and remove the processor.

b       For the Kingsway processor, rotate the lock to the unlock position as shown below then remove the processor.

4.     Match the arrow on the new processor to the arrow on the motherboard and carefully place the processor into the socket. Lock the processor in its mounting plate once it is properly seated.

                                                Riverside Processor                                                          Kingsway Processor

5.     Apply thermal grease to the processor spreader plate in the pattern shown below.

Riverside Processor

(Apply approximately one-half of the      Kingsway Processor contents of the thermal grease syringe)


CAUTION

Do not use the entire contents of the syringe. Too much grease could degrade the performance of the cooler.

6.     Fit the cooler to the mounting holes on the motherboard and cooler back plate.

7.     Secure the cooler with the spring–loaded captive screws.

I/O Shield

To remove the I/O shield, disassemble in the following order:

1.      Remove the mother board as described in previous steps.

2.      From the outside of the core, push on the outside edges of the I/O shield and remove from the core chassis.

To replace the I/O shield, reverse the instructions above.

CABLING

Interconnection Diagrams

Lanier Motherboard

Lanier II NM10 Motherboard

Kingsway GL40 Motherboard

Riverside Q67 Motherboard

Cables

Audio Breakout Header Assembly

                         P1 (Chassis)                                                                                                          P2 (Motherboard)

                             P1 (Chassis)                                                                                                    P2 (Motherboard)

Panel Mount Motherboard Power

 

Chassis Con

Motherboard Con

                                       Chassis Con                                                                                      Motherboard Con

SATA Data and Power Cable (DVD and HDD)

Pin 1(a) Pin 7(a)

Pin 15(b)

Pin 1(b)

USB 2.0 Breakout Assembly

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS

Motherboard Connectors

Video ‐ Analogue (VGA)

The table below lists the pinout assignments for a standard DB‐15 connector on the rear IO for a standard VGA monitor.

Pin

Signal

1

RED

2

GREEN

3

BLUE

4

NC

5

GND

6

R_GND

7

G_GND

8

B_GND

9

5V Supply

10

GND

11

NC

12

DDC DATA

13

HSYNC

14

VSYNC

15

DDC CLK

Video ‐ Digital (DVI)

The table below lists the pin assignments for a standard DVI–D connector on the rear IO for a standard DVI monitor.

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

1

TDMS DATA 2‐

13

NC

2

TDMS DATA 2+

14

+5V POWER

3

TDMS DATA 2/4 SHIELD

15

GND

4

NC

16

HOT PLUG DETECT

5

NC

17

TDMS DATA 0‐

6

DDC CLOCK

18

TDMS DATA 0+

7

DDC DATA

19

TDMS DATA 0/5 SHIELD

8

NC

20

NC

9

TDMS DATA 1‐

21

NC

10

TDMS DATA 1+

22

TDMS CLOCK SHIELD

11

TDMS DATA 1/3 SHIELD

23

TDMS CLOCK+

12

NC

24

TDMS CLOCK‐

 

 

 

 

C1

Not Connected

 

 

C2

Not Connected

 

 

C3

Not Connected

 

 

C4

Not Connected

 

 

C5

Not Connected

 

 

Audio

Line Out Header on Motherboard

The table below lists the pin assignments for the audio line out internal header.

Pin

Signal

1

Right

2

Jack Detect

3

Audio Ground

4

Left

5

Audio Ground

Audio Output Connector

3.5mm stereo jack socket ‐ no colour coding.

               Pin        Signal

1                 Audio Left

2                 Audio Right

3                 GND

Serial Ports

Standard RS–232 DB–9

               Pin                      Signal

1                                    CD

2                                    RX3        TX4         DTR

5                                    GND

6                                    DSR 7    RTS 8      CTS

                9                           RI

Network Connector

Standard RJ45 Ethernet network 10/100/1000 Base‐T connection.

               Pin        Signal

1                 TD+

2                 TD3       RD+

4                 NC

5                 NC

6                 RD‐

7                 NC

8                 NC

USB

USB on Rear I/O

USB 2.0 compatible standard USB ports

               Pin        Signal

1                 +5V

2                 DATA3   DATA+

                4             GND

USB Internal Headers

The tables below list the pin out assignments of the internal USB headers on the motherboard. Each header provides two USB ports.

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

1

+5

2

+5

3

DATA ‐

4

DATA ‐

5

DATA +

6

DATA +

7

GND

8

GND

9

NC

10

GND

S–ATA

S–ATA Data Connectors

               Pin             Signal

1                       GND

2                       A+ 3  A4          GND 5    B6          B+ 7         GND

S–ATA Power Connectors

               Pin             Signal

1                       GND

2                       A+ 3  A4          GND

HDDs and Optical Drive S–ATA Connector

S‐ATA DC Power Segment

DC power is supplied through a S‐ATA 15 pin connector.

               Pin             Signal

1                       3.3 V

2                       3.3 V

3                       3.3 V

4                       GND

5                       GND

6                       GND 7             5 V

8                       5 V

9                       5 V

10                     GND

11                     Reserved

12                     GND

13                     12 V

14                     12 V

15                     12 V

S‐ATA Signal Segment

Signals are supplied through a S‐ATA 7 pin connector.

               Pin             Signal

1                       GND

2                       A + 3 A 4         GND 5    B 6          B + 7         GND

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

There are no special test and adjustment tools required.

 


USB 7 Port Hub

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

This chapter gives the information required to service the USB 7 Port Hub fitted in atm Notes 663X ATM’s.

DESCRIPTION

The USB Hub iatm Noteseases the number of USB ports connected to the PC Core. It provides the following functionality:

l  Operation from a single 24V power supply

l  1 upstream facing port

l  7 powered downstream facing ports

l  Power management for each port

l  Device connect/disconnect detection

l  Bus fault detection and recovery

l  High, full and low‐speed device support

l  Transaction translator for each port to provide full unshared bandwidth for USB1.1 devices.

Power Requirement

The Hub requires the following dc voltage and currents:

                                                         Quiescent Current               Continuous Current

+24 V +/-10%                      125 mA min. + 125 mA for        1.0 A max. each used downstream port

The +24 V supply is sourced from the ATM power supply. The current rating in the table represents a total load which includes the current sourced for the following voltages:

l  +5 V +/‐5% is derived from the 24 V using a Sipex SP7652 Power Blox switcher

l  +3.3 V +/‐0.3V is derived from the 5 V using a low drop‐out linear regulator

l  +1.8 V +/‐10% is derived from the 3.3 V using a low drop‐out linear regulator.

Maximum Cable Lengths

Port

Speed

Maximum Cable Length

Upstream

All

5.0 m (16.40 ft.)

Downstream

High

5.0 m (16.40 ft.)

Downstream

Full

5.0 m (16.40 ft.)

Downstream

Low

3.0 m (9.84 ft.)

TROUBLESHOOTING

The system has a USBViewer option which allows the user to verify which module is allocated to which USB port and is accessed as follows:

Note: The user requires a USB Service Key to perform this function. 

1.     Select the DEVICE DIAGNOSTICS option from the SYSTEM APPLICATION menu.

2.     Select HARDWARE INFORMATION AND RECOVERY option.

3.     Select the USBViewer option.

4.     The system will then display the following screen showing the module to port

allocation for atm Notes modules or USB Hubs which have a working USB connection.

Note: Modules or USB Hubs are dynamically shown on the screen. If a Module or USB Hub is removed while screen is displayed the information relating to it will also be removed from the screen. 

5.     The user can select a specific module and the system will then display the following screen showing port details.

DIAGNOSTICS

Level 1 Diagnostics

There are two LEDs for each port, which indicate the port status. The definitions of the LEDs are shown below:

LED Colour

Status

Green

All OK

Amber

Error condition

Off

Non operational

Green (blinking On/Off)

Software attention

Amber (blinking On/Off)

Hardware attention

Green/Amber (blinking On/Off)

Reserved

There is one LED positioned close connector J9 that indicates power on or off.

There are no other diagnostics for this device.

STRAPPING

None.

ADJUSTMENTS

None.

MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

Note:  Cables should be replaced into the same port from which they were removed.

Top Box Mounted Hub

1.      Remove the screws holding USB mounting tray to the module tray.

2.      Note the positions of all USB cables.

3.      Unplug all cables from the hub.

4.      Remove the hub assembly.

5.      Replace the hub assembly.

6.      Refit cables into the same ports noted in step 2.

7.      Refit and secure USB mounting tray.

Safe Mounted Hub

1.      Note the positions of all USB cables.

2.      Unplug all cables from the hub.

3.      Remove the screws holding the cover to the safe.

4.      Remove the hub assembly.

5.      Replace the hub assembly.

6.      Replace the cover.

7.      Refit cables into the same ports noted in step 1.

CABLING

None.

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT

Hub Board

The diagram below shows the Hub Board connectors. ** Indicates the two LEDs for each port.

ATM Interface

The Hub has two interfaces with the host ATM and up to seven interfaces with modules in the ATM:

l  Power

l  Upstream connector l Downstream connectors.

Power Interface

Power is obtained from the host ATM via a 2‐pin right angled mini‐fit junior connector (J9) on the connector board, with the following pinout:

               Pin           Signal

1                   +24 V

2                   0 V

Upstream Connector

Communication to and from the host ATM is via a 5‐pin mini‐B connector (J8) on the connector board, with the following pinout:

               Pin           Signal

1                    VCC

2                    D3        D+

4                    N.C.

5                    GND

               Shell         SHIELD

Downstream Connectors

Communication to and from the modules is via seven 4‐pin upright type A connectors (J1‐ J7) on the connector board, with the following pinout:

               Pin           Signal

               Shell         SHIELD

1                    VCC

2                    D3        D+

                4               GND

               Shell         SHIELD

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

None.

 


Section Divider

Section 7 - Card Readers

February 2014

Section Divider

February 2014


USB IMCRW

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

The USB Integrated Motorised Card Reader Writer (UIMCRW) is capable of supporting all current financial card technologies, both Magnetic and Smart (excluding Watermark) and has the flexibility to be able to interface with future card technologies.

DESCRIPTION

The following illustration shows the main functional elements of the UIMCRW:

Available variants of the UIMCRW are as follows:

l  Track 2 ‐ Read Only

l  Track 1/2/3 ‐ Track 1/2 Read, Track 3 Read/Write l 3 Track ‐ Track 1/2/3 Read/Write (HiCo).

The above variants are available in the following configurations:

l  With or without Smart Card Reader (except HiCo which is Smart only)

l  With or without Card Return On Power Fail and/or System Escape (CROPF/SE)

l  With or without MEI (in throat)

l  With or without Card Clamping.

The following options are available on Track 1/2/3 readers (Germany only):

l  Card Identification Module (CIM) l MM Security Module.

UIMCRW Firmware

The UIMCRW firmware contains code for all current software and hardware features, such that if the hardware is available and is “switched on” by the software, it will automatically operate.

On start‐up, the UIMCRW compares a downloadable software component on the ATMs hard drive to its on‐board firmware and automatically performs the download if a difference is found.

Card Detection and Pre‐head Detection

Control of the UIMCRW shutter is by means of a microswitch which detects the physical presence and width of a card in the entry position and a pre‐head detection feature which detects the presence of a magnetic stripe on the card. When the microswitch is activated and the pre‐head detector recognizes a magnetic stripe a signal is applied to the shutter solenoid to open the shutter and permit the card to enter the UIMCRW.

Card Transport

Movement of the card in the UIMCRW transport, and eject and capture instructions, are controlled by the UIMCRW firmware in response to commands from the host application.

Card Return/Capture

Under normal conditions, when the card is presented to the user at the end of a transaction, the card will protrude a minimum of 25mm (except for warped cards) from the throat of the UIMCRW. From this position, the card can still be captured by the

UIMCRW.

Security ‐ Long and Short Card Detection

The UIMCRW automatically detects long or short cards and notifies the host that an abnormal card has been inserted into the UIMCRW. Abnormal cards are ejected immediately and can not enter the reader.

Reading and Writing To Magnetic Stripe Cards

The UIMCRW is equipped with four analogue methods of reading the magnetic track and, in the event of a read error, will try a total of five times to read the card.

Digital Decoding

A digital method of reading poor quality cards is included in the UIMCRW. The customer’s application has to be specially written to select digital decoding. If this is enabled, the card read time will be longer because of the extra cycle which occurs after the analogue read attempts.

Writing Magnetic Data

The Track 1/2/3 Read/Write (HiCo) UIMCRW has two write currents (High‐co and Lowco). The appropriate current is set by the UIMCRW using HiCoLoCo software detection. In the event of a write error verified by a read after write, the UIMCRW will attempt a further two times to write to the card and to verify the result.

Reading and Writing to Smart Cards

When a Smart Card IC Contact Block is fitted, the card is moved to the “Set” position (PDI in the above illustration), the contact block lowered and Power (VCC), Clock (CLK) and Reset (RST) applied. The ATR chip data from a successful read is sent to the host. Any excess current on VCC while the Smart card is activated will result in an error signal being generated.

UIMCRWs with the Smart facility permit reading and writing to Smart cards with contacts in the ISO position and are provided with the electrical interface to one SAM card mounted on the IC and SAM1 Contact Block.

Smart Card Standards

The UIMCRW with Smart Card facility complies with the following Smart card standards:

l  EMV ‐ Europay, Mastercard and Visa

l  GIECB ‐ Carte Bancaire

l  ZKA ‐ German Banking Organisation

l  Latest version of ISO 7816 part 3 and 4

l  Memory Cards (For example: GPM896 & Siemens 4442 as supported by ICM300). Hardware and software facilities are provided on the UIMCRW for the future introduction of Contactless Smart Cards, Proximity Card and multiple SAM slots for CEPS (Common Electronic Purse Scheme).

Sensor Locations

Optional Features

Card Return on Power Failure or System Escape

Card Return on Power Failure (CROPF) and Card Return on System Escape (CROSE) are provided as one optional feature on the UIMCRW. The combined feature is referred to as CROPF/SE.

CROPF Battery

The CROPF option is provided with a re‐chargeable battery located on the module tray below the UIMCRW.

The CROPF circuit is contained on the control board and the battery plugs into connector J11. The battery is attached to the baseplate by two cable ties.

CROPF Operation

In the event of a power failure the battery will provide the power necessary to complete the present magnetic or smart card transaction and then attempt to return the card to the input slot and offer it to the user for recovery. If the user does not take the card within 30 seconds, the card will be captured. If a card jams during a CROPF operation, sufficient battery power is provided for three attempts to clear the jam and present the card to the user, or capture the card, if not taken.

CROSE

In the event of a System Escape command being generated, while a card is in the UIMCRW, the CROSE firmware will determine whether or not the Escape command was generated due to a power up situation. If not, the card is presented to the user. If the user does not take the card within 30 seconds, the card will be captured. In the event of an Escape command being generated following a prolonged shutdown period, any card in the UIMCRW will not be moved to the entry slot. Instead, the card will be captured.

Latchfast Card Capture

A Latch Fast Card Capture (LFCC) bin with electronic tamper indication is provided as an option with the UIMCRW. The tamper indication system is automatically set up when hardware interrogation reports the presence of the LFCC harness to the device firmware. A microswitch on the bin cradle detects the presence of the bin. In the event of Card Capture command being generated when a card is in the UIMCRW, the LFCC system will check that the LFCC bin is present before depositing the card in the bin.

A photodetector on the bin cradle looks through holes in the sides of the bin at an LED attached to the other side of the cradle. If the beam between the photodetector and LED is broken by the cards stacking up from the base of the bin this indicates a FULL SOON condition. A count is started in software, and iatm Notesemented for each card captured. Whenever the count reaches 12 cards a FULL signal is sent by the LFCC to the host and the UIMCRW is made inoperable with a severity of FATAL.

The tamper switch on the LFCC bin detects any attempt to remove the bin from the UIMCRW. Once the bin is removed, the cradle can be unclipped from the lugs in the base by squeezing the sides inwards.

CIM/MM Validation

CIM Module

An optional CIM86/MM optical detection and identification feature can be fitted to the UIMCRW enabling reading of the card optical track using an optical head reader and either CIM86 or MM technologies.

The CIM 86 PCB is located in a metal box on the top of the UIMCRW with the optical detector located above the card transport path. The metal box and optical detector are screwed to a bracket that hooks under the rear cross tie of the UIMCRW and is secured by a single screw (shown in the above illustration).

If an MM PCB is fitted (Germany, Austria & Switzerland), it is located in the ATM safe and connected to the UIMCRW via a current loop to RS232 interface board and an RS232 interface. The successful correlation between the optical and Track 3 magnetic track of the card confirms the authenticity of the card, otherwise the card is rejected.

When CIM86/MM is enabled and all magnetic tracks have been read successfully, the card is moved to the front position, with the shutter open. In this position the card doesn’t protrude from the throat. The CIM86/MM optical head is enabled and the card driven back into the card reader and Track 3 read.

Media Entry Indicators

Media Entry Indicator (MEI) printed circuit boards and green indicators located inside the plastic moulding of the throat of the UIMCRW are available. The MEI indicators may be selected by the application to be on continuously or to be flashed at a frequency of 0.25Hz, 0.5Hz, 1Hz, 2Hz, or 4Hz.

Card Clamping

A card clamping device may be fitted for additional security measures from card jamming fraud techniques. The card clamper locks the card in the throat when the reader detects a card jam, thus prevents fraudsters from taking and using the jammed card.

Note:  The card clamping feature cannot be installed together with the CIMM/MM feature.

Anti‐Eavesdropping Kit

An Anti‐Eavesdropping Kit may be fitted for additional security measures to prevent eavesdropping in ATM product configurations consisting of IMCRW or NU‐IMCRW modules.

Note:  The AEK Kit cannot be installed in product configurations with CIM/MM feature.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Error

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

Device disconnected

USB cable disconnected from MCRW

Check USB cable.

Reconnect cable.

USB cable disconnected from hub

Check USB cable.

Reconnect cable.

Power cable disconnected from MCRW

Check power cable.

Reconnect cable.

Power cable disconnected from power supply

Check power cable.

Reconnect cable.

Power supply fault.

Check power supply voltage.

Repair power supply.

USB cable faulty

Replace USB cable and retest.

Replace cable

Power cable faulty

Replace power cable and retest.

Replace cable.

Read head fault

Dirt on magnetic head

 

Clean MCRW head. Retest.

Read head faulty

Fault still present following cleaning cycle.

Replace MCRW transport.

Write head fault

Dirt on magnetic head.

 

Clean MCRW head. Retest.

Write head faulty

Fault still present following cleaning cycle.

Replace MCRW transport.

Shutter jam

Jammed card or foreign object obstructing shutter

Check for jammed card or foreign object.

Clear jam, clean and retest.

 

Check if card clamping module is fitted and if it is activated. Check for clamped card.

Release the clamped card, clean, and retest.

Glue or gum on shutter or shutter sensors

Check shutter and sensors. Shutter may move but switch is not working, or shutter may move slowly.

Use atm Notes approved cleaning solution to remove substance.

Solenoid/gear failure

Run HW_DIAG looped

Shutter/Sensor test.

Observe shutter activation.

If shutter not activated, replace MCRW throat.

Sensor failure

Run HW_DIAG looped

Shutter/Sensor test. Observe shutter switch sensor Byte 2 Bit 0 (Jammed

Open) or Byte 2 Bit 1 (Jammed Closed). Verify sensor changes.

If sensor faulty replace MCRW throat.

PCB faulty

Run HW_DIAG looped

Shutter/Sensor test.

Observe shutter activation.

If shutter not activated, replace MCRW transport.

 

Error

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

Card jam

Jammed card or foreign object obstructing card path

Check for jammed card or foreign object.

Clear jam, clean and retest.

Check if card clamping module is fitted and if it is activated. Check for a clamped card.

Release the clamped card, clean and retest.

Dirt on rollers

Check rollers.

Use air spray to remove dirt.

Moisture on rollers

Check rollers

Dry rollers

Oil/grease/glue/gum on rollers

Check rollers

Use atm Notes approved cleaning solution to remove substance.

Rollers damaged

Check rollers

Replace MCRW transport.

Card detect switch damaged

Check switch for wear.

If switch is worn, replace MCRW throat.

Motor/gear failure

Run HW_DIAG Run to Run Sequence 3. Observe motor/gear operate correctly.

If not, replace MCRW transport.

Belt failure

Run HW_DIAG Run to Run Sequence 3. Observe belt to determine if slipping.

If belt slipping, replace MCRW transport.

Sensor failure

Run HW_DIAG looped

Shutter/Sensor test. Cover and uncover PD1, 1 PD2 and PD3 sensors.

Verify sensor changes. (Byte

3 bit 0 = PD1 blocked, bit 1 =

PDS2 blocked, bit 2 = PD3 blocked)

If sensor faulty, replace MCRW transport.

PCB faulty

Run HW_DIAG Run to Run sequence 3. Observe motor/gear to determine activation.

If not activated, replace

MCRW.

Invalid card

Dirt/grease/oil on card

 

Clean MCRW read head.

Dirt/grease/oil on rollers

Check rollers.

Run cleaning cycle and hold cleaning card at throat for 3 seconds to ensure pinch is cleaned thoroughly.

 

Error still reported after cleaning cycle. Run HW_DIAG Run to Run

Sequence 3 on loop.

If error still reported, replace MCRW transport.

 

Error

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

Customer tampering

Jammed card or foreign object obstructing throat.

Check for jammed card or foreign object.

Clear jam, clean read head and retest.

Check if card clamping module is fitted and if it is activated. Check for a clamped card.

Release the clamped card, clean, and retest.

Card detect switch damaged.

Check switch for wear.

If switch is worn, replace MCRW throat.

 

Error still reported after cleaning

Replace MRCW.

CROPF failure

CROPF failure

 

Replace battery.

Capture bin removed

Capture bin not inserted or not inserted correctly.

Check capture bin.

Insert capture bin.

Harness disconnected.

Check harness.

Connect harness

Harness faulty.

Bin is present and harness is connected but bin removed error is still reported.

Replace harness.

MCRW PCB faulty

Run HW_DIAG looped shutter/sensor test.

Observe shutter activation.

Replace MCRW transport.

Capture bin full/ full soon

Bin full.

Check bin.

Empty bin.

Harness not connected.

Bin full error reported when bin empty. Check harness is connected. Check connectors on bin full sensors.

Connect harnessing.

Harness faulty.

Bin full error reported when bin empty and harness and sensors are connected correctly.

Replace harness.

Bin full receiver or transmitter sensor faulty

Bin full error reported when bin empty, harnessing checked.

Replace bin.

MCRW PCB faulty.

Bin full still reported when empty.

Replace MCRW transport.

SC stopper/Pin contacts

Faulty IC block.

Run HW_DIAGS Run to Run Sequence 1. Observe IC contact block movement.

Replace ICC block.

SCIF error

Faulty IC block.

Run HW_DIAGS Run to Run Sequence 1. Observe IC contact block movement.

Replace ICC block.

Switch pack error

Switches set incorrectly.

Check switches ‐ should all be off. (See Strapping.)

Set all switches to off.

 

Error

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

CIM/M /I/F comms error (M_Status = 90)

CIM PCB defective

Replace CIM/MM interface and retest.

Replace CIM/MM interface board (stage 1 PCB)

Sensor dirty or obstructed.

LED on CIM/MM module is flashing.

Clean sensor on CIM module.

Communications fault.

LED on CIM/MM block is off.

Run HW_DIAGS CIM or MM Turnaround test.

CIM/MM/I/F comms error (M_Status = 91)

CIM harness not connected.

Check harness. Run HW_DIAGS CIM‐86 turnaround test.

Connect harness.

Sensor dirty or obstructed.

LED on CIM/MM module is flashing.

Clean sensor on CIM/MM module.

Communications fault.

CIM LED off.

Run HW_DIAGS CIM or MM Turnaround test.

Harness faulty

Replace harness and run CIM‐86 turnaround test.

Replace harness.

CIM/MM interface faulty

Harness checked or replaced, CIM‐86 turnaround test run and error still reported.

Replace CIM/MM interface board (stage 1 PCB)

CIM/MM interface comms error

Harness checked or replaced, CIM‐86 turnaround test run, CIM/ MM interface replaced and error still reported.

Replace CIM module

MCRW PCB faulty

Harness checked, CIM module replaced, CIM‐86 test run and error still reported.

Replace MCRW transport

CIM/MM comms error M_Status = 88)

CIM/MM defective

Replace CIM module and retest.

Replace CIM module.

Sensor dirty or obstructed.

Check harness. Run HW_DIAGS CIM‐86 turnaround test.

Clean sensor on CIM module.

Communications fault.

LED on CIM module is flashing.

Run HW_DIAGS CIM or MM turnaround test.

Error

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

CIM/MM comms error M_Status = 89)

Harness faulty

Replace harness and run HW_DIAGS CIM‐86 turnaround test.

Replace harness.

Sensor dirty or obstructed.

LED on CIM module is flashing.

Clean sensor on CIM module.

Communications fault.

CIM LED off.

Run CIM or MM turnaround test.

CIM/MM interface faulty

Harness checked or replaced, CIM‐86 turnaround test run and error still reported.

Replace CIM/MM interface (stage 1 PCB).

CIM/MM interface comms error

Harness checked or replaced, CIM‐86 turnaround test run, CIM/ MM interface replaced and error still reported.

Replace CIM module.

MCRW PCB faulty

Harness checked, CIM module replaced, CIM‐86 test run and error still reported.

Replace MCRW transport

Removing Clamped Cards

To remove clamped cards from the reader, perform the following steps:

1.     Locate the green gear on the card clamper and rotate it in the direction of the arrow to loosen the grip of the clamper.

2.     Gently pull the card out from the green bezel of the reader.

DIAGNOSTICS

Level 0 Diagnostics

Level 0 diagnostic tests run on the IMCRW control board at start‐up. The tests run in either of two modes determined by the setting on the diagnostic switchpack on the board. The location of the switchpack is shown in the illustration below:

 

 

The two diagnostic modes are:

l  Power On Self Test (POST) mode ‐ all switches off ‐ five tests execute once without repeat at system start‐up (see table below)

l  Selected Test mode ‐ switchpack set to test number ‐ selected test runs until the unit receives a reset.

Switch Settings

The table shows the list of tests that can be selected and the tests that run at normal start‐up and their sequence.

               Test ID   Switch Setting              Test Description                               Start-Up          Selected

                                SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1                                                                 (and order)

00               0            0             0             0             Normal boot‐up (POST)

01               0            0             0             1             Motor Test            1             X

02               0            0             1             0             Smart Card Signal Test*      4             X

03               0            0             1             1             SAM1 Signal Test*              5             X

04               0            1             0             0             Clear F‐ROM        X

05               0            1             0             1             Shutter Test (including Throat          2             X

Sweep)*

06               0            1             1             0             IC Block Solenoid and Sensor Test    3             X 07              0             1             1             1             PD Sensor Slice Level Adjust Test     X

08               1            0             0             0             Motor Speed Test X

09               1            0             0             1             Adjustment Start Sentinel Position  X

                0A          1        0        1        0        Single Cycle Test Mode                                               X

0B          1             0             1              1             Reserved 0C              1             1             0              0             Reserved

                0D          1        1        0        1        Reserved

                0E           1        1        1        0        Cycle Test Mode                                                          X

(Sankyo)

                0F           1        1        1        1        Reserved

Note:  * These tests only run if the hardware is present.

The following notes describe the UIMCRW’s behaviour during POST and Selected Test Mode:

Note

1                 At power on, both LEDs are on. The green LED remains on during boot up, while the red LED only remains on for 100 ms.

2                 If there is no user code in Flash ROM (F‐ROM) the card reader must wait for a host download. During this time the red light remains off while the green LED flashes (on 500 ms, off 500 ms).

3                 During initial power on any test number set on the switches is ignored except if set for the "Clear F‐ROM" test and, in this case, the test is performed.

4                 During execution of the Clear F‐ROM test the red LED flashes at a rate of 0.5 Hz and the green LED is off. This test can take up to 10 seconds to complete, after which the LEDs report the test result. A pass is shown by a flashing red LED with the green LED on. A fail is shown by the red LED on constantly with the green LED flashing at 0.5 Hz. At this stage the LEDs are unable to flash the test and failure codes described below.

5                 During all other selected tests the red LED flashes at 0.5 Hz and the green LED reports the test result (see “Test Results”).

6                 The UIMCRW performs the Power On Self Tests (POST) as listed in the section "Switch Settings". If the UIMCRW fails during POST, then the red LED is lit constantly and the green LED flashes a sequence to indicate a failure (See "Test Results").

Note

7                 If boot up completes normally (that is, the UIMCRW runs user code), then both LEDs are turned off. During normal operation no LEDs should be on.

8                 If the switches have illegal settings, both the red and green LEDs flash at a constant rate of 3 Hz.

9                 During download to F‐ROM, the red and green LEDs flash together at 0.5 Hz

TEST REPORTING

Two LEDs on the control board, one red and one green, report the progress of level 0 diagnostics as follows:

Condition

Red LED

Green LED

Pass

Flashes

On for 2 seconds, then flashes at 0.25 second intervals to indicate the test id number (1 flash for test 1, 2 flashes for test 2 and so on).

Fail

Constant

On for 2 seconds.

Flashes at 0.25 second intervals to indicate the test id number (1 flash for test 1, 2 flashes for test 2 and so on). Off for 1 second.

Flashes at 0.25 second intervals to indicate the error code (1 flash for code 1, 2 flashes for code 2 and so on).

Off for 1 second.

Sequence is repeated.

TEST DESCRIPTIONS

The following sections describe each test in turn.

Test 01H ‐ Motor

Purpose - To test the IMCRW motor.

Description ‐ The following sequence is repeated until a failure occurs:

1.     Motor forwards 190 mm/s for 1 second approximately.

2.     Motor backwards 190 mm/s for 1 second approximately.

3.     Motor stopped for 2 seconds.

Note:  This test can not be performed with a card in the reader.

Note:  If a card is detected (width switch and shutter both open) when this test is running in normal start‐up then the test will not fail.

Test Results:

Error Code

Red

Green

Meaning

00

flashing

off

Pass

01

constant

1 flash

CPU can not get encoder pulse

02

constant

2 flashes

Card jammed

03

constant

3 flashes

A card is in the reader

Test 02H ‐ Smart Card Signal

Purpose ‐ To test the smart card signal level.

Description ‐ The following sequence is repeated until failure:

l  I/O line, Reset, and VCC, of ICC are toggled.

l  VCC (5 V mode) ON (1 second) l All OFF (1 second)

l  VCC (3 V mode) ON (1 second)

l  All OFF (1 SECOND)

Test Results:

              Error Code  Red           Green        Meaning

00                     flashing           off          Pass

01                     constant          1 flash    Short circuit

Note:  The CPU can detect only the excess current. The I/O, Reset, and VCC signal levels are not checked.

Test 03H ‐ SAM1 Signal

Purpose ‐ To test the SAM1 signal level.

Description ‐ The following sequence is repeated until failure:

l I/O line, Reset, and VCC, of SAM are toggled. l VCC (5 V mode) ON (1 second) l All OFF (1 second). Test Results:

Error Code

Red

Green

Meaning

00

flashing

off

Pass

01

constant

1 flash

Short circuit SAM1

02*

constant

2 flashes

Short circuit SAM2

03*

constant

3 flashes

Short circuit SAM3

04*

constant

4 flashes

Short circuit SAM4

05*

constant

5 flashes

Short circuit SAM5

Note:  The CPU can detect only the excess current. The I/O, Reset, and VCC signal levels are not checked.

Note:  * These codes can occur only if SAM2‐5 PCB is fitted.

Test 04H ‐ Clear F‐ROM

Purpose ‐ To clear all F‐ROM contents except atm Notes file.

Description ‐ The program area (0x8000 ‐ 0x7FFF) of the F‐ROM is cleared. On the next boot the IMCRW enters download mode which returns the Flash ROM to the original shipping condition.

Test Results:

              Error Code    Red           Green        Meaning

00                       flashing         off          Pass

01                       constant        1 flash    Unable to clear

Test 05H ‐ Shutter (Including Throat Sweep) Purpose ‐ To test the IMCRW shutter.

Description ‐ The following sequence is repeated until failure:

1.           Open shutter for 2 seconds 2.     Close shutter for 2 seconds.

If the high security throat is present then a full pre‐sweep cycle is executed. In normal start‐up mode this test will only produce a twitch of the shutter.

Test Results:

Error Code

Red

Green

Meaning

00

flashing

off

Pass

01

constant

1 flash

Shutter open

02

constant

2 flashes

Shutter closed

03*

constant

3 flashes

Sweep error 1

04*

constant

4 flashes

Sweep error 2

05*

constant

5 flashes

Sweep error 3

06*

constant

6 flashes

Sweep error 4

07*

constant

7 flashes

Sweep error 5

Note:  This test can not be performed with a card in the reader.

Note:  This test must not be run with a card in the throat of the IMCRW (width switch and shutter both open).

Note:  * These codes can occur only if the high security throat is fitted.

Test 06H ‐ IC Block Solenoid and Sensor

Purpose ‐ To test the IMCRW IC block solenoid and sensor.

Description ‐ The following sequence is repeated until failure:

1.     IC Block down 2 seconds.

2.     IC Block up 2 seconds.

In normal start‐up mode the time is reduced to 0.5 seconds.

Test Results:

               Error Code Red           Green        Meaning

                00               flashing       off               Pass

                06               constant      6 flashes     Movement error

Test 07H ‐ PD Sensor Threshold Level Adjust

Purpose ‐ To measure the threshold voltage of each PD sensor and store the value in F‐ROM.

Description ‐ The following sequence is executed once:

1.     Turn on all position PD (photo‐diode) sensor LEDs with half power.

2.     Measure the voltage of each PD sensor.

3.     Calculate each PD threshold voltage and write them into F‐ROM.

Test Results:

 

 

Error Code Red

Green

Meaning

00                flashing

off

Pass

01                constant

1 flash

Shutter open

02                constant

2 flashes

Shutter closed

03*              constant

3 flashes

Sweep error 1

04*              constant

4 flashes

Sweep error 2

05*              constant

5 flashes

Sweep error 3

06*              constant

6 flashes

Sweep error 4

Test 08H ‐ Motor Speed Test

Purpose ‐ To measure speed of card movement.

Description ‐ The following sequence is executed once:

1.     Accept card entry.

2.     Speed of card movement measured. Test Results:

               Error Code Red           Green        Meaning

                00               flashing       off               Pass

02                   constant           2 flashes Card jammed

03                   constant           3 flashes Unable to measure (out of range)

Test 09H ‐ Adjustment Start Sentinel Position

Purpose: To measure the start sentinel position and store the value in F‐ROM.

Description: The following sequence is executed once:

1.     Accept card entry.

2.     Measure start sentinel position

3.     Write adjustment data to F‐ROM Test Results:

Error Code Red

Green

Meaning

00               flashing

off

Pass

01               constant

1 flash

Not standard card or read error

02               constant

2 flashes

Card jam

03               constant

3 flashes

Unable to adjust (out of range)

06               constant

6 flashes

Unable to save the data to F‐ROM normally

Test 0AH ‐ Single Cycle Test Mode Purpose ‐ To cycle the IMCRW.

Description ‐ The following sequence is executed once:

1.     Accept card entry (the card must have magnetic stripes).

2.     Perform bit check on magnetic tracks 1, 2 and 3.

3.     Set smart card position.

4.     Turn smart card power on and receive ATR.

5.     Turn smart card power off and release.

6.     Eject card. Test Results:

Error Code

Red

Green

Meaning

00

flashing

off

Pass

01

constant

1 flash

Shutter open

02

constant

2 flashes

Shutter closed

03*

constant

3 flashes

Sweep error 1

04*

constant

4 flashes

Sweep error 2

05*

constant

5 flashes

Sweep error 3

06*

constant

6 flashes

Sweep error 4

07

constant

7 flashes

Card jam

Test 0EH ‐ Repeat Cycle Test Mode Purpose ‐ To cycle the IMCRW.

Description ‐ The same sequence as test 0AH (above) is repeated until failure.

Level 1 Diagnostics

The following table shows level 1 diagnostic tests which are available on all UIMCRWs. Additional tests for specific variants are shown in the subsequent tables.

Note:  Test results (contained in M_STATUS, M_DATA and T_DATA) are given in the atm Notes publication B006‐6273‐A000, Self‐Service Financial Terminals Diagnostic Status Code Notebook.

All UIMCRW Variants

Test

Description

MENU

Displays a menu of the all the other tests to allow the user to select.

ENTER

Accepts card entry. If the Accept fails then the rest of the test is skipped. The test times out if no card is inserted within 10 seconds.  On timeout the reader is disabled and a late event is checked for.

READ ISO TRACK 1

Performs an ISO Track 1 read and displays all the data on the track (or up to any detected error, if one exists). (Track 123 MCRW only).

READ ISO TRACK 2

Performs an ISO Track 2 read and displays all the data on the track (or up to any detected error, if one exists).

READ ISO TRACK 3

Performs an ISO Track 3 read and displays all the data on the track (or up to any detected error, if one exists). (Track 123 MCRW only).

WRITE ISO TRACK 3

Performs a read of ISO Track 3 and if successful the original track image is stored. Performs a write to ISO track 3 of two different patterns of 104 characters. If the first write is unsuccessful then the second write is not attempted. Two patterns are necessary to ensure that the write capability is operational. If the original track image read and both writes were successful then a write with the original card image is performed to restore track 3. If a read or write error occurs during this test then track 3 of the test card may be corrupted.  Rewrite of the original data is not attempted if the test write fails.

(Track 123 MCRW only)

Note:The first pattern is all ASCII zeros and the second pattern is '0123456789=' repeated until the track (104 characters) is filled.

EJECT

Returns the card to the exit position of the card reader and waits 10 seconds for it to be removed.

CAPTURE

Captures the card from the reader.

SPEED TEST

This test is present for compatibility with the MCRW and always returns success. The card must already be in the reader when the test is initiated.

SHUTTER/SENSOR TEST

Opens and closes the shutter to check the shutter switch for correct operation. Also reports the static state of the sensors.

RELAY AND BATTERY TEST

Operates the relays and shows the state of the battery (CROPF variants only).

CLEANING CYCLE

Opens shutter and accepts card inputs. Cycles cleaning card 5 times, then ejects card and closes shutter. The test times out if no card is inserted within 10 seconds.

 

Test

Description

DISPLAY DEVICE SERIAL

NUMBER

Displays the UIMCRW serial number which is obtained from the registry DWORD value %ULYBASEKEY%/DeviceImage/USBIMCRW/MCRW‐01USBMotorised/Serial Number.


 

Run to Run Tests

Every UIMCRW variant offers a set of run to run tests:

Test

Description

RUN TO RUN SEQUENCE 1

The following sequence of tests is executed:

SHUTTER/SENSOR TEST

ENTER

READ ISO TRACK 1  (if configured) READ ISO TRACK 2

READ ISO TRACK 3  (if configured)

CIM VERIFY (if configured)

SMART CARD STAGE (if configured) SMART CARD RESET (if configured)

SMART CARD RELEASE (if configured)

WRITE ISO TRACK 3 (if configured)

EJECT

CAPTURE

Note that the SMART CARD RESET will check T‐DATA not

T‐CODE to ensure the Smart Card is functioning correctly.

RUN TO RUN SEQUENCE 2

The following sequence of tests is executed:

ENTER

CAPTURE

RUN TO RUN SEQUENCE 3

The following sequence of tests is executed:

ENTER

READ ISO TRACK 1  (if configured) READ ISO TRACK 2

READ ISO TRACK 3  (if configured)

CIM VERIFY (if configured)

SMART CARD STAGE (if configured) SMART CARD RESET (if configured)

SMART CARD RELEASE (if configured)

EJECT

Note that the SMART CARD RESET will check T‐DATA not

T‐CODE to ensure the Smart Card is functioning correctly.

RUN TO RUN SEQUENCE 4

This test is only provided if CIM is configured. The following sequence of tests is executed: ENTER SERVICE CIM SERVICE

EJECT

Note:  In a RUN TO RUN test, (with or without Looping), if no card is detected on an ENTER then the RUN TO RUN test is terminated.  If no card is present on a CAPTURE then the CAPTURE test is skipped.

3‐Track Write UIMCRW

The following additional tests are available on 3‐track write UIMCRWs:

Test

Description

WRITE BUFFER TRACK 1

WRITE TRACK BUFFER 2

WRITE TRACK BUFFER 3

The data from the specified track is read and saved.  The first test pattern is written to the appropriate buffer, and then is written to the magnetic card.  If both commands give good responses then the second test pattern is written to the card in the same way.  If good responses are received and the original data was saved successfully then the original card data is written back to the card.

The first pattern is all ASCII zeros and the second pattern is

0123456789=" for tracks 2 and 3 and

0123456789=ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ" for track 1 repeated to maximum length as follows:‐

76  for Track 1

37  for Track 2

104 for Track 3

If at any point a Write Buffer or Write Card command fails then the rest of the test is aborted.

WRITE 3 BUFFER TRACKS

The data from all three tracks is read and saved.  The first test pattern of ASCII zeroes is written to all three buffers. If successful, the buffers are written to the card.  If successful, the second test pattern (see above) is written to all three buffers.  If successful the buffers are written to the card.  If successful, the original track data is written to the buffers and then back to the card.  Only the track data that was successfully saved is restored.

Smart Card UIMCRW

The following additional tests are available on smart card UIMCRWs:

Test

Description

SMART CARD STAGE

Moves the card which is in the UIMCRW transport into the Smart Card Reader Writer (SCRW) and brings the contacts down onto the card.

SMART CARD RESET

Power is applied to the card under the contacts and the 'Answer to Reset' message is read from the card.  The card is then powered off. Note that this test will check T‐DATA not T‐CODE to ensure the Smart Card is functioning correctly.

SMART CARD RELEASE

Raises the contacts and moves the card out of the SCRW back into the UIMCRW transport.

SMART CARD INITIALISE

The device controller switches into SCRW mode.  Any card present is powered off.  The controller switches to MCRW mode.

SCIF SOLENOID

The Smart Card contact solenoid is energised and de‐energised in sequence.

SCIF IDENTIFY

The Smart Card Interface (SCIF) firmware identity number is read and displayed as T‐DATA.

SC CLEANING CYCLE

Opens the shutter to accept a SmartCard cleaning card. The card is inserted then staged and released 5 times then ejected. The test times out if no card is inserted within 10 seconds.

With Tamper Indication

The following additional test is available for all UIMCRW variants with tamper indication:

Test

Description

TAMPER INDICATION

The status of the UIMCRW tamper indicator is displayed.

With CIM

The following additional test is available for CIM UIMCRWs:

Test

Description

CIM TURNAROUND

Performs a functional check on the CIM Interface Module, the CIM86 security module and the connecting harness. Test characters are sent to the CIM‐86 via the interface and are echoed back unmodified. Alternatively the interface only can be tested by connecting the receive and send lines together on the CIM harness connector. Note: The connection or disconnection of the CIM harness must only be done while the ATM is powered off.

With MM

The following additional test is available for MM UIMCRWs:

Test

Description

MM TURNAROUND

Performs a functional check on the MM Interface Module, the MM security module and the connecting harness. Test characters are sent to the MM via the interface and are echoed back unmodified. Alternatively the interface only can be tested by connecting the receive and send lines together on the MM harness connector. Note: The connection or disconnection of the MM harness must only be done while the ATM is powered off.

Level 3 Diagnostics

The Level 3 Diagnostics returned for the UIMCRW are:

S_DATA

The S_DATA returned for the IMCRW are:

               S_DATA     Meaning

00                     GOOD (No error).

01                     ROUTINE (Minor fault).

02                     WARNING (May require attention).

03                     SUSPEND (Possible tampering)

04                     FATAL (Device inoperative)

TALLIES

The tallies recorded for the IMCRW are:

Tally

Description

CARDTRAN

A card enters the transport.

SHTR JAM

When a shutter jam (open or closed) is detected on accept or eject.

SHTR SEN

On accept when card enters reader but shutter is not seen to open.

OVER LEN

A card length error is detected, e.g multiple cards

READ OPS

A read is attempted for the first time.

READ ERR

A track cannot be read correctly after a full set of retries.

BLANKTRK

A blank track is detected.

WRTE OPS

A write is attempted for the first time.

WRTE ERR

When track 3 read after write check fails after a full set of retries.

WRTE RTY

A read after write check fails on the first attempt but is successful on a retry.

COM FAIL

A read or write failed due to comms failure.

COMM RTY

A successful read or write retry resulted from a comms failure.

EJCT OPS

An eject attempted for the first time.

EJCT JAM

An eject attempt fails e.g. due to card jam or shutter jammed closed.

REMOVED

The card is removed after a successful eject (including cleaning cycle eject). If another command is received before the card is taken the tally will not be iatm Notesemented.

CAPT OPS

A capture is attempted for the first time.

CAPTURED

A card is captured.

CAPT N‐D

A capture was attempted but the card was removed during capture.

CAPT JAM

A capture attempt failed e.g. card jam.

CAPT RTY

A capture failed on the first attempt but is successful on a retry.

HEADPASS

A card traverses the transport in one direction.

CARD JAM

A card jam cannot be cleared by retries or error recovery.

JAM RTY

A card jam is cleared by retries or error recovery.

WDTH JAM

Width switch is permanently blocked during accept.

NO RDTK1

Track 1 cannot be read correctly after a full set of retries.

NO RDTK2

Track 2 cannot be read correctly after a full set of retries.

NO RDTK3

Track 3 cannot be read correctly after a full set of retries.

AJAMTHRT

A card jams in the throat during the accept cycle and cannot be cleared by retries or error recovery.

AJAMTRAN

A card jams in the transport during the accept cycle and cannot be cleared by retries or error recovery.

EJAMTHRT

A card jams in the throat during the eject cycle and cannot be cleared by retries or error recovery.

EJAMTRAN

A card jams in the transport during the eject cycle and cannot be cleared by retries or error recovery.

 

Tally

Description

CJAMTHRT

A card jams in the throat during the capture cycle and cannot be cleared by retries or error recovery.

CJAMTRAN

A card jams in the transport during the capture cycle and cannot be cleared by retries or error recovery.

RJAMTRAN

A card jams in the transport during the read cycle and cannot be cleared by retries or error recovery.

WJAMTRAN

A card jams in the transport during the write cycle and cannot be cleared by retries or error recovery.

NOWRTTK1

A read after write check fails after a full set of retries on track 1.

NOWRTTK2

A read after write check fails after a full set of retries on track 2.

NOWRTTK3

A read after write check fails after a full set of retries on track 3.

FRDTTOPS

The fraud throat is actuated, either during execution of a THROAT SWEEP command or during card entry when a Pre‐sweep is enabled.

FRDTTERR

The fraud throat reports an error during operation.

NONSCDET

The card present is detected not to be a smart card, during execution of the command to power on the smart card.

SCDETECT

The card present is detected to be a smart card, during execution of the command to power on the smart card.

NONMCARD

A non‐magnetic card is entered.

CIM VRFY

A CIM Verify is attempted for the first time, (not Iatm Notesemented for retries).

MM ATMPT

The MM sensor is activated to read the optical stripe on an ec card.

STRAPPING

The diagnostic switches on the main control board should all be set to OFF for normal operation of the UIMCRW.

 

 

ADJUSTMENTS

Pre‐head

The Pre‐Head position should set as follows:

1.     Check that the Pre‐Head is set as shown in the illustration below, with distance A equal to distance B.

2.     If necessary, loosen screw (e) shown below. and move the Pre‐Head until A = B.

3.     Tighten screw (e).

Heartbeat

If the card reader is being subjected to repeated resets (i.e. disconnects and reconnects) then the heartbeat functionality should be disabled in Self Service Configuration menu in Sys App, to eliminate it as the possible cause.

Card Detect Microswitch

The microswitch can be tested using ST‐SW Card (Sankyo EGCMC0119).

1.     Insert the ST‐SW Card slowly into the card throat.

2.     Listen for a click sound from the switch when position B on the card contacts the microswitch actuator. This sound indicates that the microswitch has detected the card and switched ON.

3.     Draw out the ST‐SW Card slowly and again listen for the click sound when position A is detected by the microswitch. This sound indicates that the microswitch has detected removal of the card and has switched OFF.

4.     Check that the microswitch operates correctly at each ST‐SW card position.

5.     If necessary, loosen the microswitch adjusting screws and adjust the microswitch until it operates correctly.

6.     If the sound of the microswitch changing from ON to OFF and vice versa cannot be

heard, replace the bezel assembly.

FRU MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

The following modules are field replaceable items:

l  Anti‐Eavesdropping Kit

l  MEIs

l  IC contact block

l  Throat

l  Battery l Base transport l Card Clamping:

l  Card Clamping PCB

l  Card Clamper

Anti‐Eavesdropping Kit

If fitted, AEK parts should be removed as required for FRU replacement as follows

1.     Remove MCRW module from ATM detaching all the necessary cables.

2.     Loosen the M3 Hex Pozdriv screw from the protective bracket as shown.

3.     De‐align the hooks on AEK protective bracket and slide the AEK protective bracket from front to back as shown, and remove it from the MCRW.

4.     Remove the support bracket assembly by removing one M3 THF Comb Pozi screw and one M4 M/C Screw.

5.     Loosen the M3 X 12 screw and self locking nut to remove the PCB (if fitted) and bottom cover assembly.

6.     Loosen the two M3 Hex Pozdriv 6.0 screws and remove the bottom cover.

7.     Loosen the two screws and remove the Anti Drill Plate by carefully manipulating the existing ‘Z’shaped ribbon membrane.

8.     Replace the required AEK parts.

9.     Re‐install the MCRW assembly on the module tray connecting all the required cables to MCRW. Also tie up the cables using cable tie straps at appropriate positions.

MEIs

1.     Disconnect the MEI harness from the main control board (CN4).

2.     Unclip the tang at each side holding the MEI cover to the throat, and lift off the cover.

3.     Lift the upper MEI PCB out from the groove behind the card entry slot.

5.             When replacing the MEI cover, make sure that the extension arm makes a good grounding contact with the metal surface of the UIMCRW above the throat.

IC Contact Block

1.     If CIM/MM is fitted, remove the screw securing the CIM/MM module to the top of the card reader, and lift off the module.

2.     Lift the clear plastic mylar strip and disconnect the ribbon cable from the main control board. Remove the two screws securing the IC contact block, which are accessed through the control board. Remove the IC contact block.

Throat

1.     Undo the pre‐head connector at J22 on the LED board.

2.     Remove the screws securing the throat to the UIMCRW base transport: 2 on the lefthand side and 2 on the right.

3.     Disconnect the MEI harness from the outside of the main control board, and the solenoid connector from the inside surface.

Battery

1.     Remove the screw securing the UIMCRW to the module tray.

2.     Unplug the battery connector J11 on the control board.

3.     Slide the UIMCRW off the module tray.

4.     Snip the cable ties securing the battery to the tray.

5.     Remove and replace the battery and cable ties.

Note:  When fitting new cable ties, the fastening end should be kept under the module tray so that it doesn’t interfere with the seating of the UIMCRW.

Base Transport

To remove and replace the base transport, remove and replace all the other UIMCRW modules as detailed in this section, and fit them onto a replacement base transport.

Card Clamping Module

Card Clamping PCB

To remove the card clamping PCB, perform the following steps:

1.     Turn the reader upside down.

2.     Move the securing clips upward to release the two ribbon cables from the main card reader PCB.

3.     Disconnect the two ribbon cables then feed them through the side frame of the card reader.

4.     Disconnect the two power harnesses from the card clamping PCB.

               6.    Slide the PCB out of the card reader.

To replace the card clamping PCB, perform the following steps:

1.     Turn the card reader upside down.

2.     Partially slide the PCB into the guide rails.

3.     Thread the ribbon cables through the side frame and over the card reader PCB.

4.     Connect the power harnesses to the PCB.

5.     Push the PCB the rest of the way into the card reader until the hole in the rear of the PCB lines up with the card reader frame.

6.     Secure the PCB with one screw.

7.     Connect the ribbon cable to the card reader PCB.

8.     Lock the ribbon cables by pushing down the securing clips.

Card Clamper

CAUTION

The lock blade protrudes from the main body of the card clamper. Take care when handling the device.

To remove the card clamper, perform the following steps:

1.     Ensure that the card clamping PCB is disconnected. If it is still connected, perform the following steps: a Turn the card reader upside down.

2.     Turn the card reader the right way up.

3.     Remove and retain the M4 Pan head screw securing the card clamper to the card reader.

4.     Remove the card clamper from the card reader.

To replace the card clamper, perform the following steps:

1.     Line–up the slot in the front of the clamper with the shaft in the card reader.

2.     Align the notch on the clamper with the side frame of the card reader.

3.     Secure the clamper with one M4 pan head screw.

PCB Slides and Ribbon Cable Edge Protector

These items are not field replaceable units. When a card reader fitted with a card clamping device is damaged, a replacement card reader cannot be ordered with card clamping. All parts of the card clamping module (including screws, guide rails, and the edge protector) have to be moved from the damaged card reader to the new card reader.

To remove the slides and ribbon cable edge protector, perform the following steps:

1.     Using a pair of pliers, release the poppers securing the PCB guide rails to the side frames of the card reader. Remove and retain the guide rails.

2.     Remove and retain the ribbon cable edge protector from the card reader side frame.

To replace the PCB slides and ribbon cable edge protector, perform the following steps.

               1.      Push the poppers in each guide rail into the two holes in the card reader side frames.

CABLING

CIM Harness

The illustration below shows the schematic of the harness for the CIM Stage 1 PCB to the CIM Module.

MM HARNESS

The illustration below shows the schematic of the harness for the CIM/MM Stage 1 PCB to the MM Box.

CARD CAPTURE BIN HARNESS

CONNECTORS

The following diagram shows the connections between the modules of the UIMCRW.

Main Control Board

The position of connectors on the main control board is as shown in the diagram below and their pinouts are given in the following table:

Connector Number

Pin No.

Signal Name

J801 (USB I/F)

(Connects to PC Core)

1

VBUS (Power +5V DC)

2

D‐ (USB Data (‐))

3

D+ (USB Data (+))

 

4

ID (NC)

 

5

SGN (Signal Ground)

J2 (Power)

(Connects to Power Supply via Uniharness)

1

+24V DC

2

PGN (Power Ground)

 

 

J4 (Photo Transistor)

1

SGN (Signal Ground)

 

2

PD3 (Card Sensing)

 

3

PD2 (Card Sensing)

 

4

PDI (Card Sensing)

 

5

PD4 (Card Sensing)

 

6

PD1 (Card Sensing)

 

7

+5V VCC

 

 

 

J5 (Card SENS.LED)

1

+12V VCC

 

2

HFLT (LED Half Light)

 

3

LEDON (LED On/Off)

 

4

PHD‐ (Pre Head‐)

 

5

PHD+ (Pre Head+)

 

6

FG2 (Frame Ground)

 

7

SGN (Signal Ground)

 

8

HDS1 (Head Detect1)

 

9

HDS2 (Head Detect2)

 

10

HDS3 (Head Detect3)

J6 (Read/Write Head) 14‐way connector

 

Connector Number

Pin No.

Signal Name

J7 (Motor)

1

LED+ (Motor Revolution Sensing)

 

2

PTR (Motor Revolution Sensing)

 

3

GND

 

4

Motor+

 

5

Motor‐

J9 (Spare Port) 10‐way connector

J11 (Battery)

(Connects to CROPF Battery)

1

BAT+ (Battery+)

2

BAT‐ (Battery‐)

J31 (MEI Power and Control)

1

+24V VCC

 

2

MEI

CN4 (Upper and Lower MEIs)

1

+12V VCC

 

2

MEI A

 

3

MEI B

 

4

L‐back

 

5

SGN

J101 (Stage 1 CON1)

(Connects to Stage 1 CIM PCB)

1

FG (Frame Ground)

 

2

3 to 6

GND

N/C

 

 

7

+24V VCC

 

8

N/C

 

9

CIMDT (CIM Detect)

 

10

MMDT (MM Detect)

 

11

SMTXD (CIM MM Transmit Data)

 

12

SMRXD (CIM MM Receive Data)

 

13

+24V VCC

 

14

SMRST (CIM MM Reset)

 

15

GND

 

16 to

19

N/C

J102 (Stage 1 CON2)

8‐way

N/C

J110 (Card Bin)

(Connects to latchfast card capture bin harness)

1

CUS (Capture Unit Sensing)

2 & 3

N/C

4

EFS (Early Full Sensing)

 

5 & 6

N/C

 

7

CBES (Capture Box Exist Sensing)

 

8

+5V VCC

Connector Number

Pin No.

Signal Name

 

 

 

J201 (Stage 2 CON)

1 to 6

Contactless IC Card PCB Interface

 

8 to 22

CIM2‐5 PCB Interface

J301 (Shutter SOL Card Throat Switch)

1

+24V VCC

2

Shutter SOL

 

3

GND

 

4

PI1 (Shutter Motion Sensor)

 

5

GND

 

6

SW1 (Card Throat SW)

CN1 (TK2 Read Head) 3‐way connector

J302 (IC Card Block) 19‐way

(Connects to J1 on IC Block

PCB)

connect

or

CIM/MM PCB

The position of connectors on the CIM/MM PCB, located on the underside of the UIMCRW, is as shown in the diagram below and their pinouts are given in the following table:

Note:  Connector CN101 is on the rear of the board.

Connector Number

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN51 (12V Reg.)

1

Reg.IN (24V)

 

2

GND

 

3

Reg.OUT (12V)

CN 52 (5V Reg)

1

Reg.IN (12V)

 

2

GND

 

3

Reg.OUT (5V)

 

 

 

Connector Number

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN11

1

+5V

(Connects to CIM Module)

2

MMDT (MM Detect)

 

3

Reset

 

4

TXD (Transmit Data)

 

5

RXD (Receive Data)

 

6

GND

 

7

CIMDT (CIM Detect)

 

8

GND

 

9

N/C

 

10

N/C

 

11

+5V

 

12

+5V

 

13

GND

 

14

GND

 

15

N/C

 

16

N/C

CN101 (Ribbon cable to J101 on Base PCB)

 

 

CIM/MM With Security PCB

The position of connectors on the CIM/MM with security PCB, located on the underside of the UIMCRW, is as shown in the diagram below and their pinouts are given in the following table:.

 

 

 

CN22

 

CN21

CN11

 

CN51

CN52    CN23

CN32

CN31

Connector Number

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN51 (12V Reg.)

1

Reg.IN (24V)

 

2

GND

 

3

Reg.OUT (12V)

CN 52 (5V Reg)

1

Reg.IN (12V)

 

2

GND

 

3

Reg.OUT (5V)

 

Connector Number

Pin No.

Signal Name

 

 

 

CN11

1

+5V

(Connects to CIM Module)

2

MMDT (MM Detect)

 

3

Reset

 

4

TXD (Transmit Data)

 

5

RXD (Receive Data)

 

6

GND

 

7

CIMDT (CIM Detect)

 

8

GND

 

9

N/C

 

10

N/C

 

11

+5V

 

12

+5V

 

13

GND

 

14

GND

 

15

N/C

 

16

N/C

CN21 (P.EJ Sensor)

1

P.LED1 (Home sensor LED)

 

2

P.SEN1 (Home Sensor Tr.)

 

3

GND

 

4

P.LED2 (End Sensor LED)

 

5

P.SEN2 (End Sensor Tr.)

 

6

GND

CN22 (P.EJ. Motor)

1

PPH1

 

2

PPH2

 

3

PPH3

 

4

PPH4

 

5

+24V

 

6

+5V

 

7

PED (Power Eject Detect)

CN23 (Alge V Detect)

1

AVD (Algerian V Detect)

 

2

GND

CN31 (Throat Sweep Sensor)

1

SW3

 

2

LED3

 

3

LED4

 

4

GND

 

5

LED1

 

6

SW1

 

7

LED2

Connector Number

Pin No.

Signal Name

 

8

SW2

 

9

GND

 

10

SW4

CN32 (Throat Sweep Motor)

1

TPH1

 

2

TPH2

 

3

TPH3

 

4

TPH4

 

5

+12v

IC Block PCB

The position of connectors on the IC contact block PCB is as shown in the diagram below and their pinouts are given in the following table:

Connector Number

Pin No.

Signal Name

J1 (19‐way ribbon cable to Base PCB connector J302)

 

 

J2 (14‐way ribbon cable to contact PCB)

 

 

J3

1

ICSOL+ (IC Contact SOL)

 

2

ICSOL‐ (IC Contact SOL)

Card Clamping PCB

The illustration below shows the connectors of the card clamping PCB.

The table below lists the pin and signal assignments of the connectors.

Connector Number

Pin No.

Signal Name

CN31(Card Clamper)

1

FS1

 

2

N/C

 

3

N/C

 

4

GND

 

5

N/C

 

6

N/C

 

7

N/C

 

8

N/C

 

9

GND

 

10

HEGDCT (Unit connection detect (loop back))

CN32 (Card Clamper Motor)

1

PH1

 

2

PH2

 

3

PH3

 

4

PH4

 

5

COM

CN101 (19–way ribbon cable to Base PCB connector J101)

1

N/C

 

2

GND

 

3

N/C

 

4

N/C

 

5

N/C

 

6

N/C

 

7

+ 23 V

Connector Number

Pin No.

Signal Name

 

8

N/C

 

9

N/C

 

10

N/C

 

11

N/C

 

12

N/C

 

13

+23 V

 

14

N/C

 

15

GND

 

16

N/C

 

17

N/C

 

18

N/C

 

19

N/C

CN102 (8–way ribbon to Base PCB connector J102)

1

FSCK (motor pulse)

 

2

FSAT (motor CW/CCW select)

 

3

FSEN (motor enable)

 

4

FS1 (unit SW signal)

 

5

N/C

 

6

HEGDCT (unit connection detect (loop back))

 

7

N/C

 

8

N/C

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

CIM/MM Turnaround Plug

A turnaround plug (atm Notes Part No. 009‐0018452) is required to run the CIM/MM diagnostic turnaround test.

Note:  Connection or disconnection of the CIM or MM harness must only be done with the ATM powered off.

The plug has the following components and arrangement:

l  Wire‐PVC, UL Style 1061 24 AWG (7 x 30AWG), White, 006‐5830041

l  Connector, 14‐way (2x7) Universal Ejection Style Pinless Headers, 006‐0088037

l  Heat shrink.

Cards

The following cards are used to maintain and adjust the UIMCRW:

l  Cleaning card (Sankyo No. EGCMC01881, atm Notes No. 998‐0052929)

l  ST‐SW Card (throat microswitch SW1 adjustment) (Sankyo EGCMC0119)

l  ISO Contact Position Smart Card Test Card (atm Notes No. 009‐0017008)

 


USB Smart Dip Card Reader

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

The USB Smart Dip Card Reader is capable of reading cards with ISO magnetic tracks in compliance with ISO/IEC 7810, 7811, 7813 standards and from smart cards to the ISO/IEC 7816‐3 I.C. card standard (Icc: 60mA mac). The card reader is also EMV compliant.

DESCRIPTION

The functions performed by the dip card reader are:

l  Detects the insertion of a card (front position microswitch)

l  Detects the card when fully inserted into the card reader (rear position microswitch)

l  Reads data from track 1, 2 and 3 as the card is inserted into the reader or when the card is removed from the reader

l  Reads data from the smart chip on the card when the card is fully inserted and latched

l  Communicates with the PC Core through a USB port.

The card reader is located on the rear of the facia panel of ATMs.

There are no card capture, eject or power failure features fitted to the card reader. The customer removes the card when the transaction is completed and after the card latch has been released.

Magnetic Stripe Reading

The card is manually inserted into the card reader. During the insertion or removal the magnetic stripe is read as it moves over the magnetic heads. If selecting either of the diagnostic test options:

l  Run to Run Sequence 1 ‐ Insert and remove card or

l  Run to Run sequence 2 ‐ Insert card and leave then the card must be inserted fully until it is latched.

The card reader is capable of reading cards inserted at speeds between 10 cm/s and 100 cm/s (3.94 in./s and 39.4 in./s).

Note:  A read failure will occur if the insertion/removal movement is stopped or jerked during the insertion/removal action.

Smart Card Reading

The card is manually inserted into the smart dip card reader until the card is latched.

The data is read once the card is latched and power is applied to the smart card.

Security Feature

Provision is made on the Smart DIP PCB for future incorporation of a Security Access Module (SAM) PCB.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Error message

Possible Root Cause  I

solation Procedure

Resolution Procedure

Communications Failure Inspect_Now

USB cable removed.

Inspect USB

connections at hub, PC core and card reader

Insert USB plug.

Card reader power cable removed

Inspect power connections at PC core and card reader

Switch off the power before inserting power connector.

Card reader firmware hung

Check for card reader response

Reset ATM

Card reader fault

Card reader not appearing

Replace card reader

Magnetic Read Head Fault Clean_Soon

Read head is dirty.

 

Clean the card reader heads.

Magnetic Reader Mechanism Failure Replace_Now

Magnetic reader mechanism fault

 

Replace card reader

Latch Mechanism Failure Replace_Soon

Magnetic reader mechanism fault

 

Replace card reader

Smart Reader Mechanism Failure ‐ Replace_Now

Smart reader mechanism fault

 

Replace card reader

DIAGNOSTICS

Level 0 Diagnostics

The only level 0 diagnostic self test performed at power up is on the solenoid operation of the lock lever.

If the solenoid operation is not correct, i.e. jammed or similar, then a RED LED on the card reader blinks 0.25s on, 0.25s off.

Level 1 Diagnostics

The following tests are provided:

               Test                                             Description

                MENU                                             This displays a menu of all the other Applets to allow an

operator to select one.

                RUN TO RUN SEQUENCE 1            The following sequence of tests is executed:

ENTER CARD AND REMOVE (READ_ON_WITHDRAWAL) READ ISO TRACK 1

READ ISO TRACK 2

READ ISO TRACK 3

Test

Description

RUN TO RUN SEQUENCE 2

The following sequence of tests is executed: ENTER CARD AND LEAVE INSERTED SMART CARD RESET

READ ON WITHDRAWAL

FIRMWARE IDENTIFY

The USBSDR driver revision and firmware identity numbers are read and displayed as t‐data.

CLEANING CYCLE

The following sequence of tests is executed:ENTER CARD

SMART CARD RELEASE

EJECT CARD

Level 3 Diagnostics

S_DATA

The S_DATA returned for the smart dip card reader are:

               S_DATA     Meaning

00                     GOOD (No error).

01                     ROUTINE (Minor fault)

02                     WARNING (May require attention).

03                     SUSPEND (Possible customer tampering) 04           FATAL (Device inoperative, USB comms error).

TALLIES

The tallies recorded for the smart dip card reader are:

Tally

Description

CARDTRAN

A card is fully inserted during accept.

NO DATA

No data was read from the card during accept.

READ OPS

Data verification is attempted.

READ ERR

On read fails due to parity, or LRC.

BLANKTRK

Card data has no start sentinel.

COMM_OPS

An attempt to send a command to, or get a response from the card reader driver, is made across the USB interface.

COMM_RTY

A USB comms retry is successful.

COMM_ERR

A USB comms failure occurs.

NONSCDET

The card present is detected not to be a smart card, during the execution of the command to power on the smart card.

SCDETECT

The card present is detected to be a smart card, during the execution of the command to power on the smart card.

SCRESETS

A smart card reset is carried out, during the execution of the command to power on the smart card

Tally

Description

SCRSTERR

An error is found in the answer to reset, during the execution of the command to power on the smart card.

SCCOMATT

A communication is attempted between the card reader and the smart card.

SCCOMRTY

A communication retry was successfully carried out, during the execution of a smart card related command.

SCRSPTIM

The card reader reports that the smart card has failed to respond within the specified timeout period.

UDIP INI

Attempts to re‐initialise the device following a USB disconnect.

STRAPPING

None

ADJUSTMENTS

There are no field adjustments.

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

None.

CABLING

No internal cabling.

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS

USB mini‐B connector

Pin

Signal Name No.

1

2

3

4

5

Vcc DD+

N/C

Gnd

Power connector

Pin

Signal Name No.

1

2

24V

0V

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

The following test cards are required to perform level 1 diagnostic testing on the smart dip card reader:

l ISO test card ‐ atm Notes part numbers 009‐0009494 (old) and 009‐0017008 (new) l Cleaning Card ‐ atm Notes part number 998‐0052929.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

For the preventive maintenance schedule and details of the required tasks for the USB Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo), refer to the Preventive Maintenance section of this manual.


USB Contactless Card Reader

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

This chapter gives servicing information for the USB Contactless Card Reader (USB CCR).

Card

DESCRIPTION

The USB CCR consists of two hardware components:

l  An antenna unit (antenna, buzzer, 4 LED indicators and RF shield) housed in a plastic case, mounted on the card orientation area of the facia (see illustration above).

Note:  By default the buzzer is disabled in the software.

l  A control unit (power supply, digital and RF circuits) housed in a plastic moulded case mounted inside the ATM.

The contactless interface is based on the industry standard ISO 14443 13.56MHz RFID protocols, and supports a wide variety of contactless payment applications such as:

l  MasterCard® PayPass™

l  Visa Wave

l  ExpressPay from American Express®

l  MIFARE®

l  Discover®

l  JCB.

The USB CCR can be updated and upgraded in the field to add new contactless payment applications.

For magnetic data type applications, customers wave or tap their contactless card, key fob or other Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) enabled device on the front of the 'landing zone' indicated by the symbol shown below:

Both audio and visual acknowledgements can be returned to indicate to the customer that their transaction is being authorized.

Note:  Transactions requiring larger data sizes and/or transactions that require writing to the card may require the card to be left on the 'landing zone' for longer, with audio and visual indication specific to the application.

The USB CCR supports 24V operation and has USB 2.0 full‐speed communication interfaces.

Antenna Unit Connectors

Control Unit Connectors

TROUBLESHOOTING

Error

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

USB CCR disconnected

Cable disconnected from USB CCR

Check cable

Reconnect cable

USB cable disconnected from USB hub

Check cable

Reconnect cable

Power cable

disconnected from USB CCR

Check power cable

Reconnect power cable

Power cable disconnected from power supply

Check power cable

Reconnect power cable

Power supply fault

Check power supply actual voltage

Repair power supply

USB CCR firmwear hung

Check for card reader response

Reset ATM

USB CCR faulty

Check for USB CCR response

Replace USB CCR

USB cable faulty

Replace cable and reset

Replace cable

Power cable faulty

Replace power cable and reset

Replace cable

Not authorized

USB CCR requires to be authorized

None

Authorize USB CCR

DIAGNOSTICS

HW_DIAGNOSTICS Property

The USB CCR provides multiple diagnostic test Applets.

Note:  Looping is allowed on all tests.

Applet ID

Test

Description

0

MENU

This displays a menu of all the other Applets to allow an operator to select one.

1

Identification

The following information is displayed:

1.     Device Type: USB

2.     Serial Number

3.     Firmware Version

Applet ID

Test

Description

2

Detect Card

The following sequence of tests is executed:

1.     Start Transaction

2.     Detect Card & Display either one of the following card types:

l  ISO 14443‐4 Type A

l  ISO 14443‐4 Type B

l  Mifare Type A (Standard)

l  Mifare Type A (Ultralight)

l  ISO 14443 Type A l ISO 14443 Type B

3.     Stop Transaction

If no card is present within 10 seconds then display “Card Not Tapped” and the test will terminate.

HW_SELF_TEST Property

The USB CCR offers the following Applets for this property.

Applet ID

Test

Description

0

MENU

This displays a menu of all the other Applets to allow an operator to select one.

1

Device Self Test

The device self test.

1.     The USBCCR is activated using Start Transaction to detect a card ‐ if this is unsuccessful then the test is terminated and a ‘Fail’ Status returned.

2.     The operator is prompted to present a card and allowed 10 seconds to do so ‐ if no card is detected, the test fails with a ‘Not Completed’ status, the USBCCR is disabled and the test is terminated.

3.     Upon card detection the card is activated.

4.     The Stop Transaction command is

issued ‐ if this is unsuccessful then the test is terminated and a ‘Fail’ Status is returned.

5.     End of test.

HW_MAINTENANCE PROPERTY

The USB CCR supports two Applets for this property.

Applet ID

Test

Description

0

MENU

This displays a menu of the other Applets to allow an operator to select one.

1

Identification

The following information is displayed:

1.     Device Type: USB

2.     Serial Number

3.     Firmware Version

HW_CONFIGURATION PROPERTY

This feature supports device specific configuration and therefore provides a configuration dialogue.

Applet ID

Test

Description

0

MENU

This displays a menu of the other Applets to allow an operator to select one.

1

Report Device Type

This Applet allows the operator to interrogate the device for what type of device is present.

l Device Type: USB

2

Report Serial Number

This Applet allows the operator to interrogate the device for the Device Serial Number.

l Device Serial Number

3

Report Firmware Versions

This Applet allows the operator to interrogate the device for information relating to the device firmware.

l  Firmware Version

l  Loader Version

4

Set Device Configuration

This Applet allows the operator to adjust configuration parameters.

Note:  If the Applet terminates due to a device fault then “Device Failure” will be displayed.

STRAPPING

LEDs and MEEIs

The 4 LEDs on the antenna unit are dual purpose and act either as MEEIs or as transaction progress indicators. An MEEI input on the control unit allows connection to the Universal Misc I/F board to synchronize flashing with other MEEIs on the ATM.

Software on the control unit decides whether the LEDs are controlled by transaction or by external MEEI input. If a transaction is taking place, the external MEEI input is ignored and the LEDs indicate transaction progress as specified by the standards of the card system being used.

Control Board

ADJUSTMENTS

None.

MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

There are no field replaceable parts within the device.

CABLING

Harnesses

USB Contactless Card Reader LED Control

Pin Number

Wire Number

USB Contactless Card Reader RF

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS

+24V Power

Molex 2‐way MiniFit Jnr. Pin2 MFBL.

               Pin No.  Signal   Comment

1                 +24V      Vcc

2                 0V          0V mates 1st

USB

USB 2.0 specification Mini‐B receptacle with through‐hole mounting tabs.

               Pin No.  Signal   Comment

1                 Vbus      5V

2                 D‐          Data 3    D+          Data

4                 ID          N.C. (used for USB OTG)

               Pin No.  Signal   Comment

5                 Ground 0V

AUX

Connector providing additional control signals. Molex 87833‐1420.

Pin No.  Signal

Comment

1             +24V

N.C. (Alternative +24V input)

2             0V

N.C. (Alternative 0V)

3             +24V

N.C. (Alternative +24V input)

4                 0V

5                 N.C.

N.C. (Alternative 0V)

6             /MEEI_in

(See Note2)

7             B DATA+in

N.C. (See Note 1)

8             B DATA‐in

N.C. (See Note 1)

9             0V

N.C. (Alternative 0V)

10           0V

N.C. (Alternative 0V)

11           TX0_232

N.C.

12           RX0_232

N.C.

13           /ISP‐INPUT

N.C.

14           Vbus

N.C. (Alternative Vbus connection)

Note 1:  Alternative USB D+ connection only with population option ‐ not USB compliant.

Note 2:  Input pin for MEEI. This pin is designed to be driven by a Universal Misc I/F MEEI output. It must be pulled to 0V to illuminate the four MEEI LEDs. Otherwise, this pin must be allowed to float. The pin contains an internal 10 k ohms pull‐up to +24V to drive the MEEI detect circuit on the Universal Misc I/F.

R.F. Out

Molex micro fit connector providing R.F. to the antenna unit.

Note:  Maximum cable length is 1.00 m (3.3 ft.).

               Pin No.    Signal

1         R.F. 2   Ground

LED/Buzzer

Connection between control unit and antenna unit. 8‐Way Molex milli‐grid.

Pin No.

Signal

Comment

1

+5V

Supply from control unit

2

LED4

Logic 0 = LED on; Logic 1 = LED off

Pin No.

Signal

Comment

3

Buzzer

Buzzer output from control unit

4

LED3

Logic 0 = LED on; Logic 1 = LED off

5

0V

Supply from control unit

6

LED2

Logic 0 = LED on; Logic 1 = LED off

7

MOD_INDEX

 

8

LED1

Logic 0 = LED on; Logic 1 = LED off

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

None.


                                                                                                                USB Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo)                                                                                                                                                               1

USB Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo)

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

The USB Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo) is a Sankyo ICM330‐3R1395 Card Reader.

The card reader is capable of reading cards to the following standards: Magnetic card

l  ISO/IEC 7810

l  ISO/IEC 7811

l  ISO/IEC 7813

IC card

l  ISO/IEC 7816/1‐3 (Icc: 60mA max)

l  EMV ‘96 Ver 3.1.1

l  EMV2000 Ver 4.0

Memory card

l  GPM896

l  SLE4442

l  SLE4428

l  I2C (24C01~24C256)

The card reader is eatm Notesyption supported (triple DES and single DES).

2        USB Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo)

DESCRIPTION

Operation

Manual insert and pull out operation. Once inserted a card becomes latched and cannot be removed until unlatched by the card reader.

Simultaneous read on ISO Tracks 1, 2 and 3.

Power

Power requirement:

                      Voltage                            DC 12V +/‐ 10%

                     Ripple                              <100 mVp‐p

Power impedance <1 omega Current consumption:

                     Waiting (LED off)             <100 mA

                     Solenoid on                     <400 mA

                     Rush (ICC on)                  <700 mA within 3ms

Interface Connections

LED

There is a single LED located at the front of the card reader.

                                                                                                                USB Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo)                                                                                                                                                               3

ERROR MESSAGES

None.

DIAGNOSTICS

For diagnostics, refer to the Diagnostics Overview section of this manual.

STRAPPING

None.

ADJUSTMENTS

None.

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

None.

CABLING

None.

4        USB Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo)

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS

USB connector (J10)

                    Pin No.               Signal Name

1                                    Vbus

2                                    D3   D+

                     4                           GND (signal)

DC power supply connector (J6)

                    Pin No.        Signal Name       I/O         Function

1                          +12V       I              +12V dc (main power supply)

2                          PGN         O            Power ground (0V)

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

None.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

For the preventive maintenance schedule and details of the required tasks for the USB Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo), refer to Card Readers in the Preventive Maintenance section of this manual.


Card Recycler Module

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

This chapter describes the Card Recycler Module (CRM).

DESCRIPTION

The CRM is attached to the rear of the standard motorised card reader and has the ability to capture customer cards, via the motorised card reader, in an open tray which has a ten card capacity. The CRM also has the ability to store cards presented by the customer in one of five bi‐directional slots. The bi‐directional slots enable cards to be returned to customer via the motorised card reader.

SPECIFICATIONS

Capacity

 

Slot Area

Supports 5 card slots, card‐capture and return

Capture Tray

CF66‐CR1A06A 10 cards

Electrical

 

Supply Voltage

24V DC ±20%

Power Consumption

Idle Mode 2.0W, Load 7.0W

Environment

 

Acoustics

<60db

Operating temperature

‐10°C to 50°C, (‐14°F to 122°F)

Storage temperature

‐20°C to 70°C, (‐4°F to 158°F)

Operating Humidity

90% RH or less, non‐condensing

Storage Humidity

10% to 90% RH

Other

 

USB

USB 2.0 Hi‐Speed

Dimensions

125(L) x 102 (W) x 97(H)mm, 4.9(L) x 4.0(W) x 3.8(H)in

LED STATUS INDICATORS

TROUBLESHOOTING AND DIAGNOSTICS

None.

MAINTENANCE AND CONFIGURATION

None.

STRAPPING AND ADJUSTMENTS

None.

CAPTURED CARD REMOVAL

1.     Locate the ATM Power Switch and turn to the OFF position ‘0’.

2.     Disconnect the DC and USB cables from the rear of the module.

3.     Remove and retain the four screws securing the CRM to the mounting plate.

4.     Remove the CRM from the ATM and place on a clean flat surface.

5.     Inspect the card carriage for any captured cards in the slots or the capture tray. Cards found in the capture tray area can be removed through the access aperture in the top of the module.

CAUTION

Risk of damage to the card slots if the next two steps are not performed.

6.     To permit the manual raising and lowering of the card slots, the card D‐Wheel needs to be checked that it is in the clear position. Look through the inspection hole in the frame to observe the grub screw. If the screw is in the position shown (facing outwards) then the D‐Wheel is in the correct position.

7.     If necessary, adjust the position of the grub screw using a 7mm nut runner to turn the shaft clockwise.

Note:  It is possible that a captured card is partially ejected at this point. It is therefore essential that the card is extracted out the front of the module before moving the carriage up or down.

8.     The default position of the module card tray might not have any cards captured. You may have to adjust the card slot vertical position to align the captured card with the exit aperture in the front of the module. To do so, turn the shaft shown using a 7mm nut runner; Clockwise to raise the slot and counter‐clockwise to lower the slot.

9.     Push the card forward by hand from the rear of the module.

10.  Pull the card to remove from the exit slot at the front of the module.

11.  Repeat steps 8‐10 for each captured card.

12.  Reset the card slot to the lowest position. (Reference step 8 to adjust).

13.  Refit the CRM to the ATM and reconnect the USB and DC cables.

CABLING

CRM Power Harness

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS

None.

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

None.


Section Divider

Section 8 - Keyboards and Eatm Notesyptors

February 2014

Section Divider

February 2014


Universal Eatm Notesypting PIN Pad (II)

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

This chapter describes the USB Eatm Notesypting PIN Pad II (U‐EPP II) used in the 66xx range of terminals.

The U‐EPP II gives protection to the cardholder’s Personal Identification Number (PIN) and of the keys used to verify and eatm Notesypt these PINs.

DESCRIPTION

The U‐EPP II device operates as a USB 2.0 compliant full speed device attached to an atm Notes PC Core and consists of the following hardware elements.

l  16 key keyboard

l  Integrated USB mainboard encompassing Secure Cryptographic functions.

Note:  The U‐EPP II hardware does not support FDKs, or a PS/2 or USB QWERTY keyboard.

Keyboard

The keyboard layout is configured during manufacturing and the U‐EPP II mainboard is required to store the factory configuration information.

The keyboard will typically have digits 0 to 9 and function keys for clear, cancel, enter and delete. When hexadecimal data entry is required the PIN pad will operate as a regular hexadecimal key pad, providing one of 0 to 9 and A to F on any one key.

USB Mainboard

The U‐EPP II solution is implemented on a secure System on Chip (SoC). The board cannot be removed from the keyboard.

Any attempt to disassemble the U‐EPP II will result in loss of all data within the security module.

Removal Switches

The U‐EPP II incorporates removal switches, which detect the removal of the U‐EPP II from the parent ATM. The U‐EPP II device monitors this switch, thus any security actions can be directly invoked by the U‐EPP II. The ATM is notified via a device status change.

USB Interface

The USB interface is integrated into the mainboard. It supports USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 and acts as a USB Full Speed device. The device uses a USB Mini B connector and is capable of driving USB cables up to a maximum of 5m.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Error

Possible Root Causes

Isolation

Resolution

Keys at end of life

Number of key presses detected reaching end of rated life

n/a

Replace U‐EPP II module

Comms failure

USB cable

disconnected from UEPP II

Check USB cable

Re‐connect USB cable

USB cable

disconnected from USB hub

Check USB cable

Re‐connect USB cable

USB cable faulty

Replace USB cable and re‐test

Connect USB cable

Firmware validation failed

Missing, incorrect or corrupt firmware files on hard disk

Contact software supplier

Re‐load firmware files

Firmware update failed

Error updating firmware due to hardware failure

n/a

Replace U‐EPP II module

Tampered

U‐EPP II device has detected a tamper condition and deleted all keys

n/a

Replace U‐EPP II module

Requires initialisation

Device cleared due to firmware update

n/a

Customer key loading procedure

DIAGNOSTICS

If an alpha keyboard service only is present on the system then the following level 1 diagnostic tests are available:

l  Key Detect Test

l  Communications Echo Test l PC Keyboard Test.

Looping is not allowed on the following tests:

l  Key Detect Test l Delete All User Keys l PC Keyboard Test.

All tests are available from the rear panel, even those which require front interaction. Tests will time out in absence of front keyboard interaction.

Level 0 Diagnostics

There are no level 0 diagnostics for the U‐EPP II.

Level 1 Diagnostics

The following level 1 diagnostic tests are available for the U‐EPP II.

Key Detect Test

A message is displayed asking the user to press each of the 16 numeric keys in turn, the four left FDKs from top to bottom then the four right FDKs from top to bottom.

After each key press is detected the matrix code will be displayed (in hexadecimal). This test will terminate if no key press is detected within 7 seconds of the previous key press.

This test runs until all keys have been pressed or the test times out. The test will not complete if no key presses have been detected. If the position codes have the correct values then this test passes, otherwise it results in a fail.

This test can only be conducted if the variant of the installed alpha keyboard service indicates that FDKs are present.

Communications Echo Test

This tests the physical and link level layers. Bytes of data are first sent to the U‐EPP II. The test then verifies whether the U‐EPP II responds with the same data bytes. If there is no response from the device or the bytes are not correctly verified this test will return a fail.

Identify Command Test

Returns the identity of the U‐EPP II module and displays:

l  Name and model

l  Part number and key tip configuration

l  U‐EPP II serial number

l  Manufacturer serial number

l  U‐EPP II firmware identifier and version l Hardware version l Security number.

This test will fail when there is no valid serial number or there is no response from the device. Otherwise the test always results in a pass.

Report Status Test

This test displays the current status of the U‐EPP II including:

l  whether the U‐EPP II is Good, has been Tampered or has been removed from the fascia and requires re‐activation

l  reporting the current security mode only ‘Secure’ option displayed.

If the status of the U‐EPP II is good then this test returns a pass, any other status returns a fail.

PC Keyboard Test

Tests whether a PC keyboard key press can be detected.

The test will prompt for a key on the PC keyboard to be pressed. When a key press is detected the Unicode code point will be displayed in hexadecimal, along with the character (depending on the font used for the display). The test will terminate if no key press is detected within 7 seconds of the previous key press.

This test will return a pass if at least one key press has been detected. If no key presses have been detected then the test returns a fail.

Level 3 Diagnostics

S_DATA

S_DATA

Meaning

00

Good (no error)

01

Routine (minor fault)

04

Fatal (requires immediate attention)

Tallies

              Tally Description                  Tally ID                Tally Mnemonic

                PIN pad top key presses        0                             KEYPRESS

Comms operations 1 COMM OPS Comms retries 2 COMM RTY Comms failures 3 REATTACH

                Keys stuck                              4                             KEYSTUCK

Self Tests

The following tests are performed for the self test (see Level 1 Diagnostics for details of the individual tests):

l  Communications echo test l Report status test.

l  Key detect test

CONFIGURATION

The U‐EPP II supports configuration via the system application. Configuration Settings are remotely viewable by default. However, they cannot be modified.

Configuration Options

The following options are available for configuration of the U‐EPP II:

Transfer Firmware Files

A memory stick/pen, flex disk or CD rom containing U‐EPP II firmware files will be required for this operation. After the memory stick/pen, flex disk or Cd rom is inserted it is checked for U‐EPP II firmware. Files found are then verified before being copied. Once files are successfully copied, country version configuration may be required.

A shutdown and re‐boot is required for the changes to take affect.

Display Version Number

Displays the following information:

l  U‐EPP II serial number

l  MSN and the U‐EPP II firmware version (repeated if multiple modules are present) l Security Configuration data l Top‐level part number.

Select Country Version

Allows configuration of the country specific firmware versions. The system will prompt for transfer of any required firmware files.

A shutdown and re‐boot is required for the changes to take affect.

Delete All User Keys

This option will delete all user keys. This option should typically be used if the U‐EPP II is being removed from service. This option is only displayed if the Delete All User Keys preconfiguration parameter is enabled.

A confirmation message box will be displayed indicating that all the keys will be deleted irreversibly if the OK button is pressed. If the OK button is not pressed within 10 seconds the operation will be cancelled.

Note:  If this option is completed the U‐EPP II will not function again until customer eatm Notesyption keys are reloaded.

STRAPPING

None.

ADJUSTMENTS

None.

MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

The U‐EPP II module is not a re‐workable item and has no serviceable parts therefore any failure will require a complete replacement module.

Assembly Replacement

When unpacking a spare U‐EPP II assembly check for any signs of tampering. If tampering is suspected then do not install the assembly. If the assembly is tamper free:

1.     Check and record the serial number of the new assembly in the atm Notes work order system.

2.     Locate the new serial number label.

3.     Install the assembly exactly according to the kit instruction.

Note: Ensure that all grounding and safety precautions are followed as per installation instructions. 

4.     Failure to follow the installation instructions may result in incorrect functioning of the U‐EPP II

5.     Fit the new serial number label to the ATM next to the tracer plate.

Defective Assembly Disposal

Damaged or defective assemblies must be returned to the customer for them to dispose of as per their disposal procedures.

CABLING

No internal cabling.

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS

None

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

None.

 


China Eatm Notesypting Pin Pad (USBCPIN)

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

This chapter describes the USB China Eatm Notesypting PIN Pad (USBCPIN) used in the terminals. The China‐EPP hereinafter will be referred as USBCPIN.

The USBCPIN gives protection to the cardholder’s Personal Identification Number (PIN) and of the keys used to verify and eatm Notesypt these PINs.

Note: When a new USBCPIN is installed then CE must authorize the USBCPIN for installation. See Authorise EPP for Installation. Authorize EPP for installation

If the CE wants to remove the USBCPIN then the CE must authorize the USBCPIN for removal. See Authorise for EPP Removal.

Authorize EPP for Removal

DESCRIPTION

The USBCPIN device operates as a USB 2.0 compliant full speed device attached to an atm Notes PC Core and consists of the following hardware elements.

l  16 key keyboard

l  Integrated USB mainboard encompassing Secure Cryptographic functions. There are four possible configurations for the USBCPIN.

l  W/O heater, Hong Kong Layout

l  With heater, Hong Kong Layout

l  W/O heater, Taiwan Layout

l  With heater, Taiwan Layout

Note:  The USBCPIN hardware does not support FDKs, or a PS/2 or USB QWERTY keyboard.

Keyboard

The keyboard layout is configured during manufacturing and the USBCPIN mainboard is required to store the factory configuration information.

The keyboard will typically have digits 0 to 9 and function keys for clear, cancel, enter and delete. When hexadecimal data entry is required the PIN pad will operate as a regular hexadecimal key pad, providing one of 0 to 9 and A to F on any one key. Keys are made of stainless steel with etch engraving and colored graphics, front plate is Zinc alloy die casting frame. All texts on the keypad is black, function keys with colored graphics The two different keyboard layouts available are shown below.

                                                           HONGKONG LAYOUT                                                                  TAIWAN LAYOUT

USB Mainboard

The USBCPIN solution is implemented on a secure System on Chip (SoC). The board cannot be removed from the keyboard.Any attempt to disassemble the USBCPIN will result in loss of all data within the security module.

Removal Switches

The USBCPIN incorporates removal switches, which detect the removal of the USBCPIN from the parent ATM. The USBCPIN device monitors this switch, thus any security actions can be directly invoked by the USBCPIN. The ATM is notified via a device status change.

USB Interface

The USB interface is integrated into the mainboard. It supports USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 and acts as a USB Full Speed device. The device uses a USB Mini B connector and is capable of driving USB cables up to a maximum of 5m.

Power Requirements

l  Power supply: DC +5V +/‐ 10%, max 200mA

l  DC +24V 1A for Heating; Environment temperature <0 deg C, start the highest temperature not to exceed 50 deg C in the EPP surface (Optional).

Mechanical Characteristics

l  Key lifespan: > 2,000,000 times

l  Key bodies are zinc alloy and Keycaps are stainless steel, 12 keys 22 x 17mm with R8.5 corners and 4 keys 31 x 17mm with R8.5 corners, with a raised dot on the "5" key, embossing X/0/I and raised braille on function keys for aiding visually handicapped users

l  Key activation force: 2‐ 3N

l  Key trip: >/=0.45mm

l  Shell and key body material: zinc alloy

l  Static load capacity <1000N

l  Keycaps material: stainless steel

l  Water‐proof device: a watertight gasket, silica material

ERROR MESSAGES

Error

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

Keys at end of life

Number of key presses detected reaching end of rated life

n/a

Replace USBCPIN module

Comms failure

USB cable disconnected from USBPIN

Check USB cable

Re‐connect USB cable

USB cable disconnected from USB hub

Check USB cable

Re‐connect USB cable

USB cable faulty

Replace USB cable and retest

Connect USB cable

Tampered

USBCPIN device has detected a tamper condition and deleted all keys

n/a

Replace USBCPIN module

Keys at end of life

Number of key presses detected reaching end of rated life

n/a

Replace FDK Fascia

DIAGNOSTICS

If an alpha keyboard service only is present on the system then the following device diagnostic tests are available:

l  USBCPIN

l  Key Detect Test

l  Communications Echo Test

l  PC Keyboard Test

Looping is not allowed on the following tests:

l  Key Detect Test

l  Delete All User Keys

l  PC Keyboard Test

All tests are available from the rear panel, even those which require front interaction. Tests will time out in absence of front keyboard interaction.

Level 0 Diagnostics

There are no level 0 diagnostics for the USBCPIN.

Device Diagnostics

The following level 1 diagnostic tests are available for the USBCPIN.

USBCPIN

This displays a menu of the all the other tests to allow an operator to select one.

Key Detect Test

A message is displayed asking the user to press each of the 16 numeric keys in turn, the four left FDKs from top to bottom then the four right FDKs from top to bottom.

After each key press is detected the matrix code will be displayed (in hexadecimal). This test will terminate if no key press is detected within 7 seconds of the previous key press.

This test runs until all keys have been pressed or the test times out. The test will not complete if no key presses have been detected. If the position codes have the correct values then this test passes, otherwise it results in a fail.

This test can only be conducted if the variant of the installed alpha keyboard service indicates that FDKs are present.

Communications Echo Test

This tests the physical and link level layers. Bytes of data are sent to the USBPIN feature which forwards the message to the coredriver. The coredriver performs an Identify command test in order to verify that the device is able to communicate. In that case, the coredriver simulates the echo test response which is forwarded by the manager. Thus it can be verified that the USBCPIN is available for communication. Additionally this test ensures that response data is twisted and therefore misinterpreted. If there is no response from the device or the bytes do not match what are expected this test will return a fail.

Identify Command Test

This test ascertains the identity of the USBCPIN module and displays:

l  M‐Status l M‐Data

l  EPP Type

l  Loader Version

l  Manufacturer Serial Number

l  USBCPIN serial number

l  Application Version

l  Driver Version

l  Tracer Number

l  Part Number

l  Name\Model Number

l  Hardware Version

l  Firmware Version

This test will fail when there is no valid serial number or there is no response from the device. Otherwise the test always results in a pass.

Delete all User Keys

This test deletes all user keys irreversibly, but does not affect the keyspace structure. When this test is invoked a menu will be displayed offering Yes or No options. The No option will return the user to the diagnostic menu. The Yes option will display a message box indicating that all the keys will be deleted irreversibly if the message box OK button is pressed. If the OK button is not pressed within 10 seconds the operation will be cancelled and the user returned to the Yes/No menu.

This option should typically be used if the USBPIN is being removed from service. If this option is selected, the USBCPIN will not function again until customer eatm Notesyption keys are reloaded.

This test is only displayed if the Delete All User Keys pre‐configuration parameter is enabled and always results in a pass, except where a timeout occurs when it is considered not complete.

Report Status Test

This test displays the current status of the USBCPIN including:

l  whether the USBCPIN is good, has been tampered or has been removed from the fascia and requires re‐activation

l  reporting the current security mode either ‘Secure’ or ‘Maintenance’ option displayed

If the status of the USBCPIN is good then this test returns a pass, any other status returns a fail.

PC Keyboard Test

Tests whether a PC keyboard key press can be detected.

The test will prompt for a key on the PC keyboard to be pressed. When a key press is detected the Unicode code point will be displayed in hexadecimal, along with the character (depending on the font used for the display). The test will terminate if no key press is detected within 7 seconds of the previous key press.

This test will return a pass if at least one key press has been detected. If no key presses have been detected then the test returns a fail.

PCI Audit Information Test

This test displays the PCI Audit Information as follow:

l  Name\Model Number

l  Hardware Version

l  Firmware Version

l  Loader Version

l  Serial Number

Authorize EPP for Removal

This test prepares the EPP Device for a secure physical disassembly from an ATM. Key commands are locked until the device is authorized for installation again. Following authorisation removal of the USBCPIN will not result in tamper detection. On the other hand, it is allowed to securely remove the device from the ATM without fearing to activate tampering detection.

Authorize EPP for installation

In order to transport an USBCPIN device, key commands have to be locked (see authorized for removal). After assembling the device on an ATM, key commands can be reactivated by executing this test.

Device Self Test

The following device self tests are available for the USBCPIN.

USBCPIN

This displays a menu of the all the other tests to allow an operator to select one.

USBCPIN Self Test

The following tests (from the diagnostics tests) are performed for the self test:

1.      A communications echo test command is sent to the Eatm NotesYPTOR service. If this is unsuccessful then the test is terminated and the test fails.

2.      The report status test is used to identify whether there is a reason for the device to not be fully operational. If this test fails then the test is terminated.

3.      The key detect test is executed to ensure that the keyboard part of the pinpad is operational, as the pinpad is used in the following test. The test is terminated if this test fails.

4.      The eatm Notesyptor test is used to simulate a transaction, testing both the eatm Notesyptor and the overall operation of the device.

Tallies

              Tally Description                  Tally ID                Tally Mnemonic

                PIN pad top key presses        0                             KEYPRESS

Comms operations 1 COMM OPS Comms retries 2 COMM RTY Comms failures 3 REATTACH

                Keys stuck                              4                             KEYSTUCK

CONFIGURATION

The USBCPIN supports configuration via the system application. Configuration Settings are remotely viewable by default. However, they cannot be modified.

Configuration Options

The following options are available for the configuration of USBCPIN.

USBCPIN

This displays a menu of the all the other tests to allow an operator to select one.

Display Version Number

This test ascertains the identity of the USBCPIN module displaying:

l  EPP Type

l  Loader Version

l  Manufacturer Serial Number

l  Serial Number

l  Application Version

l  NAME\Model Number

l  Hardware Version

l  Firmware Version l Part Number

Delete all User Keys

This test deletes all user keys irreversibly, but does not affect the keyspace structure. When this test is invoked a menu will be displayed offering Yes or No options. The No option will return the user to the diagnostic menu. The Yes option will display a message box indicating that all the keys will be deleted irreversibly if the message box OK button is pressed. If the OK button is not pressed within 10 seconds the operation will be cancelled and the user returned to the Yes/No menu.

This option should typically be used if the USBCPIN is being removed from service. If this option is selected, the USBCPIN will not function again until customer eatm Notesyption keys are reloaded. This test is only displayed if the Delete All User Keys pre‐configuration parameter is enabled.

STRAPPING

None.

ADJUSTMENTS

None.

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

The USBCPIN module is not a re‐workable item and has no serviceable parts therefore any failure will require a complete replacement module.

Assembly Replacement

When unpacking a spare USBCPIN assembly check for any signs of tampering. If tampering is suspected then do not install the assembly.

If the assembly is tamper free:

1.      Check and record the serial number of the new assembly in the atm Notes work order system.

2.      Locate the new serial number label.

3.      Install the assembly exactly according to the kit instruction.

CAUTION

Ensure that all grounding and safety precautions are followed as per installation instructions.

Failure to follow the installation instructions may result in incorrect functioning of the USBCPIN module.

               4.    Fit the new serial number label to the ATM next to the tracer plate.

Defective Assembly Disposal

Damaged or defective assemblies must be returned to the customer for them to dispose of as per their disposal procedures.

CABLING

None.

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS

Shown below are the connection points of the USBCPIN module.

USB mini B

               Pin        Signal

1                 ‐5V

2                 D3         D+

4                 GND

5                 SHIELD

Heater

               Pin        Signal

1                 24V

2                 0V

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

None.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

None.


Universal Eatm Notesypting Pin Pad (III)

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

This chapter describes the USB Eatm Notesypting Pin Pad III (U‐EPP III).

The U‐EPP III provides protection to the cardholder’s Personal Identification Number (PIN) and of the keys used to verify and eatm Notesypt these PINs.

Heater Assembly

CAUTION

Make sure that ESD precautions are observed.

DESCRIPTION

The U–EPP III operates as a USB 2.0 compliant full speed device attached to an atm Notes PC Core, uses PCI 3.x firmware features, and consists of the following elements:

l  16 key keyboard

l  Integrated USB mainboard that provides secure cryptographic functions l Heaters (optional)

Keyboard

The keyboard layout is configured during manufacturing and the U–EPP III mainboard is required to store the factory configuration information.

The keyboard has digits 0 to 9 and function keys for clear, cancel, enter, and delete. When hexadecimal entry is required the PIN pad operates as a regular hexadecimal key pad, providing one of 0 to 9 or A to F on any one key.

USB Mainboard

The U–EPP III solution is implemented on a secure System on Chip (SoC). The board cannot be removed from the keyboard.

Any attempt to disassemble the U–EPP results in loss of all data within the security module.

Removal Switches

The removal switches are used to detect removal of the U–EPP III from the parent terminal.

The removal switches are normally closed when the EPP is fitted in the terminal. The removal of the EPP from the terminal changes the state of the removal switches from closed to open and automatically deletes the user eatm Notesyption keys loaded in the EPP.

When the removal switches are in open state, PIN eatm Notesyption operations are rejected and PIN Entry mode is disabled.

Note:  When the EPP has no power and is removed from the terminal, the user eatm Notesyption keys will be deleted on the next power–up.

A “Reset Removal Switches” command through the system application forces the removal switches to change state from open to closed state. A transition of the removal switches from open to closed state automatically activates removal switches monitoring.

USB Interface

The USB interface is integrated into the mainboard. It supports USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 and acts as a USB Full Speed device.

The U–EPP III uses a USB Mini B connector and is capable of driving USB cables up to maximum of 5m.

Power Requirements

 

Voltage

Nominal Current

Max Current

EPP Module

USB 5V

140 mA

500mA

Heater

24V

 

1A

TROUBLESHOOTING

The following error messages are reported by the module. Refer to the sections “Module Replacement” and “Adjustments” for detailed instructions on FRU actions. To de‐code specific M_Status and M_Data use the Status Code Translator Tool available from http://www.infoprod.atm Notes.com or refer to Diagnostic Status Code Notebook (B006‐6273).

Error

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

Keys at end of life

Number of key presses detected reaching end of rated life

n/a

Replace U–EPP III module

Comms failure

USB cable disconnected from U–EPP III

Check USB cable.

Reconnect USB cable

 

USB cable disconnected from hub

Check USB cable.

Reconnect USB cable

 

USB cable faulty

Replace USB cable and re–test

Connect USB cable

Firmware validation failed

Missing, incorrect or corrupt firmware files on hard disk

Contact software supplier

Re–load firmware files

Firmware update failed

Error updating firmware due to hardware failure

n/a

Replace U–EPP III module

Tampered

U–EPP III device has detected a tamper condition and deleted all keys

n/a

Replace U–EPP III module

Requires initialisation

Device cleared due to firmware update

n/a

Customer key loading procedure

DIAGNOSTICS

For general diagnostic information see the Diagnostics Overview chapter in the Diagnostics Overview section. To de‐code M_status and M_data use the Status Code Translator Tool (available from http://www.infoprod.atm Notes.com) or refer to Diagnostic Status Code Notebook (B006‐6273).

Level 0 diagnostics

There are no level 0 diagnostic tests for the U–EPP III.

Device Diagnostics

The U–EPP III provides the following Device Diagnostic Tests:

l  Key Detect Test

l  Communications Echo Test

l  Identify Command Test

l  Report Status

l  Reset Removal Switches

l  PCI Audit Information

l  Delete All User Keys

l  PC Keyboard Test

If only an alpha keyboard service is present in the system, then only the following tests are available:

l  Key detect test

l  Communications echo test

l  PC keyboard test

Looping is not allowed on the following tests:

l  Key detect test

l  Delete all user keys l PC keyboard test

All tests are available from the rear panel, even those which require front interaction.

Tests will time out in absence of front keyboard interaction.

Key Detect Test

Asks the user to press each of the 16 numeric keys in turn, the four left FDKs from top to bottom then the four right FDKs from top to bottom.

After each key press is detected the matrix code displays in hexadecimal format. This test terminates if no key press is detected within 7 seconds from the previous key press.

This test runs until all keys have been pressed or the test times out. The test will not complete if no key presses have been detected. If the position codes have the correct values then this test passes, otherwise the test fails.

This test can only be performed if the variant of the installed alpha keyboard service indicates that FDKs are present.

Communications Echo Test

Tests the physical and link level layers of the EPP. Bytes of data are first sent to the EPP. The test then verifies whether the U–EPP III responds with the same data bytes.

If there is no response from the device or the bytes are not correctly verified, this test returns a fail.

Identify Command Test

Displays the following identification information of the U–EPP III module:

l  Name and model

l  Part number and key tip configuration

l  U–EPP III serial number

l  Manufacturer serial number

l  U–EPP III firmware identifier version

l  Hardware version

l  Security version

This test fails when there is no valid serial number or there is no response from the device. Otherwise, this test always results in a pass.

Report Status

Displays the current status of the U–EPP III. This includes whether the U–EPP III is Good has been Tampered, or has been removed form the facia and requires re–activation

If the U–EPP III is not tampered, this test attempts to report whether there are keys currently loaded into the eatm Notesyptor.

If the status for the U–EPP III is good then this test returns a pass, any other status returns a fail.

Reset Removal Switches

Forces a reset of the Removal Switches in the U–EPP III.

A confirmation window displays indicating that the removal switches have been successfully closed.

Once the switches are closed, the EPP now monitors the state of the removal switches. A transition of the switches from closed to open state deletes the user eatm Notesyption keys and blocks cryptographic commands.

PCI Audit Information

Displays the following PCI Audit information:

l  Name/Model Number

l  Hardware Version

l  Firmware Version

l  Loader Version

l  Serial Number

Delete All User Keys

Deletes all user keys. This option is used if the U–EPP III is being removed from service. This option is only displayed if the Delete All User Keys pre–configuration parameter is enabled.

A confirmation message box displays indicating that all the keys will be deleted irreversibly if the OK button is selected.

If the OK button is not selected within 10 seconds, the operation will be cancelled.

If this operation is completed the U–EPP III will not function again until customer eatm Notesyption keys are reloaded.

This test always returns a pass, except where a timeout occurs when it is considered not complete.

PC Keyboard Test

Tests whether a PC keyboard key press can be detected or not.

This test prompts for a key on the PC keyboard to be pressed. When a key press is detected the Unicode code point is displayed in hexadecimal format, along with the character (depending on the font used for the display.)

The test terminates if no key press is detected within 7 seconds of the previous key press.

This test returns a pass if at least one key press has been detected. If no key presses have been detected then test returns a fail.

Device Self Test

The USB EPP III Self Test performs the following Device Diagnostic tests:

l  Communications echo test

l  Report status test

l  Key detect test

Refer to the “Device Diagnostic” section for details of the tests.

Tallies

The table below lists the tallies that the U–EPP provides.

Tally Description

Tally ID

Tally Mnemonic

PIN pad top key presses

0

KEYPRESS

Comms operations

1

COMM OPS

Comms retries

2

COMM RTY

Comms failures

3

REATTACH

Keys stuck

4

KEYSTUCK

STRAPPING

None.

ADJUSTMENTS

Configuration Options

The U–EPP III supports configuration through the system application. Configuration settings are remotely viewable by default, however they cannot be modified.

The U–EPP provides the following configuration options:

l  Transfer Firmware Files

l  Display Version Number

l  Select Country Version

l  Delete All User Keys

Transfer Firmware Files

A memory stick/pen, flex disk or CD–Rom containing U–EPP III firmware files is required for this operation. After the memory stick/pen, flex disk or CD–Rom is inserted it is checked for U–EPP III firmware. Files found are then verified before being copied.

Once files are successfully copied, country version configuration may be required.

A system shutdown and re–boot is required for the changes to take effect.

Display Version Number

Displays the following information:

l  U–EPP III serial number

l  MSN and the U–EPP III firmware version (repeated if multiple modules are present)

l  Security Configuration data

l  Top–level part number

Select Country Version

Allows configuration of the country specific firmware versions. The system will prompt for transfer of any required firmware files.

A system shutdown and re–boot is required for the changes to take effect.

Delete All User Keys

Deletes all user keys. This option is used if the U–EPP III is being removed from service. This option is only displayed if the Delete All User Keys pre–configuration parameter is enabled.

A confirmation message box displays indicating that all the keys will be deleted irreversibly if the OK button is selected.

If the OK button is not selected within 10 seconds, the operation will be cancelled.

If this operation is completed the U–EPP III will not function again until customer eatm Notesyption keys are reloaded.

This test always returns a pass, except where a time–out occurs when it is considered not complete.

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

The U–EPP III module is not a re–workable item and has no serviceable parts, any failure requires a complete module replacement.

Damaged Assembly Disposal

Disassemble the faulty device removed from the terminal to activate the tamper sensors and ensure permanent erasure of all sensitive information contained within the device.

Damaged or defective assemblies must be returned to the customer for them to dispose of as per their disposal procedures.

Assembly Replacement

When unpacking a spare U–EPP III assembly, check for any signs of tampering. If tampering is suspected then do not install the assembly. Report the event to atm Notes, follow the escalation procedure documented in process SSPD.2.5.1_PRO1_WCS_GLOBAL.

If the assembly is tamper free, perform the following steps:

1.     Check and record the following information:

l  Serial number of the new device

l  Serial number of the faulty device

l  Confirmation and erasure of sensitive data from faulty device

l  Customer Engineer ID

2.     Provide the recorded information to the key custodian.

CAUTION

Make sure that the terminal is powered off during the EPP installation until such time the EPP is fully fitted to the terminal.

Make sure that all grounding and safety precautions are followed as per installation instructions.

Failure to follow the installation instruction may result in incorrect functioning of the U–EPP III.

3.     Install the assembly exactly according to the kit instruction.

4.     Fit the new serial number label to the terminal next to the tracer plate.

Key Loading

Before loading user eatm Notesyption keys, make sure that the key custodian verifies the following:

l  That the Customer Engineer ID is valid by checking against a list previously provided by the customer service organisation.

l  That the service call work order was scheduled and expected.

l  That the EPP serial number of the device matches the serial number provided by atm Notes.

If the key custodian cannot verify the CE ID, work order, or serial number, then the customer keys must not be loaded and escalation procedure shall be implemented as per the customer security policy.

After the user eatm Notesyption keys are loaded, issue a Reset Removal Switches command through System Application to ensure that the removal switches are closed and PCI 3.x compliant firmware features are active.

CABLING

None

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS

The illustration below shows the connector assignments for the U–EPP III.

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

None.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

None.


Section Divider

Section 9 - Display

Section Divider


15 inch USB Projected Capacitive Touch Screen

INTRODUCTION

This chapter describes the 15 inch USB Projected Capacitive (USB PCAP) Touch Screen which uses projected capacitive technology to provide accurate touch detection.

CAUTION

Make sure ESD precautions are observed.

DESCRIPTION

The USB Projected Capacitive Touch Screen module is made up of the following components:

l  Touch Screen Glass Sensor

l  Two–Part controller (Controller Board and A/D Board)

l  Flex circuit–10 circuit cable

The illustration below shows the interconnection diagram of the PCAP touch screen.

Glass Sensor

The glass sensor is a chemically toughened glass with electrodes arranged into rows and columns. Each electrode is routed back to the controller through a trace on the glass.

The sensor uses a dual flex tail cable to connect to the controller board and a single flex tail cable to connect to the A/D board.

The location of the flex tail connectors and the active area of the touch screen varies across products.

Two–Part Controller (Controller Board and A/D Board)

The USB PCAP touchscreen use a two–part controller for signal processing.

l  Controller board

l  A/D board

The controller and A/D board are connected to each other through a detachable Flex Circuit–10 Circuit cable. The controllers use flex tail ZIF connectors to connect the flex tail cables from the touchscreen and the flex circuit–10 circuit cable.

The controller board uses a 5–pin right angled header for USB connection.

Locations of the Controller board and A/D board vary across products the touch screen is fitted in. The illustrations below show the locations of the boards in different configurations.

Dual flex cable

Flex circuit-10 circuit cable

Configuration B

Controller Board

The illustrations below show the front view and rear view of the controller board.

Front View                        Rear View Mounting Hole

A/D Board

The illustration below shows the front view and rear view of the A/D board.

                                                 Front View                                                                            Rear View

Projected Capacitive Technology

The touchscreen controller continually scans and monitors the capacitance of the electrodes in the glass sensor. When a finger touches the surface of the touchscreen, it pulls a small portion of charge changing the capacitance of the electrodes. The controllers then determine the coordinates where the change in capacitance occurred to locate the touched area.

Power Requirements

The sensor and A/D board are powered by the controller board.

The table below lists the power requirements of the PCAP touchscreen.

Input Voltage

+5 Vdc (+‐ 5%) from USB VBUS

Input Current

150 mA max. (130 mA typical)

USB PCAP Touch Screen Feature Driver

Windows XP Operating Systems require the Touchbase UPDD driver (Tbupddwu.exe) to be installed to support the USB PCAP Touch Screen feature. The Touchbase driver is included in the USB Touch Screen install for third party driver support.

Windows 7 Operating Systems use native drivers.

ERROR MESSAGES

The PCAP touch screen does not send out any error messages. If no PCAP touch screen is detected in SysApp, check the cable connections.

DIAGNOSTICS

For general diagnostic information see the Diagnostics Overview chapter in the Diagnostics Overview section.

Level 0 Diagnostics

There are no level 0 diagnostics.

Device Diagnostics

To verify correct screen calibration of the touchscreen, follow the steps below.

1.     Access the System Application Menu.

2.     Select Device Diagnostics.

3.     Select USP PCAP Touch Screen.

4.     Select Display Touch Coordinates to execute the touchscreen device diagnostic test.

5.     Touch the screen anywhere. The test displays the last touched point on the screen as a dot with the X and Y coordinates.

6.     Touch the Cancel area to terminate the test.

Note:  If no touch is detected within 30 seconds, the test automatically terminates.

Device Self Test

To perform the device self test of the touch screen, follow the steps below.

1.     Access the System Application Menu.

2.     Select Device Self Test.

3.     Select USB PCAP Touch Screen to execute the touch screen self test. The application displays the test screen below.

4.     Touch the screen anywhere. A status message that confirms the touch is displayed.

Note:  If a touch is not detected within 5 seconds, the test times out and a message that indicates the error is displayed.

STRAPPING

None

ADJUSTMENTS

Touch Screen Configuration

To calibrate the touch screen, perform the steps below.

1.     Access the System Application Menu.

2.     Select Self Service Configuration.

3.     Select Set Device Configuration.

4.     Select USB PCAP Touch Screen.

5.     Select Touch Screen Calibration to execute the calibration application.

Note:  The calibration test can be cancelled using the cardholder keyboard.

6.     Touch the various defined screen points to complete the calibration. Once the calibration process is complete, the calibration application displays a test screen with four buttons.

7.     Touch the four buttons to test the accuracy of the calibration.

8.     The calibration test returns a Pass/Fail condition of 11 (Calibration Immediate.)

Note:  The calibration test always returns the Pass/Fail condition whether or not the calibration is succesful.

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

The following are the field replaceable units of the USB PCAP Touch Screen:

l  Touch Screen Glass Sensor

l  Controllers

Note:  The touch screen and controllers have different installation configurations across products.

Touch Screen Glass

Configuration A

The recommended way to remove the touch screen for this configuration is to remove it from the terminal together with the display and controllers as a single assembly.

1.     Disconnect the following cables:

l  VGA cable from the display

l  USB touch cable from the USB hub

2.     Remove the screws that secure the touch screen to the terminal as shown below.

3.     From the front of the facia, hold the touch screen on the left and right side and push upwards to slide the touch screen about 20‐40 mm, then lift the touch screen clear from the facia moulding.

4.     Place the assembly face down on a clean, flat, and non–abrasive surface.

5.     Disconnect the following cables of the defective touch screen glass:

l  dual flex cable from the controller board

l  single flex cable from the A/D board

6.     Remove the screws that secure the controllers and display assembly from the defective touch screen glass and fit the assembly to the new touch screen.

7.     Connect the flex cables of the new touch screen to the controllers.

8.     Fit the new touch screen to the terminal. Make sure that there is no gap between the touch screen and lower facia.

9.     Secure the touch screen to the terminal with the screws removed earlier.

10.  Connect the following cables:

l  USB touch cable to the USB hub

l  VGA cable to the display

11.  Calibrate the touch screen using the Touch Screen Configuration test in SysApp to make sure that the touch screen functions properly.

Configuration B

1.     Disconnect the following cables:

l  USB touch cable from the USB hub

l  dual flex cable from the controller board

l  single flex cable from the A/D board


2.     Remove       screws that secure the facia to the facia brackets as shown below.

3.     On one side, lift the facia off from the bracket and insert the screw driver through the access hole to remove the pan head screw.

4.     Refit the facia to the bracket and remove the equivalent screw on the other side.

5.     Secure the facia to the facia brackets with the screws removed earlier.

Note:  The two pan head screws removed through the holes do not need to be refitted later.

6.     Remove the top and bottom screws of the touch screen.

7.     From the front of the facia, hold the touch screen on the left and right side and push upwards to slide the touch screen about 20–40 mm, then lift the touch screen clear from the facia moulding.

8.     Fit the new touch screen to the terminal. Make sure that the flex cables are properly inserted through the slots in the facia frame. Make sure that there is no gap between the touch screen and lower facia.

9.     Secure the touch screen to the terminal with the screws removed earlier.

10.  Connect      following cables:

l  Dual flex cable to the controller board

l  Single flex cable to the A/D board

l  USB touch cable to the USB hub

Note:  The A/D board may need to be removed from the display to have better access to connect the flex cables as shown below.

11.  Calibrate the touch screen using the Touch Screen Configuration test in SysApp to make sure that the touch screen functions properly.

Controllers

Both the controller board and A/D board will be replaced if either one of them is defective.

Configuration A

To replace the controllers, perform the steps below.

1.     Take note of the routing of the flex cables from the touch screen to the controllers and the flex circuit–10 circuit cable that connects the boards to each other.

2.     Disconnect the following cables from the controller board:

l  USB Touch cable

l  Dual flex cable

l  Flex circuit–10 circuit cable

3.     Remove the screw that secures the controller board and its cover as shown below.

4.     Remove the screws that secure the controller board to the cover.

5.     Fit and secure the new controller board to the cover.

6.     Connect      following cables to the controller board:

l  dual flex cable

l  flex circuit–10 ciruit cable

l  USB touch cable

7.     Disconnect the following cables from the A/D board:

l  single flex cable

l  flex circuit–10 circuit cable

8.     Remove the screw that secures the A/D board and cover as shown below.

9.     The A/D board is mounted using a double stick tape on the rear of the board as shown below. Take note of the position and orientation of the board then carefully remove the board from the cover.

10.  Attach the new A/D board to the cover.

11.  Fit and secure the new board and cover to the terminal.

12.  Connect the following cables to the A/D board:

l  single flex cable

l  flex ciruit–10 ciruit cable

13.  Calibrate the touch screen using the Touch Screen Configuration test in SysApp to make sure the touch screen functions properly.

Configuration B

1.     Take note of the routing of the flex cables from the touch screen to the controllers and the flex circuit–10 circuit cable that connects the boards to each other.

2.     Disconnect the following cables from the controller board:

l  USB Touch cable

l  Dual flex cable

l  Flex circuit–10 circuit cable

3.     Remove the screws that secure the controller board and its cover as shown below.

4.     Remove the screws that secure the controller board to the cover.

5.     Fit and secure the new controller board to the cover.

6.     Connect the following cables to the controller board:

l  dual flex cable

l  flex circuit–10 ciruit cable

l  USB touch cable

7.     Disconnect the following cables from the A/D board:

l  single flex cable

l  flex circuit–10 circuit cable

8.     Remove       screw that secures the A/D board and cover as shown below.

9.     Bend the bottom part of the cover to open it and access the A/D board which is mounted using a double stick tape on its bottom side. Take note of the position and orientation of the board then carefully remove the board from the cover.

10.  Attach the new A/D board to the cover.

11.  Connect the following cables to the A/D board while the cover is still open as shown below:

l  single flex cable

l  flex circuit–10 circuit cable

12.  Close the cover, then fit and secure the new board and cover to the terminal.

13.  Calibrate the touch screen using the Touch Screen Configuration test in SysApp to make sure the touch screen functions properly.

CABLING

Flex Circuit ‐ 10 Circuit Cable

The illustration below shows the flat flexible cable used to connect the controller board and A/D board.


CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS

Glass Sensor

The tables below lists the pinout assignments of the glass sensor flexi tail connectors.

Single Flex Connector

Pin

 

Signal

Pin

Signal

1

 

Y1

28

Y28

2

 

Y2

29

Y29

3

 

Y3

30

Y30

4

 

Y4

31

Y31

5

 

Y5

32

Y32

6

 

Y6

33

Y33

7

 

Y7

34

Y34

8

 

Y8

35

Y35

9

 

Y9

36

Y36

10

 

Y10

37

Y37

11

 

Y11

38

Y38

12

 

Y12

39

Y39

13

 

Y13

40

Y40

14

 

Y14

41

Y41

15

 

Y15

42

Y42

16

 

Y16

43

NC

17

 

Y17

44

NC

18

 

Y18

45

NC

19

 

Y19

46

NC

20

 

Y20

47

NC

21

 

Y21

48

NC

22

 

Y22

49

NC

23

 

Y23

50

NC

24

 

Y24

51

NC

25

 

Y25

52

NC

26

 

Y26

53

NC

27

 

Y27

54

NC

Dual Flex Connector

CON1

 

CON2

 

Pin No.

Signal

Pin No.

Signal

1

GND

1

NC

2

NC

2

X28

3

NC

3

X27

4

NC

4

X26

5

NC

5

X25

6

X56

6

X24

7

X55

7

X23

8

X54

8

X22

9

X53

9

X21

10

X52

10

X20

11

X51

11

X19

12

X50

12

X18

13

X49

13

X17

14

X48

14

X16

15

X47

15

X15

16

X46

16

X14

17

X45

17

X13

18

X44

18

X12

19

X43

19

X11

20

X42

20

X10

21

X41

21

X9

22

X40

22

X8

23

X39

23

X7

24

X38

24

X6

25

X37

25

X5

26

X36

26

X4

27

X35

27

X3

28

X34

28

X2

29

X33

29

X1

30

X32

30

NC

31

X31

31

NC

32

X30

32

NC

33

X29

33

NC

34

NC

34

GND

Controllers

Controller Board

The tables below list the pinout assignments of the controller board connectors.

CON 1

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

1

GND

18

X32

2

NC

19

X17

3

X1

20

X18

4

X2

21

X19

5

X3

22

X20

6

X4

23

X21

7

X5

24

X22

8

X6

25

X23

9

X7

26

X24

10

X8

27

X25

11

X9

28

X26

12

X10

29

X27

13

X11

30

X28

14

X12

31

X29

15

X13

32

X30

16

X14

33

X31

17

X15

34

NC

CON 2

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

1

NC

18

X48

2

X32

19

X49

3

X33

20

X50

4

X34

21

X51

5

X35

22

X52

6

X36

23

X53

7

X37

24

X54

8

X38

25

X55

9

X39

26

X56

10

X40

27

X57

11

X41

28

X58

12

X42

29

X59

13

X43

30

X60

14

X44

31

X61

15

X45

32

X62

16

X46

33

X63

17

X47

34

GND

CON 3

Pin

Signal

1

VCD

2

NC

3

OE

4

VDD

5

Token

6

AVSS

7

Clock

8

AVSS

9

NC

10

NC

CON 4

 

Pin

Signal

1

VUSB

2

D‐

3

D+

4

GND

5

Shield


 

A/D Board

The tables below lists the pinout assignment for the A/D board connectors.

Pin

Signal

Pins

Signal

1

VCD

6

AVSS

2

NC

7

Clock

3

OE

8

AVSS

4

VDD

9

NC

5

Token

10

NC

CON 1

Pin

Signal

Pin

 

Signal

1

Y1

28

 

Y28

2

Y2

29

 

Y29

3

Y3

30

 

Y30

4

Y4

31

 

Y31

5

Y5

32

 

Y32

6

Y6

33

 

Y33

7

Y7

34

 

Y34

8

Y8

35

 

Y35

9

Y9

36

 

Y36

10

Y10

37

 

Y37

11

Y11

38

 

Y38

12

Y12

39

 

Y39

13

Y13

40

 

Y40

14

Y14

41

 

Y41

15

Y15

42

 

Y42

16

Y16

43

 

NC

17

Y17

44

 

NC

18

Y18

45

 

NC

19

Y19

46

 

NC

20

Y20

47

 

NC

21

Y21

48

 

NC

22

Y22

49

 

NC

23

Y23

50

 

NC

24

Y24

51

 

NC

25

Y25

52

 

NC

26

Y26

53

 

NC

27

Y27

54

 

NC

CON 2

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

There are no test and adjustment tools required for this device.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

None.

 


Backlight Displays

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

This chapter describes the 7.0 inch and 10.4 inch colour backlight displays.

These TFT‐LCD panels are self‐contained replaceable units.

DESCRIPTION

l  Signal Interface: LVDS

l  Power consumption (Typical): 7 inch ‐ 3.7W, 10 inch ‐ 4.7W

l  Display Colours: 262K/16.2M (6‐bit / 6‐bit + FRC)

l  Input Voltage VDD (Typical): 3.3V

l  Operating Temperature: ‐30 to 85 degrees C

l  Storage Temperature: ‐30 to 85 degrees C

Interface Connections

CAUTION

Disconnect the power supply before inserting or removing the LVDS connector.

CAUTION

When inserting or removing the LVDS Connector, do not rotate or tilt the connector.

7.0 inch Display

10.4 inch Display

ERROR MESSAGES

None.

DIAGNOSTICS

For diagnostics, refer to Diagnostics Overview section of this manual.

STRAPPING

None.

ADJUSTMENTS

None.

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

There are no field replaceable parts in the displays.

CABLING

There is no field replaceable internal cabling.

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENTS/PINOUTS

7.0 Inch Display LVDS Connector

               Pin         Signal

1              VDD 2              VDD

3                UD

4                LR

5                RxIN16   RxIN1+

7                GND

8                RxIN29              RxIN2+

                10           GND

Backlight Connector

               Pin        Signal

1                 GND

2                 ON/OFF (3.3V on, GND off)

3                 Dimming (Analog 0‐5V)

4                 VDD (12V Power Input)

10.4 Inch Display LVDS Connector

Pin

11 12 13

14 15 16

17 18 19

20

Signal

RxIN3RxIN3+

GND

RxCLKINRxCLKIN+

GND

SEL68

NC

RxIN4RxIN4+

               Pin         Signal

Pin

Signal

                1             VDD

11

RxIN2‐

                2             VDD

12

RxIN2+

                3             GND

13

GND

                4             DPS

14

RxCLKIN‐

                5             RxIN0‐

15

RxCLKIN+

                6             RxIN0+

16

GND

                7             GND

17

RxIN3‐

                8             RxIN1‐

18

RXIN3+

                9             RxIN1+

19

RSV

                10           GND

20

SEL68

LED Driver Connector

               Pin        Signal

1                 VCC (12V input)

2                 GND

3                 ON/OFF (5V on, 0V off)

4                 Dimming (PWM)

5                 NA

Light Bar Connector

               Pin        Signal

1                 LED anode (red)

2                 LED cathode (white)

3                 LED cathode (black)

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

None.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

None.

 


15 Inch Dynamo Displays

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

This chapter describes the 15 inch Dynamo Displays (Standard Bright and Sunlight Readable) and Thermal Management Module (TMM).

DESCRIPTION

15 Inch Dynamo Displays

Dynamo 15 inch Standard Bright and Sunlight Readable displays will display at least 262,144 colours (6 bit colour) and will automatically scale VGA, SVGA and XGA formats to fill the entire viewable area of the display.

The key functional elements of displays are listed below.

l  Video Controller Board ‐ The video board includes a digital interface for DVI and an analog interface for VGA. The scaling processor supports VGA, SVGA, XGA, and SXGA resolutions from the PC Core. It also consists of LVDS and Back Light interfaces for the LCD panel.

l  OSD Button Board ‐ This is where the OSD controls can be accessed. The OSD buttons are SWB1(Menu), SWB2(Select), SWB3(Up) and SWB4(Down).

l  FSD Personality Board ‐ The FSD personality board includes thermal management control, 4‐port USB Hub(3 ports for external use and 1port for microcontroller), DCDC power management system and also contains flash based C8051F387 microcontroller.

l  Dynamo Display Chassis ‐ The chassis supports the Back Light LCD Panel, Video Controller Board, OSD Button Board and FSD personality Board. On the Sunlight Readable display it also supports the Internal temperature sensor board.

l  DC/AC Inverter Board ‐ Sunlight Readable display only. This device is a DC‐AC Inverter unit for four CCFL lamps. It has brightness function, a sensing function for running out of lamp (alarm output) and shutdown function.

Thermal Management Module (TMM)

The TMM is used along with Dynamo Displays to allow forced air cooling of the LCD panel when under thermal load. The TMM firmware functionality is intended to maintain display panel temperature within the range of 10°C to 40°C. TMM is physically 'module swap' compatible with the existing products that use Dynamo or GDS displays. Also TMM is specific to Dynamo or GDS dsplays and not compatible with each other.

When the panel is heated by the sun, air is pulled through the filter situated at the rear of the cabinet by the fans mounted internally. The flow of air is directed over the top of the display and then down the face of the LCD panel across the full width of the viewing area, eventually exhausting from the bottom of the Display/TMM module when assembled in a Product with an exterior Touchscreen or FDK bezel assembly. When the panel is cooled by low temperature, the heater ensures the panel is kept within correct operating conditions.

Temperature values acquired from the heater, internal, & external temperature sensors are used to trigger the heater ON/OFF for maintaining bezel within the desired temperature limits. If internal temperature sensor fails, external temperature sensor is used to control the heater and vice versa. If all the temperature sensors fail, the heater should never switch ON. The temperature sensors are listed below.

l  Front Sensor

l  Heater Sensor

l  External Sensor (present only on specific products)

Power Requirements

The Dynamo Display receives power from the external +24V DC supply with parameters +24V +10% tolerance, and 4.0 A current maximum. It then supplies power for the TMM and the external USB devices.

Warm‐up Time

The Dynamo Displays and TMM units shall warm up and achieve full operating specification within twenty (20) minutes of power being applied to the unit under normal operating conditions. This time shall apply even in the event of momentary loss of power.

Configuration

Dynamo Display

The Dynamo 15 inch display interfaces to the PC Core via two cables: a USB cable for USB upstream, and a DVI or VGA cable for video communications. The Displays will support the configuration below:

ERROR MESSAGES

None.

DIAGNOSTICS

None.

STRAPPING

None.

ADJUSTMENTS

Dynamo Display

The unit is equipped with controls to allow adjustment of the picture set‐up. These controls are located on the rear of the unit and will allow the following adjustments:

l  Contrast

l  Phase

l  Vertical Image Position

l  Horizontal Image Position

l  Clock

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

The Dynamo Displays and Thermal Management Module are "module‐swap" units. These modules are not re‐workable and have no serviceable parts, therefore, any failure will require a complete replacement module.

Thermal Management Module (TMM)

To replace TMM assembly from the Display unit which is already removed from the product.

1.     Identify the 6 mounting screws securing the TMM to the Display and remove them as appropriate.

2.     Identify and remove the Internal Sensor cable connector from the Display.

3.     Remove the nut on the Display mounting bracket and then take out the sensor bracket.

4.     Lift the TMM assembly and then detach the Fan and Heater conectors from Display assembly.

5.     Replace the TMM assembly and put back all the connectors and fasteners.

Defective Assembly Disposal

Damaged or defective assemblies must be returned to the customer for disposal according to their disposal procedures.

CABLING

None.

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS

Dynamo Display

l  USB ports ‐ The 15 inch Dynamo Display has four USB 2.0 ports. The mini USB port is reserved for the C8051F387 microcontroller and the other three are for external USB ports each with a capability of supplying up to 500mA.

l  VGA Connector ‐ The Video Graphics Array (VGA) connector is a three‐row 15‐pin DE15 connector.

l  DVI Connector ‐ The Digital Video Interface (DVI) connector for the video board is the DVI‐I (integrated ‐ digital and analog) connector.

l  Sensor Connector ‐ Front/Heater Sensor cable or the External Sensor cable can be attached here.

l  Heater Connector ‐ This connects the heater element from TMM to Display.

l  Fan Connectors ‐ This connects the two fans in TMM to the Display.

Mini B USB Port

Pin

Name

Description

1

VBUS

+5V

2

D‐

Data‐

3

D+

Data+

4

ID

None

5

GND

Signal Ground

Type A USB Single Connector

Pin

Name

Description

1

USBPWR

+5V

2

USBD‐

Data‐

3

USBD+

Data+

4

USBGND

Signal Ground

Type A USB Dual Connector

Pin

Name

Description

1

USB1PWR

+5V

2

USB1‐

Data1‐

3

USB1+

Data1+

4

USB1GND

Signal Ground

5

USB2PWR

+5V

6

USB2‐

Data2‐

7

USB2+

Data2+

8

USB2GND

Signal Ground

VGA Connector

        Pin        Name

1                 Red

2                 Green

3                 Blue

4                 Reserved

5                 GND

6                 Red return

7                 Green return

8                 Blue return

9                 5v Supply

10              GND

11              Reserved

12              DDC DATA

13              HS

14              VS

15              DDC CLK

DVI‐I Connector

Description

Analog signal input

Analog signal input Analog signal input

 NC

Ground Ground Ground

Ground Supply

Ground

NC

VGA DDC DATA

Horizontal Sync

Vertical Sync

VGA DDC CLOCK

Pin

Name

Description

1

CH2‐

½ of Channel 2 differential pair

2

CH2+

½ of Channel 2 differential pair

3

GND

TMDS Data 2/R Shield Ground

4

n/c

Unused 2nd DVI Link

5

n/c

Unused 2nd DVI Link

6

DDC_CLK

DVI DDC Clock

7

DDC_Data

DVI DDC Data

8

VS

Vertical Sync / nc

9

CH1‐

½ of Channel 1 differential pair

10

CH1+

½ of Channel 1 differential pair

11

GND

TMDS Data 1/3 Shield Ground

12

n/c

Unused 2nd DVI Link

13

n/c

Unused 2nd DVI Link

14

+5V

Power for DDC EEPROM

15

GND

Ground

16

LVHPDET

Hot Plug Detect

17

CH0‐

½ of Channel 0 differential pair

 

Pin

Name

Description

 

18

CH0+

½ of Channel 0 differential pair

 

19

GND

TMDS Data 0/5 Shield Ground

 

20

n/c

Unused 2nd DVI Link

 

21

n/c

Unused 2nd DVI Link

 

22

GND

TMDS Clock Shield Ground

 

23

CLOCK+

½ of Clock differential pair

 

24

CLOCK‐

½ of Clock differential pair

 

25

Red

Red / nc

 

26

Green

Green / nc

 

27

Blue

Blue / nc

 

28

HS

Horizontal Sync /nc

 

29

GND

Ground

 

30

GND

Ground

Temperature Sensor 1

Pin

Name

Description

1

+V

+5V

2

GND

Signal Ground

3

SCL1

I2C Clock

4

SDA1

I2C Data

Temperature Sensor 2

        Pin        Name

1      +V

2      GND

3      SCL1 4    SDA1

Fan Control 1

        Pin        Name

1    +24V 2      Fan

Fan Control 2

Description

+5V

Signal Ground

I2C Clock I2C Data

Description

+24V Power

Fan Speed

        Pin        Name

Description

        1             +24V

+24V Power

        2             Fan

Fan Speed

Heater

        Pin        Name

1                 +24V

2                 Out

Power Input

Description

+24V Supply

Heater Out

        Pin        Name

Description

        1             +24V

+24V Supply

        2             GND

Power Ground

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

Vaccum cleaner for filter cleaning (optional).

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

None.


 SelfServ 23 and 27 ATMs Service Manual Section 10: Printers

Section Divider

Section 10 - Printers

February 2014

SelfServ 23 and 27 ATMs Service Manual Section 10: Printers Section Divider

February 2014


USB Receipt Printer

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

This chapter describes the USB receipt printer of which there are the following variants:

l  Single roll

l  One‐sided

l  Two‐sided

l  Dual roll

l  One‐sided

l  Two‐sided

l  Value Added Media (stamp).

Each variant is available with or without a capture bin, except the stamp variant.

The printers are fitted with line thermal print heads which print on either one or both sides of the receipt, and on one side of valuable media such as stamps. The dual feed transport mechanism on the dual roll variants has two infeeds fitted on the print engine to allow printing from two hoppers, either for iatm Noteseased capacity or for a second media such as stamps.

1              Transport       5             Rear paper hopper

2              Print engine   6             Front paper hopper

3              Dual feed mechanism 7             Capture bin

4              Value Added Media dual feed mechanism

DESCRIPTION

The USB receipt printer has the following features:

l  Optional two sided printing

l  Optional capture area (not on stamp variant)

l  Optional dual feed

l  Resolution 203 dpi

l  Supports maximum receipt paper roll diameter of 228.6 mm (9 in.) for dual roll and 254mm (10in.) for single roll

l  Thermal printing

l  Optional value added media printing, such as stamps.

Power Requirements

The printer requires power from the ATM power supply (+24V DC ± 10%) and power consumption is up to 10.0 A.

Paper Specification

The paper used in your printer must conform to the specifications given in atm Notes publication Consumable Items for Self Service (B006‐4992). The publication also provides ordering details of the ATM consumables which should be purchased from atm Notes Systemedia.

Printable area

Black Mark Alignment

The printer will cut within the black mark according to adjustment parameters. Registration will be automatically restored if lost.

Receipt Paper Low

Paper low is sensed when the paper roll outer diameter reaches 39 mm (1.53 in) and after a further 10 receipts are printed, the paper low condition is reported. When a set length of paper (default is 5000 mm) has passed through the printer after paper low is reported, the printer will report paper out if a jam condition occurs after this point or if the printer is dual roll with hopper usage set as single supply.

Sensor Locations

See the table on the following page for a description of sensors.

One‐sided Single Roll

Two‐sided Single Roll

 

One‐sided Dual Roll 

Two‐sided Dual Roll 

Sensor ID

Sensor Name

Location

Function

Paper Low 1

Paper Low 1

Hopper

Detects paper low.

Paper Low 2

Paper Low 2

Hopper

Detects paper low.

DF_1a

Dual Feed

Dual Feed Unit

Detects which feeder is in use, acts as Paper End during reverse feed.

DF_2a

Dual Feed

Dual Feed Unit

Detects which feeder is in use, acts as Paper End during reverse feed.

DF_1b

Dual Feed

Dual Feed Unit

Detects which feeder is in use, acts as Paper Edge during reverse feed.

DF_2b

Dual Feed

Dual Feed Unit

Detects which feeder is in use, acts as Paper Edge during reverse feed.

Cover Open

Cover Open

Engine

Detects cover open. Stops all actions except cutter.

Sensor ID

Sensor Name

Location

Function

PE

Paper End

Engine

Detects paper end, but not used for paper positioning.

BD

Black Dot

Engine

Black dot (mark) registration.

HP

Home Position

Engine

Detects cutter home position.

TJ

Transport Jam

Transport

Detects jam in transport.

Exit

Exit

Transport

Detects paper presented to customer at exit. Activates capture if paper not taken.

CB

Capture Bin

Transport

Detects paper in capture bin.

CBF

Capture Bin Full

Transport

Detects capture bin full and suspends capture function.

Paper Low

Paper Low

Hopper

Detects paper low.

TOF

Top of Form

Engine

Detects top of form.

2ST

2 Sided Paper

Engine

Detects 2ST paper.

Engine Exit

Engine Exit

Engine

Detects paper at exit.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Faults can be diagnosed using the LEDs on the logic board, and by using the ATM error reporting system.

LEDs Location and Meanings

Two LEDs, one red and one green, are located on the logic board on single roll printers and on the dual feed pcb in the hopper on dual roll printers. The LEDs can be used to diagnose the conditions shown in the following table.

Single Roll LEDs

Dual Roll LEDs

Green

Red

Meaning

On

Off

On‐line

Fast blink

Off

IPL mode (firmware ready to download)

Off

Fast blink

Paper empty (standard or dual feeder bins empty)

Slow blink

Off

Paper low (standard or dual feeder bins near empty)

Off

On

Dual Feed jam

Off

On

Capture jam

Off

On

Transport jam

Off

Fast blink

Cutter jam, cover open or firmware error (ROM/RAM/EPROM)

Green

Red

Meaning

Off

Slow blink

Black mark error

Slow blink

Off

Capture bin full

Off

Fast blink

Unable to load paper

Off

Off

Power off

Module Error Messages

The following error messages are reported by the receipt printer. Refer to the “Module Replacement” section for detailed instructions on replacing modules, and “Diagnostics” for details of running diagnostic tests.

Error Messages

Corrective Actions

Comms Error

Check USB cable at the printer and at the hub. Check the power cable at the printer and at the power supply. Reconnect or replace if necessary.

The printer may need to be re‐set. Run self test.

Control Board Hardware Error

Replace print engine.

Under Voltage

ATM power harnessing may be faulty ‐ test power from module to distribution board to ATM power supply. Replace harnessing if necessary.

ATM power supply may be faulty. Check and replace if necessary.

Knife Life Low/Out

Replace print engine.

Knife Jam

Clear jam and reload paper. Run self test. If no jam:

‐ May be faulty sensor or connector. Check knife sensor and connector J9, run knife test. Clean sensor/re‐connect connector. If necessary replace knife or print engine. ‐ May be faulty knife motors ‐ run knife test and observe motor and gears. If necessary replace knife or print engine.

Print Head Life Low/Out

Replace print engine.

Over Temperature

Check operating conditions and if necessary, replace print engine if printer is constantly over temperature.

Black Mark Error

Check that black mark paper is being used, the black marks are complete and the paper is loaded correctly (i.e. black marks facing down).

Check black dot sensor is clean and unobstructed. Run Slew to Black Mark test.

Check the sensor connector (J7) is securely attached.

If necessary, replace print engine.

Print Unit Open

If open, close cover. Run self test.

If closed, printer open sensor or sensor cable may be faulty ‐ run Sensor Test, if this reports printer open, replace printer.

Paper Not Loaded/

Front Hopper Not Loaded/

Rear Hopper Not Loaded

Re‐load paper if paper was incorrectly loaded, or clear jam.

Error Messages

Corrective Actions

Transport Jam on Eject/on Capture

Clear jam from transport, at transport sensor.

If not jammed:

‐ May be a motor/gear or belt failure: run Print Quality test, observe motor/gears and belt (may be slipping). Replace transport if necessary.

‐ May be PCB or sensor fault: run looped Sensor test. Cover and uncover the sensor. Replace print engine if necessary.

Exit Jam on Eject/on Capture

Clear jam from transport, at exit sensor. Also check facia.

If not jammed:

‐ May be a motor/gear or belt failure: run Print Quality test, observe motor/gears and belt (may be slipping). Replace transport if necessary.

‐ May be PCB or sensor fault: run looped Sensor test. Cover and uncover the sensor. Replace print engine if necessary.

Capture Bin Full

Empty capture bin. Check for paper blocking the capture bin full sensor.

If empty, may be a PCB or sensor failure: run looped Sensor test, cover and uncover the sensor. Replace transport if failed sensor or print engine if failed PCB.

Paper Low/Out

Front Hopper Low/Out

Rear Hopper Low/Out

Load paper. If not empty, may be a PCB or sensor failure: run looped Sensor test, cover and uncover the sensor. Replace hopper if failed sensor or print engine if failed PCB.

Transport Not Connected

Unload paper. Check transport harness and reconnect if necessary. Run Transport Forward test.

May be a connector failure: run looped Sensor test. Connect and disconnect connector. If necessary, replace transport. May be faulty PCB. Run looped Sensor test, cover and uncover the sensor. Replace transport if necessary.

Dual Feed Mechanism Jam

Clear jam from dual feed.

Check transport harness. Run Paper Feed Motor Test to check motor and gears turn.

May be a sensor failure: run looped Sensor test. Connect and disconnect connector. If necessary, replace dual feed. May be faulty PCB. Run looped Sensor test, cover and uncover the sensor. If necessary, replace dual feed.

General Checks

l  Check that the power cable is connected securely at both ends.

l  Check that the interface cables between the printer, the USB hub and the PC core are connected securely.

l  Check that the cable between the logic board (J3) to the drive board (J8) is connected securely at both ends for 1ST printers.

l  Check the cable between the logic board (J6) to the drive board (J15) is connected securely at both ends for 2ST printers.

l  Check the joint harness of the cutter motor is connected correctly.

l  Check that the transport feed motor connector is correctly connected to the joint harness underneath the dual roll engine block.

l  Check that the interface cable for the module reporting a problem is connected securely:

Problem

Check cable

Frequent knife jams

Cutter motor cable (J9)

Paper low not detected/ Frequent paper empty messages

Paper low sensor cable (J2)

Frequent black mark errors

Black mark sensor (J7)

Frequent capture jams

CB sensor cable (J7)

Frequent transport jams

Feed motor cable (J6)

Paper not feeding correctly

Feed motor cable (J6)

Poor printing or none at all

Thermal head cable (J3)

Printer open message can’t be cleared

Open sensor cable (J4)

l  Check if the fuse on the logic board has blown

l  Check that the sensors are not obscured by foreign objects/paper dust.

l  Check the 24V power supply to the control board.

l  Check that correct type of thermal paper is being used (one or two sided), and that it is not damp, dirty or dusty.

l  Check for foreign objects in the feed path / stuck to the paper feed rollers or paper guides. Clean the areas carefully.

l  Clean thermal elements in print head with alcohol if there are print quality problems.

l  Clean the transport belts with alcohol if there are frequent jams.

l  Clean the transport sensors using compressed air without removing them from the printer chassis. If for any reason sensors are removed, they must be recalibrated. Refer to the “Recalibration” section for detailed instructions.

l  Check for wear or lack of tension in the transport belts, replace transport assembly if necessary.

l  If an EEPROM error is detected, switch the printer off and on again to confirm the diagnostic result. If there is no change, replace the print engine.

DIAGNOSTICS

For general diagnostic information see the Diagnostics Overview chapter in the Diagnostics Overview section.

Level 0 Diagnostics

Level 0 diagnostic tests run on start‐up and reset.

LED Diagnostic Displays

The following table shows the codes displayed by the LEDs in the event of an error.

Green

Red

Meaning

On

Off

On‐line

Fast Blink

Off

IPL mode (firmware ready to download)

Off

Fast blink

Paper empty: single hopper or both dual feed hoppers

Slow Blink

Slow Blink

Paper empty: one of dual feed hoppers

Slow Blink

Off

Paper low: any hopper

Off

On

Paper jam

Off

Fast Blink

Firmware error (ROM, RAM or EPROM) or cover open or knife jam

Off

Slow blink

Black mark error

Slow blink

Off

Capture bin full

Off

Fast blink

Unable to load paper

Off

Off

Power off

Device Diagnostics

All the Sys App device diagnostic tests that involve printing initialize the receipt printer in the following manner:

l  Top and bottom margins are set to 0 and 40 l Line spacing is set to 2.6 mm (1/9 in.) l Top line position 25.4 mm (1 in.).

All the settings set on entry into diagnostics are restored on exit. Looping is allowed on all tests. Tests that require paper out do not run if paper is left in, however, they still return a good response.

Note that all tests will be printed on the paper loaded into the print engine, so if there is valuable media loaded in the rear hopper, it is advisable to unload it from the print engine prior to running diagnostics tests.

Sensor Test

The Sensor test reports, in M_DATA, status and sensor information. There should be no movement of the printhead during this test.

Print Quality Test

Available on single feed printers only. The test produces a produces a receipt with:

l  the atm Notes logo

l  a full character set printout, single wide

l  a solid black rectangle

l  a “Check Solid Box For White Lines” statement.

If a 2ST printer is loaded with 1ST paper, the following statement will also be printed

l  “Single‐sided Paper on 2ST Printer”.

On 2ST printers the reverse side will have:

l  the 2ST logo

l  a solid black rectangle

l  a “Check Solid Box For White Lines” statement.

Print Quality Test ‐ Front Hopper

Available on dual feed printers only. This test produces a receipt from the front hopper with the same information as for Print Quality Test and also the statement “Printed from Front Hopper”.

Print Quality Test ‐ Rear Hopper

Available on dual feed printers only. This test produces a test print from the rear hopper with the same information as for Print Quality Test and also the statement “Printed from Rear Hopper”.

Print Alignment Test

This test prints a sheet of paper with several vertical lines across the paper width, then cuts. The lines allow confirmation that the paper is not skewed.

Slew Test

The Slew Test prints “START” on the first line, slews nine lines, and then prints “FINISH” and cuts.

Transport Forward Test

The test drives the transport for 5 seconds and then switches it off. Paper must be removed from the printer for this test to run.

Paper Feed Motor(s) Test

The test drives the paper feed motor and the print head motor for 5 seconds. Paper must be removed from the printer for this test to run.

Knife Cut Test

The cut test causes the knife to be actioned. There should be no paper in the printer for this test.

Fascia Alignment Test

The test prints a graphic to allow the Field Engineer to determine whether the fascia/ receipt printer alignment should be adjusted.

Slew To Black Mark Test

This test slews to the next black mark and cuts the paper.

Note:  This test is only offered on printers configured for black mark paper.

Cut And Capture Test

The printer slews to the next black mark and cuts the paper, then captures the receipt.

Note:  This test is only offered on printers configured for black mark paper and with a capture bin.

Important note: all test receipts should be removed from the printer prior to putting the ATM back into service.

Service Tallies

The tallies returned for the receipt printer are:

Tally

Description

RECEIPTS

The number of receipts issued. Iatm Notesemented following a cut function.

CAPTURE

The number of receipts captured.

MARK ERR

The number of times the device controller failed to detect the index mark on preprinted paper while performing a form feed to black mark.

KNIF JAM

The number of knife jams.

EXIT JAM

The number of exit jams (exit jam on capture/exit jam on eject).

TRAN JAM

The number of transport jams (transport jam on capture/transport jam on eject)

CAPT JAM

The number of capture jams (transport jam on capture/exit jam on capture)

HOURS ON

The number of hours the printer has been switched on.

PAP LEN

The number of millimetres of paper that have passed under the printhead.

ERR RECO

The number of error recoveries.

OVER HEAT

The number of times the printer has over‐heated.

FLSH CYC

The number of flash cycles.

HEAD OPN

The number of times the head has been opened.

SUP VOLT

The number of supply voltage anomalies.

USB COM

The number of USB communications faults.

ILLEG SEQ

The number of times an illegal sequence warning has occurred.

KNIFE CUT

The number of knife cuts

DFEED JAM

The number of time a dual feed mechanism jam has occurred

STRAPPING

Fuse

There is a 10A fuse on the logic board (F3 ‐ one sided printer) or (F1 ‐ two sided printer).

ADJUSTMENTS

The Configuration menu in System Application (Sys App) displays the following options for the receipt printer:

Menu

Description

Form Feed

Form Feed (front hopper)

Form Feed (rear hopper)

Sets the printer to feed to either:

Black mark

Fixed length (min. value 1, max value 500).

Variable length, that is the length of printed date plus a margin

(minimum value for bottom margin is 77, maximum value 500).

Printer Contrast

Sets the printer contrast in the range:

0 (lightest) to 14 (darkest). Default value is 2.

Black Mark Cut Position Adjustment Sets where within the black mark the form is cut. Minimum value is 0, maximum is 14. Default is 2.

                Adjust Left Margin                               Sets the position of the left margin.

Adjustments are in steps of 0.125mm (0.005 in.) within the range of minimum ‐1.875mm (‐0.075 in.) to maximum +1.875mm (‐+.075 in.) Minimum value is 0, maximum is 30. Default value is 15.

Present Position Adjustment               Sets the position of the first line of print relative to the top of the page.

Minimum value is 1, maximum is 30. Default is 15.

                Colour                                                  Sets the printer to use 2‐colour paper.

Printer Configuration Printout

To print out the current settings and functions, press and hold the feed button and press the reset button. After the test is complete, reset the dip switch settings to OFF then either power off or press the reset button (SW1) to reboot the printer.

The printout can also be performed in on‐line mode.

Printer Sensor Re–calibration Procedure

Sensors re‐calibration process is required when sensors are replaced.

One–sided (1ST) Single Roll with or without Capture Perform the following steps to re–calibrate the sensors:

1.     Remove all the paper from the transport or capture, and paper roll from the hopper.

2.     Power–up the printer with DIP switches under 1 and 2 to ON, and 3 to OFF condition.

3.     If the printer detects this status, two LEDs are off.

4.     Briefly press the Feed button three times to select sensor adjustment.

Two LEDs indicate the status of the self test. The table below lists and displays the status of the LEDs during the self test.

Press Feed button

LED Status

 

Red

Green

0 (power–up state)

Off

Off

1 time

Off

On

2 times

On

Off

3 times

On

On

LED Display

                                                                                                                         Red                    Green

5.     Press and hold the Feed button.

6.     The firmware measures the level of sensors.

7.     Load a BM paper roll into the hopper.

8.     Press the Feed button.

The paper is loaded, cut, and presented. If a capture bin present, the paper is then captured. The Sensor adjustment is performed during feeding.

9.     If both LEDs are blinking, sensor adjustment is successful. If red LED is ON, sensor adjustment is unsuccessful.

10.  After re‐calibration, set all DIP switches OFF, and power the printer off and on.

Note:  Black mark mode executes this procedure.

One–Sided (1ST) Dual Roll with or without Capture

Perform the following steps to re–calibrate the sensors:

1.     Remove all paper from the transport or capture, feeders, and paper roll from both hoppers.

2.     Power–up the printer with DIP switches under 1 and 2 to ON, and 3 to OFF condition.

3.     If the printer detects this status, two LEDs are off.

4.     Briefly press the Feed button three times to select sensor adjustment.

Two LEDs indicate the status of the self test. The table below lists and displays the status of the LEDs during the self test.

Press Feed button

LED Status

 

Red

Green

0 (power–up state)

Off

Off

1 time

Off

On

2 times

On

Off

3 times

On

On

LED Display

                                                                                                                    Red                    Green

5.     Press and hold the Feed button.

6.     The firmware measures the level of sensors.

7.     Load BM paper rolls into both front and rear hoppers.

8.     Feed the BM paper from front hopper to lower feeder and press the Feed button. The paper is loaded, cut, and presented. If a capture bin is fitted, the paper is then captured. The Sensor adjustment is performed during feeding.

9.     If both LEDs are blinking, sensor adjustment is successful. If red LED is ON, sensor adjustment is unsuccessful.

10.  After re‐calibration, set all DIP switches off, and power the printer off and on.

Note:  Black mark mode executes this procedure.

Two–Sided (2ST) Single Roll with or without Capture

Selecting Single Side Test Mode or Double Side Test mode

Perform the procedure below to select Single Side (1ST) test mode or Double Side (2ST )


test mode.

To select 1ST or 2ST LEDs

                   Double side test mode

                    Single side test mode

                   Double side test mode

             Both LEDs are out


Sensor Re–calibration Procedure

Perform the following steps to re–calibrate the sensors:

1.     Remove all paper from the transport or capture, and paper roll from the hopper.

2.     Power–up the printer with DIP switches under 1 and 2 to ON, and 3 to OFF condition.

3.     Select 1ST or 2ST mode.

4.     Briefly press the Feed button three times to select sensor adjustment.

Two LEDs indicate the status of the self test. The table below lists and displays the LED status during the self test.

Push Feed button

LED Status

 

Red

Green

1 time

Off

On

2 times

On

Off

3 times

On

On

LED Display

                                                                                                       Red                    Green

5.     Push and hold the Feed button.

6.     The firmware measures the level of sensors.

7.     Set a BM paper roll in the hopper.

8.     Press the Feed button.

The paper is loaded, cut and presented. If a capture bin is present the paper is then captured. The Sensor adjustment is performed during feeding.

9.     Remove all the paper roll from the printer, and replace with 2ST paper roll.

10.  Press the Feed button.

The paper is loaded, cut and presented. And then it is captured if capture bin present. The 2ST sensor adjustment is performed during feeding.

11.  If both LED is blinking, sensor adjustment is successful. If red LED is ON, sensor adjustment is unsuccessful.

12.  After re‐calibration, set all DIP switches OFF, and power the printer off and on.

Two–Sided (2ST) Dual Roll with or without Capture

Selecting Single Side Test Mode or Double Side Test mode

Perform the procedure below to select Single Side (1ST) test mode or Double Side (2ST )


test mode.

To select 1ST or 2ST LEDs

                   Double side test mode

                    Single side test mode

                   Double side test mode

             Both LEDs are out


Sensor Re–calibration Procedure

Perform the following steps to re–calibrate the sensors:

1.     Remove all the paper from the transport or capture, and paper roll from the hopper.

2.     Power–up the printer with DIP switch under 1 and 2 to ON, and 3 to OFF condition.

3.     Select 1ST or 2ST mode.

4.     Briefly press the Feed button three times to select sensor adjustment.

Two LEDs indicate the status of the self test. The table below lists and displays the LED status during the self test.

Push Feed button

LED Status

 

Red

Green

1 time

Off

On

2 times

On

Off

3 times

On

On

LED Display

                                                                                                                     Red                    Green

5.     Press and hold the Feed button.

6.     The firmware measures the level of sensors.

7.     Set BM paper rolls in the front and rear hoppers.

8.     Feed the BM paper from front hopper to lower feeder, and press the Feed button. The paper is loaded, cut, and presented. If a capture bin is fitted, the paper is then captured. The Sensor adjustment is performed during feeding.

9.     Remove all BM paper rolls from the printer, and replace with 2ST paper roll into the front hopper only.

10.  Feed the 2ST paper from front hopper to lower feeder, and press the Feed button. The paper is loaded, cut and presented. If capture bin present, the paper is then captured. The 2ST sensor adjustment is performed during feeding.

11.  If both LEDs are blinking, sensor adjustment is successful. If red LED is ON, sensor adjustment unsuccessful.

12.  After re‐calibration, set all DIP switches off, and power the printer off and on.

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

The procedures in this section describe the removal and replacement of the following field replaceable units:

l  Transport

l  Dual feed mechanism

l  Print engine

l  Hopper

l  Paper low sensor.

Transport

1.     Disconnect the two harnesses (three on a capture bin variant).

2.     Remove and retain the single screw on each side.

3.     Loosen the two screws underneath the transport. On the capture bin variant, a long blade screwdriver will be required to reach through the frame.

4.     Remove the transport.

Dual Feed Mechanism (Standard)

The dual feed mechanism is supplied with the dual roll pcb and interconnection harness.

1.      Remove the cable ties securing all harnessing from the dual feed mechanism back to the dual feed PCB in the hopper.

2.      Remove the two screws (one each side) that secure the front hopper lifting bar and the two fixing screws securing the pcb cover. Remove the cover then disconnect all the harnessing from the PCB.

3.      Remove the screws securing the pcb to its mounting.

4.      a) For single‐sided printers: Remove the retain the four screws (two each side) securing the dual in‐feed mechanism to the print engine.

b) For two‐sided printers: Remove and retain the two screws securing the dual feed mechanism to the rear of the print engine. Loosen the screw on each side of the print engine.

Loosen Screw (2 off)

Remove Screws

               5.    Lift the in‐feed mechanism clear of the print engine.

Dual Feed Assembly (Stamp)

The dual feed mechanism is supplied with the dual roll pcb and interconnection harness.

1.      Remove the cable ties securing all harnessing from the dual feed mechanism back to the dual feed PCB in the hopper.

2.      Remove the screw securing the PCB cover to the underside of the printer, and remove the cover.

3.      Disconnect the 40‐pin connector and all other harnessing from the PCB.

4.      Remove the two spacer screws from the base of the dual feed assembly and tilt the assembly over towards the hopper to remove it.

Print Engine

One‐sided

1.     Dual feed variants only: remove the dual feed mechanism as described in previous section.

2.     Disconnect the earth straps on each side of the print engine, and disconnect the harness as shown below.

3.     Remove and retain the two screws (one on each side), securing the print engine to the frame.

4.     Disconnect the main sensor harness connector from the PCB.

5.     Slide the engine lugs clear of the frame, and lift it up.

Two‐sided

1.      Dual feed variants only: remove the dual in‐feed mechanism as described in previous section.

2.      Disconnect the earth straps on the rear of the print engine, then two screws (one on each side), securing the print engine to the frame then slide the engine lugs clear of the frame, and lift it off.

3.      Remove the screw securing the control board cover beneath the print engine.

4.      Disconnect the hopper low sensor harness from the PCB.

Fuse

One‐sided Printer

The fuse on the control board is accessible from the underside of the printer, or for better access, first remove the print engine as described above, then:

1.     Remove the two screws on top and the single screw on the side securing the control boards cover.

Control Board Cover Screw (2 off)

Control Board Cover Screw

2.     The fuse is visible from the underside of the print engine.

Two‐sided Printer

The fuse on the control board is accessible from the underside of the printer, as shown below. On dual feed variants, the control board cover must first be removed.

Front Hopper

Single Roll

1.     First remove the print engine and in‐feed mechanism as described in earlier sections.

2.     Cut the cable tie holding the paper low sensor harness to the hopper, then disconnect the connector located below the print engine tray.

3.     Remove the two screws securing the earth straps then the two screws securing the hopper assembly to the print engine.

Dual Roll

1.     Remove the two screws securing the yellow lifting handle in the front hopper. Then remove the two screws securing the dual feed PCB cover.

2.     Disconnect the rear hopper low sensor harness from the dual PCB and remove all harnessing from the front hopper.

3.     Remove the four screws (two each side) securing the PCB to the hopper and remove the PCB.

4.     Disconnect the paper low sensor harness connector located below the print engine tray and remove the lower two screws securing the earth straps to the hopper assembly and print engine.

5.     Remove the upper two screws securing the hopper assembly to the print engine and remove the hopper.

Rear Hopper

1.     Remove the four screws (two each side) that secure the two joining brackets between the front and rear hoppers.

2.     Remove the two screws securing the yellow lifting handle in the front hopper. Then remove the two screws securing the dual feed PCB cover.

3.     Disconnect the rear hopper sensor low harness from the PCB and remove the rear hopper.

Hopper Low Sensor Harness

1.     Release the harness from the cable ties.

2.     Push out the two sensor pcb securing studs.

3.     Disconnnect the harness from the control board.

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENTS/PINOUTS

Logic Board

One Sided

J1

Not used

J6

USB (Straight, type B)

J2

DRV Signal

J8

Power

J3

Board to board connector

 

 

Two Sided

J6

Board to board connector

J2

DIN power ‐ 3 pins (RSD)

J3

Power ‐ 2 pin (FSD)

J5

USB (Straight, type B)

Pin Assignments ‐ USB connector (J6)

(One and Two Sided Printers)

1

2

3

4

Shell

VBUS

DD+

GND

Shield

Single Roll Drive Board

One‐sided

J1

Not used

J6

Feed motor

J2

Paper low & capture sensors

J7

Black dot (mark) sensor

J3

Thermal head

J8

Board to board connector

J4

Cover open sensor

J9

Knife motor

J5

Paper end sensor

J14

Logic signal

Two Sided

J1

Cutter motor

J8

Exit sensor

J2

Combine Sensors

J9

Feed Motor

J3

Transport/Hopper/Motor/Paper low sensor

J10

TOF sensor

J4

PE Sensor

J11

TOF LED

J5

RS232

J13

2ST PDET sensor

J6‐7

Thermal Heads

J15

Board to board connector

Dual Roll Control Board

 

J4

J9

J2

J8

J7

 

J1

 

 

J5

J3

J1

Paper low (2nd Bin)

J6

Control Signal

J2

Sensor LED (1st Bin)

J7

Motor (1st Bin)

J3

Sensor (1st Bin)

J8

Motor (2nd Bin)

J4

Sensor LED (2nd Bin)

J9

Feed Switch

J5

Sensor (2nd Bin)

 

 

CABLING

The dual roll printer has a ribbon cable signal harness which goes from the control board to print engine.

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

None.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

For the preventive maintenance schedule and details of the required tasks for the USB Receipt Printer, refer to the Preventive Maintenance section of this manual.


USB Journal Printer

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

This chapter describes the USB journal printer, which uses a line thermal head to perform high quality, high speed, quiet printing of characters and graphics.

DESCRIPTION

The USB journal printer has the following features:

l  Supports maximum paper roll diameter of 83mm (3.2 ins)

l  Resolution 203 dpi

l  Downloadable firmware l Remote diagnostics.

Power Requirements

The printer requires power from the ATM power supply (+24V DC ± 10%) and power consumption is up to 6.0 A.

Environmental Requirements

Operating the printer at either extreme of its temperature or humidity ranges may degrade the print quality and may cause the firmware to disable printing. However, the printer itself will not be damaged.

Condition

Temperature       Humidity

Max Temp Change

Operating

5°C ‐ 50°C (41°F 20 ‐ 80%

‐ 122°F)

10°C (50F)/hour

Idle

0°C ‐ 55°C (32°F 10 ‐ 95% ‐ 131°F)

10°C (50F)/hour

Extreme power‐on

0°C ‐ 55°C (32°F 10 ‐ 95% ‐ 131°F)

15°C (59F)/hour

Storage

‐5°C ‐ 55°C (23°F 10 ‐ 90%

‐ 131°F)

15°C (59F)/hour

Dew point

26°C (78.8°F) maximum

 

Paper Specification

Paper Roll

l  Width: 80.0 mm (3.15 in.)

l  Length: 83 m (272 ft.) max

l  Diameter: 83 mm (3.26 in.) or less

l  Paper core inner diameter: 12 mm (0.47 in.)

Printable Area

Journal Paper Low

The paper low signal indicates when 5.8 m (19 ft.) ±40% remains on the supply roll.

Sensor Locations

Sensor

Function

Paper Low

Detects paper low.

Cover Open

Detects cover open, halts operation.

PE

Detects presence of paper for controlling feed motor.

Winding Jam

Detects winding wheel movement and controls winding.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Faults can be diagnosed using the LEDs on the control board, and by using the ATM error reporting system.

LEDs Location and Meaning

Two pairs of LEDs are located one each side of the control board and are also visible through holes at the bottom of the side frames. The LEDs can be used to diagnose the conditions shown in the following table.

Green

Red

Meaning

On

Off

On‐line

Fast blink

Off

IPL mode (firmware ready to download)

Off

Fast blink

Paper out

Slow blink

Off

Paper low

Off

On

Winding jam

Slow blink

Off

Paper not wound

Off

Fast blink

Cover open / Unable to load paper

Off

Off

Power off

Module Error Messages

The following error messages are reported by the journal printer. Refer to the “Module Replacement” section for detailed instructions on replacing modules, and “Diagnostics” for details of running diagnostic tests

Error Messages

Corrective Actions

Printer Disconnected

Check USB cable at the printer and at the hub. Check the power cable at the printer and at the power supply. Re‐connect or replace if necessary.

The printer may need to be re‐set. Run self test.

PCB Hardware Error

Replace printer.

Printer Under Voltage

ATM power harnessing may be faulty ‐ test power from module to distribution board to ATM power supply. Replace harnessing if necessary.

ATM power supply may be faulty. Check and replace if necessary.

Print Head Life Low/Out

Replace printer.

Printer Over Temperature

Check operating conditions against Environmental Requirements

(page 2). If necessary, replace printer if constantly over temperature.

Printer Open

If open, close print mechanism.

If closed, printer open sensor or sensor cable may be faulty ‐ run

HW_DIAG Sensor Test, if this reports printer open, replace printer.

Paper Not Loaded

Re‐load the paper if it was incorrectly loaded, or clear jam.

Printer Not Winding

Re‐load paper, ensuring is correctly fed into take‐up spindle. Check winding motor cable is securely connected (J4).

Print Mechanism Jam

Clear jam and re‐load paper.

Winding motor may be faulty ‐ unload paper, run HW_DIAG Winding Motor test. Motor and gears should turn. If not, replace printer.

Paper feed motor may be faulty ‐ unload paper, run HW_DIAG Paper Feed Motor test. Motor and gears should turn. If not, replace printer.

Paper Low/Out

Re‐load paper.

Run HW_DIAG Sensor test. Cover and uncover the sensor. If necessary, replace printer.

General Checks

The following general checks should determine the cause of the majority of errors with the journal printer:

l  Check that the power cable is connected securely at both ends.

l  Check that the interface cable from the PC core is connected securely at both ends.

l  Check that the interface cable for the module reporting a problem is connected securely:

Problem

Check cable

Paper low not detected / Frequent paper empty messages

Paper low sensor cable (J1)

Frequent “Unable to load paper” messages.

Paper end sensor cable (J1)

Paper not feeding correctly / frequent jam messages

Feed motor cable (J6)

Paper not winding correctly

Winding motor cable (J4)

Poor printing or none at all

Thermal head cable (J5)

Printer open message cannot be cleared

Open sensor cable (J2)

l  Check that the sensors are not obscured by foreign objects/paper dust.

l  Check that the operating temperature complies with the specifications given in section ‘Environmental Requirements’.

l  Check that thermal paper is being used.

l  Check that the paper is not damp, dirty or dusty.

l  Check for foreign objects in the feed path or stuck to the reel guides, take‐up core, drive gears or platen.

l  Clean thermal elements in print head with alcohol (IPA), using a cotton bud.

l  If an EEPROM error is detected, switch the printer off and on again to confirm the diagnostic result. If there is no change, replace the printer.

DIAGNOSTICS

Level 0 Diagnostics

Level 0 diagnostic tests run on start‐up and reset or on entering self test mode via dip switch DSW1.

Start‐up Tests

The following tests run at start‐up:

l  Flash ROM CRC check

l  Internal RAM check

l  EEPROM test

l  Microprocessor test.

In the event of an error in one of the tests the LEDs will indicate the error type. The error state will be maintained until power is cycled or reset.

LED Diagnostic Displays

The following table shows the codes displayed by the LEDs in the event of an error.

Green

Red

Meaning

On

Off

On‐line

Fast blink

Off

IPL mode (firmware ready to download )

Off

Fast blink

Paper empty

Slow blink

Off

Paper low

Off

On

Winding jam

Off

Fast blink

Unable to load paper

Slow blink

Off

Paper not wound

Off

Off

Power off

Test Selected By Dip Switch

The level 0 diagnostic tests that can be set by the logic board dip switch DSW1 are:

l  Rolling ASCII print test

l  ‘H’ print test

l  Dot check pattern print test l Sensor level adjustment.

Switch and LED Locations

Dip switch DSW1 on the control board is used to select the diagnostic tests. The LEDs indicate the test selected. Switch SW1 is the reset button.

How to Enter a Test

1.     Ensure the printer is powered off.

2.     Set bits 1 and 2 of DSW1 to ON and bit 3 to OFF.

3.     Power up the printer.

4.     The two LEDs should be off, indicating test mode.

5.     Select the required self test by pressing the feed button briefly as follows. The LEDs will indicate the test selected.

Feed

Button Presses

LED

Green Red

Test

x 0

OFF     OFF

Rolling ASCII print test (continuous printing)

Mono or 2-colour options.

x1

ON       OFF

‘H’ print test (continuous printing)

x2

OFF     ON

Dot check pattern print test

x3

ON       ON

Sensor level adjustment

6.     Once the test is selected, push and hold the feed button and the test will be performed.

Note:  For the ASCII test to start, you have to briefly press the feed button then press and hold the feed button again to start the test.

7.     After the test is complete, reset the dip switch settings to OFF then either power off or press the reset button (SW1) to reboot the printer.

Rolling ASCII Print Tests

These tests invoke the printer to continuously print the resident character set, in standard pitch for 23 lines, then feed 2 lines. The page count is not stored in EEPROM. After the test is complete, reset the dip switch settings to OFF then either power off or press the reset button (SW1) to reboot the printer.

00000012

 !”#$%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFG

!”#$%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGH ”#$%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHI

#$%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJ

00000013

$%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJK

%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL &’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLM

’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMN

00000014

()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO

)*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP

*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQ

+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR

“H” Print Test

This test causes the printer to continuously print “H” characters in the standard pitch. for

23 lines, then feed 2 lines. The page count is not stored in EEPROM. After the test is complete, reset the dip switch settings to OFF then either power off or press the reset button (SW1) to reboot the printer.

00000314

HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH

HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH

HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH

HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH

00000315

HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH

HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH

HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH

HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH

00000316

HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH

HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH

HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH

HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH

Dot Check Pattern Test

This test causes the printer to print a dot check pattern. The 12.5% slant line dot pattern is created using character code 05H. After the test is complete, reset the dip switch settings to OFF then either power off or press the reset button (SW1) to reboot the printer.

Sensor Level Adjustment

The following sensors can be adjusted:

l Paper low sensor l Winding sensor.

To adjust the sensors proceed as follows:

1.     Ensure there is no paper in the transport.

2.     Set dip switch bits 1 and 2 to ON, then power up the printer.

3.     The firmware measures the sensors levels.

4.     Place a paper roll in the hopper. and feed paper to the print mechanism entry slot, then press the feed button.

5.     The paper is fed through the print mechanism. Sensor adjustment is performed automatically during this operation. The printer stores the adjustment value into EEPROM and can be printed on the configuration printout.

6.     After the test is complete, reset the dip switch settings to OFF then either power off or press the reset button (SW1) to reboot the printer.

Printer Configuration Printout

This is not a test as such but a printout of several of the current settings and functions. To perform the test, press and hold the feed button and press the reset button. After the test is complete, reset the dip switch settings to OFF then either power off or press the reset button (SW1) to reboot the printer. The printout can also be peformed in online mode.

Level 1 Diagnostics

All the Level 1 diagnostic tests that involve printing initialize the journal printer in the following manner:

l  Margins are set to 0 and 40

l  Line spacing is set to 2.6 mm (1/9 in.)

The settings set on entry into diagnostics are restored on exit. Looping is allowed on all tests. Tests that require paper out do not run if paper is left in, however, they still return a good response.

Sensor Test

The Sensor test reports, in M_DATA, status and sensor information. There should be no movement of the printhead during this test.

Print Quality Test

The Print Quality test prints a line of LDTX in double wide then a line in single wide, followed by graphics. This is followed by a solid black rectangle.

Winding Motor Test

The Winding Motor test drives the winding motor for 5 seconds. Paper must be removed from the printer for this test to run.

Paper Feed Motor Test

The Paper Feed Motor test drives the paper feed motor for 5 seconds. Paper must be removed from the printer for this test to run.

LEVEL 3 DIAGNOSTICS

The level 3 diagnostics returned for the journal printer are:

S_Data

S_DATA        Meaning

00                      GOOD (No error).

01                      ROUTINE (Minor fault).

02                      WARNING (May require attention).

03                      SUSPEND (Possible customer tampering).

04                      FATAL (Requires immediate attention).

Tallies

 

Tally

Description

WIND JAM

The number of winding jams.

MECH JAM

The number of print mechanism jams.

HOU ON

The number of hours the printer has been switched on.

PAP LEN

The number of millimetres of paper that have passed under the printhead.

ERR RECO

The number of error recoveries.

OVER HEA

The number of times the printer has over-heated.

FLAS CYC

The number of flash cycles.

HEAD OPN

The number of times the head has been opened.

SUP VOLT

The number of supply voltage anomalies.

USB COMM

The number of USB communications faults.

STRAPPING

Switches

The following switches are found on the control board and are also accessible through gaps in the printer frame.

l  Switch SW1 is the reset switch.

l  The 2‐pin dip switch (DSW1) on the control board is used to enter self test mode.

bit 0

bit 1

Contents

0

0

Online mode

1

0

Self test mode

0

1

Flash download mode

1

1

Sensor adjustment mode

The following tests can be accessed in self‐test mode:

l  Rolling ASCII print test

l  ‘H’ print test

l  Dot check pattern print test

l  Sensor level adjustment.

A pair of LEDs on each side of the board indicate the tests selected as well as indicating errors.

ADJUSTMENTS

The Configuration menu in System Application (Sys App) displays the following menu option for the journal printer:

Menu

Description

Printer Contrast

Sets the printer contrast in the range [1] (lightest) to 30 (darkest). Default is 15.

Adjust Left Margin

Sets the position of the left margin. Adjustments are in steps of 0.125mm (0.005 in.) within the range of min 1.875mm (‐0.075 in.) to max +1.875mm (‐+.075 in.).

Minimum value is 0, maximum is 30. Default value is 15.

MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

This section describes the removal and replacement of the head assembly. The assembly is not advocated as a Field Replaceable Unit, but is available as a spare part.

Head Assembly

2.    

Remove the thermal head’s black earth harness from the connector on one side of the frame.

3.     Remove and retain the two screws securing the bottom cover. Remove the cover.

4.     Lift the cable clamp securing the harness. Lift harness slightly and slide the cover off.

5.     Disconnect the thermal head connector from J5 on the board.

6.     Remove and retain the two screws securing the print head.

7.    

Loosen the stop screw on the side of the printer until the head drops. Remove the head assembly.

8.     Disconnect the harnesses from the head assembly.

CABLING

None.

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS

                                                                                          LED1  LED3            J5

                                                                                                      LED2  LED4    J1

CN1

USB                                                                    J3

Feed motor

CN2

Power                                                                J4

Winding motor

J1

Winding jam, paper low, paper end sensors    J5

Thermal head

J2

Cover open sensor                                                SW1

Reset switch

Pin Assignments

USB connector (CN1)

1

2

3

4

Shell

VBUS

DD+

GND

Shield

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

None.


Section Divider

Section 11 - Dispense

February 2014

SelfServ 23 and 27 ATMs Service Manual Section 11: Dispense Section Divider

February 2014


S1 Bill Alignment Dispenser

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

This chapter describes the Front and Rear Access S1 currency dispensers which form bill stacks using the bill alignment mechanism.

As this type of dispenser has been developed and manufactured post EU RoHS compliance guidelines it can only be serviced using appropriate RoHS compliant parts.

S1 Variants

The major area variants of the S1 Bill Alignment dispensers are:

l  Mechanical:

l  Rear Access (short transport)

l  Rear Access (mid transport) l Rear Access (long transport) l Front Access.

l  Electrical:

l  The dispenser is available in 115 V and 230 V main motor variants l The dispenser control board has USB connectivity.

l  Software:

l  Microsoft Windows XP and Aptra XFS 4.5 onwards.

Pick Modules

The Dispenser can use the Aria or the 56XX enhanced single and double pick modules. The Aria pick modules are described in the Aria pick module chapter in the dispense section of this manual. The description of the 56XX type is in chapter 17.6 of the Service Aids Mini‐Manual (FM‐0547‐A).

Note:  Where there is a mixture of Aria and 56XX enhanced pick modules, then the Aria type must always be used in the lower positions.

Single and Dual Configuration

The ATM is available in either single or dual cash configuration. Each dispenser can be configured to recognise up to seven denominations, but is limited to dispensing up to four due to the maximum number of cassettes it can hold. In an ATM configured with dual dispensers the total number of denominations can be 14 of which a maximum of 8 can be dispensed at any one time.

WARNING

It is recommended that currency denominations in a dual dispenser are consistently mapped to the same cassette types in both dispensers. This will ensure that the correct denomination is inserted into the correct dispenser.

Operational Environment

The dispenser operates as an intelligent module under the control of its own on‐board microprocessor. It communicates with the ATM central processing unit using the USB Interface. Dispenser device control firmware resident in the dispenser memory interfaces with the ATM transaction control and diagnostic programs.

Variants

The S1 dispenser is available in the following variants:

l  Front Access

l  Rear Access

l  Short Transport l Mid Transport

l  Long Transport.

The following options are available on all variants.

l  1, 2, 3 or 4 Standard width cassettes

l  Standard Security

l  Tamper Indicating Security

l  Cash Security (Fluiditi/Axytrans)

l  Open or latchfast purge bin

l  115 V version

l  230 V version

Containers

The dispenser is capable of using the wide currency cassettes developed to replace the obsolete standard width cassette. A full description of the currency cassettes is given in the Currency Cassette chapter of the Dispense section of this manual.

Note: Standard width currency cassette Type H8015‐STD‐01/02‐08 are obsolete and are not recommended for use with this dispenser. 

Currency Cassettes

l  Latch Fast security (Standard). The security method takes the form of a cable tie or similar through the door latch.

l  Tamper Indicating security (TI). The cassette has a mechanical indicator to signal any tampering via colour change to the indicator. In addition the catch can be fitted with a seal.

l  Fluiditi/Axytrans ATM security. The system protects currency cassettes when installed in the ATM by injecting marking ink into the cassette upon the ATM being attacked. It is important that correct handling procedures are observed when handling this type of cassette.

l  Fluiditi/Axytrans Replenishment security. The system protects the cassette while in transit as well as when installed in the ATM by injecting marking ink into the cassette. It is important that correct handling procedures are observed when handling this type of cassette.

Purge Bins

l  Open bin.

l  Latch fast bin. The security method takes the form of a cable tie or similar through the purge bin latch.

Note:  An indicator is not available on the purge bin. A dispenser ordered with mechanical TI is supplied with a latch fast purge bin.

Specifications

Power Requirements

The power requirement for the Control board is:

l  Direct current: l +24 V  10% 0.35 A l +24 V Interlock.

l  Alternating current:

l  115 Vac, 5.5 A r.m.s., 20.0 A surge or

l  230 Vac, 3.0 A r.m.s., 10.0 A surge.

The S1 Control board supplies the following power:

l  Direct current:

l  +3.3 V  10% 0.5 A

l  +5 V  10% 0.75 A l +12 V  10% 0.5 A.

Weight

The weights of the component parts of the S1 dispenser are:

l  Front Access Dispenser:

l  Basic unit (2 double pick modules + presenter) = 38.9 kg (85.75 lb.)

l  Presenter unit =20.9 kg (46.07 lb.) l Rear Access Dispenser:

l  Short unit (2 double pick modules + presenter) = 36.30 kg (80.02 lb.)

l  Mid unit (2 double pick modules + presenter) = 36.90 kg (81.34 lb.)

l  Long unit (2 double pick modules + presenter) = 39.10 kg (86.19 lb.)

l  Presenter unit (Short) = 18.3 kg (40.34 lb.)

l  Presenter unit (Mid) = 18.9 kg (41.66 lb.)

l  Presenter unit (Long) = 21.1 kg (46.51 lb.)

l  Single pick module = 6.3 kg (13.9 lb.)

l  Double pick module = 9 kg (19.84 lb.)

l  Currency cassette (Plastic) empty = 2.16 kg (4.76 lb.)

l  Currency cassette (Plastic) full = 6.62 kg (14.60 lb.)

l  Currency cassette (Metal) empty = 3.48 kg (7.67 lb.)

l  Currency cassette (Metal) full = 8.21 kg (18.10 lb.)

l  Open purge bin empty = 0.28 kg (0.62 lb.)

l  Open purge bin full = 0.42 kg (0.92 lb.)

l  Latch fast purge bin empty = 0.82 kg (1.81 lb.)

l  Latch fast purge bin full = 0.96 kg (2.12 lb.)

Dispenser Dimensions

The dimensions of the S1 dispenser with four pick modules (excluding ATM interface requirements) are:

l  Front Access Dispenser:

l  Width = 300 mm (11.81 in.)

l  Height = 768 mm (30.24 in.)

l  Depth = 750 mm (29.52 in.) l Rear Access Dispenser:

l  Width = 300 mm (11.81 in.)

l  Height = 700mm (27.35 in.)

l  Depth Short Nose = 726 mm (28.58 in.)

l  Depth Mid Nose = 846 mm (33.30 in.)

l  Depth Long Nose = 960 mm (37.79 in.)

DESCRIPTION

Bill alignment dispensers present a bunch of up to 40 bills/notes (50 bills for special China version) in up to four denominations of currency to the cardholder. A detect and purge system controls the movement of currency along the transport. Misfed or damaged currency is bunched and driven into a purge bin. The option is available, via application commands, to retract currency presented to the cardholder but not taken, to the purge bin.

The following sections describe the operation of the dispenser’s mechanical, electrical/ electronic, and firmware components.

Path of Notes

The dispensers are built with two, three, or four pick modules suspended below the presenter module.

The path of notes through the presenter is shown in the following diagrams:

Forming the Stack

Notes enter the presenter from the pick modules, pass the LVDT and are projected against the bill stop gate of the bill alignment mechanism by the flicker shaft fingers. They then fall on to the top of the note clamp transport where they form a stack.

S1 Front Access Stack

S1 Rear Access Stack

Present

The note clamp transport is lifted up so that the note stack is held against the underside of the top set of presenter transport belts. The belts are driven and the stack of notes is moved to the facia exit slot where it is held for the cardholder.

S1 Front Access Present

S1 Rear Access Present

Reject

If the stack is not taken by the cardholder, or a mispick has been detected, then the presenter transport is driven in reverse and the notes are moved into the purge bin. S1 Front Access Reject

S1 Rear Access Reject

Purge

If the stack is not presented after the stacking process or a mispick is detected, then the presenter transport is driven in reverse and the notes are moved into the purge bin. S1 Front Access Purge

S1 Rear Access Purge

Sensors

The position of the sensors that detect the movement of notes is shown in the diagrams below:

S1 Front Access Sensors

S1 Rear Access Sensors

Pick Module

The dispensers may be configured with two, three, or four pick modules hanging vertically below the presenter module.

There are two types of pick module: the single pick module holds one currency cassette, and the double pick module holds two cassettes, one above the other. The single and double pick modules used are the Aria type 3 as described in Aria Pick Module chapter in the Dispense section of this manual.

Pick positions are numbered 1 to 4, with number one immediately below the presenter.

Note:  If a mixture of Aria and 56XX enhanced pick modules are used, then the Aria type 3 pick module is always in the lower position.

Presenter Module

The presenter module has the following functions:

l  stack up to 40 bills/notes (50 bills for special China version) and present the stack to the cardholder

l  detect when the stack of bills is taken

l  control the exit shutter behind the ATM facia

l  provide a housing for the purge bin

l  drive damaged, mispicked, or not‐taken currency into the purge bin

l  detect when the purge bin is full

l  drive, through gearing, all the pick modules

l  detect the movement of bills through the transport l create the timing signal for the measurement of bill singularity l supply the pick vacuum to all the pick modules.

The components of the presenter which achieve these functions are:

l  linear variable displacement transducer (LVDT)

l  main timing disk

l  flicker shaft, anti‐static brush, and deflectors

l  bill alignment assembly and bill stop gate

l  note clamp, note clamp sensors

l  presenter transport and motor

l  presenter timing disk

l  transport sensors

l  exit sensor

l  shutter assembly (fascia mounted)

l  purge bin location components

l  purge transport

l  purge sensor

l  main motor and vacuum pump

l  motor and sensing control circuits.

The following sections describe these components.

Linear Variable Displacement Transducer (LVDT)

Bills passed up from the pick modules enter the presenter via the LVDT transport. This short transport is the only one in the presenter that is driven by the main motor and is linked via a gear train to the first pick module transport.

Note:  Care should be taken with regards to the sensing coils and ferrite cores as these can be damaged by inappropriate handling.

The LVDT is a sensing device, situated in the transport just before the flicker shaft, which gives an electrical output proportional to the displacement of two movable roller assemblies caused by bills passing between them and fixed reference rollers. The rollers are attached to ferrite cores which project through sensing coils printed on a pcb. The output from the coils is digitized, integrated, and is compared to the expected value (held in memory) for the currency being dispensed. In this way torn, folded, or multiple bills are detected.

Note:  There is no Pre‐LVDT sensor on the bill alignment presenters. The timing of the calculation is carried out by the LVDT itself.

Main Timing Disk

The main timing disk pulley is driven by a toothed belt from the main motor. Thirty‐six holes around the periphery of the timing disk create the timing pulses from an optoelectronic sensor. The output of the sensor is used to measure the movement of the bills as far as the flicker shaft and as a reference in the measurement of bill width. The interval between the interrupts represents a distance travelled by the bill of approximately 1 mm.

Main Timing Disk ‐ Rear Access

Main Timing Disk ‐ Front Access

Flicker Shaft, Anti‐Static Brush, and Deflectors

The plastic fingers on the flicker shaft impart an extra impetus to the notes as they leave the LVDT transport so that they are projected against the bill stop gate of the bill alignment assembly. This action is augmented by a second flicker shaft assembly with short flicker fingers. The longer flicker fingers also drag the notes into the stack against plastic guides attached to the LVDT transport.

Just as the notes leave the LVDT transport they pass through an anti‐static brush to remove any electric charge that would hinder them forming into a stack. Above the antistatic brush two plastic note deflectors are clipped between tie bars so that they brush across the upper surface of the note and provide a light downward pressure to keep the trailing edge of the notes down and aid the action of the flicker fingers.

Bill Alignment Assembly

The bill stop gate of the bill alignment assembly hangs down into the path of the notes as they are flicked out of the LVDT transport. Notes strike the gate, bounce back from it, and fall down on to the top of the note clamp transport where they are dragged into a stack by the action of the flicker fingers.

The neat formation of the stack of notes depends upon the bounce given to the notes by the gate which, in turn, depends on the position of the gate. The gate hangs from a belt transport driven by a stepper motor controlled by the dispenser firmware. The position for the width of notes being dispensed is calculated by the firmware from the note width stored in the dispenser bill configuration procedure. During a transaction, if the width of notes to be dispensed varies, the gate is moved to the new position before the next size is dispensed. The recommended method of forming the stack is from the smallest bills first, getting progressively larger, so that the bill alignment mechanism moves out to accommodate each larger size. The zero reference position of the bill alignment mechanism is sensed by the stack sensor which is interrupted by a flag on the bill stop gate when the mechanism has been driven fully forward. This is done at the start of every dispense and the gate is driven from there to its calculated position.

When the stack of notes is completed, the gate is driven back slightly towards the rear of the dispenser to clear the stack and the note clamp transport is then raised. If the stack has been formed successfully, the notes will be driven forwards by the presenter transport belts to be taken by the cardholder. If, however, a fault has been detected, the notes will be driven to the purge bin. To achieve this, the presenter transport drives the stack forward until its trailing edge just passes the stack sensor, then the bill alignment mechanism is driven towards the rear of the dispenser. This action causes the bill stop gate to be lifted out of the presenter belt transport by the action of passing over ramps attached to the side frames of the presenter. The mechanism is sensed fully back and up by a second flag on the bill stop gate interrupting the beam of the rear bill alignment sensor. The bill alignment mechanism remains in this position during the purge cycle. The presenter transport is then driven rearward to deliver the stack to the purge bin.

Bill Alignment Assembly ‐ Front Access

Bill Alignment Assembly ‐ Rear Access

Note Clamp

The note clamp transport is a tray assembly that is raised and lowered by a semicircular cam driven by a stepper motor via a gear train. The transport consists of a set of three belts held between two shafts at either end of the metal tray. One of the shafts is driven by the presenter transport stepper motor via a toothed belt and the other shaft is an idler. The transport belts run on crown pulleys on the shafts.

Also fixed to the clamp tray is the plastic stack tray. When the note clamp transport is in the down position this stack tray is higher than the transport belts so that the notes can stack on its top surface. As the transport is lifted by the action of the cam the idler shaft lifts in elongated holes in the stack tray so that the belts are lifted up above the surface of the stack tray and lift the stack of notes from it. In this way, when the notes are driven by the presenter transport they are not impeded by rubbing across the stack tray. Part of the stack tray is shaped to project beyond the drive shaft to provide a support for notes when being purged into the purge bin.

In its down position, the note clamp transport sits within a metal bracket, attached between the presenter side frames, that has vertical plates to prevent notes from falling off the sides of the note clamp transport. Fingers on the bill stop gate hang down through the slots in the stack tray to prevent any notes from falling off the rear of the note clamp transport.

Note Clamp Sensors

The note clamp transport is sensed in its up and down position by two sensors that are interrupted by a flag on the shaft attached to the clamp lifting cam. The stack of notes is sensed by the same sensor that detects the forward position of the note, looking down through a hole in the tray of the clamp transport to an LED attached to the metal bracket that provides the vertical side plates.

Clamp Up and Down Sensors

                                                 Bill Alignment Stepper Motor            ClampCam        Clamp Stepper Motor

Presenter Transport

The presenter transport consists of an upper set of three belts bearing against a lower set of three belts, both sets driven by a stepper motor via toothed belts at the left hand side of the dispenser. The transport belts pass across crown pulleys on the drive and tension shafts. The lower set of belts runs from the exit of the dispenser to just above the LVDT transport and the upper set runs from the exit and extends over the note clamp transport.

Just after the note alignment mechanism backs away from the stack of notes, the note clamp transport is raised by the rotation of the semicircular cam. The clamp is lifted so that its belts press against the underside of the top set of presenter transport belts and the note stack is held between both sets of belts. The stepper motor then drives the presenter transport (and also through a gearwheel the belts on the note clamp transport) so that the stack of notes is moved to the exit held between the upper and lower presenter transport belts. The toggle shaft at the exit compensates for different thicknesses of stack and permits the stack to be pulled from the dispenser by the cardholder.

Presenter ‐ Front Access

Presenter ‐ Rear Access

Presenter Timing Disk

An opto‐electronic sensor controls the time that the presenter stepper motor has to be powered to drive the transport and stop it with the bills projecting from the exit slot. The sensor beam is chopped by the segments on a timing disk attached to the presenter transport drive shaft to produce interrupts equivalent to travel of the stack of 1.6 mm.

Transport Sensors

The progress of the notes through the presenter transport is monitored by a number of infra‐red sensors as shown in the illustrations below and also diagrams in the section “Path of Notes”.

The illustration of the Front and Rear access dispensers show the sensors T3 and T3A arranged across the width of the transport. These sensors and their respective LEDs are wired in series to improve detection of certain currencies that have a transparent section as part of the bill design.

Transport Sensors ‐ Front Access

Transport Sensors ‐ Rear Access

Exit Sensor

The last sensor on the transport is the exit sensor T5 which sees the stack in the present position and detects it being taken by the cardholder.

Purge Bin Location Components

The purge bin is held in the presenter so that it is accessible from the same position as the currency cassettes. It is supported by guide rails and is locked in position by a latch. A microswitch is operated by the inserted purge bin to inform the electronics system that the bin is in place.

When a latchfast purge bin is installed, a keyplate enters holes in the top front of a latchfast purge bin and pushes the truck door up into the top. The rear door of the latchfast purge bin is secured by a sealable latch.

Purge Transport

The purge transport consists upper and lower foam roller shafts driven via toothed gears from the presenter transport and upper and lower plastic guides. The extended portion of the note stack tray forms the lower note support guides and an upper set of plastic guides is attached between the drive shaft of the upper presenter transport belts and the upper foam roller shaft.

On a purge, either due to a mispick being detected or the stack of notes not being taken by the cardholder, the direction of the stepper motor driving the presenter transport is reversed, (the bill alignment mechanism having been previously driven to its rearmost and up position), thus moving the stack into the note guides which direct the notes from the belts in between upper and lower foam roll shafts. A friction clutch arrangement makes sure that the foam roll shafts only drive when the presenter motor is reversed and the notes are driven in the direction of the purge bin. The foam rollers complete the task of pushing notes into the bin.

Purge Sensor

The movement of the currency notes into the purge bin is detected by a sensor and LED that look across the path of the notes at the foam rollers. This sensor also detects a bin overfill condition.

Main Motor and Vacuum Pump

The main motor drives the LVDT transport and all pick modules via toothed timing belts. It also drives the vacuum pump to provide a vacuum to the pick line via 6 mm bore tubing. A vacuum reservoir is located near the pump to improve the system vacuum, and an air filter in the tubing above the first pick module protects the pump from damage caused by ingress of grit particles. In both front and rear dispensers the power is supplied in 115V and 230V options.

Rear Access

The dispenser the motor and pump assemblies for rear access dispensers is located in a separate electronic box assembly that also houses the dispenser control board. This box is attached below the exit transport nose of the dispenser.

Front Access

The dispenser motor and vacuum pump assembly for front access dispensers is located at the rear of the presenter next to the LVDT transport. The dispenser control board is attached to the upper pick module.

Currency Dispenser Control Board

The following illustration shows the Currency Dispenser Control Board.

Interlock

The Control Board controls the operation of the currency dispenser. It is a Coldfire Processor based control board, responsible for collating all sensor information and operating the individual pick modules, the presenter, the ac motor and stepper motors, bill alignment and clamp motors and also communicating commands and responses to the ATM core processor.

The Control Board is a mixed technology pcb employing both Surface Mount Technology (SMT) and Plated Through Hole (PTH) components.


functions of the Control Board can be summarised as follows:

1.     To co‐ordinate operation of the currency dispenser transport hardware including all motors, sensors, and actuators.

2.     To process instructions from and provide responses to the ATM core electronics via a USB interface.

3.     To provide a power and logic interface to the associated single and double pick modules.

Voltage and Current

The power requirement for the S1 (USB) Control board is:

l  Direct current: l +24 V  10% 0.35 A l +24 V Interlock.

The S1 (USB) Control board supplies the following power:

l  Direct current:

l  +3.3 V  10% 0.5 A

l  +5 V  10% 0.75 A l +12 V  10% 0.5 A.

The S1 Control Board is fitted with a 32V Slow Blow 3 A surge protection fuse to protect the 24V supply to the pick module control boards. In the event of the fuse failing new Control Board has to be fitted and the Control Board Authentication procedure in this chapter has to be carried out.

Compatibility

The USB Currency Dispenser Control Board is designed for operation in the atm Notes S1 Currency Dispenser.

Dispensers Security Switch

Switch SW3 on the Control Board is used in the authentication process as required and to authorize running level 1 diagnostic tests: STACK, PRESENT, and DISPENSE. Refer to Level 1 Diagnostic Tests.

Configuration Switches

Eight configuration switches provided for configuration use and Extended Level 0 Diagnostics.

Diagnostic LEDs

A bank of Eight LEDs are provided to display Operating System LED configurations. A second bank of Four LEDs are show the Extended Level 0 Diagnostics information during start‐up.

illustration shown below shows the positions of Dispenser Security switch, Configuration switch and the Diagnostic LEDs.

Firmware Description

The Currency Dispenser Device Firmware provides device control, including full error recovery procedures in the USB peripheral environment.

The firmware interface provides dispensing of up to four different currency denominations with a single dispenser and up to eight denominations with dual dispensers. It accepts, executes, and returns status information in response to device control commands from the next level process.

The firmware operates under control of the VxWorks real time kernel by soliciting commands from the USB Secondary software and sending solicited and unsolicited responses to the USB secondary for transmission to the host system.

Currency Dispenser firmware will operate as a dual implementation module and is programmable. New versions of firmware is downloadable via the USB Loader Service.

The Currency Dispenser firmware can be configured for up to eight cassettes in the operational environment. The purpose of this is to allow up to eight cassettes to be present in a self‐service terminal.

The USB dispenser has some new T_CODE, M_STATUS, SOH modules or message IDs. Some additional M_DATA values have been added to indicate faults within new dispenser mechanisms.


TROUBLESHOOTING

Module State Table

Error

M_Status

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

Note jam at pick sensor

5

Poor quality media

Poorly loaded cassettes

Check media path for debris

Check cassette for poorly loaded bills

Remove debris

Fill cassette See also

Troubleshooting

Procedures section.

Invalid pick sensor interrupt

Cassette removed

N/A

Cassette 1/2/3/4 out

Push cassette fully home and ensure latched

Insert cassette

No magnets present

Check magnets present and in correct order

 

Cassette empty

4

Cassette 1/2/3/4 empty

Check cassette is empty

Fill cassette

Poor stack

Check media stack

Fill cassette

Cassette parameters not configured

40

Media length and singularity values not set

Set media length and singularity values for each cassette

Set parameters

Too many rejects

2

Poor quality media

Check purge bin for damaged or folded media

Check cassette

Unable to learn

Poorly loaded media in cassette

Check cassette to ensure media loaded neatly

Check cassette

Too many pick failures

3

Poor quality media

Check purge bin for damaged or folded media

Check cassette. See also Troubleshooting

Procedures section.

Poor stack

Check media loaded in cassette

Check cassette

Purge bin removed

7

Purge bin removed

Check purge bin present

Insert purge bin

Purge bin nearly full

N/A

Purge bin nearly full

Clear software count

Check purge bin

Poor quality media

Check purge bin for damaged or folded media

Check cassette

Poor stack

Check media loaded in cassette

Check cassette

Purge bin full

8

Purge bin full

Check purge bin for damaged or folded media

Emptying purge bin

Poor quality media

Check purge bin for damaged or folded media

Check cassette

Poor stack

Check media loaded in cassette

Check cassette

 

Error

M_Status

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

Note jam in main transport at LVDT

5

Media jam or debris

Clear jam

Check jam cleared. See also Troubleshooting Procedures section

Note jam between the pick module and the LVDT

5

Poor quality media causing jam

Clear Jam

Clear jam. See also

Troubleshooting

Procedures section.

Poor stack

Check media loaded in cassette

Check cassette

Main transport timing disk failed

16

Timing sensor dirty

Clean sensor

Clean sensor

Presenter timing wheel failed

29

Dirty sensor

Clean sensor

Clean sensor

Worn down gear

Replace worn down gear

See Troubleshooting Procedures section

Note jam or transport sensor failure

18

Media jam or debris

Clear jam

See Troubleshooting Procedures section

Dirt on rollers or belts

Clean

Interlock open

35

Interlock switch not

made

Check switch operation

Make contact by

pushing dispenser fully

home

Shutter jam open

13

Media jammed in shutter

Check for jammed media

Clear jammed media

Shutter jam closed

14

Media jammed in shutter

Check for jammed media

Clear jammed media

Pick module deconfigured (when performing a start exchange during manipulation of cassettes.)

41

A START/END EXCHANGE must be performed when manipulating the cassettes to avoid a ‘deconfigured’ state, resulting in the inability to learn bill parameters.

 

Disable MANIP in the service provider registry.

Or

A START/END exchange must be incorporated into the application.

SNR transport open

64

SNR transport open

Remove top cassette check SNR

Close transport

USB serial number too many invalid characters

Build up of dirt on SNR

Clean SNR camera. See Adjustments section.

USB serial number too

many invalid serial numbers

Build up of dirt on SNR

Clean SNR camera. See Adjustments section.

Communications failure to

SNR

64

Communications connection to SNR board disconnected

Check comms connections to SNR board on pick module

Re‐connect comms or repair cable

USB serial number reader control board failure

64

Control board failure

Replace pick module

USB serial number reader fixed guide camera failure (top CIS)

64

Fixed guide flex circuit not connected. Faulty camera or control board

Check flex circuit connection at fixed guide and at control board.

Re‐connect flex circuit. Replace pick module if necessary.

Error

M_Status

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

USB serial number reader moving guide camera failure (bottom CIS)

64

Moving guide flex circuit not connected. Faulty camera or control board

Check flex circuit connection at moving guide and at control board.

Re‐connect flex circuit. Replace pick module if necessary.

Troubleshooting Procedures

Additional troubleshooting procedures for the following M_Status codes:

M_Status 3 ‐ Pick Failure

l  Inspect cassette ‐ check how well the cassette is loaded (no bands/clips, cash is ATM‐fit and neatly stacked) then remove the cash and check that the cassette is clean, that the garage door is undamaged and that the cassette is set to the correct height/width for the currency. Check that the cassette can be inserted fully into the dispenser and that the latch is operational.

l  Inspect pick module ‐ check the pick arm assembly, filter and suction cups for wear or damage. Replace if necessary. Check for white dust or noisy operation indicating worn gears. Check for black dust indicating worn belts.

l  Check the pick line vacuum ‐ attach a vacuum gauge to the solenoid on the lowest tube and perform a Clear diagnostic test. Check the vacuum reaches 800mBar (23.5 IN HG) and is held for 1 minute after the motor stops. If the test fails, then re‐check at the air filter, if the test passes at the air filter, replace all vacuum tubes and T‐pieces. If the test fails at the air filter replace the motor pump assembly (rear access) or the presenter (front access).

l  Check the ‘D wheel’ timing within each pick module ‐ the timing disk on the outside of the pick module should be set to ‘D’ with the ‘D wheels’ inside the pick module set with a 0.5mm gap before touching the drive roller. Use the D‐wheel setting gauge to re‐time if needed. Refer to the Aria Pick Module chapter or the Preventive Maintenance chapter for more detail on timings.

l  Check pick‐to‐pick module timing ‐ the first pick unit on the upper pick module should be set to 1 on the timing disk and the second pick unit should be set to 2. The first pick unit on the lower pick module should be set to 3 and the second pick unit should be set to 4. Refer to the Aria Pick Module chapter or the Preventive Maintenance chapter for more detail on timings.

l  Check the pick interface PCB ‐ make sure that the cassette id pick interface PCB is fully located against the side frame and is secure. Check that the pick interface connections are fully home.

M_Status 5 ‐ Sensor Failure/Currency Jam in Main Transport

l  All the procedures for M_Status 3 (above) also apply to M_Status 5, and in addition:

l  Check for bill skew ‐ inspect the cassettes to ensure that bills are not skewing when exiting through the garage door. If the bills are skewing, check for poorly loaded cash or incorrect cassette configuration. Run a single bill dispense test from each pick module multiple times while observing for bill skew when entering the stacking area

of the presenter. If bills are skewed, inspect the belts and rollers in the pick module and the presenter, clean or replace as necessary. If the bills continue to skew on exiting the pick module, replace the pick module; if they skew after entering the presenter, replace the presenter.

M_Status 12 ‐ Presenter Clamp/Alignment Mechanism Failure or Jam

l  Clean and inspect the presenter clamping mechanism (bill alignment mechanism). Check for binding in the mechanism. Run a dispense diagnostic test first with one bill then with 40 bills to verify proper operation. If the test fails, replace the presenter.

M_Status 13/14 ‐ Shutter Jammed Open/Closed

l  Check for signs of damage to the shutter which could indicate fraudulent activity.

l  Run the dispenser shutter diagnostic test with halt on error enabled and looping 50 times (facia should be in normal operational position). If the test fails, remove the shutter to clean it and inspect it for binding when operated manually. Re‐fit the shutter and re‐run the test. If the test continues to fail replace the shutter assembly.

M_Status 18 ‐ Currency Jam in Presenter Transport/Sensor Failure

l  Check for bills jammed in the presenter transport and for damaged or unfit bills in the purge bin.

l  Check belt alignment: mark the presenter belts with a straight line then run a belt drive diagnostic test, observe if the belts are still in line after the test. If they are out of alignment, clean the belts and rollers then re‐run the test. If they are still out of alignment replace the presenter.

l  Check for bill skew: run a single bill dispense test from each pick unit multiple times while observing for bill skew or delay on entering the stacking area of the presenter. If bills are skewed or damaged during the dispense, inspect the belts and rollers in the pick module and the presenter, clean or replace as necessary.

l  If the bills are skewed during the stack part of the dispense operation, check for problems in the LVDT area such as damage to belts, flickers, deflectors or badly located ESD brushes. Also check for skewed bills coming from the pick module into the LDVT area ‐ use the troubleshooting procedures for M_Status 3 and 5.

l  If the bills are skewed during the present part of the dispense operation, there may be an issue with the stack table. Check the error log for M_Status 12 errors in the last 30 days, if there are none try fitting shims to the stacking table or replace the presenter.

l  If the bills are skewed after they have cleared the stack table, check the transport belts for dirt.

M_Status 29 ‐ Timing Disk/Motor Failure

l  Check the Hardware Device Error Logs for M_Status 29 events. These may be of varying severity and frequency and will typically be found as M_Data 06 34 XX, although other M_Data may also be found in association with this problem.

l  Check for worn gears:

l  Check for white powder around the area of the gears on the Presenter side frame.

l  Hold the gear in position and see if there is excessive movement or “play.”

l  Replace worn gears. Before refitting a gear to a shaft, clean the shaft using a clean cloth. Remove any existing gear wear white powder from around the Presenter side frame. Some of the shafts will have a pin that drives the gear (Item 1 in the illustration below). Ensure that the pin does not fall out. Start at the topmost gear (Item 1) and progress down the gear train, replacing one gear shaft at a time. Gear 4 (Item 4) must be removed first to replace the right hand gear 3 (Item 3). Refit in reverse order.

DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostic tests on the dispenser when installed in an atm Notes ATM are described in the following sections:

Level 0 Diagnostics

This chapter describes the Level 0 Diagnostic which are performed to verify the basic elements of the control board fitted to the S1 Currency Dispenser module.

The tests are carried out after a power‐up or hard reset. The device specific function sysGpioInit is called up by the start‐up code before any diagnostic tests are started.

Note:  These tests are not performed after a soft reset.

Level 0 Tests and Result Codes

When the level 0 diagnostic tests are being performed the test ID is displayed on the bank of 4 programmable LED’s. If a failure occurs the result will be displayed on the LED’s for one second followed by the test ID again for one second after the test has been completed. This action will continue until the board is reset. If no failure is detected the system performs the next in the sequence until the entire start up sequence is complete at which time the LED’s are cleared.

Once the Level 0 Diagnostics have been completed, any usage of the LED’s is now entirely device specific.

Note:  There are no switch selectable or run to run tests available.

Test 1 ‐ Flash sum check

This is a checksum test to verify the contents of the Flash ROM. The USB bootloader is checked and the Device Realtime Software (if present). If the USB bootloader checksum test fails an error code is displayed and the board fails to boot up. If the Device Realtime Software sum check fails the application_loaded flag is cleared and a forced download of new software is performed.

Test 1 Results

               LED Code                             Status

               0x0D                                      Bootloader checksum fail

Test 2 ‐ SRAM test

This test is to ensure that the SRAM is available and the following steps are performed:

l  The data bus is initially tested by performing a walking 1’s test at address 0.

l  The wiring for the bus is tested by performing a walking 1’s test on the address bit to check for aliasing. The test will diagnose a single‐bit address such as stuck‐high, stuck‐low, as well as shorted pins.

l  The physical memory integrity is tested by performing an iatm Notesement/decrement test over the entire region. Every storage bit in the device is tested as a zero and a one during the process.

Test 2 Results

LED Code

Status

0x08

Data bus error

0x09

Address bus error

0x0A

Internal data error

Test 3 ‐ EEPROM test

This test is performed after the level 0 diagnostics have been completed. The test performs a basic check on the EEPROM device (NVRAM#1). The test performs the following steps:

l  The system attempts to read a known header in the top 4 bytes of the device. The location of a header is defined as a pass for this test.

l  If the system does not locate a header the test will the try to write and read back a header. If this fails, the system indicates a faulty device.

Test 3 Results

               LED Code                             Status

               0x08                                        EEPROM write/read error

Level 1 Diagnostics

This section describes the level 1 diagnostics for the S1 currency dispenser, including the tamper indicating variant which are accessed via the System Application menu.

The M_STATUS codes and M_DATA returned for currency handling modules are listed in the atm Notes publication, B006‐6273‐A000 56xx/Personas Self‐Service Financial Terminals Diagnostic Status Code Notebook and in the Status Code Translator ‐ an application for PC or Blackberry ‐ available from http://www.infoprod.atm Notes.com/ Tests on the Currency Dispenser Diagnostic menu are:

l  Clear

l  Set Notes

l  Stack

l  Present

l  Dispense

l  Main Motor

l  Self Test

l  Exit Shutter

l  Sensor/Switch Status

l  Presenter Bill Drive

l  Learn Bill Parameters

l  Presenter Clamp

l  Pick Valve

l  Run To Run

l  Tamper Indication

l  Get Serial Numbers

l  Serial Number Read Sensors Status. Looping is allowed on certain tests.

Clear

The Clear test drives any bills left in the transport into the purge bin.

Set Notes

The Set Notes test allows you to set the number of notes to be picked, from each cassette type present. If the combined maximum number of notes is greater than 40 (50 bills for special China version), the test fails and displays “Invalid number of notes”. You are then prompted to “Set notes for cassette X”.

A default of five notes is picked from each cassette type if no number is entered.

Stack

The Stack test picks a number of bills, from each cassette type, and stacks them for presentation.

A default of five bills is picked, from each cassette type, unless changed using the “Set Notes” option.

Note:  This test is not offered unless there has been a change of state of the dispenser security switch after entry to diagnostics, and the “Cash Enable” option on the control menu is set ON.

Present

The Present test moves previously stacked bills to the exit slot for removal.

Note:  This test is not offered unless there has been a change of state of the dispenser security switch after entry to diagnostics.

Dispense

The Dispense test performs the Stack and Present tests in a single operation.

A default of five bills is picked, from each cassette type, unless changed using the “Set Notes” option.

Note:  This test is not offered unless there has been a change of state of the dispenser security switch after entry to diagnostics, and the “Cash Enable” option on the control menu is set ON.

Main Motor

The Main Motor test tests the vertical transport drive motor.

Self Test

The Self Test test picks one bill from each pick module with a cassette installed, moves the bills into the purge bin and then activates/exercises the exit shutter.

Exit Shutter

The Exit Shutter test checks the exit shutter sensors while the shutter is energized (open) and again when it is de‐energized (shut).

Sensor/Switch Status

The Sensor/Switch Status test determines the state of all sensors and switches and reports them as M_DATA. The sensor reading is taken with the LEDs on.

Presenter Bill Drive

The Presenter Bill Drive test activates the presenter bill drive at two speeds, fast and slow, in both the forward and reverse directions.

Learn Bill Parameters

The Learn Bill Parameters test instructs the firmware to learn the bill parameters. The test is only offered for configured cassettes. 5 bills are picked from a selected cassette, inspected for width and singularity, and then deposited in the purge bin.

The bill width and singularity is returned as T_DATA.

Presenter Clamp

The Presenter Clamp test exercises and monitors the presenter clamp and the bill alignment mechanism. Before the clamp test is performed the bill alignment mechanism will be moved to the home position if required. The outcome of the test is returned as

M_DATA.

The clamp test initially checks the position of the presenter clamp. If it is not in the home position, it is driven until it reaches home. When it is home it is driven to the present position and then driven back to home. Failure in any of these operations is reported.

The bill alignment test initially checks the position of the bill alignment mechanism. If it is not at home, the mechanism is driven until it reaches home. When it is in the home position it is driven to the smallest bill position and then driven back to home. Failure in any of these operations is reported.

Pick Valve

The Pick Valve test energizes the main motor and the pick valve of the pick module, in the selected position, for a period of 10 seconds.

Note 1:  No feedback is provided for this test. You have to manually confirm the operation of the valve.

Note 2:  All currency cassettes must be removed from the dispenser for this test to run.

Run‐To‐Run

The Run‐To‐Run test automatically performs, in sequence, the following tests:

l  Clear

l  Sensor/Switch Status

l  Presenter Clamp

l  Self Test

l  Exit Shutter

l  Dispense (only if the security switch has been operated, refer to “Dispense Test”)

l  Clear.

Tamper Indication

The Tamper Indication test displays the status of the dispenser tamper indicator as

M_DATA.

Get Serial Numbers

If Serial Number Read hardware is present in the pick module, then all serial number, denominations and images will be displayed for the notes picked from the prior Dispense, Stack or Self Test command.

Serial Number Read Sensors Status

If Serial Number Read hardware is present in the pick module, this test returns the status of the Serial Number Read image and SNR transport sensors.

Actual To Virtual Cassette Mapping

Error codes returned by a Self Test or Dispense test are mapped to the virtual type (VT) of the cassette. This section enables you to determine which cassette type has returned which code.

The following algorithm is used:

l  Map codes returned by physical cassette types 1 to 4, into the corresponding virtual type.

l  Map physical extended types 5 to 7 into the unused virtual type entries in ascending order.

l  Set any unused virtual type slots to their physical types.

The following examples explain how the error codes can be traced to the correct cassette position in the dispenser.

Example 1

Note: In this example two cassettes are

Type 1. To achieve a code for each Type 1 run the test with one removed in turn.

Step 3

 

 

1

5

2

1

3

2

4

1

Physical

                                          Position     Type

Example 2

Step 3 - No further mapping required. All fields filled by steps 1 and 2.

Level 3 Diagnostics

The level 3 diagnostics returned for the S1 currency dispenser are:

S_DATA

The S_DATA returned for the currency dispenser are:

               S_DATA     Meaning

00                     GOOD (No error).

01                     ROUTINE (Minor fault).

02                     WARNING (May require attention).

03                     SUSPEND (Possible customer tampering). 04          FATAL (Requires immediate attention).

Tallies

The mnemonics for these tallies are accessed via the REPORT_TALLY_MNEMONICS command and are not part of the TMS Interface Support Area NVRAM.

Tally

Description

PKFAIL 1

Pick attempt failure. A dispense attempt reported a pick failure on virtual cassette number 1. This tally is not iatm Notesemented if the cassette low media sensor is activated.

PKFAIL 2

As PKFAIL 1 for virtual cassette number 2.

PKFAIL 3

As PKFAIL 1 for virtual cassette number 3.

PKFAIL 4

As PKFAIL 1 for virtual cassette number 4.

SIZEERR1

Bill size errors. A dispense attempt was not successful because at least one undersize, oversize or extra bill was detected from virtual cassette number 1.

SIZEERR2

As SIZEERR1 for virtual cassette number 2.

SIZEERR3

As SIZEERR1 for virtual cassette number 3.

SIZEERR4

As SIZEERR1 for virtual cassette number 4.

DOUBLE1

Double bill errors. A dispense attempt was not successful because at least one double bill was detected from virtual cassette number 1.

DOUBLE2

As DOUBLE1 for virtual cassette number 2.

DOUBLE3

As DOUBLE1 for virtual cassette number 3.

DOUBLE4

As DOUBLE1 for virtual cassette number 4.

REJECT1

Bills picked from virtual cassette number 1 and purged due to bill verification errors. This count does not include good bills picked and purged during dispense by position.

REJECT2

As REJECT1 for virtual cassette number 2.

REJECT3

As REJECT1 for virtual cassette number 3.

REJECT4

 As REJECT1 for virtual cassette number 4.

PICKED 1

 Bills picked and successfully stacked from virtual cassette number 1 or successfully diverted during dispense by position.

PICKED 2

As PICKED 1 for virtual cassette number 2.

PICKED 3

As PICKED 1 for virtual cassette number 3.

PICKED 4

As PICKED 1 for virtual cassette number 4.

DISP OPS

Dispense, dispense by position or clear main transport operations attempted.

TRANSEN

Dispenser transport sensor fault or transport jam. A dispense or zero dispense attempt was not successful because a fault was detected on one of the dispenser transport sensors:

The fault may have occurred for a number of reasons:

‐ Sensor blocked initially (jam or sensor fault).

‐ Bill not seen under sensor at correct time (jam or sensor fault)

‐ Bill did not clear sensor at correct time (jam or sensor fault) ‐ Main motor timing disk failure (jam or sensor fault).

COMMINIT

Reserved

COMMRET

Reserved

COMMFAIL

Reserved

RES 5070

Reserved for H‐8010‐5070‐XX‐08 currency dispenser.

EXITSHUT

Exit shutter faults detected. The conditions causing this tally to be iatm Notesemented are:

Tally

Description

‐ Exit shutter sensors indicate that shutter failed to open during a present operation

‐ Exit shutter sensors indicate that shutter is not closed on initiation of a dispense, dispense by position, clear dispense, purge, or present operation ‐ EXIT_SHUTTER_TEST or DIAG_SHUTTER_TEST failed.

 

PRES OPS

Present operations attempted.

 

PRSTROPS

Other presenter operations attempted, for example, clamp or purge.

 

PRSTRJAM

Presenter mechanism was not in the correct position or jammed during a dispense, dispense by position, clear dispense, purge or present operation.

 

PRES_ERR

Reserved

 

EXITSENS

Reserved

 

PRESDISK

Presenter timing disk failed to operate correctly.

 

PRESJAM

Presenter bill jam was detected:

‐ Presenter transport sensors failed to block/clear while tracking bills ‐ Sensors failed static on/off test

‐ Sensors blocked initially on present or at end of purge.

 

SER READ

Number of serial number scan operations.

 

INVNOTES

Number of invalid notes scanned.

 

SERCHARS

Number of serial number read characters.

 

INVCHARS

Number of invalid characters.

 

SNROPERR

Number of serial number read (SNR) transport open errors.

 

The Tally record types listed are defined in the Module Management Subsystem FS with the remaining Tallies being part of the TMS Interface Support Area NVRAM.

The tally mnemonics listed are not reported by the firmware in any response message, but are included for maintainability purposes due to them being used in the source code when operating with tally values.

STRAPPING

Currency Dispenser Control Board

The strapping associated with the Currency Dispenser Control board has the following default position:

l  First Dispenser command switch pack (SW1) — set switches 1 to 8 to OFF for normal operation.

l  Second Dispenser command switch pack (SW1) — set switch 1 to ON and switches 2 to 8 to OFF for normal operation.

l  EPS2 functionality:

l  Switch pack SW1, switch 4 down (ON) — EPS 2 Full Enable feature enabled. This feature activates full EPS2 functionality, including ‘fatal on detection’ and ‘auto present’, following attack detection.

l  Switch pack SW1, switch 5 down (ON) — EPS 2 Auto–Purge feature enabled. This feature provides EPS 2 full functionality with the exception of ‘auto–present’. The Auto–Purge feature may be ordered in combination with EPS2 Full Enable feature.

l  Switch pack SW1, switch 6 down (ON) — EPS 2.2 enabled.

ADJUSTMENTS

Drive Belt Tension

Proceed as follows to adjust the tension of the drive belt from the main motor to the intermediate pulley. Refer to the illustrations following the procedure for each type of dispenser.

l  Check for a deflection of 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) when a force of 1.0 N (0.21 lb.) is applied to the mid span of the drive belt.

l  If the tension is wrong, loosen the four motor mounting screws.

l  Move the main motor to adjust the belt tension.

l  Tighten the screws and check the tension again.

l  Repeat the adjustment until the correct tension is achieved.

Drive Belt Arrangement ‐ Rear Access

Drive Belt Arrangement ‐ Front Access

Currency Evaluation Qualification Procedure

Note:  The S1 Currency Dispenser is calibrated in the same way as the other dispensers in the 58XX and 56XX ranges of ATMs and singularity values previously calculated for these are valid.

When the first dispenser is received in each country the local Field Engineering organization must establish the singularity values for each type of currency to be dispensed. These singularity values must then be entered to every ATM dispensing that currency, upon initial installation or whenever the dispenser control board or the LVDT has been changed or repaired.

The currency evaluation qualification procedure can only be performed on a calibrated dispenser. Attempting the procedure on an uncalibrated or incorrectly calibrated dispenser will give incorrect results.

Calibrating the Dispenser

Note:  Dispensers are shipped pre‐calibrated by the manufacturing plant. Calibration is required if the LVDT or control board are replaced or NVRAM is corrupted or a new version of firmware is download.

The dispenser maintains an internal compensation factor in NVRAM on the dispenser control board. This compensation factor allows for differences that exist between the singularities calculated by different LVDT assemblies because of mechanical tolerances. The dispenser adjusts the LVDT compensation factor automatically as bills of a known singularity value are dispensed. While bills are dispensed the actual average of good single bill singularities is measured over 255 bills. This average is compared to the singularity figure typed in at installation time and the compensation factor is adjusted accordingly. Initially the compensation factor is set to 80H (equivalent to 1.00) and this is changed automatically by the dispenser and updated every 255 bills.

To achieve dispenser calibration at least 255 bills of a known singularity must be dispensed after a power reset. This may be local currency or test media.

The following procedure describes how to calibrate a dispenser on a terminal running on the XP platform using SYSTEM APPLICATION. For details of System Application, refer to atm Notes Self Service Support, System Application User Guide (B006‐6167).

Level 1 diagnostic tests are required to dispense cash and for this reason you need to insert the field engineer’s Service Key.

The procedure is as follows:

1.     For each cassette type, adjust the cassette guides if necessary to accept the test currency, and set the cassette magnets for the required cassette type. Refer to currency cassette chapter in the dispense section of this manual for details.

2.     Load the test currency into the cassette.

3.     Insert the cassette into the dispenser.

4.     Put the ATM into supervisor mode.

5.     Select the SELF‐SERVICE CONFIGURATION option from the SUPERVISOR menu.

6.     Then select the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION option.

7.     Then choose the USB CASH HANDLER option. The system will then instruct the CE to wait while the Dispenser Transport is cleared.

8.     The system with display the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu.

9.     Then choose the SET option.

10.  The system will then display the NOTE CONFIGURATION set up menu as shown below. The menu is spread over two pages which is navigated using page up and page down options.

11.  To start changing the note configuration activate the Reset option.

12.  Enter Note Size for Type 1. This is repeated for Types 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7.

13.  Enter the Singularity for Type 1. This is repeated for Types 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7.

14.  To accept all the changes made select OK.

15.  The system will redisplay the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu shown below.

16.  To finally confirm the changes activate the Toggle option to change the NO option to YES.

17.  Return to the SYSTEM APPLICATION main Menu and select the DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC option.

18.  Select the CASH HANDLER option from the DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC menu.

19.  Operate the dispenser security switch.

20.  Select SET NOTES option from the CASH HANDLER menu. The number of notes to be picked is 40 (50 for special China version) from cassette type 1

21.  Change the Loop Off option to Loop On.

22.  Select the DISPENSE option and allow the loop count to reach at least 7 before stopping the command.

The dispenser is now calibrated and you can evaluate the currency to be dispensed as described in the next section.

Establishing Singularity and Size

In this procedure you have to cause the ATM to calculate the singularity and size of 40 (50 bills for special China version) dispensed bills five times for each currency you wish to evaluate. Due to the nature of the currency the singularity calculated may vary for each attempt. Add the five figures shown in the Parameters Option and take the average (divide by five and round to the nearest whole number) and the answers are the singularity and size values you enter to the ATM and to all ATMs using the same currency.

To achieve a good singularity figure the currency loaded for this procedure should comprise of new bills. Load the currency so that the same side of each bill is facing the truck door of the cassette. Put the bills into the cassette in 50 bill bunches, alternately right way up and upside down (see the following illustration). This makes sure that variations in inking are allowed for.

The singularity procedure is as follows:

1.     Prepare cassettes to accept the denominations of currency you will normally be dispensing from the ATMs. Refer to currency cassette chapter in the dispense section of this manual for the method of adjusting cassettes to currency size.

2.     Set the cassette magnets to indicate cassette types 1, 2, 3 and 4 as required. Refer to currency cassette chapter in the dispense section of this manual for this setting.

3.     Load at least 200 bills of each denomination of the currency into the cassettes and insert the cassettes into the dispenser.

4.     Put the ATM into supervisor mode.

5.     Select the SYSTEM APPLICATION option from the ATM opening menu.

6.     Select the SELF‐SERVICE CONFIGURATION option.

7.     Then choose the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION option.

8.     Then choose the CASH HANDLER option. The system will display the following screen.

9.     Then choose the LEARN option.

10.  Select the SET NOTES option to change the number of bills to be dispensed during the LEARN process.

11.  The system will display the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu showing the cassette types available (only those present in the ATM) as shown below.

12.  Select Type 1 from the menu shown below and the system will display the menu below which allows you to change the number of bill to be dispensed.

13.  Return to NOTE CONFIGURATION menu and activate Type 1.

14.  The system will perform a test and return the message shown below.

15.  The system will return to the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu.

16.  Make a note of the singularity and size figures on the screen against the cassette and type selected or all cassette types if applicable. The figures are obtained through the Parameters Option

17.  Empty the purge bin as necessary.

18.  Repeat steps 11 to 18 until you have five readings of singularity and size for each cassette type loaded.

19.  Add each set of five figures and divide the total by five to obtain an average singularity and size for each cassette type.

20.  Select the PARAMETER option from the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu

21.  Modify as appropriate the parameters you require to change.

22.  To accept all the changes made select OK and the changes will be accepted.

23.  The system will redisplay the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu shown below.

24.  To finally confirm the changes activate the Toggle option to change the NO option to YES.

25.  Return the system to the SYSTEM APPLICATION MAIN menu.

The procedure is now complete. From the UTILITIES menu you can now enter level 1 diagnostics and dispense notes to test the validity of the singularity values. A minimum of one cassette full of used notes and one cassette full of new notes of each denomination should be dispensed. New notes must be loaded with alternate packs right way up and then upside down. Bowed notes must be loaded with the bow towards the note pusher.

A reject rate less than 1.5% must be achieved when dispensing an average of 2.5 bills per transaction. If the reject rate is greater than this the singularity and size values should be recalculated.

Calculation of Reject Rate

The reject rate is calculated using the following formula. The numbers for rejected bills and total bills picked are taken from tallies.

Total Number of Rejected Bills

Reject Rate               =            x 100% Total Bills Picked + Total Number of Rejected Bills

Error Messages

Errors occurring during bill configuration procedures result in the error messages described below.

Dispenser Clear Transport Error

When the DISPENSER BILL CONFIG option is selected from the CONFIGURATION menu a CLEAR command is sent to clear the transport of any bills. If the clear operation fails then the following error screens shown below are displayed. Each screen is displayed for five seconds before the next one is displayed. You return to the CASH HANDLER menu via the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION menu.

Change Parameter Errors

The currency parameters are checked for errors as they are entered. If an error is detected then the error message shown below is displayed. The incorrect entry is highlighted and you can re‐enter a correct value in the error position.

The message is shown for five seconds and then you are prompted to enter the new parameter value again. Once all the parameter values have been changed and checked, the main dispenser screen reappears with the new parameter values. If a mistake becomes apparent at this point then the user can select CHANGE again.

The dispenser parameter error messages are as follows:

l  ERROR ‐ VALID RANGE XX ‐ XXX ‐ Parameter value is outside the permissible range. This applies to bill sizes and singularity values

l  DUPLICATE VALUE IN SEQUENCE ‐ A duplicate value has been entered in the presentation order

l  ERROR ‐ INVALID SEQUENCE ‐ The user has input fewer than four values for the presentation order.

Learn Parameter Errors

Cassette Errors During Learn - If an attempt to learn the parameters from a particular cassette type fails then, providing the error is not fatal, the operation will be tried repeatedly until successful, or a fatal error occurs. Should a fatal error occur then the error screen shown below appears, and after five seconds, you are returned to the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu.

Dispenser Error During Learn - The following screen appears if a fatal dispenser error occurs while learning parameters from the dispenser. Any changes made up to this point can not be written to the dispenser therefore you are returned to the CASH HANDLER menu via the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION menu.

Dispenser Read/Write Errors - If, while communicating with the dispenser, an error occurs which is not fatal, then the operation is tried repeatedly until it is successful or until a fatal error occurs. When a fatal error is encountered then a DISPENSER COMMS ERROR screen showing one of the following messages is displayed. The CONFIG MENU activator on the screen returns you to the configuration menu.

Unable To Read Parameters ‐ A fatal error has occurred while reading data from the dispenser. Unable to read the currently configured dispenser parameters so can not continue with configuration.

Configuration Not Completed ‐ Fatal error while writing data to the dispenser. The configuration data is written to the dispenser NVRAM using three separate dispenser calls. One sets the new bill sizes, one sets the new singularity values and the third sets the new presentation order. Because the data is split into three parts, if this type of error occurs then the dispenser configuration is incomplete.

Cleaning Serial Number Read Transport Cameras

The upper and lower SNR transport cameras should be cleaned as part of regular preventive maintenance, especially in dusty environments. Cleaning will also be required to clear the states of health ‘USB serial number read too many invalid characters’ or ‘USB serial number read too many invalid serial numbers’ which are triggered when the number of invalid characters or invalid serial numbers read reaches the configured thresholds (default 10% and 5% respectively).

Clean the cameras using compressed air or a soft thin brush or cotton bud. Ingrained grime can be removed using a lint free cloth moistened with soapy water or an alcohol free wipe.

SNR transport at rear of first pick

MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

Removing the Electronics Box (Rear Access)

On the Rear Access Currency Dispenser the electronics box contains the main motor and pump assembly, solid state relay, and motor run capacitor. It also provides a mounting place for the dispenser control board. Its removal gives access to these components and also to the LVDT assembly.

1.     Disconnect the cable at the bottom left‐hand side of the control board.

2.     Push out the cable ties holding the harness to the top and left‐hand side of the control board cover.

3.     Loosen the two screws on the left‐hand side of the control board cover.

4.     Unscrew and remove the screw at the bottom right‐hand side of the control board cover.

5.     Remove the control board cover from the electronics box.

6.     Push out the cable ties holding the dispenser harness on to the electronics box.

7.     Disconnect the cables from the lower right‐hand side of the electronics box.

8.     Disconnect the remaining cables from the control board. Check that each connector is labelled with its control board connector number.

9.     Unscrew and remove the two screws securing the green turning wheel in position.

10.  Remove the green turning wheel from the presenter drive wheel and then ease off the timing belt.

11.  Remove the two plastic rivets securing the timing disk sensor in position by pushing the rivet centre on the timing disk side of sensor. Move the sensor clear of the timing disk.

12.  Loosen the four main motor mounting screws and ease the timing belt off the rear of the timing disk gear towards the presenter side frame.

14.  At the upper left‐hand side of the electronics box remove the screw attaching the earth strap to the presenter.

15.  Remove the air hose from the pump.

16.  Remove the two top screws (1 each side) holding the electronics box to the presenter.

17.  Remove the two bottom screws (1 each side) holding the electronics box to the Upper Pick Module.

18.  Lift the electronics box to release its hooks from the presenter tie shaft, and lift it clear of the dispenser

Replacing the Electronics Box

Fitting the replacement electronics box is the reverse of the removal procedure.

Removing the Control Board

Before removing the control board to resolve a dispenser performance issue (when Stack or Present command are not working for example), perform the following to make sure that the board is in fact the root cause:

1.     Check the connections to the board are all seated correctly.

2.     Check that the connectors are undamaged.

3.     Set switches 3 and 8 to ON, then perform a reset to re‐boot the system.

4.     Re‐calibrate the dispenser in System Application (Self Service Configuration menu), to set the note configuration and parameters.

5.     Authorise and authenticate the control board.

6.     Use Device Diagnostics to issue a Stack command with one note. Observe the note’s movement: it should exit the stack table smoothly and should not hesitate at the interface between the stack table and the presenter.

7.     Use Device Diagnostics to issue a Present command with one note. Observe the note’s movement as it moves to the exit.

8.     Use Device Diagnostics to issue a Clear (retract) command with one note. Observe the note’s movement as it moves to the purge bin.

9.     Repeat the Stack, Present and Clear commands for a 40 note stack.

10.  Repeat the sequence of commands for a one note stack and then a 40 note stack a further two times each.

11.  During the tests, there should be no present errors such as skewing or splaying; no pick failures (M_Status 3); no purges except for the ones under the Clear command; no sensor failures or jams in the main transport (M_Status 5) or presenter transport (M_Status 18); or presenter clamp/alignment mechanism problems (M_Status 12).

12.  If after this process, the original error is still evident, proceed with removing and replacing the control board.

Dispenser Control Board ‐ Rear Access

Remove the control board as follows:

1.     Loosen the two screws on the left‐hand side of the control board cover.

2.     Disconnect the cable at the bottom left‐hand side of the control board.

3.     Unscrew and remove the screw on the bottom right‐hand side securing the control board cover to the electronics box.

4.     Remove the control board cover from the electronics box.

5.     Push out the cable ties holding the dispenser harness on to the electronics box.

6.     Disconnect the remaining cables from the control board. The strain relief fixing for the USB cable must be released prior to removal.

7.     Unscrew and remove the screws securing the heat sink to the left‐hand side of the electronics box.

8.     Unscrew and remove the four screws securing the control board to the electronics box and then remove the control board.

Replacing the Control Board

Fitting the replacement Control Board is the reverse of the removal procedure.

Dispenser Control Board ‐ Front Access

On the Front Access Dispenser the control board is attached to its mounting plate by four M4 Pozidrive screws into stand‐offs and a further two M3 screws through the heat sinks, as shown in the illustration below

The control board mounting plate is hung in slots in the presenter side frames and fastened by a screw at each side in the positions indicated in the illustration below:

Removing the Main Motor

For the Rear Access Presenter procedure, see the section “Removing the Electronics Box”.

Front Access

Proceed as follows to remove the main motor from the front access:

1.     Remove the cable guard (3 screws) at the left‐hand side of the dispenser and let it hang free.

2.     Remove two connectors from the SSR assembly and then the 4 screws (two at each side) and remove the assembly.

3.     Remove the green handwheel (2 screws).

4.     Remove the circlip and retaining washer and slip off the timing belt between the handwheel and main motor shaft.

5.     Remove the plastic rivets holding the timing disk sensor and move the sensor clear of the timing disk.

6.     Slacken the four screws holding the main motor to the side frame.

7.     Ease the timing belt off the timing disk gear towards the presenter side frame.

8.     Remove the timing disk from its shaft and lift the timing belt off the main motor pulley.

9.     Remove four motor screws, slackened in step 6, and lift the motor out of the slot in the side frame.

10.  Disconnect the vacuum hose from the pump.

Removing the LVDT

Dispenser LVDT ‐ Rear Access

In the Rear Access dispenser the LVDT assembly is attached between the side frames of the presenter by two screws at either side. To remove the LVDT proceed as follows:

Note:  There is no field adjustment on this LVDT version.

1.     Make sure you have access to both sides of the dispenser.

2.     Remove the electronics box as described in the previous procedure.

3.     Remove the four screws attaching the LVDT assembly to the presenter side frames ‐ two at either end

4.     Slide the LVDT forward and out via the space vacated by the electronics box, taking care not to trap any wires.

Dispenser LVDT ‐ Front Access

Remove the LVDT assembly from the Front Access dispenser as follows:

1.     Remove the main motor, refer to section “Removing the Main Motor”.

2.     Remove the LVDT shield (2 screws in presenter side frames at both sides).

3.     Remove the circlips inside and outside of the right‐hand side frame, on the drive shaft of the LVDT upper belt transport.

4.     Slide the shaft out of the presenter right‐hand side frame so that the tension is removed from the transport belts.

5.     Remove the screws from the LVDT assembly (2 screws in the presenter side frames at both sides).

6.     Ease the LVDT assembly out between the belts.

Replacing the LVDT

Fitting the replacement LVDT is the reverse of the removal procedure.

Electronic Verification of LVDT

The LVDT should be verified by following the Calibrating the Dispenser procedure section of this chapter.

The only additional action required is to check that the LVDT calibration ratio returned in the last byte of M_DATA is 80H ± 12.5%, that is between the following limits:

l  Minimum: 50H

l  Mean: 80H

l  Maximum: B0H

NOTE:   Values outside the range given above indicate that further investigation of the LVDT may be necessary, but values less than 60H and greater than A0H should be investigated.

Pick Module Timing

The S1 dispenser does not require any timing relationship to be set between the action of the pick modules and the presenter. The pick module to pick module relationship does, however, still require to be set. The adjustment procedures are described in Aria pick module chapter of the dispense section of this manual.

CABLING

Internal Cables

The diagrams in this section are the schematics of the internal cables of the Currency Dispenser. Refer to the Aria pick module section of the Dispense Chapter of this manual Aria pick module internal cables.

Dispenser Main Motor

Dispenser Interconnection Diagram


Presenters Cabling (Sheet 1 of 4)

Presenter Cabling (Sheet 2 of 4)

Presenters Cabling (Sheet 3 of 4)

Presenters Cabling (Sheet 4 of 4)


1

2

3

4


CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT

This section includes pinouts of the connectors on the Currency Dispenser Control Board.

USB Connector

The USB Interface connector (J2) provides the USB interface to the USB dispenser control board. The connector is a standard right‐angled USB Type‐B connector with the following pinout.

1

2

3

4

5

BUS_PWR

USB_DUSB_D+

NC

GND

Transport LEDS and Sensors

The connector (J8) carries the signals to the currency dispenser transport LEDs and sensors 1 to 5, and also provides interfaces to the purge bin and ac motor. This connector is a 24‐way right‐angle header with the following pinout:

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

AC_MOTOR_ONb+5 V

TSEN1T1LED_POS

TSEN1_POST1LED

TSEN2T2LED_POS

TSEN2_POST2_5LED

TSEN3T3LED_POS1

TSEN3_POST3LED

TSEN4T4LED_POS

TSEN4_POST4LED

TSEN5T5LED_POS

TSEN5_POST2_5LED

GNDPURGE_INb

Pick Modules

The connector J4 provides the interface to the currency dispenser pick modules. It is a 40‐way right‐angle latched header connector with the following pinout:

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

CAS_ID1bGND

CAS_ID2bGND

CAS_ID3bGND

CAS_ID4bGND CAS_TEMPbGND CASLOWbGND

N/CLEDON_PICK

GNDGND

S0S1

DISABLEbCOILENb

PICKPSEN1 PSEN2PSEN3

PSEN4PICK_TXD

PICK_RXDGND

GND+12 V +5 V+5 V

GNDGND

GNDGND

+24 V+24 V

+24 V+24 V

Note Thickness Sensor/ LVDT

The connector (J9) provides the interface to the Note Thickness sensor (LVDT). This is a 10‐way right angled latch header connector with the following pinout:

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

+5 VGND

STRAIN_REFNTS1

NTS2NULL_NTS

NULL_OKN/C

LVDT_GAIN_SELbN/C

Stepper Motors

The connector J13 provides the interface to the three stepper motors used in the currency dispenser. This is a 12‐way right‐angled header with the following pinout:

7

1

8

2

PRES_A_POSPRES_B_POS

PRES_C_POSPRES_D_POS

9

3

10

4

11

5

12

6

CLAMP_A_POSCLAMP_B_POS

CLAMP_C_POSCLAMP_D_POS

ALIGN_A_POSALIGN_B_POS

ALIGN_C_POSALIGN_D_POS

Intelligent Cassette Interface

The connector (J11) provides the interface from the USB dispenser control board to the ICS module. This is a 10‐way right‐angle header with the following pinout:

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

+24 V+24 V

GNDGND

+5 VGND

ICS_TXDICS_RXD

GNDN/C

Clamp Middle Position Sensor

The connector (J5) provides the interface to the Clamp Tray Mid‐Position sensor. The connector is a 4‐way right‐angle header with the following pinout:

1

2

3

4

CLAMP_MID_LED

GND

+5V_MID‐SEN

CLAMP_MID

Motor Sensors

The connector (J6) provides the interface to the stepper motor sensors. The connector is a 24‐way right‐angle header with the following pinout:

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

CLAMP_UP_LEDALIGN_LED

GNDGND

+5V_CLAMP_UP+5V_ALIGN_HOME

CLAMP_UPALIGN_HOME

CLAMP_DOWN_LEDPRES_TD_LED

GNDGND

+5V_CLAMP_DOWN+5V_PRES_TDISK

CLAMP_DOWNPRES_TDISK

CONF1MAIN_TD_LED

GNDGND

CONF2+5V_MAIN_TDISK

GNDMAIN_TDISK

+24V Connector

The connector (J17) provides the +24v power supply to the onboard regulators which generate +12v, +5V and +3.3V. The connector is a 2 way right angled header with the following pinout:

1

2

+24V GND

+24V_Interlock Connector

The connector (J18) provides the +24v interlock power supply to the motor drive and solenoid drive. The connector is a 3 way right angled header with the following pinout:

1

2

3

+24V_INT

GND

+24V _INT

Fascia Shutter I2C Connector

The connector (J20) provides the I2C interface to the fascia shutter. The connector is a 6 way right angled header with the following pinout:

1

2

3

4

5

6

GND

GND

I2C_SDA_BUF

GND

I2C_SCL_BUF

GND

TTL Shutter Connector

The connector (J21) provides the interface to the TTL shutter. The connector is a 4 way right angled header with the following pinout:

1

2

3

4

SHUT_OPEN

GND

SHUT_ONb Shut_LOCK

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

l Vacuum gauge and adaptor. l Test notes.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

For the preventive maintenance schedule and details of the required tasks for the S1 dispenser, refer to the Preventive Maintenance section of this manual.


Aria Pick Module

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

There are two types of Aria pick module; the single pick module holds one currency cassette, and the double pick module holds two cassettes, one above the other. The term Pick Unit is also used in this chapter to mean a cassette position, that is, there is one pick unit provided by a single pick module and two pick units in a double pick module.

The Aria single pick module is shown in the illustration below.

The Aria double pick module is shown in the following two illustrations:

Specifications

Weight

The weights of the pick module and cassettes are:

Single pick module = 6.3 kg (13.9 lb.) Currency cassette empty = 3.2 kg (7.05 lb.) Double pick module = 9.7 kg (21.38 lb.)           Currency cassette full = 6.0 kg (13.2 lb.)

Voltage And Current

The Pick Interface Board circuits require the following voltages at the currents shown:

l  + 5 V  0.25 V at 0.2 A (maximum) l +12 V  1.20 V at 0.1 A (maximum)

l  +24 V  2.40 V at 0.5 A (maximum).

Functions of the Pick Module

The functions performed by pick modules are to:

l  provide support for currency cassettes

l  identify the inserted cassettes

l  open the front of the inserted cassettes

l  lift (pick) bills one by one from the cassettes

l  detect when currency is running low

l  transport the bills to the pick module above or to the presenter.

The components of the pick modules and presenter to achieve the above functions are:

l  cassette guides and latch

l  cassette identity sensors

l  pick module keyplate l pick action:

l  pick arms l vacuum cups l pick timing:

l  timing disk

l  pick solenoid

l  pick sensor

l  cassette low sensor

l  belt transport

l  main motor and vacuum pump l pick interface boards l serial number read.

Cassette Guides and Latch

The currency cassette rests on rails on the side frames of the pick module. Upper plastic guides on the side frames and the spring loaded catch hold the cassette firmly in position.

Cassette Identity Sensors

A printed circuit board on the side of the pick module carries two sets of four encapsulated reed switches. Each set of switches is in close proximity to an inserted currency cassette and is influenced by the magnetic fields of small permanent magnets in a housing on the side of the cassette.

The magnets can be moved within the housing or left out so that certain combinations of reed switches SW1, SW2, SW3, SW4, are operated. This achieves a binary code which is used to identify the cassette as type 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7. When the currency cassette is inserted into a pick module in any position in the dispenser, it signals its identity via the reed switches. The firmware identifies each cassette and so is able to select the proper one for dispensing bills of a specific denomination.

Pick Module Keyplate

When the cassette is inserted into the dispenser the prongs of the pick module keyplate enter the holes in its base. The cassette door is pushed into the cassette base, leaving the front open to permit the currency to be picked and dispensed.

Pick Action

The stack is formed by the action of the bill alignment mechanism, so the S1 dispenser does not require the accurate presenter/pick module timing relationship that the 56xx stacker wheel type of presenter does, however, the Aria pick module timing should still be set to ensure clean delivery of the bills from the cassette into the pick module transport.

Pick Timing

The pick shaft gets its oscillating motion from the gear segment attached to a crank which is driven by a cam follower riding in a track in the cluster drive cam. The cluster drive is driven from the transport through an idler gear. The pick arms move continuously between a position where the pick vacuum cups are above the D wheels to where the vacuum cups are pushing the currency back into the cassette.

Attached to the cluster drive cam is a plastic disk printed with timing marks. A cut out section of the disk forms a timing arc which is detected by an optical switch and is used (ANDed with a signal from the currency dispenser control board) to produce the electrical pulses that energize and de‐energize the pick solenoid valve. The solenoid valve is energized following a transition through sensor clear to sensor blocked and it remains energized while the segment on the disk is obscuring the optical sensor. This time corresponds to the time when the pick arms are just reversing away from the currency in the cassette until they are above the D wheels.

When the solenoid valve is de‐energized it closes off the pump section of tubing. The tubing to the pick arm vents to atmosphere via backflow through the de‐energized solenoid. The note drops off the suction cups and is gripped by the D wheels and pinch rolls.

The letter D and numbers 1, 2, 3, and 4 printed on the timing disk are used to set and check the timing of individual pick modules and this adjustment is described in the “Adjustments” section of this chapter.

Pick Sensor

The pick sensor consists of two assemblies hard wired to the pick harness. A phototransistor is on one assembly and an infra‐red light emitting diode is on the other. The light emitting diode is in the same assembly as the cassette low sensor (see next section). The pick sensor and the LED are attached so that they “look” across the path of the notes between the pick mechanism and the transport. When a note blocks the light path, it is detected. The pick sensor output is converted into note width by monitoring the number of interrupts while the sensor is blocked with the interrupts generated by the main transport timing disk on the presenter. A difference of plus 3 or minus 5 timing wheel ticks in width from the known width of the currency (stored in NVRAM) will cause the note to be rejected to the purge bin and the pick to be attempted three more times.

Cassette Low Sensor

The cassette low sensor consists of a reed switch attached to the pick module keyplate. The assembly also houses the pick LED. The reed switch is held on a bracket which projects into the open door of the cassette. It operates when a permanent magnet attached to the cassette currency pusher mechanism approaches the front of the cassette as the currency is dispensed. In the plastic cassette, the position of this magnet can be set in two positions to actuate the switch when 75  50 or 200  50 notes are left in the cassette.

Belt Transport

In the pick module transport the D‐Wheel shaft and the pinch wheel shaft are driven through a gear train. The gear train of the top pick module meshes with the gear train of the presenter. In the Aria double pick module, the gear train of the second pick position is driven by a toothed belt from the top module.

Notes are driven from the D‐Wheel/pinch wheel shafts into plastic note guides that deflect them into the vertical transport. The vertical transport consists of three belts stretched between an upper (driven) shaft and a lower idler shaft. These belts press the notes against smooth plastic skid plates while driving them upwards into, either the transport of a higher pick module or the presenter transport. The top shaft of the pick module vertical transport is driven by a toothed belt from a pulley wheel fixed to the D‐Wheel shaft.

Main Motor and Vacuum Pump

The dispenser main motor drives the LVDT transport and all pick modules via toothed timing belts. It also drives the vacuum pump to provide a vacuum to the pick line via 6 mm bore tubing. A vacuum reservoir is located near the pump to improve the system vacuum, and an air filter in the tubing above the first pick module protects the pump from damage caused by ingress of grit particles.

The motor control circuits are located on the dispenser control board.

Pick Interface Boards

The boards act as an interface between the actuators and sensors in the currency dispenser pick module and the currency dispenser control board.

The interface boards use mixed technology, with both Surface Mount Technology (SMT) and Plated Through Hole (PTH) components. A ribbon cable harness connects the boards to cascaded pick interface boards in two, three, or four cassette dispensers. All the control lines from the dispenser control board, and the sensor information returning to that board, are routed via a parallel bus interface. Signals between cascaded pick interface boards are boosted where necessary.

The following diagrams show a Single Pick Interface plus a Double Pick Interface board and two Double Pick Interface Boards connected to the Currency Dispenser Control Board.

Single Pick Interface Board

The following illustration shows the layout of the components on the front and rear of the single pick interface board.

Double Pick Interface Board

The following illustration shows the layout of the components on the front and rear of the double pick interface board.

Serial Number Read

The serial number read (SNR) transport is an optional anti‐fraud feature in the double pick module, primarily for the China market. A pair of scanners reads the denomination and serial number of every note as it passes from the pick to the presenter, and also takes an image.

There is an SNR control board mounted on the side of the pick module.

                                           (to dispenser board)      (to USB hub)

Note that the scanners are calibrated by the manufacturer and matched to a specific control board by serial numbers, so boards and scanners must not be swapped out individually. The Field Replaceable Unit for the Serial Number Read function is the entire pick module.

ADJUSTMENTS

Pick Module Timing

S1 dispensers use a bill alignment mechanism to form the note stack and do not require any timing relationship to be set between the action of the pick modules and the presenter.

The pick module to pick module relationship does, however, still require to be set. The adjustment procedures in this section are described for single and double pick modules. The aim of these procedures is to attach correctly timed pick modules below the presenter with the timing disks of the pick units aligned to the timing marks 1, 2, 3, and 4, reading from the topmost pick module to the bottom.

             1 High Dispenser       2 High Dispenser       3 High Dispenser      4 High Dispenser

 

Presenter

P1 Timing Disk = 1

 

Presenter

P2 Timing Disk = 1

      Timing Disk = 2

 

Presenter

P2 Timing Disk = 1

 Timing Disk = 2

P1 Timing Disk = 3

 

Presenter

P2 Timing Disk = 1

      Timing Disk = 2

P2 Timing Disk = 3

      Timing Disk = 4

P1 = Single Pick Module

P2 = Double Pick Module

Note:  Where there is a mixture of Aria and 56XX type pick modules, then the Aria type must always be the bottom pick module.

You must carry out the procedures in the order given:

l  Separating the Pick Units of the Double Pick Module

l  Pick Unit Internal Timing

l  Double Pick Module Pick Unit Relationship l Pick Module to Presenter Timing

l  1 High Dispenser

l  2 High Dispenser

l  3 High Dispenser

l  4 High Dispenser.

Separating the Pick Units of the Aria Double Pick Module

To adjust a double pick module you must first isolate the gear trains of the two pick units by removing the timing belt shown in the following figure.

Retain the timing belt until required to reinstall it in the procedure “Joining the Pick Units of the Double Pick Module”.

Pick Unit Internal Timing

The only relationship to be set in the pick unit is between the pick wheel and the cam driven vacuum arm line.

Note:  In a double pick unit make the adjustment on the upper pick unit first

The method of setting is as follows:

1.     Position the teeth mesh between the drive segment and pick line so that the upper tooth of the drive segment is above the upper tooth of the pick line.

2.     Take off and retain the 26T idler gear directly below the pick line (left side of the module looking from the currency cassette).

3.     Rotate the gears of the pick module transport until the pick D wheel is free of its mating tension wheel.

4.     Rotate the drive cluster in a clockwise direction until the D timing mark on the timing disk lines up with the timing sensor body.

5.     Rotate the gears of the pick module transport until the interrupted part of the pick D wheels is away from the pick arms. Turn the gears until a gap of from 0.5 mm  0.5 mm (0.02 in.  0.02 in.) exists between the leading edges of the pick D wheels and the tension wheels as shown in the first figure above.

6.     Replace the idler gear removed in step 2. Be careful not to dislodge the setting.

7.     Carry out steps 1 to 6 on the lower pick unit.

Double Pick Module Pick Unit Relationship

When the internal timing of both pick units of the double pick module has been set, the pick units have to be locked in a fixed timing relationship. Proceed as follows:

1.    Rotate the gear train of the upper pick unit to move the timing disk in a clockwise direction until the 1 timing mark on the drive cluster timing disk lines up with the timing sensor body.

CAUTION

Always rotate the gear train in its normal direction of travel. The pick timing disks should turn clockwise. Do not move the gear train backwards and forwards.

2.     Rotate the gear train of the lower pick unit until the 2 timing mark on the drive cluster timing disk lines up with the timing sensor body.

3.     Place the timing belt (removed in the procedure “Separating the Pick Units of the Double Pick Module”) around the pulley wheel of the lower pick position and put it on as many teeth as possible of the pulley wheel of the upper pick position, taking care not to dislodge the settings. Turn the upper gear train in the normal direction of travel (see Caution above) to ride the timing belt fully on to the pulley wheel.

Presenter Timing

The S1 bill alignment dispenser does not require any timing relationship to be set between the action of the pick modules and the presenter.

PIck Module to Presenter Timing

Once the pick modules have been prepared, as in the previous procedures, the pick modules can be assembled with a presenter to produce the complete currency dispenser. There are no timing adjustments to the presenter.


The dispenser is heavy. Get help to lift it.

.

1 High Dispenser

1. Rotate the gear train of the single pick module to move the timing disk in a clockwise direction until the 1 timing mark on the drive cluster timing disk lines up with the timing sensor body (see above illustration).

CAUTION

Always rotate the gear train in its normal direction of travel. The pick timing disk should turn clockwise. Do not move the gear train backwards and forwards.

2.     Attach the pick module to the presenter.

3.     Check that the 1 timing mark is in line with the timing sensor body.

2 High Dispenser

1.     Rotate the gear train of the double pick module to move the timing disks in a clockwise direction until the 1 timing mark on the upper drive cluster timing disk lines up with the timing sensor body.

Always rotate the gear train in its normal direction of travel. The pick timing disks should turn clockwise. Do not move the gear train backwards and forwards.

2.     Check that the 2 timing mark on the lower drive cluster timing disk lines up with the timing sensor body.

3.     Attach the double pick module to the presenter.

4.     Check that all the timing marks are aligned. Timing marks 1 and 2 should be in line with their respective timing sensor bodies.

3 High Dispenser

1. Rotate the gear train of the double pick module (observe the caution below) to move the timing disks in a clockwise direction until the 1 timing mark on the upper drive cluster timing disk lines up with the timing sensor body.

CAUTION

Always rotate the gear train in its normal direction of travel. The pick timing disk should turn clockwise. Do not move the gear train backwards and forwards.

2.     Check that the 2 timing mark on the lower drive cluster timing disk lines up with the timing sensor body.

3.     Attach the pick module to the presenter.

4.     Rotate the gear train of the single pick module (observe the caution above) to move the timing disks in a clockwise direction until the 3 timing mark on the cluster timing disk lines up with the timing sensor body.

5.     Attach the single pick module to the bottom pick module of the double pick module.

6.     Check that all the timing marks are aligned. Timing marks 1, 2, and 3 should be in line with their respective timing sensor bodies and a presenter timing arrow should be next to the timing stud.

4 High Dispenser

1.     Rotate the gear train of the first double pick module to move the timing disks in a clockwise direction until the 1 timing mark on the upper drive cluster timing disk lines up with the timing sensor body.

Always rotate the gear train in its normal direction of travel. The pick timing disks should turn clockwise. Do not move the gear train backwards and forwards.

2.     Check that the 2 timing mark on the lower drive cluster timing disk lines up with the timing sensor body.

3.     Attach the double pick module to the presenter.

4.     Rotate the gear train of the lower double pick module (observe the caution above) to move the timing disks in a clockwise direction until the 3 timing mark on the upper drive cluster timing disk lines up with the timing sensor body.

5.     Check that the 4 timing mark on the lower drive cluster timing disk lines up with the timing sensor body.

6.     Attach the double pick module to the bottom of the first double pick module.

7.     Check that all the timing marks are aligned. Timing marks 1, 2, 3, and 4 should be in line with their respective timing sensor bodies.

Note 1:  For dispenser assembly the procedure can be carried out by building from pick unit 4 upwards with the presenter added last.

Note 2:  Re‐configuration is required when downgrading from four to three or three to two pick modules. The NVRAM must be cleared to de‐configure the removed pick modules.

TEST TOOLS

None.

INTERNAL CABLES

The diagrams in this section are the schematics of the internal cables of the Aria single and double pick modules.


Single Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 1 of 2)

Single Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 2 of 2)

Double Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 1 of 2)

Double Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 2 of 2)


STRAPPING

Fuse FS1

Fuse FS1 is in the 24 V dc line to the pick solenoid on each Single Pick Interface board. There is one fuse on the double pick interface board, protecting the line to both pick unit solenoids. refer to the following diagrams for location of the fuse.

The fuse is a 125 V, 1.0 A pigtail fuse, part number 007‐9830118.

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT

This section shows the pinouts of the connectors on the Single and Double Pick Interface boards and explains the function of the signals.

Connector J1

Connector J1 on the Pick Interface Board provides an interface to the Currency Dispenser Control Board and also to cascaded Pick Interface boards. The interface consists of power lines from the Currency Dispenser Control Board or cascaded Pick Interface Board, control lines from the Currency Dispenser Control Board, and sensor information and Cassette Data Bus signals to the Currency Dispenser Control Board. Provision is also made for an Intelligent Cassette interface.

J1 is a dual 20‐way connector with the following pinout:

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

CAS_ID1_OUTGround

CAS_ID1_OUTGround

CAS_ID3_OUTGround

CAS_ID4_OUTGround TEMP_OUTGround CASLOW_OUTGround

GULP‐LEDON

P0P1 S0S1

DISABLE‐COILEN

PICKPSEN1 PSEN2PSEN3

PSEN4TXD

RXDGround

Ground+12 V

+5 V+5 V

GroundGround

GroundGround

+24 V+24 V

+24 V+24 V

The function of the signals on connector J1 are described in the following table:

              Signal Name           Function

Control lines from the Dispenser Control Board:

                DISABLE‐                   LO = disables the operation of the pick valve solenoid

P0, P1, S0, S1 Decoded on the pick interface board to select the appropriate pick unit to pick from.

                PICK                          HI = enables the pick valve solenoid driver

Signal Name

Function

LEDON

HI = enables all LEDs associated with the pick sensors.

CAS_IDX_OUT‐

LO = magnet is next to ID reed switch X in selected cassette.

CASLOW_OUT‐

LO = currency is low in selected cassette.

COILEN, TXD, RXD

Reserved for use with intelligent cassette interface

PSENX

Analogue signal from bill picked sensor on Pick Module X.

TEMP_OUT‐

Pick module temperature low (below 10 deg.C) ‐ See Note.

Note:  Aria pick modules do not have the low temperature sensing thermistor that is fitted to 56XX pick modules. The harness attached to connector J2 of the Single Pick Interface or J5 of the Double Pick Interface, loops the TEMP1 signal to ground so that a logic 1 is produced by the circuit, representing “temperature good”.

Connector J2 (Single Pick) and J5 (Double Pick)

Connector J2 (Single Pick I/F Board) or J5 (Double Pick I/F Board) provides the interface to the sensors and actuators of the pick units.

Connector J2 has the following pinout:

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

SEN1‐SEN1+

TEMP1N/C

LED_PICK1+Ground

CASLOW1‐N/C

GULP_FEED (Not Used)Ground

GROUND_REFPICKARM_1+

PICKARM_1N/C

VLV1_ON‐+24V_FUSED

Connector J5 has the following pinout:

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

SEN1‐SEN1+

TEMP1N/C

GroundLED_PICK1+

CASLOW1‐N/C

GroundLED_PICKARM1+

PICKARM_1PICKARM_1+

VLV1_ON‐+24V_FUSED

GULP_FEED (Not Used)Ground

SEN2‐SEN2+

TEMP2N/C

GroundLED_PICK2+

CASLOW2‐N/C

GroundLED_PICKARM2+

PICKARM_2PICKARM_2+

VLV2_ON‐+24V_FUSED

The function of the signals on connector J2/J5 are described in the following table:

              Signal Name       Function

Sensors and Actuators

PICKARM1+

Provides voltage to optotransmissive switch transistor and LED.

PICKARM_1

Connects optotransmissive switch emitter to comparator to detect when switch blocked or clear and enable the pick valve solenoid logic.

LED_PICK1+

Provides voltage to LED anode of the cassette low sensor. The LED return is connected to ground at connector J2.

CASLOWX‐

Signals a cassette currency low state.

SEN1+, SEN1‐

Connection to the pick sensor optical transistor.

VLV1 ON‐

Switches the pick solenoid valve.

GULP_FEED

Not used ‐ see text below.

TEMPX

Connected to ground by harness ‐ see text below.

Gulp Feed Detector

The Aria pick modules do not have a gulp feed detector. If Aria and 56XX pick modules are mixed and a gulp feed occurs on the 56XX type, then the GULP_FEED signal is still passed via the Aria modules to the Currency Dispenser Control Board where it will immediately stop the dispenser main motor.

Low Temperature Thermistor

The Aria pick modules do not have a low temperature thermistor. The pick harness provides a short to ground of signal TEMPX to pin 6 of connector J2 or to pins 5 and 21 of connector J5 so that the TEMP_OUT‐ signal to the Control Board always indicates high (above 10 deg. C) temperatures.

Connector J3 (Single Pick) and J3/J4 (Double Pick)

Connector J3 on the Single and Double Pick Interface Boards is provided for the intelligent cassette interface. It has the following pinout:

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

+24 V+24 V

GroundGround

+5 VGround

TXD1_OUTRXD1_IN

INT1_PRES‐COILEN1

The Double Pick Interface Board has an additional identical connector (J4) for the the intelligent cassette interface for Pick Unit 2. The signal names are TXD2_OUT, RXD2_IN, INT2_PRES‐, and COILEN2.

Connector J4 (Single Pick) And J2 (Double Pick)

J4 (Single Pick I/F Board) or J2 (Double Pick I/F Board) is a dual 20‐way connector which carries the bus input lines to a cascaded Single Pick Interface board or Double Pick Interface board. It has the following pinout:

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

+24 V+24 V

+24 V+24 V

GroundGround

GroundGround

+5 V+5 V

+12 VGround

GroundRXD

TXDN/C

SEN4_INSEN3_IN

SEN2_INPICK_OUT

COILENDISABLE_OUT‐

S1_OUTS0_OUT

P1_OUTP0_OUT

LED_ON_OUTGULPGroundCASLOW_INGroundTEMP_INGroundCAS_ID4_IN‐

GroundCAS_ID3_IN‐

+24 VCAS_ID2_IN‐

+24 VCAS_ID1_IN‐

Control Signals

Control signals from the Dispenser Control board are output on connector J4/J2 via open collector drivers to maintain signal levels. The table below lists the input signal alongside the equivalent output to the cascaded board.

            Signal from Control Board  Signal to Cascaded Board

                PICK                                         PICK_OUT

                LEDON                                     LED_ON_OUT

                S0                                             S0_OUT

                S1                                             S1_OUT

                DISABLE                                   DISABLE_OUT

Sensor and Cassette Data Bus Signals

The signals from the transport sensors are buffered by unity gain operational amplifiers.

The cassette bus interface signals from the cascaded Pick Interface board are buffered on entry to higher position Pick Interface boards. The table below lists the names of the incoming signals against those sent to the Control board.

Signal from Cascaded Pick Interface

Signal to Control Board

CAS_ID1_IN‐

CAS_ID1_OUT‐

CAS_ID2_IN‐

CAS_ID2_OUT‐

CAS_ID3_IN‐

CAS_ID3_OUT‐

CAS_ID4_IN‐

CAS_ID4_OUT‐

TEMP_IN‐

TEMP_OUT‐

CASLOW_IN‐

CASLOW_OUT‐

SEN2_IN

PSEN2

SEN3_IN

PSEN3

SEN4_IN

PSEN4

The signals GULP‐, RXD, TXD, and COILEN‐ are directly connected between the bus output and the bus input connectors (J1 and J4/J2).


Currency Cassettes

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

atm Notes Currency Cassettes are portable containers, moulded in high impact polycarbonate, that are designed to store and release currency under the control of the parent currency dispenser sub‐system.

DESCRIPTION

The following versions of the currency cassette are available for use in ATMs:

l  Wide currency cassette:

l  standard security variant

l  tamper indicating variant

l  Fluiditi Replenishment Security variant l Fluiditi ATM Security variant.

l  1000 Rupee wide cassette

l  standard security variant

l  tamper indicating variant

All variants of the cassettes can be mechanically adjusted to hold currency of different lengths and widths and electro‐mechanically adjusted to provide a currency denomination code.

The mechanical adjustments allow the cassette to be set to accept a world wide range of currencies. The dimensions of the currency which can be used in the cassette vary depending on whether the cassette is to be used in a 50xx, 56xx or Personas terminal.

Wide currency cassettes accept currency of the following dimensions:

l  Minimum width and length 62 mm x 120 mm (2.44 in. x 4.72 in.) l Maximum width and length 95 mm x 172 mm (3.74 in. x 6.77 in.) 1000 Rupee Wide Currency Cassette variant:

l  Minimum width and length 62 mm x 120 mm (2.44 in. x 4.72 in.)

l  Maximum width and length 95 mm x 177 mm (3.74 in. x 6.97 in.)

The electro‐mechanical adjustments enable a cassette to be given a cassette identification code. Up to seven codes are possible, with each code allowing a different currency denomination to be loaded into a cassette. See “Cassette Identification Code” in this chapter.

Cassette Variances

Fluiditi currency cassettes use the small magnet housing but the side of the cassette is marked to accept the longer housing, indicating that the cassette is the wide type.

1000 Rupee Wide Cassettes Distinguishing Features

The distinguishing features that enable you to tell wide cassettes from 1000 Rupee wide cassettes are listed below:

                   No.      1000 Rupee Wide Cassette Wide Cassette

1          Warning Label     N/A

2          Label     N/A

3          Door shutter rib is cut off Standard shutter

4          Lid bracket           N/A

5          Shutter guide (Colour-Gray) Standard shutter guide (Colour-Brown)

                   No.      1000 Rupee Wide Cassette Wide Cassette

6          The head of clip magnet       Standard clip magnet holder holder is cut off

7          Note runner (Colour-Gray)   N/A Refer to the following illustrations:

Standard Security Currency Cassettes

The standard security cassettes are containers which offer the capability to seal the access lid. When the cassette is inserted into the dispenser, a mechanism opens a door in the cassette to allow the currency to be picked from the cassette and fed through the currency dispenser sub‐system.

When the cassette is removed from the dispenser the door is automatically closed and latched. To gain access to the cassettes interior, the optional seal is broken and the access lid opened and removed.

Tamper Indicating Currency Cassettes

The tamper indicating currency cassettes differ from the standard security cassettes in that they provide evidence of unauthorized attempts to open the container or that the cassette has been removed from the ATM and re‐inserted.

The cassette contains a mechanism and a coloured indicator in addition to the provision for sealing the access lid.

When the cassette is being prepared for insertion into the ATM, the mechanism is primed, with the indicator showing that it is primed (colour green), the currency is loaded into the cassette and then the access lid is closed and the seal fitted.

When the container is inserted into the ATM, then subsequently removed, a door is opened and closed in the same way as for the standard cassette, however the mechanism causes the coloured indicator to advance to show that the cassette has been inserted (colour white).

Should it be necessary to remove the cassette between replenishment operations, for example to clear a jam, this can be done up to six times before the container needs to be reset (primed) again. The indicator shows the insertions as 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6.

When the container is returned for replenishment it should be inspected according to local practice and the indicator checked that a single insertion/removal has occurred. If the indicator shows that more than one insertion/removal has occurred the circumstances must be investigated and verified. The access seal can then be broken to gain access for emptying and refilling.

Fluiditi Currency Cassettes

There are two types of Fluiditi currency cassettes: the Fluiditi ATM Security cassette and the Fluiditi Replenishment Security cassette. Both are designed to fit into a security system that injects a marking ink onto the currency within the cassette if the ATM is attacked. The currency is permanently stained and therefore no longer of any use. Because of this, it is very important that the correct procedures be observed when handling this type of cassette.

The Fluiditi ATM Security cassette looks exactly the same as a wide cassette, except for a small black plastic block on the right hand side. This block allows the ink to be fed into the cassette from the ink injection tank mounted on the side of the dispenser module. Inside the cassette lid is a spray bar with a series of small holes, through which the ink is sprayed onto the currency.

The Fluiditi ATM Replenishment cassette is the same as the ATM Security cassette except that is doesn’t have a green carry handle. Instead, it has holes on the front of the cassette to accept the pins on the Carrisafe hood that is used to remove and carry the cassette.

Once a cassette has had the security marking ink released into it, the cassette can no longer be used and should be disposed of in accordance with the appropriate instructions provided in Chapters “Fluiditi ATM Security” and “Fluiditi Replenishment Security”.

atm Notes recommends that only the service engineer should handle activated cassettes or clean spillages inside the ATM. Care must be taken when handling activated cassettes, as the ink is corrosive and stains permanently.

Cassette Components

The following illustrations show the open cassette (wide and standard types) looking from the rear (handle) end towards the front (truck door) end.

Cassettes are moulded in high impact polycarbonate in three major parts: the body, the lid, and the base.

Wide Plastic Cassette ‐ Components

The illustration below shows the components of the tamper indicating wide plastic cassette.

Tamper Indicators

All cassettes have the following features to indicate tampering:

l Door shutters have a notched section that breaks off when stressed l Plastic roller door has a deformable strip.

The Cassette Body

The cassette body holds the currency. It contains a spring‐loaded pusher mechanism that moves along a slot in the bottom of the body, to push the currency stack to the front of the cassette into the pick position. The currency stack is held between the left and righthand note guides. These adjust to suit currency of different lengths. The front ends of the note guides have spring fingers that help to separate the notes as they are picked from the stack.

Incorporated in the pusher is a note low block magnet to operate a reed switch in the pick module. This magnet can be set in either of two positions. A housing on one side of the cassette body contains up to four magnets which again operate reed switches on the pick module to signal the cassette identification code.

Also in the body compartment are the left and right spring‐loaded door shutters, the currency separator brushes and fingers, and the anti‐reset plunger. On the outside of the body are the lid latch and cassette carrying handle, the projecting lug which is used to latch the cassette into the pick module, and the embossed cassette identification code label.

The Cassette Lid

The lid hooks into locating slots at the front of the body and is latched at the rear. It holds note guides and spacers which adjust to suit currency width. A spring plunger in the body compartment of tamper indicating cassettes (refer to the illustration of the wide plastic cassette) is pushed down by the lid into the insertion counter mechanism (see the section “Insertion Counter”). An internal baffle at the latch end of the lid gives additional protection against an attempt to prise up the lid and fish for currency.

The lid is shaped so that it will not close properly if the pusher is not released or the cassette is overfilled.

The Cassette Base

The illustration below shows the components inside the tamper indicating cassette base.

The base of the cassette holds the truck door and its retraction mechanism, the pusher ratchet slide and lever, and the insertion counter and window (TI cassettes). The shape of the base forms rails which slide into the cassette guides in the pick module.

Cassette Operation

The above illustration shows the components of the dispenser pick module which mate with the cassette. When the cassette is inserted into the dispenser the prongs of the pick module keyplate enter the holes in the base of the cassette and push against locking pawls on the truck door. The door is pushed into the cassette base, leaving the front open to permit the currency to be picked from the cassette and dispensed.

Several other actions happen as the truck door is opened:

l  The door shutters are disengaged from the door and are pushed back by the pick line

l  The fingers next to the currency separator brushes drop down clear of the currency stack. The function of these fingers is to prevent notes at the front of the stack being dragged down by the opening door

l  The ratchet slide attached to the door lowers the ratchet lever so that it disengages from the pusher pawl

l  On TI cassettes the insertion counter is advanced one place (see the section “Insertion Counter”).

As the currency is dispensed the pusher moves forward under spring pressure to keep the stack of currency in position. The pick line has an eccentric motion which tends to push the currency stack back into the cassette against the action of the pusher. It is to permit this to and fro motion that the ratchet lever disengages from the pusher when the cassette is in the dispenser. When the pusher moves close to the front of the cassette the magnet in its base comes alongside metal plates under the floor of the currency compartment. These plates strengthen the magnetic field and transfer it to operate a reed switch on the pick module keyplate. This switch signals that the currency in the cassette is running low.

Removal of the cassette from the dispenser automatically closes and latches the front door and the interior of the cassette can only be reached by opening the top access lid. The ratchet is raised by the action of the door closing and is again in a position where it will engage with the pusher pawl. In this way the pusher is locked close to the currency stack so that the currency is held in place while the cassette is being carried. When the pusher is in its locked position the cassette lid can not be closed.

Pusher Operation

To load currency into the cassette the pusher is manually moved fully to the rear and locked until the currency is put in. It is then released against the back of the currency stack to keep it under pressure. Failure to release the pusher from its locked position will prevent the cassette lid from closing. You move the pusher by lifting the pusher pawl arms, sliding it to the rear, and then holding it in that position while lowering the arms so that the pusher pawl engages with the ratchet. There is one locking detent on the extreme rear end of the ratchet.

CAUTION

Lift the pusher pawl arms - do not squeeze.

LIFT - DO NOT SQUEEZE

Insertion Counter

                                                        Door Link          Cam     Lockout Spring    Index Pawl Link     Index Pawl

When the tamper indicating cassette is being prepared for insertion into the ATM, the mechanism is primed by pressing the reset lever to the side and releasing it until the indicator shows green. The currency is loaded into the cassette and then the access lid is closed and the seal fitted.

When the container is inserted into the dispenser, then subsequently removed, the front truck door is opened and closed in the same way as the standard cassette. The door also pushes a link which turns a cam linked to the index pawl engaged with the counter wheel. Each time the door is opened the wheel is advanced by the index pawl one fourteenth of a revolution. The wheel is marked on the edge and top with two sets of indications which show through two windows, one at the back of the cassette and one in the bottom of the currency compartment. The indications count the insertions as Green (cassette primed), White (first insertion), 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

On the sixth insertion a spring‐loaded follower, pressing against the edge of the counter wheel, moves into a detent in the wheel and locks it. This movement permits the springloaded door lockout lever to move in front of the door link when the cassette is pulled out of the pick module preventing the cassette from being used in the dispenser again until the insertion counter is reset. The anti reset plunger stops any movement of the reset lever while the cassette lid is closed. When the lid is opened the plunger spring lifts it clear of the lever mechanism and the counter wheel can be reset.

Further security is provided by the lockout lever which is driven out through the side of the cassette base by the action of the door link when the door is opening. This lever engages with a stop on the side frame of the pick module and prevents the cassette being pulled out of the pick module with the truck door open.

Cassette Identification Code

Each currency cassette shipped with an ATM is set with a code that can be read by the ATM software so that the cassette can be identified regardless of its position in the dispenser. The software matches the cassette code to a specific denomination of currency. Cassettes with the same code will be loaded with notes of the same value. Normally four cassette codes are recognized but up to seven codes are possible where extended cassette IDs have been selected in software (see the section “Setting the

Cassette Identification Code”). Cassettes should be marked to show which code is set.

The identification code of a cassette is set by up to four magnets contained in a plastic housing attached to the cassette side by a clip as shown in the illustration below of the Standard Width and Fluiditi currency cassette.

The Wide Currency Cassette has space in the plastic housing for six magnets (positions A, B, 1, 2, 3 and 4) as shown below, but only four (positions 1, 2, 3 and 4) are currently used.

The four magnets interact with four reed switches located on a printed circuit board attached to the frame of the dispenser pick module associated with the cassette location in the dispenser subsystem. Depending on whether a magnet is installed, or not, and the orientation of the magnet in positions 1, 2, 3 and 4, all four of the reed switches provide a code representing the cassette identification number.

When the currency cassette is inserted into a pick module in any position in the dispenser, it signals its identity via the reed switches. The firmware identifies each cassette and so is able to select the proper one for dispensing bills of a specific denomination.

Cassette Body to Lid Identification

The cassettes provided with an atm Notes four position dispenser could each be set to a different code, say Code 1, Code 2, Code 3 and Code 4, to dispense four different denominations or these could be changed so that, for example, the dispenser will dispense two different denomination notes from the four cassettes, that is with two cassettes set to Code 1 and two to Code 2. Because, also, the cassette has to be adjusted internally to accept a specific denomination of currency, lids and bodies of cassettes should be marked so that they can be kept together.

The currency cassette can be identified by writing the currency denomination on the inside or outside of both the body and lid, using an indelible ink pen.

The H‐8015‐STD1‐01/02‐08 Standard Plastic Cassette (shown below) has embossed numbers 1 to 5 on the body that can be used to identify cassette codes.

The letters H and L marked against positions 1 and 2 do not apply to ATMs.  The wide plastic cassette has embossing on the body and lid as shown in the following figure

and identification may be made as follows:

l  A: Colour coded stick‐on labels 10 mm x 15 mm (0.4 in. x 0.6 in.) approx.

l  B: Numerics for denoting cassette identification type

l  C: Recessed areas for either marking with indelible ink pens or for attaching adhesive labels to denote currency denomination, etc. at the discretion of the financial institution

l  D: Alphas for denoting additional cassette identification types or, for same use as B

Power Requirements

None.

TROUBLESHOOTING

No information available.

DIAGNOSTICS

None.

STRAPPING

None.

ADJUSTMENTS

Currency Length Adjustment

The currency length adjustment, which is, in effect, across the width of the cassette, is made by repositioning two note guides and four spacers located in the base of the cassette.

Adjustment is provided to allow the cassette to accommodate currency of lengths from 120 mm (4.72 in.) to 177 mm (6.97 in.).

There are two types of spacers available for currency length adjustment; segment and fixed size.

Segment Type Note Adjustment Spacers

The note guides in the body of the cassette bear against spacer blocks known as E spacers. These blocks have to be cut to certain lengths so that the note guides are supported the correct distance apart corresponding to the length of the currency being dispensed.

A sharp knife and a medium size cross‐head screwdriver are required to make these adjustments.

Fixed Size Note Adjustment Spacers

There are four fixed size spacers, also known as E spacers, which provide the same function as the Segment Type spacers described above. The fixed size spacers must be changed to suit the currency being dispensed, they can not be cut to size.

Note Low Sensing - In addition to the currency length and width adjustments, provision is also made to change the note low sensing in a cassette. Two note low sensing conditions are available:

l  75 notes +/‐ 50

l  200 notes + /‐ 50.

Currency Width Adjustment

The currency lid holds note guides and spacers which adjust to suit currency width, which is, in effect, the internal height of the cassette. There are two types of spacers available for currency width adjustment; segment and fixed size.

Segment Type Note Adjustment Spacers

The currency width adjustment is made by cutting the eight spacers between the upper note guides and the lid. Four of these spacers are the same as the currency length E spacers and four are known as yellow spacers (shown below).

A sharp knife and a medium size cross‐head screwdriver are required to make these adjustments.

Fixed Size Note Adjustment Spacers

There are eight fixed spacers which provide the same function as the Segment Type spacers described above. Four of these spacers are the same as the currency length E spacers and four are known as yellow spacers (shown above). The fixed size spacers must be changed to suit the currency being dispensed, they can not be cut to size.

Currency Length, Note Guide and “E” Spacer Codes

Wide Currency Cassette

Truck Door End

                                                            Note Guide                 E. Spacer

Currency Length (mm/in.)

                                                            L.H.            R.H.           L.H.           R.H.

Note Guide B to left, A to right:

                                                   Note Guide                 Note Guide

                                                          B                               A

120 (4.72)              B3           A2           E9           E10

121 (4.76)              B3           A2           E9           E10

122 (4.80)              B3           A3           E9           E9

123 (4.84)              B3           A3           E9           E9

124 (4.88)              B3           A3           E9           E9

125 (4.92)              B4           A3           E8           E9

126 (4.96)              B4           A3           E8           E9

127 (5.00)              B4           A4           E8           E8

128 (5.04)              B4           A4           E8           E8

129 (5.08)              B4           A4           E8           E8

130 (5.12)              B5           A4           E7           E8

131 (5.16)              B5           A4           E7           E8

132 (5.20)              B5           A5           E7           E7

 

Currency Length (mm/in.)

133            (5.24)

134            (5.28)

135            (5.32)

136            (5.36)

137            (5.40)

138            (5.44)

139            (5.48)140 (5.52)

141 (5.56)

Note Guide

E. Spacer

L.H. B5

B5

B6

B6

B6

B6

B6 B7

B7

R.H. A5

A5

A5

A5

A6

A6

A6 A6

A6

L.H.

E7

E7

E6

E6

E6

E6

E6

N/R

N/R

R.H.

E7

E7

E7

E7

E6

E6

E6 E6

E6

Note Guide A to left, B to right:

Note Guide A

 

Note Guide B

 

142 (5.60)

A5

B5

E5

E5

143 (5.64)

A5

B5

E5

E5

144 (5.68)

A5

B5

E5

E5

145 (5.72)

A5

B5

E5

E5

146 (5.76)

A6

B5

E4

E5

147 (5.80)

A6

B5

E4

E5

148 (5.83)

A6

B6

E4

E4

149 (5.87)

A6

B6

E4

E4

150 (5.90)

A6

B6

E4

E4

151 (5.94)

A7

B6

E3

E4

152 (5.98)

A7

B6

E3

E4

153 (6.02)

A7

B7

E3

E3

154 (6.06)

A7

B7

E3

E3

155 (6.10)

A7

B7

E3

E3

156 (6.14)

A8

B7

E2

E3

157 (6.18)

A8

B7

E2

E3

158 (6.22)

A8

B8

E2

E2

159 (6.26)

A8

B8

E2

E2

160 (6.30)

A8

B8

E2

E2

161 (6.34)

A9

B8

E1

E2

162 (6.38)

A9

B8

E1

E2

163 (6.42)

A9

B9

E1

E1

164 (6.46)

A9

B9

E1

E1

165 (6.50)

A9

B9

E1

E1

166 (6.54)

A10

B9

E

E1

167 (6.58)

A10

B9

E

E1

168 (6.62)

A10

B10

E

E

169 (6.66)

A10

B10

E

E

170 (6.70)

A10

B10

E

E

171 (6.74)

A11

B10

N/R

E

172 (6.78)

(N/R - No E spacer required)

A11

B10

N/R

E

1000 Rupee Wide Currency Cassette

                                                            Note Guide                 E. Spacer

Currency Length (mm/in.)

                                                            L.H.            R.H.           L.H.           R.H.

Note Guide B to left, A to right:

                                                   Note Guide                 Note Guide

                                                          B                               A

120 (4.72)              B3           A3           E9           E9

121 (4.76)              B3           A3           E9           E9

122 (4.80)              B3           A3           E9           E9

123 (4.84)              B4           A3           E8           E9

124 (4.88)              B4           A3           E8           E9

125 (4.92)              B4           A4           E8           E8

126 (4.96)              B4           A4           E8           E8

127 (5.00)              B4           A4           E8           E8

128 (5.04)              B5           A4           E7           E8

129 (5.08)              B5           A4           E7           E8

130 (5.12)              B5           A5           E7           E7

131 (5.16)              B5           A5           E7           E7

Note Guide Currency Length (mm/in.)

E. Spacer

L.H.

132 (5.20)               B5

133 (5.24)               B6

134 (5.28)               B6

135 (5.32)               B6

136 (5.36)               B6

137 (5.40)               B6

138 (5.44)               B6

Note Guide A to left, B to right:

R.H. A5

A5

A5

A6

A6

A6

A6

L.H.

E7

E6

E6

E6

E6

E6

E6

R.H.

E7

E7

E7

E6

E6

E6

E6

Note Guide A

 

Note Guide B

 

139 (5.48)              A5           B5           E5           E5

140 (5.52)              A5           B5           E5           E5

141 (5.52)              A5           B5           E5           E5

142 (5.60)              A5           B5           E5           E5

143 (5.64)              A5           B5           E5           E5

144 (5.68)              A6           B5           E4           E5

145 (5.72)              A6           B5           E4           E5

146 (5.76)              A6           B6           E4           E4

147 (5.80)              A6           B6           E4           E4

148 (5.83)              A6           B6           E4           E4

149 (5.87)              A7           B6           E3           E4

150 (5.90)              A7           B6           E3           E4

151 (5.94)              A7           B6           E3           E4

152 (5.98)              A7           B7           E3           E3

153 (6.02)              A7           B7           E3           E3

154 (6.06)              A8           B7           E2           E3

155 (6.10)              A8           B7           E2           E3

156 (6.14)              A8           B8           E2           E2

157 (6.18)              A8           B8           E2           E2

158 (6.22)              A8           B8           E2           E2

159 (6.26)              A9           B8           E1           E2

160 (6.30)              A9           B8           E1           E2

161 (6.34)              A9           B9           E1           E1

162 (6.38)              A9           B9           E1           E1

163 (6.42)              A9           B9           E1           E1 164 (6.46)          A10         B9           E            E1

165 (6.50)              A10         B9           E            E1

166 (6.54)              A10         B10         E            E

167 (6.58)              A10         B10         E            E

168 (6.62)              A10         B10         E            E 169 (6.66)            A11         B10         N/R         E

170 (6.70)              A11         B10         N/R         E

171 (6.74)              A11         B11         N/R         N/R

172 (6.77)              A11         B11         N/R         N/R 173 (6.81)        A11         B11         N/R         N/R

174 (6.85)              A11         B11         N/R         N/R

175 (6.89)              A11         B11         N/R         N/R

176 (6.93)              A11         B11         N/R         N/R Note Guide     E. Spacer

Currency Length (mm/in.)

                                                            L.H.            R.H.           L.H.           R.H.

177 (6.97)              A11         B11         N/R         N/R

(N/R - No E spacer required)

MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

Currency Loading

This section describes the procedures that should be followed when replenishing a currency cassette. Included are the procedures to:

l  Open the cassette

l  Remove any currency left in the cassette

l  Prepare the new currency for loading into the cassette

l  Reset the tamper indicating cassette

l  Load the currency into the cassette l Identify the cassette body to the cassette lid l Close the cassette.

The procedures assume that the cassette has been removed from the dispenser and that Fluiditi cassettes have also been removed from their secure transport hoods and sleeves.

CAUTION

Once a Fluiditi cassette has had the security marking ink released into it, the cassette can no longer be used and should be disposed of in accordance with the instructions provided in s66720 “Fluiditi ATM Security” and s66721 “Fluiditi Replenishment Security”.

Note:   atm Notes recommends that only a service engineer should handle activated cassettes or clean spillages inside the ATM.

Opening The Cassette

WARNING

Wear protective clothing when handling Fluiditi cassettes that have had the marking ink released into them.

To open a currency cassette perform the following procedure:

1.     Place the cassette on a flat table.

2.     If the cassette is a tamper indicating variant, perform the recommended security procedures of the financial organization’s control documentation.

3.     Remove the latch seal.

4.     Press the lower latch hasp down then pull the bottom of the latch towards you.

5.     Lift the latch up a small amount. Pull the top of the latch towards you then hinge it down.

6.     Raise the lid and, applying slight pressure at the front of the lid to help disengage the tags, remove the lid completely from the cassette base.

Removing Unused Currency

Pusher Operation

The currency cassette may be fitted with either of the following types of pusher arm assemblies.   

WARNING

Wear protective clothing when handling Fluiditi cassettes which have had the marking ink released into them.

If the cassette is fitted with pusher arms as shown in the following illustration, lift the pusher arms: DO NOT SQUEEZE.The following procedures show the new pusher arm assembly. 

Currency Release

To remove any unused currency remaining in the cassette, place the handle end of the cassette against a suitable stop,such as a wall, then perform the following procedure:

7.     Lift the pusher arms then move the pusher to the rearmost position by pushing with the right hand against the pusher.

8.     Latch the pusher in the rear position by applying gentle pressure near the base of the pusher, then releasing the pusher arms.

9.     Remove the remaining currency and balance the transaction in accordance with the financial institution’s procedures.

Preparing Currency

Before loading the currency into a cassette it must be prepared correctly as follows:

Used currency should be prepared by holding a bundle of approximately 100 notes in one hand and separating out with the other. While separating out, the currency should be checked for obvious defects such as:

l  Adhesive tape on the surface of the currency

l  Staples, pins,clips or any foreign matter attached to the currency

l  Torn or limp notes with pin holes or missing sections in the body of the currency

l  Tears exceeding 13mm (0.5 in.) from any edge of the currency

l  Damage or tears to the leading edge (direction of travel) of the note

l  Two or more notes stuck together

l  Corner folds more than 13mm (0.5 in.) along any edge (straighten as required) l Folded notes

New or uncirculated currency should be separated (fanned) out several times before loading into the cassette. Any notes considered to be unacceptable should be removed.

The packaging of new currency can cause it to be set into a bow shape. This bow shape may be either across the length or the width of the notes and can cause the notes to jam in the dispenser. Notes bowed across the width have been specifically identified as causing jams in the Personas 86 dispenser and it is recommended that these notes should be processed through a counting machine where possible. If this is not possible then the notes should be manually fanned and flattened several times. If the bow persists follow the instructions that are given in the section “Loading The Cassette” for notes that are deformed in this way. Notes that are bowed by 3mm (0.125 in.) or more should be removed.

Note:   Good currency preparation will enhance the performance of the currency dispenser.

Resetting The Tamper Indicating Cassette

The tamper indicating version of the cassette has a mechanical device which, on insertion of the cassette into the currency dispenser, moves the insertion counter and opens the currency exit door. On withdrawal of the cassette from the dispenser the exit door is locked but the counter is not moved.

The indication on the counter depends on the number of times the cassette has been inserted into and removed from the dispenser, that is White (one insertion and removal) 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6.

Before loading the cassette the mechanism must be reset to give the number of insertions required (up to six).

Operate the reset control by moving it to the right then releasing it the appropriate number of times until the insertion counter indicates Green.

Loading The Cassette

When loading a cassette with currency, care must be taken to ensure that notes of the correct denomination are loaded in accordance with the cassette identification code on the label attached to the cassette.

CAUTION

Once a Fluiditi cassette has had the security marking ink released into it, the cassette can no longer be used and should be disposed of in accordance with the instructions provided in Chapters “Fluiditi ATM Security” and “Fluiditi Replenishment Security”.

To load a cassette with currency observe the “Pusher Operation” procedure given under the heading ‘Removing Unused Currency’ in this Chapter and proceed as follows:

1.     Lift the pusher arms then pull the pusher to the rear of the cassette and lock in position.

2.     Align the edges of the notes in both planes by holding a bundle loosely between the fingers and thumbs of both hands and tapping lightly on a flat surface, then tapping the note ends.

3.     It is recommended that the cassette be placed at an angle so that each note stack can be loaded without it falling over. For example, stand the cassette at an angle, with the handle end at the bottom, and against a wall as shown. Load the notes into the cassette. For notes bowed along their length, load the cassette with alternate packs/

bundles of 100 notes turned as shown,and make sure that any bowed notes are loaded with the bow towards the pusher. For notes bowed across their width, lload

the cassette with alternate packs/bundles of 100 notes turned as shown,and make sure that the bow is pointing away from the pusher.

4.     Continue loading until the required amount is loaded, or a 295 mm (11.6 in.) stack is loaded. This maximum stack size is indicated by the maximum load point label on the inside of the cassette.

5.     Lift the pusher arms and push the pusher and the note stack upwards until the currency stack touches the front support, then release the pusher arms.

The currency should now remain between the front support and the pusher in an upright position, neatly stacked between the cassette guides.

Closing The Cassette

Having loaded and, where required, reset the cassette, it should be closed as follows:

Note:   Make sure that the pusher is not locked in the rear position before closing the cassette. The lid can not be closed if the the pusher has not been released or the cassette has been overfilled.

1.     Insert the tongues on the cassette lid into the slots in the cassette base then lower the lid on to the cassette base.

2.     Lift the latch up and forward until it hooks on to the lid latch block.

3.     Pull the latch down and forward until it clicks into the locked position.

4.     Check that the insertion counter indicates green (tamper indicating versions only).

5.     Seal the latch, if required, and complete the third party documentation.

The cassette is now ready for transportation to the ATM.

Setting The Cassette Identification Code

Note:   When the denomination of the currency held in a cassette is to be changed the identification code for the cassette may also have to be changed. It is also important to determine the opacity or singularity value of the new currency and, if necessary, reconfigure the parent system with this value.

It is essential that the magnets are pointing in the correct direction. Therefore, each magnet has a marked end, a painted dot, to indicate which way round it should be installed in the housing..

Note:   Early versions of the magnet are of square section, later versions are of round section

The following table shows the location and orientation of the four magnets to produce the seven cassette identification codes.:

Magnet Positions

                                          A (wide             B (wide           1         2         3         4

Code cassette cassette only) only)

1 (High*)             not used  not used

2 (Low*)             not used  not used 3              not used  not used

4                    not used     not used

5                    not used     not used

6                    not used     not used

7                    not used     not used

Note 1:   High* and Low* apply to the M80‐05 Currency Dispenser. X indicates a magnet inserted in the housing, 0 indicates magnet not present in the housing. The bar above or below the X indicates if the magnet should be placed in the housing with the marked end up or down.

Note 2:   Codes 5, 6, and 7 are recognized only in ATMs where extended cassette IDs have been enabled in software. The following illustration shows magnets in place for code.

Changing Cassette Identification Code

When it is required to change the identification code of a cassette, say as in this example, to change the setup of a cassette from code 1 to code 2, so that two cassettes can dispense notes of the same denomination, perform the following procedure:

1.     Open and remove the cassette lid.

2.     Release the clip(s) holding the plastic housing to the cassette side frame and remove the plastic housing complete with the

magnets from the cassette.

3.     Remove the magnet from positions 2.

4.     Replace the magnets in the housing so that they are positioned and orientated for the code required as shown. For example, to set the cassette to Code 2 a magnet should be inserted in position 1 with the dot end up. Another magnet should be inserted in position 4 with the dot end down. No magnets should be inserted in positions 2 and 3.

5.     Attach the housing complete with the magnets to the cassette frame using the clip(s) released in step 1. The housing should be inserted with the longer of the two legs towards the handle end of the cassette.

6.     Close the cassette lid.

7.     Mark the cassette body and lid with the currency code according to local practice.

Mechanical

The standard security, Fluiditi, and tamper indicating variants of the currency cassette can be adjusted to hold currencies of different lengths and widths and to change the note low sensing facility.

Note:   The terms “left” and “right” in the following adjustments and setting tables apply to the cassette when looked at from the front (truck door) end.

l  The length adjustment is made by changing the position of two note guides located in the base of the cassette.

l  The width adjustment is made by changing the height of the spacers located between two more note guides and the cassette lid.

l  The note low sensing adjustment is made by changing the note low block position in the base of the cassette.

The locations of the note guides, spacers and the note low block are shown in the illustration below.

Currency Length Adjustment

The currency length adjustment is made by first establishing the length of the currency to be loaded into the cassette then using this measurement to determine the position of two note guides in the base of the cassette.

Adjustment is provided to allow the cassette to accommodate currency of lengths from 120 mm (4.72 in.) to 177 mm (6.97 in.).

Once the length of the currency is known, this is used to determine a guide code and the length of a spacer, which together, are used to determine the position of two note guides located along the floor of the cassette compartment.

The two note guides are installed along the left‐hand and right‐hand sides of the cassette, as viewed from the front (that is, the truck door end) of the cassette. A triangular pointer on the front of the guide and a triangular mark at the rear line up with numbers embossed on the floor of the cassette compartment. This number is part of the guide code.

The other part of the guide code is a letter, A or B, which is embossed on the note guides, A on one note guide and B on the other. The A or B note guides can be installed along either the right or left hand side of the cassette floor (as shown) depending on the guide code but must always be installed with the spring finger end of the guide pointing to the number embossed at the front end of the cassette.

                                                      Note Guide                 Note Guide            Note Guide                 Note Guide

                                                             A                               B                          B                               A

Segment Type Note Adjustment Spacers

The segment type spacer is embossed on one side with the letter E and the numbers 1 to 15 and is known as the E spacer. The E spacer is designed to snap into position without the use of tools.

The following example shows how to adjust a cassette for currency of length 120 mm (4.72 in.).

1.     Determine the length of the new currency (in this case 120 mm (4.72 in.)).

2.     Use the table given under the heading “Currency Length, Note Guide and “E” Spacer Codes for the Wide Currency Cassette” at the end of this section to determine the guide code and the E spacer setting for the currency. For this example the left hand guide (L.H.) will have a guide code of B3 and the right hand guide (R.H.) a code of A3. The spacers will have a setting of E9 for both the left hand guide and the right hand guide.

Note:   The letters A and B in the tables indicate which note guide should be placed to the left and which to the right. Remember that right and left are considered when looking on the front of the cassette (the end with the truck door). The number 1 to 12, after the letter, corresponds to the numbers embossed on the floor of the currency cassette. The triangular pointer at the front of the note guide and the triangular mark at the rear should line up with the same number as given in the table.

3.     Remove the two note guides from the cassette base as follows:


Unscrew and remove the screws and flat washers securing the note guides to the cassette base as shown.

l  The note guides may be secured in position with green plastic clamps. If these are fitted, unscrew and remove them as shown.

l  Slide the pusher back to reveal the front edge of the guides.

Remove each note guide by pushing the guide towards the rear of the cassette and, at the same time, raising the rear end of the guide then lifting it out of the cassette as shown. Take care not to damage or bend the spring fingers.

l  Unclip and remove the four E spacers from the base of the cassette as shown. Note:   The two E spacers located near the handle end of the cassette should be

turned through 90 degrees before pulling upwards.

4.     Prior to fitting in the cassette, set four new E spacers to the spacer code for the new currency for example, E9 for the left hand guide and E9 for the right hand guide as follows:

l Hold the spacer so the letter E and the numbers 1 to 15 can be read.

Using a strong sharp knife, cut the spacer just above the number, for this example 9. You should be left with a spacer, similar to that in the following illustration, that has the letter E and the number 9 on it. l Remove any burrs left after cutting.

5.     Snap‐in the four new E spacers into the slots in the cassette base.

6.     Insert the note guides back into the cassette so that the pointers at either end of the guide are pointing at the code numbers for the new currency. For this example the left hand guide (B) should be inserted with the triangular pointer pointing at the number 3 and the right hand guide (A) pointer pointing at the number 3. The following illustration shows an example of the left hand guide. To lock the guide in place, press down on the guide and slide it towards the front of the cassette.

7.     Replace the flat washers and screws in the base of the cassette or screw in the green


plastic clamps if these are fitted.

Fixed Size Note Adjustment Spacers

The spacer is embossed on one side with the letter E and a number from 1 to 15 (E1, E2, E3 etc.) and is known as the E spacer. The E spacer is designed to snap‐in to position without the use of tools.

Note:   The following is an example of how to adjust a cassette for currency of length 120 mm (4.72 in.).

1.     Determine the length of the new currency (in this case 120 mm (4.72 in.)).

2.     Use the tables given under the heading “Currency Length, Note Guide and “E” Spacer Codes for the Wide Currency Cassette” at the end of this section to determine the guide code and the E spacer setting for the currency. For this example the left hand guide (L.H.) will have a guide code of B3 and the right hand guide (R.H.) a code of A3. The spacers will have a setting of E9 for both the left hand guide and the right hand guide.

Note:   The letters A and B in the tables indicate which note guide should be placed to the left and which to the right. Remember that right and left are considered when looking on the front of the cassette (the end with the truck door). The number 1 to 12, after the letter, corresponds to the numbers embossed on the floor of the currency cassette. The triangular pointer at the front of the note guide and the triangular mark at the rear should line up with the same number as given in the table.

3.     Remove the two note guides from the cassette base as follows:

l  Unscrew and remove the screws and flat washers securing the note guides to the cassette base as shown.

l  The note guides may be secured in position with green plastic clamps. If these are fitted, unscrew and remove them as shown.

l  Slide the pusher back to reveal the front edge of the guides.

l  Remove each note guide by pushing the guide towards the rear of the cassette and, at the same time, raising the rear end of the guide then lifting it out of the cassette as shown. Care should be taken not to damage or bend the spring fingers.

l  Unclip and remove the four E spacers from the base of the cassette as shown.

Note:   The two E spacers located near the handle end of the cassette should be turned through 90 degrees before pulling upwards

4.     Snap‐in the four new E spacers in to the slots in the cassette base.

5.     Insert the note guides back into the cassette so that the pointers at either end of the guide are pointing at the code numbers for the new currency. For this example the left hand guide (B) should be inserted with the triangular pointer pointing at the number 3 and the right hand guide (A) pointer pointing at the number 3. The following illustration shows an example of the left hand guide. To lock the guide in

place, press down on the guide and slide it towards the front of the cassette.

6.     Replace the flat washers and screws in the base of the cassette or screw in the green plastic clamps if these are fitted.

Currency Width Adjustment

The currency width adjustment is made by first establishing the width of the currency that the cassette is to hold then using this measurement to determine the setting of spacers located between two note guides and the cassette lid. The setting of the spacers can be adjusted to accommodate currency of varying widths:

l  Minimum width 62 mm (2.44 in.)

l  Maximum width 95 mm (3.74 in.).

As with the length adjustment there are two types of spacers:

l  Segment type l Fixed size.

Segment Type Note Adjustment Spacers

Cassette Lid - E and Yellow Spacer Locations - Depending upon the type of cassette, the lid will be fitted with two yellow spacers and either three or two E spacers. Newer lids are designed to accept the spray bar of the Fluiditi system and this occupies the position formerly taken by a central E spacer. Both types of lids are shown in the following illustrations.

The E spacers are the same as the E spacers used when adjusting the currency length. Each E spacer is attached to the lid note guides by a cross‐headed screw.

The other four spacers are known as Yellow spacers (shown below), and are designed to clip into the cassette lid. Each Yellow spacer is also attached to the lid note guides by a cross headed screw.

The following example shows how to adjust the cassette for currency of width 67 mm (2.64 in.) on a lid with two E spacers and two yellow spacers.

Proceed as follows:

1.     Open the cassette and remove the lid.

2.     Using a cross‐head screwdriver, remove the two note guides from the lid by undoing the cross‐head screws from the two Yellow spacers then use the same screwdriver to remove the E spacers from the note guides.

3.     Remove the Yellow spacers from the lid by pressing in the two spring legs of each spacer then pushing them out of the lid.

4.     Determine the width of the new currency (in this case 67 mm (2.64 in.)).

5.     Use the table given under the heading “Currency Width Spacer Codes” at the end of this section to determine the spacer code for the currency:

6.     Set the four new Yellow and four (or six) new E spacers to their spacer codes. For this example the Yellow spacers should be set to C8 and the E spacers to E10. The procedure to set the E spacer is the same as that when adjusting for currency length, that is, cut the spacer above segment 10. The procedure to set a Yellow spacer to its spacer code is as follows:

l  The Yellow spacers are embossed on one side. Looking at this side, you see two sets of numbers 1 to 12 reading in opposite directions. One end has the letter C on it and the other has the letter D.

l  The Yellow spacer code is C8 so count from the C end to segment 8 and, using a sharp knife, cut the spacer just above the number 8 so that you are left with a spacer that has C and segments 1 to 8, refer to following illustration.

l  Fit a locking wedge into the first gap in the cut Yellow spacer as shownRemove any burrs left after cutting..

7.     Install the four new Yellow spacers in the cassette lid by pressing the legs of the spacer together and pushing them into the apertures in the cassette lid. The legs of the spacers should be pointing towards the centre of the cassette lid as shown in the following illustration.

8.     Using the cross‐head screwdriver, attach the new E spacers to the lid note guides.

9.     Using the cross‐head screwdriver, attach the lid note guides to the cassette lid. Make sure the cut outs on the note guides are facing towards the outside edges of the cassette lid as shown in the following illustration.

Fixed Size Note Adjustment Spacers

Cassette Lid ‐ E and Yellow Spacer Locations

Depending upon the type of cassette, the lid will be fitted with two yellow spacers and either three or two E spacers. Newer lids are designed to accept the spray bar of the Fluiditi system and this occupies the position formerly taken by a central E spacer.

In this section the example shows how to adjust the cassette for currency width on a lid with two E spacers and two yellow spacers. Older cassettes will require another E spacer to fit in the central position of each note guide.

The fixed size E spacers are the same as those used when adjusting the currency length. Each E spacer is clipped in to the lid note guides ‐ see the following illustration.

The other four spacers are known as Yellow spacers, and are designed to clip into the cassette lid. Each Yellow spacer is also clipped in to the lid note guides ‐ see the following illustration.

The following example explains how to adjust a cassette for a currency of width 67 mm (2.64 in.).

Proceed as follows:

1.     Open the cassette and remove the lid.

2.     Unclip and remove the two note guides from the lid then remove the E spacers from the note guides.

3.     Remove the Yellow spacers from the lid by pressing in the two spring legs of each spacer then pushing them out of the lid.

4.     Determine the width of the new currency (in this case 67 mm (2.64 in.)).

5.     Use the table given under the heading “Currency Width Spacer Codes” at the end of this section to determine the spacer code for the currency.

6.     Select four new Yellow and four new E spacers by their spacer codes. For this example the Yellow spacers should be C8 and the E spacers E10.

7.     Install the four new Yellow spacers in the cassette lid by pressing the legs of the spacer together and pushing them into the apertures in the cassette lid. The legs of the spacers should be pointing towards the centre of the cassette lid as shown in the following illustration.

8.     Clip the four new E spacers to the lid note guides.

9.     Clip the lid note guides to the cassette lid. Make sure the cut outs on the note guides are facing towards the outside edges of the cassette lid as shown in the following illustration.

Currency Width Spacer Codes

Currency Width           Yellow Spacer     E Spacer Currency Width Yellow Spacer       E Spacer mm (in.)             Code     Codemm (in.)      Code    Code

62 (2.44)       C9           E1179 (3.11)           D3           E4 63 (2.48)            D8     E1080 (3.15)           C3           E4

64  (2.52)         D8           E1081 (3.19)           C3           E4

65  (2.56)       C8           E1082 (3.23)           D2           E3

66  (2.60)       C8           E1083 (3.27)           C2           E3 67 (2.64)            D7           E984 (3.31) C2           E3

68  (2.68)       C7           E985 (3.35)            D1           E2

69  (2.72)       C7           E986 (3.39)            C1           E1

70  (2.76)       D6           E887 (3.43)            C1           E1 71 (2.80)            C6           E788 (3.46) D            E1

72  (2.83)       C6           E789 (3.50)            C            N/R

73  (2.87)       D5           E790 (3.54)            C            N/R

74  (2.91) C5 E691 (3.58) C N/R 75 (2.95) C5 E692 (3.62) N/R N/R

76  (2.99)       D4           E693 (3.66)            N/R         N/R

77  (3.03)       C4           E594 (3.70)            N/R         N/R

78  (3.07)       C4           E595 (3.74)            N/R         N/R

(N/R - Spacer or guide not required)

Note:  On H‐8015‐STD1‐01/02‐08 non‐tamper indicating lids, when the yellow spacer is set to C or D, cut off the two welding pegs at both sides of the lid at the opposite end to the latch. (Refer to the following illustration). This permits the note guides to sit level.

There are no welding pegs on Wide Plastic cassettes.

Note Low Sensing Adjustment

The cassette contains a note low block that provides the parent ATM with an indication of a note low condition. The block can be set to give two note low settings:

l  75 +/‐ 50 notes l 200 +/‐ 50 notes.

The settings are indicated by spherical pips on the block such that if the pips are towards the truck door end of the cassette, it is set for the 75 note setting. If the pips are set to the rear of the cassette then it is set for the 200 setting. Refer to the following illustration for the location of the pips.

To change the note low setting proceed as follows:

1.     Open the cassette and remove the lid.

2.     Press the flaps of the note low block together and then pull the block upwards and out of the pusher body.

3.     Turn the block around so that the pips face the opposite way then insert the block back into the pusher.

4.     Press down firmly until the block clicks into place.

CABLING

None.

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS

None.

TOOLS

l  A sharp knife,

l  Amedium size cross‐head screwdriver.

 


S2 Currency Dispenser

INTRODUCTION

The S2 Currency Dispenser is also referred to as the USB Media Dispenser.

CAUTION

Make sure that ESD precautions are observed.

DESCRIPTION

The dispenser, upon command from the ATM processor, selects bills from the cassettes; tests for singularity and irregularities, stacks them into a single bunch then presents the bunch to the customer. The presented bunch will remain in the present position until removed by the customer or retracted under application control.

S2 Dispenser modules and cassettes are not interchangeable with earlier designs of dispenser.

The dispenser is an assembly of the following:

l  Presenter Core ‐ front or rear access

l  Nose

l  Carriage ‐ front or rear access

l  Bill Aligner Module (BAM)

l  Single Note Transport (SNT)

l  Main Motor and Pump Assembly

l  Double Pick Module(s)

l  Pick Support Frame

l  Currency Cassettes

l  Purge Bin ‐ open, latchfast, lockable latchfast

l  Status Indicator Lights

l  Main Control Board

l  5/6 Hi Expansion Board (optional)

l  Single Pick Module (optional)

l  Serial Number Read (optional)

Weight

The weight of the basic 4‐high unit with empty currency cassettes is 61.5 kg (136 lb).

Presenter Core

Nose

Variants:

l  144.5 mm Front Access

l  154.0 mm Front Access

l  172.0 mm Rear Access

l  357.5 mm Rear Access

l  471.5 mm Rear Access

Carriage

Open

                                                    Pre-Exit Sensor             Bunch Sensor

Carriage with chassis cover removed

Bill Aligner Module (BAM)

Single Note Transport (SNT)

Main Motor and Pump Assembly

Double Pick Module

Single Pick Module

Currency Cassette

Refer to the atm Notes S2 Dispenser Cassettes Operator Guide (B006‐6966) and the S2 Currency Cassette chapter in this service manual.

Purge Bin

 

Height

Width

Length

Open bin

142 mm (5.6 in.)

218 mm (8.6 in.)

361 mm (141.2 in.)

Latchfast bin

140 mm (5.5 in.)

237 mm (9.3 in.)

361 mm (141.2 in.)

Lockable latchfast bin

140 mm (5.5 in.)

237 mm (9.3 in.)

368 mm (141.5 in.)

Status Indicator Lights

The status indicator lights can be configured by the owning authority.

The default configuration is:

Indicator Light

Possible Root Cause

Solid Red

Dispenser in service.

Action is required before dispenser can be racked in.

Flashing Red

Dispenser out of service.

Action required before dispenser can be brought into service.

Solid Amber

Dispenser in service.

Action required to repair dispenser.

Flashing Amber

Dispenser in service.

Action required to replenish dispenser.

Solid Green

Dispenser in service. No action required.


 

Vacuum System

Main Control Board

Number

Harness

Number

Harness

J1

Presenter Harness

J11

Lower Pick Module Harness

J2

Presenter Harness

J12

Lower Dual cassette ID Harness

J3

SNT Harness

J13

SOH Harness

J4

SNT Harness

J14

Upper Dual cassette ID Harness

J5

Main Motor

J15

SOH Harness

J6

USB Mini Cable

J16

RJ45 Cable to shutter PCB

J7

+24VDC Power

J18

Interface Harness

J8

Upper Pick Module Harness

J19

Interface Harness

J9

Upper Pick Module Harness

J25

BAM Harness

J10

Lower Pick Module Harness

 

 

5/6 Hi Expansion Board

                                                                                   J1                    J2

              Number  Harness

                J1            Interface Harness

                J2            Interface Harness

                J3             Single or Double Pick Module Harness (Motor and Vacuum Solenoid)

                J6             Single or Double Pick Module Harness (PA/DW PCB Sensor)

                J7            Single or Dual Cassette ID Harness

Serial Number Read

The serial number read (SNR) transport is an optional anti‐fraud feature mounted in pick 1 of the upper double pick module, primarily for the China market. A pair of scanners reads the denomination and serial number of every note as it passes from the pick to the presenter, and also takes an image.

There is an SNR control board mounted on the side of the pick module.

                                        (to dispenser board) (to USB hub)

Note that the scanners are calibrated by the manufacturer and matched to a specific control board by serial numbers, so boards and scanners must not be swapped out individually. The Field Replaceable Unit for the Serial Number Read function is the entire pick module.

Electrical System

HETS

C. Presenter Harness

D. State of Health Harness

E. SNT Harness

F. Dual Cassette ID Harness

G.Double Pick Module Harness

H. BAM CIC Harness

J.  Purge Bin Interface Harness

K. Purge Bin Interconnect Harness

L. Interface Harness

5/6 Hi Expansion Board ‐ 5 High

Main Control

Harnesses

L. Interface Harness

M.Single Cassette ID Harness

N. Single Pick Module Harness

5/6 Hi Expansion Board ‐ 6 High

Main Control

Sensors

Front Access Carriage

                                               Carriage Open                                                Carriage Closed

TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Messages

The following error messages are reported by the module. Refer to the sections “Module Replacement” and “Adjustments” for detailed instructions on FRU actions. To de‐code specific M_Status and M_Data use the Status Code Translator Tool available from http://www.infoprod.atm Notes.com or refer to Diagnostic Status Code Notebook Volume 1 (B006‐6273).

Control Board Module ID 1

Error

M Status

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

NVRAM access failure

1

NV RAM corrupt

Inspect control board

Replace control board

Faulty control pcb

Inspect control board

Replace control board

USB comms failure

2

Check USB connections

Inspect harness

Push connector home

Faulty USB harness

Inspect harness

Replace USB harness

No power to device

Inspect harness

Push connector home

Faulty control PCB

Inspect harness

Replace PCB

I2C comms failure

3

Faulty I2C connections

Inspect harness connections

Inspect harness connections

Faulty I2C harness

Inspect harness

Replace harness

No power to device

Inspect power harness

Inspect power harness

Faulty shutter

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace shutter

Instance ID not configured

6

Dual dispense instance not configured

N/A

Configure instance in SysApp

Non authorised dispenser control board fitted

8

Non authorised dispenser control board fitted

N/A

Authorise device in SysApp

Device not authenticated

9

Device not authenticated at installation or control pcb replacement

N/A

Authenticate device in SysApp

Pick Module

Module ID 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7

Error

M Status

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

ICS activated – replace all affected parts

4

ICS activated

Confirm ICS triggered

Replace affected modules

Pick sensor failed

25             (p1)

26             (p2) 27 (P3)

28  (p4)

29  (p5)

30  (p6)

Jam under pick sensor

Inspect pick sensor

Clear jam

Faulty harness / PCB

Run SysAppSysApp diagnostic test

Replace pick module

Pick sensor not calibrated

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Configure pick module

Faulty control PCB

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace control PCB

Pick arm sensor fault

Faulty harness / PCB

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace pick module

Faulty pick module

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace pick module

Incorrectly fitted pick

PCB

Inspect pick PCB

Re‐seat pick PCB

Faulty control PCB

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace control PCB

D‐wheel sensor fault

Faulty harness / PCB

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace pick module

Faulty pick module

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace pick module

Incorrectly fitted pick

PCB

Inspect pick PCB

Re‐seat pick PCB

Faulty control PCB

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace control PCB

Pick arm motor fault

45  (p1)

46  (p2)

47  (p3)

48  (p4)

49  (p5)

50  (p6)

Poor cassette loading

Check cassette loading

Re‐load cassette and run multiple test notes

Faulty pick arm motor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace pick module

Faulty control PCB

Run multiple test notes

Replace control PCB

Bill jam at pick sensor

64  (p1)

65  (p2)

66  (p3)

67  (p4)

68  (p5)

69  (p6)

Poor media quality/ cassette loading or foreign object present

inspect pick module and cassette

clear jam/reload cassette/remove foreign object

Faulty pick transport

Inspect pick module

Replace pick module

Faulty cassette

Inspect cassette

Replace cassette

Faulty pick sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace pick module

 

Media detected at pick sensor at wrong time

74  (p1)

75  (p2)

76  (p3)

77  (p4)

78  (p5)

79  (p6)

Foreign object at pick sensor

Inspect pick

Clear foreign object

Poor cassette loading

Check cassette loading

Re‐load cassette

Faulty pick sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace pick module

Faulty cassette

Inspect cassette

Replace cassette

Pick sensor dirty

N/A

Sensor dirty

Inspect sensor

Clean sensor

Pick unit missing

Faulty harness

Inspect harness

Replace harness

Faulty CIC sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace pick module

Pick unit tamper

N/A

 

Pick unit not configured

Faulty CIC sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace pick module


 

Cassette

Module ID 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13

Error

M Status

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

Cassette not latched correctly

6

Cassette not latched correctly

Inspect cassette latch

Rack cassette into device

Faulty harness / sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace pick frame

Faulty cassette latch

Inspect latch

Replace pick frame

Cassette parameters not configured

7

Cassette parameters not configured

N/A

Configure cassette in

SysApp

Cassette ID sensor fault

25  (p1)

26  (p2) 27 (P3) 28 (p4) 29 (p5)

30 (p6)

Faulty harness / sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace pick module

Missing CIC target

Inspect cassette CIC target location

Replace cassette

Faulty CIC target

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace cassette

Faulty control PCB

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace control PCB

Cassette latch sensor fault

Faulty harness / sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace pick frame

Faulty cassette latch

Inspect latch

Replace pick frame

Cassette low sensor fault

Faulty harness / sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace pick module

Faulty cassette

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace cassette

Pusher Plate Stalled

Poor cassette loading

Inspect cassette contents

Re‐load cassette

Faulty cassette

Inspect cassette

Replace casette

 

Cassette empty

81  (p1)

82  (p2)

83  (p3)

84  (p4)

85  (p5)

86  (p6)

Cassette empty

Inspect cassette contents

Replenish cassette

Too many bad media items picked

Incorrect or poor quality or poorly loaded media in cassette

Inspect cassette contents

Re‐load media / Replenish with correct media

Incorrect cassette configuration

Check note configuration in SysApp

Set note

configuration in SysApp

HETs not calibrated

Confirm correct singularity

Configure singularity in SysApp

Faulty SNT

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace SNT

Unable to learn media parameters

Incorrect or poor quality or poorly loaded media in cassette

Inspect cassette contents

Re‐load media / Replenish with correct media

Faulty SNT

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace SNT

Too many consecutive mis‐picks

Incorrect or poor quality or poorly loaded media in cassette

Inspect cassette contents

Re‐load media / Replenish with correct media

Faulty / worn suction cups

Inspect suctions cups

Replace suction cups

Vacuum filter blocked

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace vacuum filter

Vacuum system fault

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace motor / pump module

Faulty pick module

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace pick module

Faulty pressure sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace presenter

Cassette removed

N/A

Cassette removed

Inspect cassette location

Insert cassette

Cassette low

Cassette low

Inspect cassette contents

Replenish cassette

Cassette not configured

N/A

Purge Bin

Module ID 14

Error

M Status

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

Bin removed

6

Bin removed

Inspect bin location

Insert bin

Faulty bin present switch

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace presenter

Bin not latched correctly

Bin not inserted fully

Inspect bin latch

Rack bin into device

Faulty bin latch

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace presenter

Faulty bin latch sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace presenter

Divert Area Module ID 15

Error

M Status

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

Bin full

91

Bin compartment full

Inspect bin

compartment

Empty bin (all compartments)

Faulty harness / sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace SNT

Bin nearly full

N/A

Bin compartment full

Inspect bin

compartment

Empty bin (all compartments)

Reject Area

Module ID 16

Error

M Status

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

Bin full

92

Bin compartment full

Inspect bin

compartment

Empty bin (all compartments)

Faulty harness / sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace SNT

Bin nearly full

N/A

Bin compartment full

Inspect bin

compartment

Empty bin (all compartments)

Retract Area

Module ID 17

Error

M Status

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

Bin retract operations limit exceeded

6

Bin compartment full

Inspect bin

compartment

Empty bin (all compartments)

Bin full

93

Bin compartment full

Inspect bin

compartment

Empty bin (all compartments)

Faulty harness / sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace SNT

Bin nearly full

N/A

Bin compartment full

Inspect bin

compartment

Empty bin (all compartments)

Carriage

Module ID 18

See also ‘Troubleshooting Procedures’ for detailed guidance on diagnosing the cause of faults in the carriage.

Error

M Status

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

Carriage bunch sensor fail

22

Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’

 

Faulty harness / sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

 Replace carriage

Jam in carriage

Inspect carriage

Clear jam

Foreign object in carriage

Inspect carriage

Clear foreign object

Faulty carriage

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace carriage

Faulty umbilical

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace umbilical

Carriage pre‐exit sensor fail

22

Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’

 

Faulty harness / sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace carriage

Jam in carriage

Inspect carriage

Clear jam

Foreign object in carriage

Inspect carriage

Clear foreign object

Faulty carriage

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace carriage

Faulty umbilical

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace umbilical

 

Carriage exit sensor

fail

22

Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’

 

Faulty harness / sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace carriage

Jam in carriage

Inspect carriage

Clear jam

Foreign object in carriage

Inspect carriage

Clear foreign object

Faulty carriage

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace carriage

Faulty umbilical

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace umbilical

Carriage position sensor fail

22

Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’

 

Faulty harness / sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

 Replace carriage

Foreign object in carriage

Inspect carriage

Clear foreign object

Faulty umbilical

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace umbilical

Carriage home position sensor fail

22

Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’

 

Faulty harness / sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace presenter

Missing target

Inspect carriage target location

Replace carriage

Faulty target

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace carriage

Faulty control PCB

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace control PCB

Carriage belt timing disk fail

22

Broken timing disk

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace carriage

Carriage drive motor

fail

42

Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’

 

Faulty carriage

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace carriage

Faulty motor / harness

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace carriage

Faulty presenter tracks

Inspect tracks

Replace presenter

Foreign object in presenter

Inspect presenter

Clear foreign object

Faulty umbilical

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace umbilical

 

Carriage belt motor fail

42

Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’

Jam in carriage

Inspect carriage

Clear jam

Faulty motor / harness

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace carriage

Faulty carriage timing disk

Inspect timing disk

Replace carriage

Faulty umbilical

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace umbilical

Carriage Jammed

42

Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’

Faulty carriage

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace carriage

Faulty motor / harness

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace carriage

Faulty presenter tracks

Inspect tracks

Replace presenter or nose

Foreign object in presenter

Inspect presenter

Remove foreign object

Faulty umbilical

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace umbilical

Media jam at the bunch sensor

62

Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’

Jam or foreign object in carriage

Inspect carriage

Clear jam or remove foreign object

Faulty carriage

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace carriage

Faulty umbilical

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace umbilical

Media jam at the preexit sensor

62

Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’

Jam or foreign object in carriage

Inspect carriage

Clear jam or remove foreign object

Faulty carriage

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace carriage

Faulty umbilical

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace umbilical

Media jam at the exit sensor

62

Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’

Jam or foreign object in carriage

Inspect carriage

Clear jam or remove foreign object

Faulty carriage

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace carriage

Faulty umbilical

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace umbilical

 

Bunch sensor is dirty

N/A

Sensor dirty

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Clean sensor

Pre‐exit sensor is dirty

Exit sensor is dirty

Carriage tamper

N/A

N/A

 

 

Too many consecutive splays in carriage

N/A

Poor quality currency

Inspect cassette contents

Replenish cassette

Splay threshold set incorrectly

Check splay threshold

Set splay threshold

Foreign object in carriage

Inspect carriage

Remove foreign object

Faulty carriage

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace carriage


 

Single Note Transport

Module ID 19

Error

M Status

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

HETS sensor fail

21

Faulty harness / sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace SNT

Faulty control PCB

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace SNT

Width sensor fail

Jam in SNT

Inspect SNT

Clear jam

Sensor dirty

Inspect sensor

Clean sensor

Sensor not calibrated

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Calibrate device

Faulty harness / sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace SNT

Main timing disk sensor fail

Jam in SNT

Inspect SNT

Clear jam

Faulty harness / sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace SNT

Faulty SNT timing disk

Inspect SNT

Replace SNT

Stacker entry sensor failed

Jam in SNT

Inspect SNT

Clear jam

Foreign object in SNT

Inspect SNT

Clear foreign object

Sensor not calibrated

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Calibrate device

Sensor dirty

Inspect sensor

Clean sensor

Faulty harness / sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace SNT

Divert bin entry sensor failed

Jam in SNT

Inspect SNT

Clear jam

Foreign object in SNT

Inspect SNT

Clear foreign object

Sensor not calibrated

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Calibrate device

Sensor dirty

Inspect sensor

Clean sensor

Faulty harness / sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace SNT

 

Media deflector home sensor failed

21

Jam in SNT

Inspect SNT

Clear jam

Foreign object in SNT

Inspect SNT

Clear foreign object

Sensor not calibrated

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Calibrate device

Sensor dirty

Inspect sensor

Clean sensor

Faulty harness / sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace SNT

Faulty SNT

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace SNT

Media deflector extended sensor failed

Jam in SNT

Inspect SNT

Clear jam

Foreign object in SNT

Inspect SNT

Clear foreign object

Sensor not calibrated

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Calibrate device

Sensor dirty

Inspect sensor

Clean sensor

Faulty harness / sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace SNT

Faulty SNT

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace SNT

Divert gate fail / divert gate sensor fault

21, 41

Jam in SNT

Inspect SNT

Clear jam

Faulty harness / sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace SNT

Faulty SNT solenoid

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace SNT

Media deflector failed

41

Jam in SNT

Inspect SNT

Clear jam

Foreign object in SNT

Inspect SNT

Clear foreign object

Faulty harness / sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace SNT

Faulty SNT

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace SNT

Divert Gate Jam at Divert

Jam in SNT

Inspect SNT

Clear jam

Foreign object in SNT

Inspect SNT

Clear foreign object

Faulty harness / sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace SNT

Faulty SNT

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace SNT

 

Unrecoverable media jam in the SNT

61

Jam in SNT

Inspect SNT

Clear jam

Misaligned belts

Inspect SNT

Re‐seat belts

Damaged belts

Inspect SNT

Replace SNT

Unrecoverable media jam

between pick modules and

SNT

Jam in vertical transport

Inspect vertical transport

Clear jam

Misaligned belts

Inspect SNT and Pick

Re‐seat belts

Damaged belts

Inspect SNT and Pick

Replace SNT / Pick

Media detected at HETS sensor at wrong time

70

Poor cassette loading

Inspect cassette contents

Re‐load cassette

Foreign object in SNT / Pick

Inspect SNT / Pick

Remove foreign object

Media detected at width sensor at wrong time

Poor cassette loading

Inspect cassette contents

Remove foreign object

Foreign object in SNT / Pick

Inspect SNT / Pick

Clear jam

HETS calibration out with acceptable range

N/A

Wrong media loaded

Inspect cassette contents

Replenish cassette

Wrong singularity configured

Confirm correct singularity

Configure singularity in SysApp

Faulty HETs sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace SNT

Stacker entry sensor is dirty

Sensor dirty

Inspect sensor

Clean sensor

Divert bin entry sensor is dirty

Width sensor is dirty

HETS sensor is dirty

SNT tamper

N/A

N/A

N/A

Presenter

Module ID 20

Error

M Status

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

Interlock disconnected

5

Device not fully racked into safe

Inspect device

Rack device into safe

Faulty interlock switch

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace presenter

Faulty module rack

Inspect module rack

Replace module rack

Presenter configuration unknown

7

Presenter learn routine required

N/A

Run learn hardware in SysApp

Clamp sensor failed

8

Faulty harness / sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace presenter

Missing CIC target

Inspect cassette CIC target location

Replace cassette

Faulty CIC target

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace cassette

Faulty motor / harness

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace presenter

Faulty carriage

Inspect carriage

Replace carriage

Purge entry sensor fail

8

Bin full

Inspect bin

Empty bin (all compartments)

Foreign object over sensor

Inspect sensor

Clear foreign object

Faulty harness / sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace presenter

Retract entry sensor fail

8

Bin full

Inspect bin

Empty bin (all compartments)

Foreign object over sensor

Inspect sensor

Clear foreign object

Faulty harness / sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace presenter

Module unlatched

8

Device not fully racked into safe

Inspect device

Rack device into safe

Faulty interlock switch

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace presenter

Faulty module rack

Inspect module rack

Replace module rack

Clamp motor failed

9

Faulty motor / harness

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace presenter

Faulty carriage

Inspect carriage

Replace carriage

Faulty clamp sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace presenter

Main motor failed

9

Faulty motor / harness

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace presenter

Faulty SNT timing disk

Inspect SNT

Replace SNT

Faulty presenter

Inspect presenter

Replace presenter

Purge entry sensor is dirty

N/A

Sensor dirty

Inspect sensor

Clean sensor

Retract entry sensor is dirty

Sensor dirty

Inspect sensor

Clean sensor

Presenter tamper

N/A

N/A

N/A

Exit Shutter

Module ID 21

Error

M Status

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

I2C communications fault

3

Check I2C connections

Inspect harness connections

Re‐plug harness

Faulty I2C harness

Inspect harness

Replace I2C harness

Faulty shutter

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace Shutter

No power to device

Inspect power harness

Replace power harness

Shutter jam – open

44

Shutter jam

Inspect shutter

Clear jam

Shutter jam – closed

Shutter tamper

N/A

N/A

 

 

Suction Cups

Module ID 22

Error

M Status

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

Suction cups on pick module 1 must be replaced soon

N/A

Suction cups damaged / worn

Inspect suction cups and check pick counter

Replace Suction cups

Suction cups on pick module 2 must be replaced soon

Suction cups on pick module 3 must be replaced soon

Suction cups on pick module 4 must be replaced soon

Suction cups on pick module 5 must be replaced soon

Suction cups on pick module 6 must be replaced soon

Media Aligner Module ID 23

Error

M Status

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

Media Aligner sensor fail

31

Jam in carriage

Inspect carriage

Clear jam

Foreign object in carriage

Inspect carriage

Clear foreign object

Faulty harness / sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace Media Aligner

Faulty motor / harness

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace Media Aligner

Faulty carriage

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace carriage

Media Aligner motor fail

51

Jam in carriage

Inspect carriage

Clear jam

Foreign object in carriage

Inspect carriage

Clear foreign object

Faulty carriage

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace carriage

Faulty motor / harness

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace Media Aligner

Vacuum System

Module ID 24

Error

M Status

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

Vacuum sensor fault

32

Faulty harness / sensor

Run SysApp diagnostic test

Replace presenter core or main PCB.

Vacuum system fail

52

Faulty vacuum pipe work

Replace presenter or pneumatic tubing or equal T connector or 90 degree vacuum connector or air filter.

Vacuum system failing

N/A

Faulty vacuum pipe work

Replace presenter or pneumatic tubing or equal T connector or 90 degree vacuum connector or air filter.

Faulty vacuum pump

Replace motor and pump assembly.

Serial Number Read Module ID 25

Error

M Status

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

USB Serial Number too many invalid characters

N/A

Build up of dirt on

SNR

Inspect SNR Camera

Clean SNR Camera

USB Serial Number too

many invalid serial numbers

N/A

USB Serial Number reader de‐configured

N/A

N/A

Communication failure to SNR device

95

Communications connection to SNR board disconnected

Check comms connections to SNR

board on pick module

Reconnect comms or repair cable

USB Serial Number Reader control board failure

95

Control board failure

 

Replace SNR device

USB Serial Number Reader fixed guide camera failure (top CIS)

95

Fixed guide flex circuit not connected. Faulty camera or control board.

Check flex circuit connection at fixed

guide and at control board

Reconnect flex circuit. Replace pick module if necessary.

USB Serial Number Reader moving guide camera failure (bottom CIS)

95

Moving guide flex circuit not connected. Faulty camera or control board.

Check flex circuit connection at moving

guide and at control board

Troubleshooting Procedures

Additional troubleshooting checks and resolutions for carriage errors (M_STATUS 22, 42, 43 or 62).

Carriage Alignment

Incorrect alignment can be indicated by carriage drive motor failures (M_STATUS 42), carriage jams (M_STATUS 62) and presenter clamp jams (M_STATUS 43).

l  Delivery failures may also occur due to carriage not being correctly positioned in the present position.

l  Check that the carriage tie bar is parallel to the dispenser nose. Anything more than 2mm deviation when the tie bar is level with the dispenser nose is not parallel. If not, remove and re‐insert the carriage, referring to FRU Module Removal and Replacement’ section. While the carriage is removed, carry out the checks listed in section ‘Checks with Carriage Removed from Presenter’.

Carriage Motor Cover

An incorrectly fitted or missing motor cover can be indicated by carriage jams between park and present (M_STATUS 42, Byte 3 0A).

l  Check that the motor cover does not collide with the presenter nose.

l  Ensure that the cover is snapped into place around all the edges and that the screws are fitted.

Carriage Umbilical Cable

A damaged or incorrectly fitting umbilical in the carriage will be indicated by carriage motor failures (M_STATUS 42) or carriage sensor failures (M_STATUS 22).

l  Check for damage to the umbilical, replace if necessary.

l  Check that the umbilical is fitted correctly in the connectors in the presenter and in the carriage. Also check that it is fitted into the correct connector in the carriage.

Carriage Plates Parallel When Open

Incorrect carriage plate opening can be indicated by presenter clamp jams (M_STATUS 43).

l  Check that the front edge of the lower carriage plate is parallel to the upper plate when the carriage opens. Use the ‘Clamp (with Carriage at Home Position)’ diagnostic test and observe the movement. The lower plate should not be more than 20mm from parallel with upper plate.

l  If it does not open evenly, carry out the following checks:

l  Is the carriage aligned correctly? ‐ see Carriage Alignment in this section.

l  Are the carriage magnets configured correctly? Re‐configure them if possible, or replace the carriage is magnets are missing.

If the carriage still does not open evenly following the above checks, remove the carriage from the presenter ‐ refer to ‘Removing the Carriage’ in the FRU Removal and Replacement section ‐ and follow the instructions in section ‘Checks with Carriage Removed from Presenter’.

Carriage Movement

Problems with the movement of the carriage can be indicated by carriage jam (M_STATUS 42).

l  Slowly move the carriage manually along the full length of the presenter track in both directions. Check that the carriage runs smoothly along the track and does not collide with any components. Remove any obstructions.

l  Check that the carriage is aligned correctly ‐ refer to ‘Carriage Alignment’ in this section.

l  Ensure that the Single Note Transport is fitted correctly and that all three mounting screws are tightened to prevent the carriage colliding with the SNT. Refer to ‘Replacing the SNT’ in the FRU Removal and Replacement section.

If the carriage still does not move smoothly following the above checks, remove the carriage ‐ refer to ‘Removing the Carriage’ in the FRU Removal and Replacement section ‐ and then follow the instructions in section ‘Checks with Carriage Removed from Presenter

Checks with Carriage Removed from Presenter

l  Are there any damaged or dislocated links or arms on the carriage? If so, replace the carriage.

l  Is there any damage on the lower link mount? If so, replace it (part number 4450757100 ‘service assy ‐ lower linkage mount with carriage lower linkage’).

l  Are there any loose, damaged or missing screws in the lower plate shaft? Replace any missing screws (check none have fallen into the carriage). Tighten screws to 0.45 Nm.

l  Rotate the green thumbwheel to check that all the belts on both the upper and lower plate rotate. If they do not, check that the carriage belt drive shafts and pulleys are all in place and are not damaged. Replace any damaged components if possible, or the carriage.

DIAGNOSTICS

For general diagnostic information see the Diagnostics Overview chapter in the Diagnostics Overview section.

Level 0 Diagnostics

The Control Board LEDs are not used for diagnostics.

There are no switches on the Control Board.

Level 1 Diagnostics

Test

Description

MENU

This displays a menu of the all the other Applets to allow the user to select one.

CLEAR

Performs the default Clear operation.

CLEAR TO RETRACT AREA

Performs a Clear operation with the destination set to Retract area.

SET NOTES

Allows the user to set the number of bills to be picked from each cassette. Only prompts for configured cassettes. If the total number of bills exceeds the currently configured maximum the command fails. A default of 5 bills for each configured and present cassette is used if no number is entered

STACK

Performs a Stack of the bills configured via Set Notes (above).

PRESENT

Performs a Present of bills previously stacked.

DISPENSE

Performs Stack and Present operations consecutively. The number of bills picked is configured via Set Notes.

LEARN NOTE PARAMETERS

Performs a Learn Measurements operation for the specified cassette type. (Only configured cassettes are offered for selection). 40 bills are picked and the parameters measured, with the new and existing parameters being returned in T_DATA.

SINGLE NOTE TRANSPORT

Performs the SNT Diagnostic test

SELF TEST

Performs a Self Test operation. Menus are displayed to allow the destination to be selected and which pick units to pick from. The shutter is then operated if requested.

SHUTTER

The Shutter Diagnostic test is performed.

SENSOR/SWITCH STATUS

A Read Sensors Diagnostic test for all sensors is performed. The following options are offered:

Normal reading with LEDs on

A/D reading of sensors in the on state

A/D blocked threshold values

CARRIAGE

The Carriage Diagnostic test is performed.

GUIDANCE LIGHTS

This test enables the various LED states / configurations to be exercised via Set Guidance Light commands. Menus are provided to allow LED and flash rates to be selected.

CLAMP

The Clamp Diagnostic test is performed. The following options are offered:

Clamp test with carriage at home

Clamp test with carriage in safe position

Test

Description

 

PICK VALVE

The Pick Valve Diagnostic test is performed for the selected pick unit.

 

PICK ARM

The Pick Arm Diagnostic test is performed for the selected pick unit.

 

DIVERT GATE

The Divert Gate Diagnostic test is performed.

 

MEDIA DEFLECTOR

The Media Deflector Diagnostic test is performed.

 

PREPARE FOR SHIPMENT

The Prepare for shipment command is executed.

 

RUN TO RUN

Performs the following sequence of tests: Clear (not performed when looping)

Sensor / Switch Status (default operation)

Carriage

Self Test

Dispense

Clear

 

RUN TO RUN 2

Performs the following sequence of tests:

Clamp Test

Carriage Test

 

PERFORMANCE

Offers a menu with the following options: FRU Performance

Device Performance.

On selecting FRU Performance the following are displayed for each FRU: Media Dispensed

Fatal Errors

Routine Errors

Media per Fatal Error

Media per Routine Error

On selecting Device Performance the following are displayed for the overall device:

Media Dispensed

Fatal Errors

Routine Errors

Media per Fatal Error

Media per Routine Error

 

NOTE IMAGES

If SNR hardware is present then all serial numbers, denominations and images will be displayed for the notes picked from the prior Dispense, Stack or SelfTest command.

 

The Stack, Present, Retract and Dispense tests are not offered unless the lowest cassette has been removed and re‐inserted (after The Menu Applet, AppletId=0, has been displayed). This also applies to the Dispense test on a Run to Run test, which is by‐passed unless these conditions have been met.

Action Requests

This section describes the mechanism sequence following an action request (command) during normal dispenser operation.

The action requests are:

l  Clear

l  Stack

l  Present

l  Retract

l  Self Test

l  Learn Measurement

l  Set Guidance Lights

l  Prepare Shipment

l  Enable Stack ready

Clear

This causes the device to be cleared of any media which may have been left in the transport.

The media is transported to the destination requested in the operation, or to the default location if no destination is provided. Possible destinations are:

l  Reject compartment in the purge bin (default)

l  Retract compartment in the purge bin

l  Present position

Media detected in the single note transport prior to the divert gate will be stacked before being moved to the required destination.

Media detected in the divert transport path, will be transported to the divert compartment.

If media has been delivered to the purge bin, the carriage will return to its idle position, ready for the next operation.

If media has been delivered to the present position, the carriage will return to its idle position once the media has been taken and the Media Taken event sent.

Stack

This causes the number of media items requested to be picked and stacked in the device ready for presentation to the card holder.

Media which are to be rejected during the operation will be diverted from the main path via the divert gate and transported to the divert bin. This is done on an individual basis with good media remaining in the main transport until they reach the stack area.

If Pre‐Present is enabled, after a good stack, the media is clamped in the carriage and moved to the pre‐present position in readiness for the next operation.

If Pre‐Present is disabled, after a good stack, the media will be left in the stack position to allow subsequent stack operations to add media to the bundle.

Present

This causes the media which have been previously stacked in the carriage to be moved to a position where the customer can remove them.

With the exit shutter closed the carriage is driven forward until it reaches the present position, where it is stopped and the shutter opened. If this is successful the media is driven forward to be taken by the customer.

When the bundle has been taken, the carriage is returned to its idle position and the shutter closed.

If a fault occurs which stops the media from reaching the customer, an attempt is made to clear the media to the reject bin.

Note:  The present command may be issued when media is in the half retract position having previously been retracted there.

Retract

This will cause the media to be drawn back into the carriage and the carriage driven to the location specified.

The location can be one of the following:

l  Retract compartment in the purge bin

l  Reject compartment in the purge bin

l  Half retract position, if enabled

If media is retracted to the purge bin, the carriage will return to the idle position in preparation for the next operation.

If media is retracted to the half retract position, the carriage will remain there until a subsequent present or clear request is invoked.

If no media is detected by the carriage sensors, the carriage will return to the idle position in preparation for the next operation.

Self Test

The test starts with the carriage in the home position. If it is not in the home position, the carriage will move to the home position before proceeding.

The following mechanisms are exercised:

l  Divert gate

l  Pick arms of any pick units not involved in the picking operation

l  Pick valve test

l  Clamp test if no items are requested from any pick unit

l  Carriage diagnostic test

l  Shutter, if requested (Shutter is always requested in diagnostics).

l  Single Note Transport if no items are requested from any pick unit

l  Media deflector test if no items are requested from any pick unit (Items are always requested in diagnostics).

Any requested media is picked and stacked.

If a bad item is detected, it is diverted by the divert gate to the divert bin and the pick operation is retried.

The media destination can be either:

l  Retract compartment

l  Reject compartment

l  Half retract position, if enabled

l  Present position

l  Divert compartment

If media destination is set to Divert, all items (good and bad) will be diverted by the divert gate to the divert bin. Otherwise they will be stacked and the carriage will be closed and driven to the media destination.

The carriage will then return to the idle position in preparation for the next stack request.

Learn Measurement

This allows the software to learn the values of the widths and singularities of media at a specified position.

Media will be picked and transported to the stacker before being transported to the location specified by the destination attribute.

Refer to the section Currency Evaluation and Qualification Procedure for details of the procedure.

Set Guidance Lights

There is a red, amber and green status LED that can be individually set to off, on solid or flashing. This request allows the state of the individual status LEDs to be set.

If the ‘Enable Default Lights’ device setting is set, the command is not performed and the default LED signalling is performed.

Prepare for Shipment

This request prepares the dispenser hardware for shipment. The following steps are taken:

l  All pick arms are moved to a suitable angle for shipment

l  The carriage is moved away from home

l  The clamp cam is moved to its shipping position

l  The carriage is moved back to home

On the next operation which attempts to open the clamp (e.g. clear), the carriage will be moved off home and the cam returned to the normal present position, to allow the clamp to be opened.

Enable Stack Ready

This will enable the dispenser hardware for a stack command.

The following steps are taken when enabling stack ready:

l  Move carriage to home position

l  Open clamp

The command can also be used to cancel the enable stack ready request.

The following steps are taken when cancelling:

l  Close clamp

l  Return to idle position

Calibrate Sensors

This will re‐calibrate sensors when an Field Replacement Unit (FRU) has been replaced. As the actual readings of the sensors are used to calibrate, the device must be clear of media.

Diagnostics Tests

This section describes all the diagnostic tests that can be used to exercise different components of the dispenser.

The tests are:

l  Pick Arm

l  Pick Valve

l  Shutter

l  Divert Gate

l  SNT

l  Carriage

l  Clamp

l  Media Deflector

l  Read Sensors

Pick Arm Test

Tests the pick arm operation for the specified pick unit.

The test is performed by moving the pick arm through a complete cycle, determined by the current pick profile, and measuring its position via its CIC sensor. The pick arm is moved at the same speed as it is moved during a real pick cycle.

The 5 phases of the pick cycle are:

l  Move to initial home position

l  Move to each of the 4 positions (finishing at home)

The CIC sensor reading and Pick Arm position in degrees are reported for each phase in the resulting event.

Cassettes do not need to be removed to perform this test.

Pick Valve Test

This will test for leaks and faulty parts in the vacuum system.

During the test, the dispenser interlock must be in the override position; cassettes can remain in the dispenser.

First check the presenter zone:

1.     Disconnecting the tubing just below the filter and seal the opening in the filter assembly with your finger. Make sure no dust from the filter falls down into the tubing.

2.     In the test menu, select First Pick Module, then Test pressure ‐ pick arm away from media, and run the test.

3.     The following results will indicate a leak in the presenter zone:

l  Either the Closed Running Result or the Closed Static Result is 1.

l  The Closed Running Result and the Closed Static Result are both 0, but the Closed Running Pressure is above 75% of the Local Atmospheric Pressure.

l  The difference between the Closed Static Pressure and the Closed Running Pressure is more than 100.

If a leak in the presenter zone is detected, replace the motor and pump assembly.

4.     The following results will indicate an electronics fault that will require a replacement of the presenter or main control board:

l  There is no difference between the local atmospheric pressure reading and the closed running pressure reading, but there is suction detected at the filter.

l  After running the same test again, there is variation in the local atmospheric pressure readings.

If there are no issues with the presenter zone, reconnect the hose to the filter and check for leaks in the upstream zone:

1.     In the test menu, select First Pick Module, then Test pressure ‐ pick arm away from media, and run the test.

2.     The following results will indicate a leak in the upstream zone:

l  Either the Closed Running Result or the Closed Static Result is 1.

l  Both the Closed Running Result and the Closed Static Result are 0, but the Closed Running Pressure is above 75% of the Local Atmospheric Pressure.

l  The difference between the Closed Static Pressure and the Closed Running Pressure is more than 100.

3.     If a leak in the upstream zone is detected, it can be isolated by disconnecting the tubing at each pick valve in turn, starting at the lowest point, and seal the end of the tubing with your finger. Then re‐run the test for that pick valve.

4.     The following results will indicate a leak in the upstream zone:

l  If the Closed Running Result and the Closed Static Result are both 0 and the difference between the Closed Static Pressure and Closed Running Pressure is less than 100, the location of the leak has been found. Replace the damaged hose and re‐run the test.

If there are no issues with the upstream zone, reconnect all hoses and check for leaks in the downstream zone:

1.     Place a very good quality note in the cassette so that the suction cups will seal against it during the test.

2.     In the test menu, select the pick line and then Test pressure ‐ pick arm in contact with media.

3.     After running the test, if either the Open Valve Result is 0 or the Open Valve Result is 1 but the difference between Open Valve Pressure and Closed Static Pressure more than 300, there is a leak in the downstream zone between the pick valve and the media.

Either, re‐seat suction cups, replace suction cups or replace pick module FRU.

Pick Valve Test Results

Value

Description

Local Atmospheric Pressure

Local Atmospheric Pressure (mbar).

Closed Running Result

0  = Base pressure reached

1  = Base pressure not reached

Closed Running Time

Time (ms) to reach Closed Running Pressure in milliseconds

Closed Running Pressure

Base pressure (mbar) or lowest pressure reached. Base pressure is the point at which the rate of change in pressure has not fallen for 200 ms.

Closed Static Result

0  = Vacuum retained

1  = Vacuum leaked, reached local atmospheric pressure.

Closed Static Time

Time (ms) to reach Closed Static Pressure with all valves closed, motor and pump stopped.

Closed Static Pressure

Pressure (mbar) reached during Closed Static Time.

Open Valve Result

0 = Vacuum leaked, reached local atmospheric pressure 1 = Vacuum retained

Open Valve Time

Time (ms) to reach Open Valve Pressure with selected valve open and all other valves closed, motor and pump stopped.

Open Valve Pressure

Pressure reached during Open Valve Time with selected valve open and all other valves closed, motor and pump stopped.

Shutter Test

This tests the shutter hardware operation by driving it to both open and closed positions.

The initial state for the shutter is the closed position, so an attempt will be made to put the shutter into its initial state prior to test start.

The test is performed by driving the shutter in the open direction, measuring the length of time taken to move between closed and open; the shutter position sensors are then read and verified in this position. After a two second delay the shutter is driven in the close direction, measuring the length of time taken to move, and the position sensors again read and verified.

Divert Gate Test

This test verifies the divert gate operation.

The test is performed by driving the divert gate to the divert position, measuring the length of time taken to move between stack and divert. The divert gate position sensor is then read and verified in this position. After a two second delay the divert gate is allowed to return to the stack position, measuring the length of time taken to move, and the position sensor is again read and verified.


SNT Test

This test verifies the operation             the SNT. The motor is driven in normal operating direction only.

The test is performed by measuring the number of timing disk and D‐Wheel interrupts over a 2 second period. The transport speed is stabilised by running it up to speed for an initial period of 2 seconds before the measurement starts.

If the observed number of interrupts is outwith the expected by more than ± 1, the test will fail.

Carriage Test

This test verifies the operation of the carriage for diagnostic purposes. It tests the carriage movement to different locations, records flag opacity and on‐board sensors at each, and tests the carriage belt drive motor.

It is recommended that the test only be performed when there is no media in the carriage, as it will not be managed appropriately.

When the request is received, the carriage and clamp cam will be driven accordingly to set the carriage in the home position with clamp closed in preparation for the test to begin.

The test is performed by driving the carriage from the HOME to PRESENT, then to RFP, then to REJECT positions at normal operating speed, coming to rest momentarily at each location. The time taken to move between positions, the opacity of the flag and the onboard sensors values are measured at each location.

At each of PRESENT, RFP and PURGE positions, the carriage belt drive motor can be enabled in one of the following ways, by changing the Command Data:

l  No belt drive

l  Full Belt Drive Test – at a slow speed for 2 seconds in each direction and repeated at a fast speed, counting the number of timing disk interrupts for each phase (default).

l  Min Belt Drive Test – at a slow speed for 2 seconds in the reverse direction only, counting the number of timing disk interrupts

There will be 3 carriage diagnostic events as a result of sending this request, one for each phase of the test.

At the end of the test, the carriage will be returned to its HOME position, in readiness for the next operation.

Clamp Test

This test verifies the operation       the clamp. The clamp mechanism consists of:

l  Carriage

l  Cam, stepper motor and CIC sensor,

l  Media Aligner, stepper motor and CIC sensor.

The Clamp open operation consists of:

l  Retract the Media Deflector

l  Retract the Media Aligner to its home position and verify via its CIC sensor.

l  Drive the Cam to its open position and verify via its CIC sensor.

l  Drive the Media Aligner to its extended position and verify via its CIC sensor.

This Clamp close operation consists of:

l  Retract the Media Deflector

l  Retract the Media Aligner to its home position and verify via its CIC sensor. l Drive the Cam to its closed position and verify via its CIC sensor.

The test can be performed as described in the following sections. Default Clamp Test

The default test is performed with the carriage at the HOME position. The carriage will be moved automatically to this position if it is not already there.

The clamp is closed, opened and closed again. Each stage of the operation is verified via the CIC sensors.

Without carriage at home

This test operates the clamp in the same manner as the default test, but does not require the carriage at the HOME position. It does not verify the operation of the lower carriage plate. It does not exercise the BAM.

The carriage will be moved automatically out of the way before the test is started if necessary. The carriage is not returned to HOME at the end of this test to allow the test to be looped.

Media Deflector Test

This test verifies the media deflector operation for diagnostic purposes.

The test is performed by driving the deflector to the extended position, measuring the length of time taken to move between the home and extended positions. The media deflector position sensor is then read and verified in this position. After a two second delay the deflector is driven to the home position, measuring the length of time taken to move, and the position sensor is again read and verified.

Read Sensors Test

This command reads the state        all sensors and switches on the dispenser.

Sensors can be read as follows:

l  normally – with LEDs switched on

l  following a sensor reset and a delay of 250 ms

l  when the LEDs have been switched on for a short time then off

l  the A/D sensor reading can be returned

l  the A/D blocked threshold or PWM drive level

The reset operation will recalibrate the sensors to obtain the blocked threshold regardless of the current threshold level.

Sensors

Can be reset

Can be Switched on/off

Pick sensors

Yes

Yes

Mainmotor timing disk sensor

No

Yes

Stack entry sensor

Yes

Yes

Single note divert entry sensor

Yes

Yes

Width measurement sensors

Yes

Yes

Deflector sensors

No

Yes

Carriage sensors

Yes

No

Purge and RFP entry sensors

Yes

No

Diver gate position sensor

Yes

No

The sensors can be reported in individual groups as specified in the sensor group attribute or all groups reported. On receipt of this request the sensors are read by the software, then the event for an individual group is (or events for each group are) sent. The events returned in response to sensor requests are detailed in section 13.7.6.

In the case of the A/D blocked threshold or PWM drive level operation, some sensors have a fixed threshold with variable PWM LED drive. For these sensors, the PWM LED drive level is reported. These sensors are:

l  Pick Sensors

l  Stack entry sensor

l  Single note divert entry sensor

l  Width measurement sensors

In this case the Carriage position sensor will report the threshold value which is the upper limit of the sensor clear state. The other thresholds for this sensor are constant in the firmware and cannot be read.

Note:  The Read Sensors request is provided for diagnostic purposes only and should not be used during a transaction to determine status. The status of the device is determined by issuing a Get Information request.


Error Codes

M_Status and M_Data

To de‐code the data use the Status Code Translator Tool (available from www.infoprod.atm Notes.com) or refer to Diagnostic Status Code Notebook (B006‐6273).

Tallies

Tally

Description

PICKED 1

Number of items successfully picked from pick position 1.

PICKED 2

Number of items successfully picked from pick position 2.

PICKED 3

Number of items successfully picked from pick position 3.

PICKED 4

Number of items successfully picked from pick position 4.

PICKED 5

Number of items successfully picked from pick position 5.

PICKED 6

Number of items successfully picked from pick position 6.

PKATMPT1

Number of times a pick attempt failed from pick position 1.

PKATMPT2

Number of times a pick attempt failed from pick position 2.

PKATMPT3

Number of times a pick attempt failed from pick position 3.

PKATMPT4

Number of times a pick attempt failed from pick position 4.

PKATMPT5

Number of times a pick attempt failed from pick position 5.

PKATMPT6

Number of times a pick attempt failed from pick position 6.

PKFAIL 1

Number of times a pick fail occurred from pick position 1.

PKFAIL 2

Number of times a pick fail occurred from pick position 2.

PKFAIL 3

Number of times a pick fail occurred from pick position 3.

PKFAIL 4

Number of times a pick fail occurred from pick position 4.

PKFAIL 5

Number of times a pick fail occurred from pick position 5.

PKFAIL 6

Number of times a pick fail occurred from pick position 6.

SIZEERR1

Number of times an item of media was rejected because a size error was detected from pick position 1.

SIZEERR2

Number of times an item of media was rejected because a size error was detected from pick position 2.

SIZEERR3

Number of times an item of media was rejected because a size error was detected from pick position 3.

SIZEERR4

Number of times an item of media was rejected because a size error was detected from pick position 4.

SIZEERR5

Number of times an item of media was rejected because a size error was detected from pick position 5.

SIZEERR6

Number of times an item of media was rejected because a size error was detected from pick position 6.

DOUBLE 1

Number of times a double was detected and rejected from pick position 1.

DOUBLE 2

Number of times a double was detected and rejected from pick position 2.

DOUBLE 3

Number of times a double was detected and rejected from pick position 3.

DOUBLE 4

Number of times a double was detected and rejected from pick position 4.

DOUBLE 5

Number of times a double was detected and rejected from pick position 5.

DOUBLE 6

Number of times a double was detected and rejected from pick position 6.

Tally

Description

 

REJECT 1

Total number of items picked and rejected from pick position 1.

 

REJECT 2

Total number of items picked and rejected from pick position 2.

 

REJECT 3

Total number of items picked and rejected from pick position 3.

 

REJECT 4

Total number of items picked and rejected from pick position 4.

 

REJECT 5

Total number of items picked and rejected from pick position 5.

 

REJECT 6

Total number of items picked and rejected from pick position 6.

 

STACKOPS

Total number of stack operations attempted including stacks as part of self test and learn measurements operations.

 

PRESENTS

Total number of present operations attempted.

 

RETRACTS

Total number of retract operations attempted.

 

CLEAROPS

Total number of clear operations attempted.

 

CAR OPS

Total number of carriage operations attempted.

 

CAR FAIL

Total number of times carriage failed to reach desired position.

 

BELT OPS

Total number of carriage belt operations attempted.

 

BELTFAIL

Total number of failed carriage belt operations.

 

CAM OPS

Total number of CAM operations (lower, raise, rotate).

 

CAM FAIL

Total number of failed CAM operations.

 

SHUT OPS

Total number of shutter operations attempted.

 

SHUTFAIL

Number of times a shutter fault has been detected.

 

COMM TRY

Number of communications attempts between the core driver and the device.

 

COMM RTR

Number of communication attempts which required a retry before succeeding.

 

COMMFAIL

Number of communications attempts which failed after retries were exhausted.

 

SER READ

Number of Serial Numbers Scan Operations

 

INVNOTES

Number of Invalid Notes Scanned

 

SERCHARS

Number of Serial Number Read Characters

 

INVCHARS

Number of Invalid Characters

 

STRAPPING

There are no strapping or DIP switches on this device.

ADJUSTMENTS

Pick Module Timing Procedure

4–High Dispenser

1.     Place the upper double pick module on the pick support frame and close the two latches securing the module to the presenter core.

2.     Move the top timing gear to the number 1 position. This will align the lower timing gear to the number 2 position as shown below.

3.     Place the lower double pick module on the pick support frame.

4.     Hang the lower double pick module from the upper module without closing the two latches.

5.     On the lower double pick module, move the top timing gear to the number 3 position. This will align the lower timing gear to the number 4 position.

6.     Make sure the four timing gears are correctly aligned from top to bottom (1, 2, 3, 4).

7.     Close the two latches securing the lower double pick module to the upper double pick module.

5–High Dispenser

1.     Follow steps 1 to 5 of the Pick Module Timing Procedure for 4–High Dispenser.

2.     Place the single pick module on the pick support frame.

3.     Hang the single pick module from the lower double pick module without closing the two latches.

4.     Make sure the five timing gears are correctly aligned from top to bottom (1, 2, 3, 4, 5).

5.     Close the two latches securing the lower double pick module to the upper double pick module.

6.     Close the two latches securing the single pick module to the lower double pick module.

6–High Dispenser

1.     Follow steps 1 to 5 of the Pick Module Timing Procedure for 4–High Dispenser.

2.     Place a third double pick module on the pick support frame.

3.     Hang the double pick module from the lower double pick module without closing the two latches.

4.     Make sure the six timing gears are correctly aligned from top to bottom (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6).

5.     Close the two latches securing the lower double pick module to the upper double pick module.

6.     Close the two latches securing the third double pick module to the lower double pick module.

Cleaning Serial Number Read Transport Cameras

If SNR is fitted, the SNR transport cameras mounted on the fixed guide and on the moving guide should be cleaned as part of regular preventive maintenance, especially in dusty environments. Cleaning will also be required to clear the states of health ‘USB serial number read too many invalid characters’ or ‘USB serial number read too many invalid serial numbers’ which are triggered when the number of invalid characters or invalid serial numbers read reaches the configured thresholds (default 10% and 5% respectively).

Clean the cameras using compressed air or a soft thin brush or cotton bud. Ingrained grime can be removed using a lint free cloth moistened with soapy water or an alcohol free wipe.

JAM CLEARANCE

Refer to the atm Notes S2 Dispenser Operator Guide (B006‐6889) for jam clearance of the pick module, SNT, carriage and shutter.

CAUTION

Do not move the carriage while it is in the open (stack) position.

How to move the Carriage to the Closed position

1.     Remove the purge bin from the dispenser.

2.     From inside the purge bin space, manually retract the BAM.

3.     Manually retract the Media Deflector Fingers on the SNT.

4.     Manually move the primary cam wheel clockwise to the CLOSED position.

                                        OPEN Position                                      CLOSED Position

HETS CALIBRATION

Note:  Dispensers are shipped pre‐calibrated by the manufacturing plant and are selfcalibrating on an ongoing basis.

The dispenser maintains an internal compensation factor in NVRAM on the main control board. This compensation factor allows for differences that exist between the singularities calculated by different HETS assemblies due to mechanical tolerances.

The dispenser adjusts the HETS compensation factor automatically as bills of a known singularity value are dispensed. While bills are dispensed, the average of good single bill singularities is measured over 50 bills. This average is compared to the singularity figure typed in at installation time and the compensation factor is adjusted accordingly. Initially the compensation factor is set to 80H (equivalent to 1.00) and this is changed automatically by the dispenser and updated every 50 bills.

Dispensers will only be calibrated correctly if the correct width and singularity for each type of currency being dispensed has been entered as described in the Setting Note Parameters section.

SETTING NOTE PARAMETERS

Each currency type being dispensed has a specific width and singularity value that must be entered in to every ATM dispensing that currency. This applies to initial installation or whenever the main control board has been changed. The local Professional Services organisation will provide values for new and existing currencies.

1.     Select Self‐Service Configuration option from the Supervisor menu.

2.     Select Set Device Configuration option.

3.     Select USB Media Dispenser option.

4.     Select Note Configuration option.

5.     Select SET option.

6.     The system will then display the Note Configuration set up menu shown below. The menu is spread over multiple pages which is navigated using page up and page down options.

7.     Enter Note Widths for all Types.

8.     Enter Singularities for all Types.

9.     To accept all the changes made select OK.

10.  The system will display the menu shown below.

To finally confirm the changes, select the ‘Toggle’ side tab to change the NO option to YES and then select ‘OK’.

Change Parameter Errors

The currency parameters are checked for errors as they are entered. If an error is detected, the error message is shown.

Possible error messages:

l  ‘Invalid Size: Valid Range 54‐85’ ‐ Width is outside the permissible range

l  ‘Invalid Singularity: Valid Range 0‐254’ ‐ Singularity is outside the permissible range After five seconds the error message is replaced by the Note Configuration screen, allowing a valid value to be entered.

CURRENCY EVALUATION QUALIFICATION PROCEDURE

Note:  The currency width and singularity values previously calculated for the S1 Dispenser are valid for the S2 Dispenser.

The local Professional Services organization must establish the width and singularity values for each type of currency to be dispensed. The currency evaluation qualification procedure should only be performed on a calibrated dispenser. Attempting the procedure on an un‐calibrated dispenser will give incorrect results.

To ensure a dispenser is calibrated, at least 50 bills of a known width and singularity must be successfully dispensed. These bills may be local currency or test media.

Establishing Singularity and Width

In this procedure you have to cause the ATM to calculate the singularity and width of 40 dispensed bills five times for each currency you wish to evaluate. Due to the nature of the currency the singularity calculated may vary for each attempt. Add the five figures shown in the Parameters Option and take the average (divide by five and round to the nearest whole number) and the answers are the singularity and width values you enter to the ATM and to all ATMs using the same currency.

To achieve a good singularity figure, the currency loaded for this procedure should comprise of new bills. Load the currency so that the same side of each bill is facing the truck door of the cassette. Put the bills into the cassette in 50 bill bunches, alternately right way up and upside down (see the following illustration). This allows for the variations in inking.

The singularity procedure is as follows:

1.     Prepare cassettes to accept the denominations of currency you will normally be dispensing from the ATMs. Refer to the S2 Currency Cassette chapter in the Dispense section of this manual for the method of adjusting cassettes to currency size.

2.     Load at least 200 bills of each denomination of the currency into the cassettes.

3.     Insert the cassettes into the dispenser.

4.     Put the ATM into supervisor mode.

5.     From the ATM opening menu, select System Application > Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media Dispenser > Note Configuration.

6.     The system will display the following message: Clearing Dispenser Transport. Please Wait

7.     Select Learn option.

8.     The system will display the Note Configuration menu showing the types available as shown below.

Note:  The menus only show the cassette types present in the ATM.

9.     There is the option to select each single type in turn, or select All Types.

10.  Select Type 1 or All Types.

11.  The system will perform the test and display the message: Learning Cassette Type 1. Please Wait.

If All Types was selected, a message for each type will be displayed.

12.  Select Learn.

13.  Select Parameters.

14.  The system will return to the Note Configuration menu.

15.  Record the singularity and width figures for the cassette and type selected or all cassette types if applicable.

16.  Select Cancel to return to the Note Configuration screen.

17.  Empty the purge bin as necessary.

18.  If you selected an single type, repeat steps 11 to 21 until you have five readings of singularity and width for each cassette type loaded.

19.  Add each set of five figures and divide the total by five to obtain an average singularity and width for each cassette type.

20.  Select the Set option from the Note Configuration menu

21.  Modify as appropriate using the average singularity and width figures obtained in step 23.

22.  To accept all the changes made, select OK.

23.  The system will display the Note Configuration menu.

24.  To finally confirm the changes, select the Toggle side tab to change the NO option to YES and then select OK.

25.  Select OK to return to the System Application Main menu.

The procedure is now complete. From the Utilities menu you can now enter level 1 diagnostics and dispense notes to test the validity of the singularity values. A minimum of one cassette full of used notes and one cassette full of new notes of each denomination should be dispensed. New notes must be loaded with alternate packs right way up and then upside down. Bowed notes must be loaded with the bow towards the note pusher.

A reject rate less than 1.5% must be achieved when dispensing an average of 2.5 bills per transaction. If the reject rate is greater than this, the singularity and width values should be recalculated.

Calculation of Reject Rate

The reject rate is calculated using the following formula.

Total Number of Rejected Bills

Reject Rate =

The numbers for rejected bills and total bills picked are taken from tallies. Take a note of the tallies current values before starting and use the difference, before and after, in the calculations. There are different tallies for each Pick/cassette.

Error Messages

Any fatal error messages will need to be cleared in the normal manner.

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

Single Pick Module

Field Replaceable Units (FRU)

l  Carriage Umbilical Harness (front access or rear access)

l  Carriage (front access or rear access)

l  Nose (including nose, tracks, purge and present flags)

l  Bill Aligner Module (BAM)

l  Single Note Transport (SNT)

l  Motor and Pump Assembly

l  Double Pick Module

l  Single Pick Module

l  Main Control Board

l  5/6 Hi Expansion Board

l  Pick Support Frame

l  Presenter Core

l  Presenter Assembly (front access or rear access),

If replacing the entire dispenser, follow the instructions to remove the pick modules then the presenter assembly.

Tools:

l  Long magnetised #2 pozidrive screwdriver

l  Spring hook (603‐9000063)

Note:  Throughout these FRU removal and replacement procedures make sure that all connectors are replaced securely and harnesses are routed correctly and neatly. Replace and make good all cable ties, check for fouling conditions and replace all cable identification labels damaged or lost during servicing.

CAUTION

Do not use the dispenser nose to rack, lift or move the dispenser.

WARNING

Remove power from the dispenser before carrying out any of the FRU removal and replacement procedures.

Carriage Umbilical Harness

CAUTION

Take care not to damage the carriage umbilical harness during the removal and replacement procedure.

Removing the Carriage Umbilical Harness

1.     Fully rack out the dispenser.

2.     Release the carriage umbilical harness from the side track by gently pushing the white latch towards the harness.

3.     Unscrew and retain the two screws securing the carriage chassis cover.

4.     Remove and retain the carriage chassis cover.

5.     Release the carriage umbilical harness from the carriage by gently pushing the white latch towards the cable, while supporting the PCB with your other hand.

Replacing the Carriage Umbilical Harness

The procedure for replacing the carriage umbilical harness is the reverse of the removal procedure.

Check that the replacement harness is undamaged before using it.

Be sure to fit the replacement harness to the correct connector and to fit it securely in the connector.

CAUTION

Check the umbilical harness has enough clearance as the carriage moves along the track.

Carriage

CAUTION

Take care not to damage the carriage umbilical cable during the removal and replacement procedure.

Removing the Carriage

1.     Fully rack out the dispenser.

2.     Release the carriage umbilical cable by gently pushing the latch towards the cable.

3.     Remove and retain the two screws securing the tie bar, then remove and retain the tie bar.

4.     Move the carriage to the end of the presenter and lift the carriage clear of the dispenser.

5.     If the carriage is to be shipped with the presenter frame, use two cable ties to secure the carriage to the sides of the presenter frame.

Replacing the Carriage

Before fitting the new carriage, check that:

l  there is no damage or cracks on the carriage lower link mount or the links and arms.

l  the carriage lower plate shaft screws are correctly fitted and undamaged.

l  all carriage belt rotate and the belt drive shafts and pulleys are in place and are undamaged.

1.     Insert the carriage into the end of the presenter.

Note:  Make sure the carriage is aligned correctly and all four gearwheels are engaged in the tracks.

2.     Replace the tie bar and secure with two screws.

3.     Make sure gearwheels are correctly positioned on the tracks by checking that the rear of the carriage is parallel with the tie bar.

4.     Push the carriage chassis towards the presenter tracks at the point shown below to assist with correct alignment of the carriage.

5.     Insert the carriage umbilical cable into the zero insertion force connector. Gently pushing the latch away from the cable to engage the connector. Check the cable is not damaged and is securely fitted in the correct connector.

6.     Check that:

l  the carriage is correctly aligned in the presenter

l  the carriage moves freely along the presenter tracks

l  the carriage lower plate is level when opened l the carriage magnets are correctly configured l the carriage motor cover is fitted correctly.

See ‘Troubleshooting Procedures’ section for details on these checks.

7.     In SysApp, select Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media Dispenser > Carriage Replaced.

This will reset all the carriage variables and recalibrate the carriage sensors.

8.     Dispense at least 50 notes to ensure the dispenser is calibrated.

Nose

Removing the Nose

1.     Fully rack out the dispenser.

2.     If fitted, remove and discard the two screws that join the track segments together (one on each side).

3.     Remove and retain eight screws that fix the nose to the presenter core (four on each side).

CAUTION

Take care not to dislodge the flags located along the inner track.

4.     Ease the nose away from the side frame.

5.     Remove and retain the nose.

Replacing the Nose

Note:  This procedure is used when replacing a nose with one of the same length. If the replacement nose is of a different length, after replacement use SysApp to force the firmware to re‐learn the new hardware configuration by selecting Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media Dispenser > Presenter Replaced.

When replacing the nose, take care not to snag any cables.

1.     Align the nose and presenter track segments.

2.     Do not refit the two screws that joined the geared track segments together.

3.     Fit the eight screws securing the nose to the presenter.

Bill Aligner Module (BAM)

Special tool: Spring hook.

Removing the BAM

1.     Fully rack out the dispenser.

2.     If the carriage is obstructing access to the BAM and the primary cam is in the ‘OPEN’ position, go to the Jam Clearance section and follow the procedure for moving the carriage to the ‘CLOSED’ position.

3.     Remove the purge bin from the dispenser.

4.     Gently move the carriage away from the BAM.

5.     Use a spring hook to unhook the two edge register extension springs from the base of the BAM. Make sure the springs remain attached to the edge register.

6.     Remove and retain the BAM cantilever and securing screw.

7.     Slide the edge register along about one inch, then turn the edge register slightly clockwise to disengage it from the slots in the base of the BAM.

8.     Remove the Edge Register from the dispenser.

9.     Remove and retain the two screws (M4 Pozidriv) securing the BAM mounting to the presenter frame.

10.  Disconnect the BAM motor harness at the flex interface (J4).

11.  Remove any cable ties securing the BAM CIC harness to the inside of the presenter.

12.  Disconnect the BAM CIC harness at the connector on the side of the presenter.

13.  Four lugs locate the BAM mounting base to the presenter framework. Move the base slightly away from the SNT to clear the lugs and lift the base out of the dispenser.

Replacing the BAM

The procedure for replacing the BAM is the reverse of the removal procedure.

In SysApp, select Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media Dispenser > Media Aligner Replaced.

This will reset all the BAM (Media Aligner) variables.

Single Note Transport (SNT)

The SNT can be removed with the Bill Aligner Module (BAM) in place.

The SNT FRU includes the SNT interface harness.

Removing the SNT

1.     Fully rack out the dispenser.

2.     Remove the purge bin.

3.     Three screws (M4 x 10 combi) secure the SNT to the presenter framework. Move the divert skid plate slightly away from the SNT to allow access to the first screw. Using a long magnetised #2 pozidrive screwdriver, remove SNT mounting screw from the location shown below.

4.     Now remove second SNT mounting screw from the location shown below. Access to this screw is blocked by a drive‐belt. A second screwdriver can be used to gently move the belt to one side while removing the screw.

5.     Remove and retain the third screw from the location shown below.

6.     Disconnect the SNT harness from the main control board at J3 and J4.

7.     Release the SNT harness from the two cable clamps securing the harness to the side of the outside of the presenter.

8.     Guide the SNT harness through the hole in the side of the presenter framework as you lift the SNT out of the dispenser.

Replacing the SNT

The procedure for replacing the SNT is the reverse of the removal procedure.

Note:  There are four potential SNT mounting points, but only three are used. The three locations are shown below and the screws should be refitted in the order shown.

In SysApp, select Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media Dispenser > SNT/HETS Replaced.

This will reset the HETS variables and recalibrate the HETS sensors.

Dispense at least 50 notes to ensure the dispenser is calibrated.

Main Motor and Pump Assembly

Note:  If the dispenser is a rear access variant with a short or medium length nose, the whole dispenser will need to be removed from the ATM as the safe door will block access.

Removing the Motor and Pump Assembly

1.     Fully rack out the dispenser.

2.     Complete the SNT removal procedure before removing the pump motor assembly.

3.     Disconnect the power cord at J5 on the main control board.

4.     If not already done, disconnect the SNT harness at J3 and J4 on the main control board.

5.     Unscrew and retain the three screws securing the hand wheel.

6.     Remove and retain the hand wheel.

CAUTION

Take care not to damage the vacuum sensor connector located on the outside of the presenter.

7.     Disconnect the vacuum tube at the junction shown below.

8.     Remove and retain the three screws and three nuts securing the pump motor

assembly to the presenter framework.

9.     Remove the pump motor assembly from the dispenser.

Replacing the Motor and Pump Assembly

The procedure for replacing the Pump Motor Assembly is the reverse of the removal procedure.

Take care not to overtighten the plastite screws that secure the green hand wheel.

There is no torque requirement for the motor securing screws.

Replace the motor in the correct orientation.

When refitting the vacuum hose at the Y junction, make sure the hose is fully inserted.

Double Pick Module

The pick module assembly includes the pick module harness.

CAUTION

The pick module assembly must be carried by the base plate and/or the upper tie bar.

Note:  This procedure is used when replacing a double pick module. If the number of pick modules in the dispenser is changed, use SysApp to force the firmware to re‐learn the new count by selecting Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media Dispenser > Pick Units Added/Removed. This will prompt a reboot. Calibrate each Pick Module by running 50 notes.

Removing the Double Pick Module Assembly

1.     Fully rack out the dispenser.

2.     Remove all currency cassettes from the dispenser.

3.     Disconnect the two upper and two lower pick module cables from the main control board.

4.     If serial number read (SNR) is fitted, disconnect the power and USB harness from the SNR board located on the side of the pick module.

5.     Disconnect the vacuum tubing at the four pick valves shown below. This can be done by pushing the ring fully home, then pulling the tube out of the valve.

6.     If the dispenser is configured with two double pick modules, unlatch and lower the lower pick module.

7.     Unlatch the top pick module from the presenter core.

8.     Lift the top pick module off the pick support frame and clear of the dispenser.

9.     If you need to remove the lower pick module, lift the lower pick module off the pick support frame and clear of the dispenser.

Replacing the Double Pick Module Assembly

The procedure for replacing the Pick Module Assemblies is the reverse of the removal procedure.

1.     In SysApp, select Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media Dispenser > Pick Units Replacement Menu.

2.     Select the appropriate pick unit from the list. This will reset the pick unit variables and recalibrate the pick unit sensor.

3.     Calibrate the Pick Module by running 50 notes.

Single Pick Module

Removing the Single Pick Module Assembly

1.     Fully rack out the dispenser.

2.     Remove all currency cassettes from the dispenser.

3.     Disconnect the two single pick module cables from the 5/6 hi expansion board.

4.     Disconnect the vacuum tubing at the pick valve. This can be done by pushing the ring fully home, then pulling the tube out of the valve.

5.     Unlatch and lift the single pick module off the pick support frame and clear of the dispenser.

Replacing the Singe Pick Module Assembly

The procedure for replacing the Pick Module Assemblies is the reverse of the removal procedure.

1.     In SysApp, select Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media Dispenser > Pick Units Replacement Menu.

2.     Select the appropriate pick unit from the list. This will reset the pick unit variables and recalibrate the pick unit sensor.

3.     Calibrate the Pick Module by running 50 notes.

Main Control Board

Removing the Main Control Board

1.     Fully rack out the dispenser.

2.     Disconnect all harnesses from the Main Control Board.

3.     Unscrew and retain the four screws securing the Main Control Board cover, then remove the cover.

4.     Unscrew and retain the five outer screws that secure the Main Control Board.

5.     Unscrew and retain the last central screw that secures the Main Control Board.

6.     Remove the Main Control Board from the dispenser.

Replacing the Main Control Board

The procedure for replacing the Main Control Board is the reverse of the removal procedure.

Note:  The note parameters for all currency types must be re‐entered after replacing the main control board. Dispense at least 50 notes to ensure the dispenser is calibrated.

5/6 Hi Expansion Board

Removing the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board

1.     Fully rack out the dispenser.

2.     Disconnect all harnesses from the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board.

3.     Unscrew and retain the two screws securing the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board cover, then remove the cover.

4.     Unscrew and retain the four outer screws that secure the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board.

5.     Remove the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board from the dispenser.

Replacing the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board

The procedure for replacing the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board is the reverse of the removal procedure.

Pick Support Frame

Removing the Pick Support Frame

1.     Remove the cash cassettes from the dispenser.

2.     Remove the Double Pick Modules as described previously.

3.     Disconnect the vacuum tube at the vacuum filter.

4.     Remove the Main Control Board as described previously.

5.     Remove the Pick Support Frame.

Replacing the Pick Support Frame

The procedure for replacing the Pick Support Frame is the reverse of the removal procedure.

Presenter Core

Removing the Presenter Core

1.     Remove the Carriage as described previously.

2.     Remove the Single Note Transport (SNT).

3.     Remove the Double Pick Modules as described previously.

4.     Remove the Pick Support Frame as described previously.

5.     Remove the IGUS chain bracket from the side of the presenter frame. The type of bracket will vary, depending on the ATM.

6.     Remove the Presenter Nose as described previously.

7.     A temporary yellow lifting handle is attached to the frame of new Presenter Core. Remove the lifting handle from the new core and attach it to the top of the core that is still attached to the dispenser rails. This handle will be used to lift the core off the rails.

8.     Remove the four screws securing the Presenter Core to the dispenser rails (two each side).

9.     Move the end of the rails to the mid‐point of their travel. Using a marker pen, make a mark on top of the rails to align with a suitable detail on the top of the presenter frame. This will indicate if the rail ends have moved during lifting of the Presenter Core.

10.  Standing on one side of the presenter and hold the presenter by the two yellow lifting points. Lift up the side of the presenter furthest away from you and free it from the far‐side rail ‐ at the same time use your fingers to push the far‐side rail away from the presenter.

11.  Retract the far‐side rail inwards and clear of the presenter.

12.  Make sure the near‐side rail has not moved and the marker is in the correct position.

13.  Lift and free the near‐side of the presenter from the near‐side rail and remove the presenter core from the ATM.

Replacing the Presenter Core

Replacing the Presenter Core is the reverse of the removal procedure.

When attaching the Presenter Core to the dispenser rails, use the following table to select the correct dispenser rail ‘T’ lug position for your ATM.

Product

Access

Location

2012

Front

A

Rear

B

6622

Front or Rear

B

6625

Rear

A

6626

Rear

A

6628

Front

A

6632

Front

A

Rear

B

6634

Rear

A

6637 and 6638

Front

A

6642

Front

A

Remove the temporary lifting handle from the old Presenter Core frame and re‐fit it to the new replacement Presenter Core. After the new replacement Presenter Core is attached to the dispenser rails, the lifting handle must be removed and re‐fitted to the old Presenter Core for returning to the rework centre.

After the dispenser has been fully re‐assembled, use SysApp to force the firmware to relearn the new hardware configuration.

Select Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media Dispenser > Presenter Replaced.

The presenter variables will be reset and the presenter sensors recalibrated.

Dispense at least 50 notes to ensure the dispenser is calibrated.

Presenter Assembly

The Presenter Assembly includes the following:

l  Presenter Core

l  Carriage

l  Bill Aligner Module (BAM)

l  Single Note Transport (SNT) l Motor and Pump Assembly

Removing the Presenter Assembly

1.     Secure the carriage to the presenter frame using two cable ties.

2.     Follow the ‘Remove the Nose’ instructions as described in the ‘Nose’ section.

3.     Follow the ‘Remove the Presenter Core’ instructions (steps 3 to 13) as described in the ‘Presenter Core’ section.

Replacing the Presenter Assembly

1.     Follow the ‘Replacing the Presenter Core’ instructions as described in the ‘Presenter Core’ section.

2.     Follow the ‘Replacing the Nose’ instructions as described in the ‘Nose’ section.

3.     After the dispenser has been fully assembled, remove the two cable ties securing the carriage to the presenter frame.

4.     In SysApp, select Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media Dispenser > Presenter Assembly Replaced.

This will force the firmware to re‐learn the new hardware configuration. The presenter variables will be reset and the presenter sensors recalibrated. This will also reset the HETS variables and recalibrate the HETS sensors, reset all the carriage variables and recalibrate the carriage sensors, and reset all the Media Aligner (BAM) variables.

5.     Dispense at least 50 notes to ensure the dispenser is calibrated.

CABLING

Presenter Harness

P1

P2

Interface Harness

                               Main Control Board                                                                  5/6 Hi Expansion Board

S2 Double Pick Module Harness

The first (upper) double pick module harness is illustrated below, other double pick module harnesses are similar.

Single Pick Module Harness

9

10

Carriage Position Sensor Harness

Carriage PCB

Dual Cassette ID Harness

                                        J12 or J14 Dual Cassette ID

Main Control Board

Single Cassette ID Harness

SNT Harness

BAM CIC Harness

                                                  J25 BAM CIC

Main Control Board

Purge Bin LEDs Interface

                                                    J1     J3

                                       Purge Bin LEDs Interface                                      Purge Bin Sensors

Purge Bin Interface Harness

J2  J4

                                         Presenter Harness                                        Purge Bin LEDs Interface

State of Health Harness

                                                 J15   Status Indicator

Main Control Board

TEST AND ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

None

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

A/D

Analogue to Digital converter

BAM

Bill Aligner Module

CIC

CambridgeIC ‐ developer of non‐contact position sensing technology

HETS

Hall Effect Thickness Sensor – used to count number of bills in SNT

RFP

Retract from present. Retraction of presented media back into the dispenser

Singularity

Calculation of number of bills passing through the HETS

SNR

Serial Number Read

SNT

Single Note Transport ‐ part of transport which transports single bills (not bundles)

SOH

State of Health


S2 Dispenser Cassette

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

atm Notes cassettes are portable containers, moulded in high impact polycarbonate, that are designed to store currency and other media such as postage stamps in the dispenser. the external dimension of the cassette are: Height: 121 mm (4.75 in.) Width: 218 mm (8.6 in.) Depth: 444 mm (17.5 in.).

The cassette can be configured to hold currency of different lengths and widths, and to indicate a code for the denomination it contains.

Currency length range: 120 to 177 mm (4.7 to 7.0 in.) Currency width range: 62 to 85 mm (2.4 to 3.4 in.).

The following variants of cassette are available:

l  Standard security cassettes: the lid is secured with a latch and an optional seal, such as a cable tie.

l  Lockable cassettes: the lid is secured with a keylock in addition to the latch.

l  Tamper indicating cassettes: tracks the number of times that a cassette has been inserted and removed from the dispenser, to detect unauthorised activity. After six insertions, the cassette is ‘locked out’ and needs to be reset. Both standard and lockable cassettes can have the tamper indicator.

Tamper Indicator

The counter on tamper indicating cassettes is initially green, and moves to white on the first insertion of the cassette into the ATM, then moves to show numbers 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 for subsequent insertions. After six insertions the cassette will no longer be accepted into the dispenser until the counter has been reset.

Each time the cassette is removed for routine replenishment, the counter should be reset by repeatedly sliding the stud then releasing it until the indicator shows green.

Cassette Identification Code

Each cassette has a identification code which is read by the ATM software so that regardless of its position in the dispenser, the cassette can be identified and selected to dispense notes of a specific denomination. The code can be changed for different currencies and denominations.

To change the cassette identification code, first remove the yellow clip inside the cassette, then take off the cassette identification casing from the side of the cassette. Remove the indicator wheel from the casing and reposition it so that the required number is aligned with the window. Refit the casing and secure with the clip.

Cassette Body and Lid Marking

Once the cassette has been configured to a particular currency, it is advisable that the body and lid are visually identified to avoid a mismatch of bodies and lids configured for different currencies.

There are two recommended methods:

l  Indelible ink marking: mark the currency denomination on the inside or outside of both the body and lid, using an indelible ink pen

l  Colour coded labels: assign a different colour for each currency denomination and use matching labels on the body and lid.

Other identification methods may be employed, and can make use of the panels of numbers and letters moulded into the cassette body and lid.

A: Recessed areas for either marking with indelible ink pens or for adhesive labels

B and C: Numbered panels.

Cleaning

Clean the cassettes with a cloth dampened with water. For stubborn marks and grease try a clean cloth dampened with isopropyl alcohol. Do not use any other cleaning agents or abrasives.

CASSETTE CONFIGURATION

The internal height and width of the cassette can be configured to fit the dimensions of the currency being used.

Cassette Height

The internal height of the cassette is adjusted for the width of the notes using combinations of spacers fitted between the lid and the note guides.

Refer to the table below for the combination of lid spacers required for your currency.

Currency width

Lid

No. of white spacers

position

A

+ Spacer colour

Lid

No. of white spacers

position

B

+ Spacer colour

Lid

C

No. of white spacers

position

 + Spacer colour

Lid

D

No. of white spacers

position

+ Spacer colour

(mm)

62

4

Orange

4

Blue

4

Yellow

4

Black

63

3

Black

4

Orange

4

Blue

4

Yellow

64

3

Yellow

3

Black

4

Orange

4

Blue

65

3

Blue

3

Yellow

3

Black

4

Orange

66

3

Orange

3

Blue

3

Yellow

3

Black

67

2

Black

3

Orange

3

Blue

3

Yellow

68

2

Yellow

2

Black

3

Orange

3

Blue

69

2

Blue

2

Yellow

2

Black

3

Orange

70

2

Orange

2

Blue

2

Yellow

2

Black

71

1

Black

2

Orange

2

Blue

2

 Yellow

72

1

Yellow

1

Black

2

Orange

2

Blue

73

1

Blue

1

Yellow

1

Black

2

Orange

74

1

Orange

1

Blue

1

Yellow

1

Black

75

0

Black

1

Orange

1

Blue

1

Yellow

76

0

Yellow

0

Black

1

Orange

1

Blue

77

0

Blue

0

Yellow

0

Black

1

Orange

78

0

Orange

0

Blue

0

Yellow

0

Black

79

No spacers, secure note guides in lid with two screws each.

80‐85

No spacers, remove note guides from lid.

To fit the lid spacers:

1.      Consult the table for the combination of spacers needed for the width of the currency to be loaded in this cassette.

2.      Fit the required spacers together starting with the white ones, by stacking one on top of the another then turning it a quarter turn (90o) clockwise. Repeat until the required stack is built.

3.      Place the stack of spacers at each location A, B, C and D on each side of the cassette. Align the stack as shown, then turn it a quarter turn (90o) clockwise to secure it. Do not turn beyond the stop position at 90o.

4.      Place the note guides on top of the stack of spacers and secure with a screw at each location A, B, C and D.

Cassette Width

The internal width of the cassette is adjusted for the length of the notes using the movable ‘L’ shaped guides which can be fixed to either side of the cassette. Side spacers are used to brace the guides.

The note guides are marked A or B and each end has a triangular indicator to line up with a numbered scale on the cassette floor. Refer to the table below for the correct position of the note guides and the required size of the side spacers.

Note Size

Left hand side

Right hand side

(mm)

(refer to illustration above)

 

Guide     Setting

Spacer

Guide

Setting

Spacer

120 ‐ 121

B 3

E9

A 2

E10

122 ‐ 124

B 3

E9

A 3

E9

125 ‐ 126

B 4

E8

A 3

E9

127 ‐ 129

B 4

E8

A 4

E8

130 ‐ 131

B 5

E7

A 4

E8

132 ‐ 134

B 5

E7

A 5

E7

135 ‐ 136

B 6

E6

A 5

E7

137 ‐ 139

B 6

E6

A 6

E6

140 ‐ 141

B 7

A 6

E6

142 ‐ 143

B 7

E5

A 7

E5

144 ‐ 145

A 5

E5

B 5

E5

146 ‐ 147

A 6

E4

B 5

E5

148 ‐ 150

A 6

E4

B 6

E4

151 ‐ 152

A 7

E3

B 6

E4

153 ‐ 155

A 7

E3

B 7

E3

156 ‐ 157

A 8

E2

B 7

E3

158 ‐ 160

A 8

E2

B 8

E2

161 ‐ 162

A 9

E1

B 8

E2

163 ‐ 165

A 9

E1

B 9

E1

166 ‐ 167

A 10

E

B 9

E1

168 ‐ 170

A 10

E

B 10

E

171 ‐ 172

A 11

B 10

E

173 ‐ 177

A 11

B 11

E

To fit the guides:

1.     Remove and retain the screws and washers securing the note guides at the handle end of the cassette.

2.     Lift the end of the guide nearest to the cassette handle and slide a guide towards the handle to disengage it, then lift it out of the cassette. Repeat with the other guide.

3.     Reposition the guides so that the triangular indicators are pointing to the correct numbers according to the table above. Then press the slides in and slide them away from the handle end of the cassette to engage them.

Note:  The metal clips on the guides must always be at the end of the cassette without the handle.

4.     Replace the screws and washers to secure the guides in position.

5.     Cut the side spacers to size, according to the table. Use a strong, sharp knife to cut the spacer so that the required number of segments are left on the spacer. Make sure that the cut edge is flat by removing any jagged cut edges.

6.     Fit the side spacers to brace the note guide on each side of the cassette: one in the slot in the centre of the note guide and one in the slot near the rear of the cassette (opposite end to the handle). The side of the spacer with the numbered segments should be against the guide.

REPLENISHING CASSETTES

Preparing Currency

Good currency preparation will enhance the performance of the currency dispenser.

Before loading the currency into a cassette it must be prepared correctly as follows:

l  Remove the bands or other packaging from the bunches of notes.

l  Used currency should be prepared by holding a bundle of approximately 100 notes and fanning them to separate them out. New currency repeat this several times.

l  While separating out, the currency should be checked for obvious defects such as:

l  Adhesive tape on the surface of the currency

l  Staples, pins or any foreign matter attached to the currency

l  Torn or limp notes with pin holes

l  Two or more notes stuck to each other

l  Corner folds (straighten as required) Folded notes.

Loading the Cassette

1.      Remove the seal (if fitted) from the cassette latch. Or unlock the cassette (lockable variant only).

2.      Press down on the lower latch tab and pull the bottom of the latch off the tab. Then lift the latch up and off the top tab.

3.      Remove the lid from the cassette.

4.      Press down in the green cup while sliding the pusher to the handle end of the cassette.

5.      Remove any remaining currency and balance the transaction in accordance with your in‐house procedures.

6.      To help re‐load notes neatly, rest the cassette on the handle end and support it at an angle, leaning against a wall for example. This stops the note stack falling over while it is being built in the cassette.

7.     Separate the currency, which has been prepared as described at the start of this section, into bundles of approximately 100 notes.

8.     Align the first bundle of notes by tapping it on both the long and short edges. Then place it at the bottom of the cassette.

9.     Continue to align and stack the bundles in the cassette, alternating the orientation of the bundles.

10.  Push down in the green cup to release it. The pusher may move the note stack a short distance until it is pushed against the end of the cassette.

11.  Insert the tabs on the lid into the slots in the cassette then close the lid.

12.  Hook the top of the latch over the top tab then press the bottom of the latch onto the lower tab.

13.  Seal the latch if required or, on lockable variants, lock the cassette. The cassette is now ready for use in the dispenser.

 


Section Divider

Section 12 - Shutters

February 2014

Section Divider

February 2014


Shutters

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

This chapter describes the shutters used in atm Notes ATMs behind the openings of the media dispense and deposit modules.

DESCRIPTION

There are two types of shutter assembly: stepper motor driven shutters and the solenoid driven shutter used on the Check Processor.

Stepper Motor Driven Shutters

The shutter assemblies include a motorised shutter control PCB which responds to open and close commands from the control board of the following modules: Media Dispenser, Envelope Depository and Dispenser (PPD), Cash Acceptor and Recycler (GBRU) and the Bunch Note Acceptor. This drives a 24 V stepper motor to open or close the shutter. The shutter control board also returns the state of the shutter (either opened or closed) to the module control boards.

There are two basic types of stepper motor driven shutter assemblies:

l Upper motor (located left‐hand side or right‐hand side) l Lower motor (located left‐hand side or right‐hand side).

Note:  The GBRU, BNA and PPD modules have additional brackets fitted to the basic shutters which control the infeed alignment.

Both type of assembly use a similar motorised shutter control board.

               Upper Motor Shutter Assembly (LHS)                       Upper Motor Shutter Assemblies (RHS)

                Lower Motor Shutter Assembly (LHS)                         Lower Motor Shutter Assembly (RHS)

Shutter Assembly

The motor drives the shutter via a worm drive. As the worm drive turns, the shutter is driven open or closed. The fully closed or open position is detected when the beam of the upper or lower opto‐transmissive switches on the shutter control board is interrupted by a flag incorporated in the shutter blade.

The following illustration shows the mechanical arrangement of the shutter.

                            Lower Motor Shutter Assembly                           Upper Motor Shutter Assembly

Control Board

J5

Upper stepper motor connection.

J1

Lower stepper motor connection.

Solenoid Driven Shutter

The shutter assembly includes a shutter control PCB which responds to open and close commands from the check processor control board to drive the solenoid arm to open or close the shutter blade.

Shutter Assembly

Control Board

J3

Micro switch harness connection.

J2

Solenoid harness connection.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Refer to the relevant device chapter for information on troubleshooting.

DIAGNOSTICS

Level 0 Diagnostics

There are no level 0 diagnostic tests associated with the shutters.

Level 1 Diagnostics

Refer to the relevant device chapter for information on level 1 diagnostic tests.

STRAPPING

None.

ADJUSTMENTS

None.

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

Stepper Motor Driven Shutters

The following instructions depend on whether:

A  ‐ The whole shutter assembly is being replaced by an atm Notes supplied kit, with the shutter preset to the closed position, or

B  ‐ Only the motor is being refitted, or

C  ‐ In exceptional circumstances, if the whole shutter assembly is being replaced by an atm Notes supplied kit, but fitted with the shutter in the open position for special service access conditions.

A ‐ Refit of complete shutter assembly with shutter preset to the closed position

Note:  The shutter assembly is preset to the closed position when shipped from the factory. Do not alter the rotational position of the shutter before fitting.

1.     Use the CE switch to remove power from the ATM whilst keeping the PC core running (this avoids the lengthy re‐boot period associated with a full re‐start).

2.     Remove the existing shutter assembly.

3.     Position the new shutter assembly over the mushroom studs located on the facia fixing bracket.

4.     Push the shutter downwards until the blade contacts the facia moulding and using moderate force remove the backlash from the shutter gears.

5.     Any gap under the shutter should be within acceptable limits, parallel and a consistent size. It should not be possible to fit the card of a magnetic card reader through any gaps.

6.     While still pressing downwards, tighten the screws.

7.     Use the CE switch to resume power to the ATM.

8.     Perform a level 1 diagnostic shutter test (approx. 50 cycles) to ensure that the shutter is still operational.

B ‐ Refit of motor only

1.     Use the CE switch to remove power from the ATM whilst keeping the PC core running (this avoids the lengthy re‐boot period associated with a full re‐start).

2.     Remove the existing shutter assembly.

3.     Remove and refit the motor on its mounting bracket.

4.     Manually wind the worm drive into the closed position so that the flag of the shutter is central to the sensor on the PCB.

Diagram showing ‘Motor Upper’ type shutter in the closed position

Diagram showing ‘Motor Lower’ type shutter in the closed position

5.     Position the shutter assembly over the mushroom studs located on the facia fixing bracket.

6.     Push the shutter downwards until the blade contacts the facia moulding and using moderate force remove the backlash from the shutter gears.

7.     Any gap under the shutter should be within acceptable limits, parallel and a consistent size. It should not be possible to fit the card of a magnetic card reader through any gaps.

8.     While still pressing downwards, tighten the screws.

9.     Use the CE switch to resume power to the ATM.

10.  Perform a level 1 diagnostic shutter test (approx. 50 cycles) to ensure that the shutter is still operational.

C ‐ Refit of complete shutter assembly with shutter in open position

Note:  Fitting the shutter in its open position is an exceptional circumstance to aid access to the module in difficult service conditions.

1.     Use the CE switch to remove power from the ATM whilst keeping the PC core running (this avoids the lengthy re‐boot period associated with a full re‐start).

2.     Remove the existing shutter assembly.

3.     Manually wind the worm drive of the new shutter assembly into the open position.

Diagram showing ‘Motor Upper’ type shutter in the open position

Diagram showing ‘Motor Lower’ type shutter in open position

4.     Position the new shutter assembly over the mushroom studs located on the facia fixing bracket.

5.     In its highest possible position, tighten the screws.

6.     Use the CE switch to resume power to the ATM.

7.     Perform a level 1 diagnostic shutter test to drive the shutter into its closed position.

8.     Use the CE switch to remove power from the ATM whilst keeping the PC core running.

9.     Loosen the fixing screws and push the shutter downwards until the blade contacts the facia moulding.

10.  Using moderate force, remove the backlash from the shutter gears.

11.  Any gap under the shutter should be within acceptable limits, parallel and a consistent size. It should not be possible to fit the card of a magnetic card reader through any gaps.

12.  While still pressing downwards, tighten the screws.

13.  Use the CE switch to resume power to the ATM.

14.  Perform a level 1 diagnostic shutter test (approx. 50 cycles) to ensure that the shutter is still operational.

CABLING

Stepper Motor Driven Shutter ‐ Internal Cabling

Solenoid Driven Shutter ‐ Internal Cabling

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

No information available.


Section Divider

Section 13 - Security

February 2014

Section Divider

February 2014


Skimming Protection Solution (MCRW)

INTRODUCTION

This chapter details the Skimming Protection Solution (SPS), also known as Anti Skimming Module (ASM), or Intelligent Fraud Detection 2 (IFD2). Note that some components such as harnessing use ASM or IFD2 in their names, these have been preserved in this manual for easier identification for re‐ordering and replacement.

The SPS feature uses sensors to detect and create an alert whenever fraudulent devices, such as card skimmers are fitted to the exterior of the card path or MCRW bezel.

CAUTION

Make sure that ESD precautions are observed.

DESCRIPTION

The SPS consists of the following elements:

l  Control box containing the SPS Control PCB (ASM Control Board) and SPS Daughter PCB (ASM Control Daughter Board)

l  SPS IMCRW Bezel moulding assembly with integrated sensors and connecting harnessing

l  Drill Mat, (if fitted) ‐ also known as the Penetration Mat.

l  Interconnecting harnessing.

The diagram below shows the functional elements of the SPS feature.

The base functionality of the SPS is to:

l  Disrupt the magnetic read capability of card skimming technology

l  Detect card skimming technology

l  Detect attacks on the disruption and detection technology l Report an entry into the ATM.

SPS uses the following technologies to prevent a skimming device from capturing data from a card’s magnetic stripe at an ATM or Kiosk.

Capacitive Sensing

The capacitive sensing device is integrated into the IMCRW bezel. Its function is to detect and create an alert whenever a fraudulent device such as a card skimmer is fitted to the exterior of the card path or MCRW bezel.

Magnetic Field ‘Jammer’

The magnetic field jammer which disrupts card skimmers is located in the IMCRW bezel moulding. Its function is to render the data obtained by a skimmer useless by disrupting the magnetic card data being read by the skimmer. It does not raise an alert at the presence of a skimmer, but blocks it from reading a card successfully during each transaction.

Note that the jammer in the bezel is not a jamming transmitter.

Electrical

Power Requirements

SPS Control PCB power requirements: 24V +/‐ 10%: 3A maximum SPS Control PCB to the Daughter PCB requirements:

l  24V +/‐ 10%: 1.5A maximum

l  5V +/‐ 10%: 50mA maximum.

Power supplied to the SPS PCB peripherals:

l  5V +/‐ 5%: 250mA maximum

l  ‐5V +/‐ 5%: 250mA maximum.

SPS Control PCB

SPS Daughter PCB

The SPS Daughter PCB which attaches directly to the SPS control PCB, provides a stepdown power supply and can support two inductor coils.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Module Error State Messages

The following error messages are reported by the device.

Module Error State    Possible Root Cause(s)                    Isolation                            Resolution

USB Communication USB cable has been disconnected           Check cable connection at Reconnect the USB cable or

Failure                          or is faulty.   the SPS, PC Core or at the replace if faulty. SPS firmware is faulty.           powered HUB.

SPS is faulty.

USBASM Control Electronics Fault

SPS is faulty.

Check LED D2 is on.

Power cycle the SPS.

Check no LEDs are on.

Power cycle the SPS.

If above steps fail, replace the device.

Device not authorised

Different SPS connected.

Requires authorisation. No more test required.

Download candidate firmware checksum

invalid

Firmware file on the disk is corrupted.

Restart the ATM and allow the firmware loader service to download the compatible device firmware.

Resident firmware checksum invalid

Firmware file on the device is corrupted.

Restart the ATM and allow the firmware loader service to download the compatible device firmware. If it fails again, then replace the hardware.

Not found during start up

SPS not attached before service start.

SPS not attached before service start.

Connect device and restart the

ATM.

USB cable is disconnected.

Check USB cable connection at the SPS, PC Core, or at the powered HUB.

Reconnect the USB cable.

USB cable is faulty.

Replace the USB cable.

SPS firmware is not running.

Check LED D1 is off.

Power cycle the SPS.

SPS is faulty.

Check LED D2 is on.

Replace SPS.

I2C Communication      I2C cable disconnected between       Check LED D2 is flashing.   Reconnect I2C cable.

Fault                              the primary card reader bezel

                                      sensor and the SPS.                                                                   Note: see Cable section

Faulty I2C cable.

Out of range cap sensor reading

Interfering object is in proximity of the primary card reader bezel sensor.

Possible skimming attack.

Check around the primary card reader bezel sensor for any foreign objects of a suspicious nature.

Do NOT remove any suspicious object, but instead, inform the necessary authorities i.e. bank security.

Out of range temperature

Primary card reader bezel sensors have been sprayed with freezer spray.

Possible skimming attack.

Check around the primary card reader bezel sensor for any foreign objects of a suspicious nature.

Do NOT remove any suspicious object, but instead, inform the necessary authorities i.e.bank security.

Module Error State

Possible Root Cause(s)

Isolation

Resolution

Primary card reader bezel capacitive sensor displaced

Primary card reader bezel capacitive sensors have been moved away from the card reader slot. Possible skimming attack.

Do NOT remove the hardware or suspicious object.

Width‐Shutter switch harness displaced

Width‐Shutter switch harness has been disconnected.

Reconnect the Width‐Shutter switch harness.

Skimmer detected

Additional material in proximity to the capacitive sensor.

Possible skimming attack.

Inspect the area around the sensor for any suspicious object.

Do NOT remove the hardware or any suspicious object.

Jammer signal too weak

Faulty primary card reader bezel jammer

Replace the primary card reader bezel.

Invalid jammer detected

Non‐atm Notes primary card reader bezel jammer attached.

Replace the primary card reader bezel.

Jammer signal too strong

Additional material in proximity to the primary card reader bezel jammer.

Possible skimming attack.

Inspect the area around the primary card reader bezel jammer for any additional material.

Do NOT remove any additional material.

Penetration                   Drill mat has been penetrated.                               ‐     Carefully replace the drill mat.

detected                       Drill mat has been removed.

Door open

Door opened.

Close the door.

Jammer programming fault

Jammer is NOT configured properly.

Use the Test Device Tool

‐ Place the tool in the bezel and with SysApp open, view Jammer On State

‐ Use the key disk to loop the test and to view the jammer toggle.

Restart the ATM and allow the firmware loader service to download the FPGA firmware. If it fails again, then check if the FPGA candidate firmware file is current or replace the hardware.

Note:  After replacing any harnessing, carry out a Post Repair Test, see instructions in the Diagnostic section.

DIAGNOSTICS

For general diagnostic information see the Diagnostics Overview chapter in the Diagnostics Overview section.

Diagnostic LEDs

LED’s are an indication of the general operation of the device. They do not report detailed faults. Refer to the System Application Menu for detailed fault reporting.

Condition

LED 1

LED 2

LED 3

LED 4

USB CONNECTED

ON

USB DISCONNECTED

RAPID FLASH

FLASH

HEALTHY

ON

FAST FLASH

DISRUPTOR ON

ON

DISRUPTOR OFF

OFF

CAPACITIVE SENSOR DISCONNECTED

SLOW FLASH

Note:  Jammer has a duty cycle when the USB is disconnected. LED 2 follows the Jammer ON/OFF condition.

Device Diagnostics

In System Application the SPS feature is called USB Anti‐Skimming Module and the disruptor is referred to as the jammer.

Note:  Looping is allowed on all tests except on Transfer Logs.

Test

Description

Menu

Displays a menu of all the other tests to allow the user to select one.

Identification

Performs an identification command and displays the following:

l   Device Variant

l   Device Serial Number

l   Main Firmware Version l FPGA Firmware Version l Device Name.

Display Status

The test will display the current sensors status and tries to check and clear the jammer weak or strong signal error. When all sensors are healthy, then the status will be displayed in the following format:

      Sensor                                                        State

     Primary Card Reader Bezel Capacitive      No Alert

      Primary Card Reader Jammer                   No Alert ‐ Jammer ON/OFF

Drill Mat         No Alert Door State            Closed

When the drill mat sensor is affected and the door is opened, then the status will be displayed as:

      Sensor                                                        State

     Primary Card Reader Bezel Capacitive      No Alert

      Primary Card Reader Jammer                   No Alert ‐ Jammer ON/OFF

      Drill Mat                                                     Alert

     Door State                                                  Open

Transfer Logs

This test is available on the ATM only if ‘Allow Transfer Logs Diagnostic Applet’ is set to TRUE (configurable via Property Page).

NOTE: Some banks collect logs from the ATM remotely.

If the configuration is set to TRUE, then the test will perform the operations below in sequence:

1.         The test will first display the menu which will contain all the removable media detected on the system for user selection.

2.         Create a directory under the root directory if not present and name it using the ATM serial number and Site I.D. e.g. 12345678_XXXXXXXX where 12345678 is the ATM serial number and xxxxxxxx is the actual Bank ATM ID.

3.         The logs will be copied into newly created directory.

4.         The user will be prompted about the success or failure of the activity.

This applet will copy the log files to the removable media. The user must not expect any device related MStatus or error code on the execution of the applet.

l This applet copies the device logs to the removable media and during this process it does not communicate with the device.

l The removable media must be loaded before executing this applet. If the media is inserted later on, then, it will not be reflected in the media selection menu.

l The logs will not be deleted from the disk after the successful execution of this applet because we may need to transfer the logs again from the ATM later.

Test

Description

Display Cap Status

The test will display the current sensors status. When all sensors are healthy, then the status will be displayed in the following format:

Sensor                                                          State

Primary Card Reader Bezel Capacitive        No Alert

Primary Card Reader Jammer                      No Alert ‐ Jammer ON/OFF

Drill Mat                                                       No Alert

Door State                                                    Closed

When the drill mat sensor is affected and the door is opened, then the status will be displayed as:

Sensor                                                          State

Primary Card Reader Bezel Capacitive        No Alert

Primary Card Reader Jammer                      No Alert ‐ Jammer ON/OFF

Drill Mat                                                       Alert

Door State                                                    Open

Run Sequence Test 1

This test verifies the operation of the Capacitive Sensor, Jammer Strong & Jammer Weak. Part of the test involves rebaselining the sensors. See detailed description below.

Post Repair Test: Run Sequence Test 1

This test should be carried out after every repair. The trigger insert tool (part number 445‐0738402) is needed to complete the test. The tool has 3 numbered test surfaces and must inserted into the card entry slot when prompted, so that the number of the surface required is visible to the user when fully inserted.

Note:  You must transfer the interface to the front of the ATM in order to carry out this test.

1.     Choose ‘Run sequence Test 1’ from Device Diagnostics menu.

2.     The status of the device will be displayed for information.

3.     Follow the on‐screen instructions. When prompted to ‘place insert 1’ insert the trigger tool so that surface number 1 is visible when the tool is fully inserted into the card entry slot.

4.     A screen will be displayed to show the result of insert 1.

5.     Then follow the instructions when prompted to remove insert 1 and place insert 2 in the card entry slot. Make sure you insert the tool so that surface number 2 is visible when the tool is fully inserted.

6.     A screen will be displayed to show the result of insert 2. Follow the on‐screen instructions when prompted to remove insert 2.

7.     When prompted to ‘place insert 3’ insert the trigger tool so that surface number 3 is visible when the tool is fully inserted into the card entry slot.

8.     A screen will be displayed to show the result of insert 3. Follow the on‐screen instructions when prompted to remove insert 3.

9.     A final screen will display the test status.

10.  Remove the trigger tool at the end of the test.

Service Tallies

Tally

Description

ATTEMPTS

The total number of communication operations done on the device.

COM_FAIL

The total number of communication failures reported by the device.

FAIL_ATT

The total number of communication retries done on communication failures.

DEV_REM

The total number of USB cable disconnections.

DEV_ARR

The total number of USB cable connections.

CAP_COMM

The total number of card reader interface capacitive sensor communication failures.

CAP_OBJ

The total number of card reader interface capacitive sensor unusual object detected.

JAMMER_ON

The total number of card reader interface Jammer ON.

JAMMROFF

The total number of card reader interface Jammer OFF.

DRIL_PEN

The total number of drill mat sensor penetrations detected.

DOOROPEN

The total number of door state sensor open.

DOOR_CLS

The total number of door state sensor close.

Device Self Test

The following options are available via System Application.

               Test                   Description

Menu

Displays a menu of all the other tests to allow the user to select one.

Device Self Test

The device self test will execute the following command:

l  This test executes the Determine state command.

l  End of test.

CONFIGURATION

Configuration options are available via the System Application.

Test

Description

Menu

Displays a menu of all the other tests to allow the user to select one.

Device Information

The test will display the following:

l    Device Variant

l    Device Serial Number

l    Main Firmware Version l FPGA Firmware Version l Device Name.

Display Status

The test will display the current sensors status.

This test executes ‘Determine State’ command to get sensor status and when all sensors are healthy, then the status will be displayed in the following format:

                                                      Sensor                                                       State

                                                      Primary Card Reader Bezel Capacitive     No Alert

                                                      Primary Card Reader Jammer                  No Alert ‐ Jammer ON/OFF

                                                      Drill Mat                                                    No Alert

                                                      Door State                                                 Closed

When the drill mat sensor is affected and the door is opened, then the status will be displayed as:

Test

Description

Sensor                                                         State

Primary Card Reader Bezel Capacitive       No Alert

Primary Card Reader Jammer                    No Alert ‐ Jammer ON/OFF

Drill Mat                                                      Alert

Door State                                                   Open

Re‐Baseline Sensor

This applet allows the user to reset the SPS device and clear all error counts and flags. The ‘Re‐baseline Sensor’ command will cause the SPS hardware to be reset to a new environment level for all sensors. The environment level is the baseline for the sensors. The test will be performed in the below sequence:

1.             Perform a check of the SPS system sensors and confirm there are no foreign objects present before executing the ‘Re‐Baseline Sensor’ command.

2.             Execute the ‘Re‐Baseline Sensor’ command to reset the new environment level.

3.             Display sensor information after this test.

Note: This applet will be visible when the user entered SysApp through the USB dongle key.

Note: Rebaseline must be performed from the front of the unit.

SPS Device Setting

This applet allows the user to set the jammer settings:

1.             Signal Drift for Jammer Activation. The acceptable range is 50 to 1000. The default is 50.

2.             Jammer Activation Timeout. the acceptable range is 1 to 10. The default is 1.

Drill Mat Status

The test will display the status of the drill mat: either configured or not. If configured, it will display any sensor alerts.

Configure Drill Mat

The test will configure the drill mat, after which the ATM must be re‐booted.

Deconfigure Drill Mat The test will de‐ configure the drill mat, after which the ATM must be re‐booted.

Note:  Configuration setting will be remotely viewable by default. They cannot be modified.

STRAPPING

None.

ADJUSTMENTS

None.

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

l  SPS IMCRW Bezel moulding assembly (containing coil, capacitive sensor driver and electrode PCB’s inside the bezel) plus Harness assembly containing shield, shield ground harness, sensor and coil assembly plus associated harnesses. l SPS Control Box

l  Control PCB

l  Daughter PCB

l  Drill mat assembly (25, 34, 38 and 32 ATM only)

l  Interconnecting harnesses

l  IFD2 (SPS) Control PCB to IMCRW Linker harness

l  SPS Replenishment harness

l  IFD2 (SPS) Short Linker harness

l  IFD2 (SPS) Control PCB to Coil Linker harness

l  IFD2 (SPS) Control PCB to IMCRW Electrode Linker harness l Penetration Mat harness.

SPS Bezel Moulding and Harness Assembly

There are no field replaceable parts within the bezel moulding assembly. If faulty, replace the bezel moulding assembly.

Drill Mat

The drill mat assembly comprising the drill mat and bracket is mandatory where the ATM supports this functionality. There are different drill mat assemblies for different ATMs: the one shown below is for illustration only

CAUTION

Take care when replacing the drill mat assembly as the micro‐switch

is easily damaged..

1.      Remove and retain the four screws (three on the SelfServ 34) securing the drill mat assembly.

2.      Carefully position the replacement drill mat assembly, taking care not to damage the delicate micro‐switch.

3.      Secure the assembly with the retained screws.

4.      Carefully remove the protective Mylar strip over the micro‐switch.

SPS Control Box

Daughter PCB

1.      Loosen the M4 nut and remove the control box cover plate from the SPS control box.

2.      Disconnect the IFD (SPS) Coil Linker harness from the daughter PCB.

3.      Remove and retain the M3 x 20 M/C comb screw securing the daughter PCB to the SPS control PCB.

4.      Remove the spacer between the daughter PCB and the SPS control PCB.

5.      Squeeze the end of the plastic stand‐off together to free the PCB from the stand‐off.

6.      Carefully remove it by gently prizing it from the control board connectors.

Note:  When removing the daughter PCB, ensure it is kept parallel with the main SPS control PCB to prevent damage to the connectors.

SPS Control PCB

1.         Disconnect the USB cable and any other cable connections from the SPS control PCB. 2. Remove and retain the plastic snap‐on stand‐off.

3.     Remove the three M3 x 6 screws securing the control PCB to the metal frame.

4.     Remove the control PCB.

Interconnecting Harnessing

There are no serviceable parts on the harnessing. If faulty, replace the harness.

CONNECTORS ASSIGNMENTS

SPS Control PCB Connectors

Daughter PCB Connectors

CABLING

The following diagram shows the harness connections on the SPS.

IFD2 (SPS) Control PCB to IMCRW Linker Harness (J12 SPS Control PCB)

                      To IFD Control PCB                                                                               To FDI Jammer Harness

IFD2 (SPS) Harness ‐ IMCRW Short Linker Harness (on IMCRW)

IFD2 (SPS) Control PCB to Coil Linker Harness (J1 Daughter PCB)

IFD2 (SPS) Ctl PCB to IMCRW Electrode Linker Harness (J9 SPS Ctl PCB)

Penetration Mat Harness (J4 SPS Control PCB)

Short

                    DMAT_J1                                                                                                                     DRILL_FEMALE

Long

SS ASM (SPS) Replenishment Harness (J6 SPS Control PCB)

Note:  The type of replenishment harnesses used will depend on the ATM model.)

ASM (SPS) Replenishment Harness (J6 SPS Control PCB)

Note:  The type of replenishment harnesses used will depend on the ATM model.

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

The trigger insert tool must be used to perform repair exit tests at the conclusion of any activity on SPS:

SPS SelfServ MCRW Trigger, atm Notes part number 445‐0738402.


Skimming Protection Solution (Dip Card

Reader)

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

This chapter details the Skimming Protection Solution (SPS), also known as Anti Skimming Module (ASM) for Dip Card Readers.

The SPS feature uses sensors to detect and create an alert whenever fraudulent devices such as card skimmers are fitted to the exterior of the card path or Dip Card Reader bezel.

CAUTION

Make sure that ESD precautions are observed.

DESCRIPTION

The SPS consists of the following elements:

l  Control box containing the SPS control PCB (ASM control board).

l  SPS dip card bezel assembly with integrated sensors and connecting harnesses.

l  Drill mat, (if fitted) ‐ also known as the penetration mat.

l  Interconnecting harnesses.

Functional Elements

The diagram below shows the functional elements of the SPS feature.

The base functionality of the SPS is to:

l  Detect card skimming technology l Detect attacks on the detection technology l Report an entry into the ATM.

SPS uses capacitive sensing to detect a skimming device. The capacitive sensing device is integrated into the Dip card reader bezel. Its function is to detect and create an alert whenever a fraudulent device such as a card skimmer is fitted to the exterior of the card path or Dip card reader bezel.

Power Requirements

SPS Control PCB power requirements: 24V +/‐ 10%: 3A maximum Power supplied to the SPS PCB peripherals:

l  5V +/‐ 5%: 250mA maximum

l  ‐5V +/‐ 5%: 250mA maximum.

SPS Control PCB

ERROR MESSAGES

Module Error State    Possible Root Cause(s)                    Isolation                            Resolution

USB Communication USB cable has been disconnected           Check cable connection at Reconnect the USB cable

Failure                          or is faulty.   the SPS, PC Core or at the or replace if faulty. SPS firmware is faulty.           powered HUB.

SPS is faulty.

USBASM Control Electronics Fault

SPS is faulty.

Check LED D2 is on.

Power cycle the SPS.

Check no LEDs are on.

Power cycle the SPS.

If above steps fail, replace the device.

Device not authorised

Different SPS connected.

Requires authorisation. No more test required.

Download candidate firmware checksum

invalid

Firmware file on the disk is corrupted.

Restart the ATM and allow the firmware loader service to download the compatible device firmware.

Resident firmware checksum invalid

Firmware file on the device is corrupted.

Restart the ATM and allow the firmware loader service to download the compatible device firmware. If it fails again,

then replace the hardware.

Not found during start up

SPS not attached before service start.

SPS not attached before service start.

Connect device and restart the ATM.

USB cable is disconnected.

Check USB cable connection at the SPS, PC Core, or at the powered HUB.

Reconnect the USB cable.

USB cable is faulty.

Replace the USB cable.

SPS firmware is not running.

Check LED D1 is off.

Power cycle the SPS.

SPS is faulty.

Check LED D2 is on.

Replace SPS.

I2C Communication      I2C cable disconnected between       Check LED D2 is flashing.   Reconnect I2C cable.

Fault                              the primary card reader bezel

                                      sensor and the SPS.                                                                   Note: see Cable section

Faulty I2C cable.

Out of range temperature

Primary card reader bezel sensors have been sprayed with freezer spray.

Possible skimming attack.

Check around the primary card reader bezel sensor for any foreign objects of a suspicious nature.

Do NOT remove any suspicious object, but instead, inform the necessary authorities i.e.bank security.

Unusual object detected

Additional material in proximity to the capacitive sensor.

Possible skimming attack.

Inspect the area around the sensor for any suspicious object.

Do NOT remove the hardware or any suspicious object.

Module Error State    Possible Root Cause(s)                    Isolation                            Resolution

Penetration         Drill mat has been penetrated.         ‐             Carefully replace the drill detected  Drill mat has been removed.           mat.

Door open                    Door opened.                                                           ‐                        Close the door.

Note:  After any repair activity ‐ not just SPS ‐ carry out instructions in the Configuration section to Re-Baseline Sensor.

DIAGNOSTICS

For general diagnostic information see the Diagnostics Overview chapter in the Diagnostics Overview section.

Diagnostic LEDs

LED’s are an indication of the general operation of the device. They do not report detailed faults. Refer to the System Application Menu for detailed fault reporting.

Condition

LED 1

LED 2

LED 3

LED 4

USB CONNECTED

ON

USB DISCONNECTED

RAPID FLASH

FLASH

HEALTHY

ON

FAST FLASH

CAPACITIVE SENSOR DISCONNECTED

SLOW FLASH

Device Diagnostics

Note:  Looping is allowed on all tests except on Transfer Logs.

Test

Description

Menu

Displays a menu of all the other tests to allow the user to select one.

Identification

Performs an identification command and displays the following:

l   Device Variant

l   Device Serial Number

l   Main Firmware Version l FPGA Firmware Version l Device Name.

Display Status

The test will display the current sensors status.

When all sensors are healthy, then the status will be displayed in the following format:

      Sensor                                                        State

     Primary Card Reader Bezel Capacitive      No Alert

Drill Mat         No Alert Door State            Closed

When the drill mat sensor is affected and the door is opened, then the status will be displayed as:

      Sensor                                                        State

     Primary Card Reader Bezel Capacitive      No Alert

      Drill Mat                                                     Alert

     Door State                                                  Open

Transfer Logs

This test is available on the ATM only if ‘Allow Transfer Logs Diagnostic Applet’ is set to TRUE (configurable via Property Page).

NOTE: Some banks collect logs from the ATM remotely.

If the configuration is set to TRUE, then the test will perform the operations below in sequence:

1.         The test will first display the menu which will contain all the removable media detected on the system for user selection.

2.         Create a directory under the root directory if not present and name it using the ATM serial number and Site I.D. e.g. 12345678_XXXXXXXX where 12345678 is the ATM serial number and xxxxxxxx is the actual Bank ATM ID.

3.         The logs will be copied into newly created directory.

4.         The user will be prompted about the success or failure of the activity.

This applet will copy the log files to the removable media. The user must not expect any device related MStatus or error code on the execution of the applet.

l This applet copies the device logs to the removable media and during this process it does not communicate with the device.

l The removable media must be loaded before executing this applet. If the media is inserted later on, then, it will not be reflected in the media selection menu.

l The logs will not be deleted from the disk after the successful execution of this applet because we may need to transfer the logs again from the ATM later.

Test

Description

Display Cap Status

The test will display the current sensors status.

When all sensors are healthy, then the status will be displayed in the following format:

Sensor                                                          State

Primary Card Reader Bezel Capacitive        No Alert

Drill Mat             No Alert Door State            Closed

When the drill mat sensor is affected and the door is opened, then the status will be displayed as:

Sensor                                                          State

Primary Card Reader Bezel Capacitive        No Alert

Drill Mat                                                       Alert

Door State                                                    Open

Run Sequence Test 1

This test performs the re‐baselining of the sensors. See Configuration section for instructions details of the Re‐Baseline Sensor post repair test.

Device Self Test

The following options are available via System Application.

Test

Menu

Device Self Test

Tallies

Description

Displays a menu of all the other tests to allow the user to select one. The device self test will execute the following command:

l  This test executes the Determine state command.

l  End of test.

Tally

Description

ATTEMPTS

The total number of communication operations done on the device.

COM_FAIL

The total number of communication failures reported by the device.

FAIL_ATT

The total number of communication retries done on communication failures.

DEV_REM

The total number of USB cable disconnections.

DEV_ARR

The total number of USB cable connections.

CAP_COMM

The total number of card reader interface capacitive sensor communication failures.

CAP_OBJ

The total number of card reader interface capacitive sensor unusual object detected.

DRIL_PEN

The total number of drill mat sensor penetrations detected.

DOOROPEN

The total number of door state sensor open.

DOOR_CLS

The total number of door state sensor close.

CONFIGURATION

Configuration options are available via the System Application.

Test

Description

Menu

Displays a menu of all the other tests to allow the user to select one.

Device Information

The test will display the following:

l    Device Variant

l    Device Serial Number

l    Main Firmware Version l FPGA Firmware Version l Device Name.

Display Status

The test will display the current sensors status.

This test executes ‘Determine State’ command to get sensor status and when all sensors are healthy, then the status will be displayed in the following format:

Sensor                                                         State

Primary Card Reader Bezel Capacitive       No Alert

Drill Mat                                                      No Alert

Door State                                                   Closed

When the drill mat sensor is affected and the door is opened, then the status will be displayed as:

Sensor                                                         State

Primary Card Reader Bezel Capacitive       No Alert

Drill Mat                                                      Alert

Door State                                                   Open

Re‐Baseline Sensor

This applet allows the user to reset the SPS device and clear all error counts and flags. The ‘Re‐baseline Sensor’ command will cause the SPS hardware to be reset to a new environment level for all sensors. The environment level is the baseline for the sensors. The test will be performed in the below sequence:

1.             Perform a check of the SPS system sensors and confirm there are no foreign objects present before executing the ‘Re‐Baseline Sensor’ command.

2.             Execute the ‘Re‐Baseline Sensor’ command to reset the new environment level.

3.             Display sensor information after this test.

Note: This applet will be visible when the user entered SysApp through the USB dongle key.

Note: Rebaseline must be performed from the front of the unit.

Drill Mat Status

The test will display the status of the drill mat: either configured or not. If configured, it will display any sensor alerts.

Configure Drill Mat

The test will configure the drill mat, after which the ATM must be re‐booted.

Deconfigure Drill Mat The test will de‐ configure the drill mat, after which the ATM must be re‐booted.

Note:  Configuration setting will be remotely viewable by default. They cannot be modified.

Post Repair Test: Re‐Baseline Sensor/Run Sequence Test 1

The SPS sensor should be re‐baselined after every repair, using the trigger test tool (part number 445‐0743656, or 445‐0749153 for 6691 ATMs). Place the trigger test tool around the bezel when prompted, ensuring that it does not move during re‐baselining but do not hold it in place with your hand as this will affect the result of the test.

Use only the correct trigger tool for the ATM:

Trigger tools for 6691 Cantilever and 6691 Head‐on

Note:  On rear access units, you must transfer the interface to the front of the ATM in order to carry out this test.

1.     Choose ‘Re‐baseline Sensor’ from Device Configuration menu.

2.     Then choose option ‘Run Sequence Test 1’.

3.     The status of the device will be displayed for information.

4.     Follow the on‐screen instructions. When prompted to ‘place insert 3’ place the trigger test tool around the bezel.

5.     A screen will be displayed to show the result of insert 3.

6.     A final screen will display the test status.

7.     Remove the trigger test tool at the end of the post repair sequence test exercise.

STRAPPING

None.

ADJUSTMENTS

None.

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

The Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) within SPS are:

l  SPS dip card reader bezel moulding assembly (containing capacitive sensor driver, electrode PCBs, ASM shield ground harness and associated harnesses). l SPS control box

l  Control PCB

l  Drill mat assembly (if fitted)

l  Interconnecting harnesses

l  SPS dip driver PCB to control PCB linker harness

l  SPS dip top electrode harness

l  SPS dip bottom electrode harness

l  SPS replenishment harness

l  Penetration mat harness

SPS Bezel and Driver Assembly

There are no serviceable parts within the bezel and driver assembly. If faulty, replace the bezel and driver assembly ‐ example shown below.

Interconnecting Harnessing

There are no serviceable parts on the harnessing. If faulty, replace the harness.

Drill Mat

The drill mat assembly comprising the drill mat and bracket is mandatory where the ATM supports this functionality. There are different drill mat assemblies for different ATMs. The one shown below is for illustration only.

CAUTION

Take care when replacing the drill mat assembly as the micro‐switch is easily damaged.

1.      Remove and retain the four screws (three on the SelfServ 34) securing the drill mat assembly.

2.      Carefully position the replacement drill mat assembly, taking care not to damage the delicate micro‐switch.

Tip: if a spare protective strip is not available, use a piece of sticky tape to protect the switch during installation, with a folded end to make it easy to remove afterwards.

3.      Secure the assembly with the retained screws.

4.      Carefully remove the protective Mylar strip over the micro‐switch.

SPS Control Box

SPS Control PCB

1.      Loosen the M4 nut and remove the control box cover plate from the SPS control box.

2.      Disconnect the USB cable and any other cable connections from the SPS control PCB.

3.      Remove the four M3 x 6 screws securing the control PCB to the metal frame.

4.      Remove the control PCB.

CABLING

The following diagram shows the harness connections on the SPS.

SPS DIP Driver PCB to Control PCB Linker Harness

Low Power DC Distribution Harness

USB Type A to Type Mini B High Speed Cable Assembly

Penetration Mat Harnesses

Short

                    DMAT_J1                                                                                                                    DRILL_FEMALE

Long

SS ASM (SPS) Replenishment Harness

Note:  The type of replenishment harnesses used will depend on the ATM model.

Bezel Assembly

ASM Shield Ground Harness

SPS Dip Bottom Electrode Harness

SPS Dip Top Electrode Harness

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS

SPS Control PCB Connectors

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

The trigger test tool must be used to perform repair exit tests at the conclusion of any repair activity, not just on SPS:

SPS SelfServ Dip Trigger, atm Notes part number 445‐0743656 or Moulding Assy ‐ Dip Trigger, atm Notes part number 445‐0749153 for 6691 ATMs.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

None.

 


Alarms

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

The alarm system provides an interface between a series of alarm sensors and an external environment, such as a bank’s existing alarm scheme. There are three types of alarm systems:

l  Basic

l  Enhanced

l  High security.

Location

The following diagrams show the locations of the installations within the safe:

Basic Alarm System

Enhanced Alarm System

High Security Alarm System

DESCRIPTION

All Alarm Systems offer status reporting. This feature reports the status of the alarm signals to the ATM application program.

A silent alarm, operated by a special combination lock, is an option.

TROUBLESHOOTING

None.

DIAGNOSTICS

Level 0

None.

Level 1

Alarms

The test Offered on the Alarms Diagnostic menu is the Determine Sensor Status test.

Determine Sensor Status

TReports the status of the safe’s six sensors.

Level 3

None.

STRAPPING

If the silent alarm is not fitted, the following turnaround plug (atm Notes part no. 4450591539) will be installed in connector J1 on the alarm termination panel:

l  1 x 009‐0006439, connector 2 x 3 plug

l  2 x 009‐0006427, terminal #18 (female) l 50 mm x 006‐5830020, wire #18 white.

ADJUSTMENTS

The vibration detector will normally be adjusted for optimum performance by the representative of the alarm company responsible for connecting the ATM to a local alarm system (they have the expertise and local knowledge to adjust the unit for a particular site). For test purposes, however, atm Notes presets the unit to an initial adjustment as follows:

l  Using a spring gauge, centred level with the contact in the direction of the arrow, adjust the screw until the force necessary to open the contact is approximately 5 g. Recommended range is 5 g minimum to 25 g maximum.

l  If a gauge is not available an approximate adjustment can be made as follows:

l  Loosen the adjustment screw until the contact is open

l  Tighten the screw until the contact is just closed

l  Tighten the screw a further one eighth (1/8) of a turn. (This is the equivalent of the 5 g setting.)

MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

No information available.

CABLING

None.

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS

Alarm Termination Panels

Basic

Basic and Enhanced/High Security

Silent Alarm Connector, J1

4

1

5

2

6

3

 N/CN/C

+12VN/C N/CSREL

Door Switch Connector, J2

3

1

4

2

+12VN/C DRELN/C

Alarm Output Connector, J3

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

TAL_NCDAL_NO

TAL_CMDAL_CM N/CDAL_NC N/CSAL_NO N/CSAL_CM N/CSAL_NC N/CCAL_NC

CSTS_CMCAL_CM

DSTS_CMCAL_NO

SSTS_CMCSTS_NC

TSTS_CMDSTS_NC

N/CSSTS_NC N/CTSTS_NC

N/C+12V

GNDN/C

Vibration Sensor Connector, J4

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

N/CN/C

N/CN/C

N/CN/C

N/CN/C

N/CN/C

VIBN/C

N/CN/C

N/CGND

Enhanced

Basic and Enhanced/High Security

Silent Alarm Connector, J1

4

1

5

2

6

3

N/CN/C

+12VN/C N/CSREL

Door Switch Connector, J2

3

1

4

2

+12VN/C DRELN/C

Alarm Output Connector, J3

1

2

3

4

5

6

TAL_NCDAL_NO TAL_CMDAL_CM

TAL_NODAL_NC

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

TAL_OUTSAL_NO

TAL_INSAL_CM N/CSAL_NC N/CCAL_NC

CSTS_CMCAL_CM

DSTS_CMCAL_NO

SSTS_CMCSTS_NC TSTS_CMDSTS_NC CTST_OPSSTS_NC CTST_OUTTSTS_NC

CTST_IN+12V

GNDN/C

Composite Attack Connector, J4

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

N/C+12V

N/CN/C

N/CCTST_OP

N/CCTST_OUT

N/CCTST_IN

N/CCAL_OUT

TAL_OUTN/C

GNDGND

I/O Panel Alarm Output Connector

The alarm output connector, located on the ATM I/O connector panel, has the following arrangement of pins which are allocated for basic and enhanced systems as shown in the diagram:

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

A spring gauge (optional).


Section Divider

Section 14 - Miscellaneous Devices and Interfaces

February 2014

Section Divider

February 2014 Media Entry/Exit Indicators             1

Media Entry/Exit Indicators

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

The Media Entry/Exit Indicators (MEEIs) are located next to media entry/exit slots on the facia of the ATM. They act as prompts to the customer during specific entry services.

DESCRIPTION

The MEEI comprises of a series of LEDs mounted on a PCB which has a single two way connector. The MEEIs are controlled through the Miscellaneous Interface.

For some entry/exit slots the MEEI may be mounted on a carrier moulding.

TROUBLESHOOTING

None.

DIAGNOSTICS

None.

June 2008

2       Media Entry/Exit Indicators

STRAPPING

None.

ADJUSTMENTS

None.

MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

Standard MEEI

In most instances the MEEI is fixed to the facia with screws. To remove the MEEI:

1.     Disconnect the harness from the MEEI.

2.     Remove the screws securing the MEEI to the facia.

3.     The MEEI can now be removed.

Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure.

MEEI With Carrier Moulding

If the MEEI is mounted on a carrier moulding then both the carrier and MEEI must be removed. Proceed as follows:

1.     Disconnect the harness from the MEEI.

June 2008

                                                                                                                                   Media Entry/Exit Indicators                                                                                                                                                                        3

2.     The carrier is held in place by lugs at each end. Using a screwdriver, ease one end of the carrier out of the facia.

3.     Remove carrier/MEEI assembly from the facia.

4.     Remove and retain the plastic rivets securing the MEEI to the carrier and remove the MEEI.

5.     Using the retained plastic rivets, secure the new MEEI to the carrier.

June 2008

4       Media Entry/Exit Indicators

6.     Insert one end of the carrier into the slot on the facia then press the other end home until it clicks into place. Make sure the lugs on the carrier are fully engaged.

7.     Re‐connect the harness.

CABLING

None.

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS

The MEEI has a single Molex, Male two way connector, P1.

1

2

24V

GND

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

None.

June 2008


Midi Miscellaneous Interface

INTRODUCTION

This chapter describes the USB Midi Miscellaneous Interface board (Midi‐Misc Board).

DESCRIPTION

The Midi‐Misc Board is a hardware variant of the Mini‐Misc Board with upgraded features. The micro‐controller connects to the host PC Core via an integrated USB 2.0 compliant full speed USB link. The micro‐controller firmware is updated automatically from the host PC via the USB link.

The Midi‐Misc Board contains the following I/O interfaces:

l  Media Entry/Exit Indicators ‐ 16 MEEIs, maximum of 3 at one time, not auto‐detect, brightness controlled (“throb”).

l  Public Audio (“beep”) ‐ Stereo, software enable.

l  Private Audio ‐ Stereo, software enable, feature detect, jack detect and volume control inputs

l  Function Display Keys ‐ 8 FDKs, feature detect.

l  TTL DIP card reader

l  Alarms Status ‐ 4 lines supported.

Board Layout

The main components on the Midi‐Misc Board are identified in the following illustration:

Power Requirement

The Midi‐Misc Board is powered from the USB Vbus supply.  The board must be powered from either a root hub or a self powered hub, it cannot be powered from a bus powered hub.

The board requires the following DC voltages:

l  USB Vbus+5v nominal

l  +5.25v max

l  +4.50v min

Required current is:

l  Vbus = 0.5Amps (maximum rms – dependent on board population)

TROUBLESHOOTING

Error Message

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

REPLACE_NOW

Device Fault

None

Replace Device

INSPECT_NOW

Comms Error

None

Connect Device

DIAGNOSTICS

For general diagnostic information see the Diagnostics Overview chapter in the Diagnostics Overview section.

Diagnostic LED

The diagnostic LED fitted to the Midi‐Misc Board is for development use only and mirrors MEEI4 in normal operation.

STRAPPING

None.

ADJUSTMENTS

None.

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

There are no field replaceable parts in the device.

CABLING

Interconnect Diagram

In‐Circuit Debug Cable

The In‐Circuit Debug Cable connects between Midi‐Misc J11 and the Microchip MPLAB ICD2 debug/programming tool.

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS

Midi‐Misc Board Connectors

Audio Line I/P Connector (J1)

This is a 3.5mm right angled PCB Audio Jack socket:

               Pin        Signal

1                 Screen

2                 PC Audio Right 3 Not Populated

4                 Not Populated

5                 PC Audio Left

Public Audio (“beep”) Connector (J2)

This is a 4‐way right angle connector:

               Pin        Signal

1  BEEP_L_A 2  BEEP_L_B

3  BEEP_R_A 4  BEEP_R_B

MEEI (5‐10) Connector (J3)

This is a 18‐way right angle connector:

               Pin        Signal

1                 NC

2                 NC

3                 NC

4                 NC

5                 NC

6                 NC

7                 +5V

8                 MEEI10_DRV

9                 +5V

10              MEEI9_DRV

11              +5V

12              MEEI8_DRV

13              +5V

14              MEEI7_DRV

15              +5V

16              MEEI6_DRV

17              +5V

Pin Signal 18 MEEI5_DRV

USB Connector (J4)

This is a 5‐way right angled USB mini B‐type connector:

               Pin        Signal

1                 BUS_PWR

2                 USB_D3 USB_D+

4   NC 5 GND

Private Audio Connector (J5)

This is a 10‐way right angle connector:

               Pin        Signal

1                 GND

2                 NC

3                 GND

4                 HP_FREAT_DETb

5                 GND

6                 HP_VOL_ADJ_BUT

7                 GND

8                 HP_JACK_DETECT_SW

9                 HP_SPK_LEFT 10 HP_SPK_RIGHT

FDK Connector (J6)

This is a 14‐way right angle connector:

               Pin        Signal

1                 NC

2                 NC

3                 FDK2_BTb

4                 FDK2_CONFb

5                 FDK2_UMb

6                 FDK2_LMb

7                 GND

8                 FDK2_TPb 9         FDK1_BTb

10              FDK1_CONFb

11              FDK1_UMb

12              FDK1_LMb

13              GND

Pin Signal 14 FDK1_TPb

Alarms Status Connector (J7)

This is an 12‐way right angle connector:

               Pin        Signal

1                 NC

2                 NC

3                 NC

4                 NC

5                 TSTS 6   GND

7 SSTS 8 GND 9 DSTS 10 GND

11    CSTS 12     GND

MEEI (1‐4) Connector (J8)

This is a 16‐way right angle connector:

               Pin        Signal

1                 NC

2                 NC

3                 NC

4                 NC

5                 NC

6                 NC

7                 GND

8                 NC

9                 +5V

10              MEEI4_DRV

11              +5V

12              MEEI3_DRV

13              +5V

14              MEEI2_DRV

15              +5V

16              MEEI1_DRV

MEEI (11‐16) Connector (J9)

This is a 20‐way right angle connector:

               Pin        Signal

1                 NC

2                 NC

3                 NC

4                 NC

5                 NC

6                 NC

7                 NC

8                 NC

9                 +5V

10              MEEI16_DRV

11              +5V

12              MEEI15_DRV

13              +5V

14              MEEI14_DRV

15              +5V

16              MEEI13_DRV

17              +5V

18              MEEI12_DRV

19              +5V

20              MEEI11_DRV

Auto Supervisor Connector (J10)

This is a 5‐way right angle connector:

               Pin        Signal

1                 AUTO_SUP_SW

2                 GND

3                 AUTO_SUP_DET

4                 GND

5                 NC

In‐Circuit Debug/Programming Connector (J11)

This is a 6‐way right‐angled header that provides in‐circuit debug and programming access to the micro‐controller:

               Pin        Signal

1                 MCLRb/VPP

2                 +5V

3                 GND

4                 IC_PGC

5                 IC_PGD

6                 IC_PGM

Note:  This connector will be fitted during board development but may be removed for production boards subject to Production Test agreement.

TTL Card Reader Connector (J12)

This is a 8‐way right angle connector:

               Pin        Signal

1                 +5V

2                 0V

3                 CR_DATA2 4         CR_CLK2

5                 CR_DATA1

6                 CR_CLS

7                 CR_REAR_SENSOR

8                 CR_CLK1

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

None.


USB DVD RW Slimline Drive

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

This chapter provides information on the USB DVD RW Slimline Drive.

The drive is a DVD‐RW and CD‐RW drive which has a USB 2.0 interface that supports DVD video and CD audio playback capability. It reads any standard DVD‐ROM and CD‐ROM disks complying with following ECMA standards:

l  ECMA–130

l  ECMA–267

l  ECMA–279

l  ECMA–337

l  ECMA–338

l  ECMA–349

l  ECMA–359

l  ECMA–371

The drive writes to any standard DVD‐R/RW and CD‐R/RW disks complying with the same ECMA standards. The drive uses a tray mechanism which is spring loaded for disk load and unload. Disks may be loaded or unloaded with the drive in either vertical or horizontal orientation.

The drive is powered from the USB cable, but requires an additional 5V dc supply from the product if the drive is used for writing to disks rather than just reading from them.

DESCRIPTION

Dimensions

The table below lists the physical properties of the drive.

Dimension

Measurement (excluding the front bezel)

Height

12.7 mm

Width

128 mm

Length

126.1 mm

Mass

172 g or less

Mounting Orientation

The USB DVD RW Slimline drive can be mounted either vertically or horizontally.

Note:  The mounting screws are M2, and should not exceed 5.0 mm from the surface of both sides or the bottom of the drive.

Disk Clamp System

To secure and hold the disk, the drive uses a Ball Clamp as its disk clamp system.

Tray Ejecting

The drive uses a spring loaded tray mechanism for loading and unloading a disk.

The tray can be ejected through either of the following options:

l  Manual Eject Button

l  Emergency Eject Hole l ATAPI command

Manual Eject Button

This button transmits an electrical signal to the eject mechanism. It is enabled at power on and may be disabled by software commands.

Readable Disks

Recordable Disks

DVD–ROM

DVD–R

DVD–R

DVD–R DL

Press the Manual Eject button located at the front bezel to eject the tray, and load or unload a disk.

Emergency Eject Hole

For emergencies, push a pin through the emergency eject hole located at the front bezel to eject the tray.

ATAPI Command

A standard ATAPI command may also eject the tray.

Supported Disk Types

The table below lists the disk types that the DVD RW Slimline drive supports.

Readable Disks

Recordable Disks

DVDR DL

DVD–RW

DVD–RW

DVD–RAM (4.7 gb)

DVD+R

DVD+R

DVD+R DL

DVD+R DL

DVD+RW

DVD+RW

DVD–RAM

CD–R

CD–DA

CD–RW

CD–ROM

 

CD–R

 

CD–RW

 

Read and Write Speed

The table below lists the read and write speed of the drive.

Drive

Read Speed

Write Speed

DVD‐RW

8x CAV 4, 680rpm

2 ‐ 6x(ZCLV) 2 ‐ 4x(ZCLV)

2x (CLV)

1x (CLV)

CD‐RW

24x CAV 5, 160rpm

10–24x(ZCLV)

10–20x(ZCLV)

10–16x(ZCLV)

10x(CLV)

4x(CLV)

Power Requirements

The USB DVD RW Slimline drive powers up with an input voltage in the range of 5 Vdc, +/ ‐5% (4.75 to 5.25 V).

The table below lists the current consumption of the DVD RW drive.

Mode

Average Current (A)

Peak Current (A)

Standby

0.18

Sleep

0.17

USB Suspend

0.06

Write 24x (CD–R)

1.1

Active

1.0

Random access (Duty 100%)

1.2

1.3

During starting seek

1.5

During eject

1.0

ERROR MESSAGES

The DVD RW Slimline drive does not send out error messages. If the drive fails to operate, perform the following:

1.     Check the USB cable connection to the USB hub or Core.

2.     Check the disk if it is damaged or scratched. Make sure the drive supports the disk that is loaded.

3.     If the drive fails to write, check the 5 V dc supply to the drive. The drive requires additional 5 V supply when writing to disks.

4.     If the drive still does not operate, replace the DVD drive with a new one.

DIAGNOSTICS

None.

STRAPPING

None.

ADJUSTMENTS

None.

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

There are no field replaceable units in the drive.

CABLING

None.

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS

The following illustration shows the rear view of the drive:

USB Mini Interface

The table below lists the pin assignments for the USB mini interface.

Name (Pin Number)

Type

1

VCC

2

D‐

3

D+

4

ID

5

GND

DC 5 V In Connector

This connector is a 4.0 mm x 1.7 mm, EIAJ RC5320A TYPE2 connector.

The table below lists the pin assignments for the 5 Vdc In connector.

Pin

Type

Inner

+5 Vdc

Outer

Ground

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

None.


Slim DVD SATA Super Multi Drive

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

This chapter provides information on the Slim DVD SATA Super Multi Drive.

The drive is a DVD–RW and CD–RW drive which has a Serial ATA interface that supports DVD video and CD audio playback capability. It reads any standard DVD–ROM and CD–ROM disks complying with the following ECMA standards:

l  ECMA–130

l  ECMA–267

l  ECMA–279

l  ECMA–337

l  ECMA–338

l  ECMA–349

l  ECMA–359

l  ECMA–371

The drive writes to any standard DVD–R/RW and CD–R/RW disks complying with the same ECMA standards. The drive uses a tray mechanism which is spring loaded for disk load and unload. To secure and hold the disk, the drive uses a Ball Clamp as its disk clamp system.

DESCRIPTION

Dimensions

The table below lists the physical properties of the drive.

Dimension

Measurement (excluding the front bezel)

Height

12.7 mm

Width

128 mm

Depth

129.4 mm

Mass

172 g or less

Tray Ejecting

The drive uses a spring loaded tray mechanism for loading and unloading a disk.

The tray can be ejected through the following options:

l  Manual eject button

l  Emergency eject hole l ATAPI command

Manual Eject Button

The eject button transmits an electrical signal to the eject mechanism. It is enabled at power on and may be disabled by software commands.

Press the Manual Eject button located at the front bezel to eject the tray, and load or unload a disk.

Emergency Eject Hole

For emergencies, push a pin through the emergency eject hole located at the front bezel to eject the tray.

ATAPI Command

A standard ATAPI command may also eject the tray.

Supported Disk Types

Mode

Average Current (A)

Peak Current (A)

Standby

0.049

Sleep

0.049

Write 24x (CD–R)

0.8

Active

0.7

Random access (Duty 100%)

1.0

1.3

The table below lists the disk types that the DVD drive supports.

Readable Disks

Recordable Disks

DVD–ROM

DVD–R

DVD–R

DVD–R DL

DVD–R DL

DVD–RW

DVD–RW

DVD–RAM (4.7 gb)

DVD+R

DVD+R

DVD+R DL

DVD+R DL

DVD+RW

DVD+RW

DVD–RAM

CD–R

CD–DA

CD–RW

CD–ROM

 

CD–R

 

CD–RW

 

Read and Write Speed

The table below lists the read and write speed of the DVD drive.

Drive

Read Speed

Write Speed

DVD–RW

8 x CAV 4, 680 rpm

2 ‐ 6x (ZCLV)

2 ‐ 4x (ZCLV)

2x (CLV)

1x (CLV)

CD–RW

24x CAV 5, 160 rpm

10 ‐ 24x (ZCLV)

10 ‐ 20x (ZCLV)

10 ‐ 16x (ZCLV)

10x (CLV)

4x (CLV)

Power Requirements

The DVD drive powers up with an input voltage in the range of 5 Vdc, +/‐ 5% (4.75 to 5.25 V).

The table below lists the current consumption the drive.

Mode

Average Current (A)

Peak Current (A)

During starting seek

1.5

During eject

0.7

ERROR MESSAGES

None.

DIAGNOSTICS

For general diagnostic information see the Diagnostics Overview chapter in the Diagnostics Overview section.

STRAPPING

None.

ADJUSTMENTS

None.

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

There are no field replaceable parts in this device.

CABLING

The DVD Super Multi drive uses the following cables to connect to the terminal.

l  Kiosk eSATA Core Breakout

l  Kiosk DVD eSATA + Power to Slimline SATA

Kiosk eSATA Core Breakout

Kiosk DVD eSATA + Power to Slimline SATA

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS

The illustration below shows the rear view of the drive with the connector and pin assignments.

The DVD Super Multi drive uses a 1.00 mm, 1.27 mm Pitch Slimline Serial ATA Plug with 13 pins as its interface connector.

The table below lists the pin assignments of the Pitch Slimline Serial ATA Plug.

Pin Name

Type

Description

S1

GND

 

S7

GND

 

 

 

 

P1

DP

Device Present

                P2                         +5 V

P3

 

 

P4

MD/DA

Manufacturing Diagnostic/Device Attention

                P5                         GND

P6

 

 

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

None.

 


DView Camera

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

This chapter provides service information on the DView camera.

The DView camera provides security and surveillance functionality. The DView camera captures images with 690 HTVL–E resolution through Wide Dynamic Range (WDR) capability in NTSC or PAL standards. The camera captures images regardless of lighting condition or application, and automatically eliminates image–compromising visual noise.

The Dual Power Board enables the camera to safely operate at 24 Vac or 12 Vdc input voltage.

CAUTION

Make sure that ESD precautions are observed.

DESCRIPTION

Dimensions

Camera

The illustrations below display the physical dimensions and measurements of the DView camera.

Dual Power Board

The illustrations below display the physical dimensions and measurements of the Dual Power Board.

Camera Specifications

The table below lists the functional and video specifications of the DView camera.

Functional Specifications

 

Image Sensor

1/3 in. WDR Image Sensor

Effective Picture Element

758(H)x540(V) approximately 409K pixels

Scanning Frequency

NTSC 2:1 Interlace/ H: 1575 Hz, V: 59.94 Hz

PAL 2:1 Interlace/ H: 1562 Hz, V: 50 Hz

Video Output

BNC 75 Ohm unbalanced

Wide Dynamic Range

120 dB/17 bit (102 dB typical)

Wide Dynamic Range Area

Fully Adjustable

Slow Shutter

YES up to 32x

Electronic Shutter

WDR Control (Auto)

Software Day/Night

ON, OFF, AUTO

White Balance

ATW, AWB, Manual

Auto White Balance Range

 2000k ~ 11000k

Sync System

Internal/Line Lock

AGC Boost

Yes

AES

1/25‐1/30, 720

Noise Reduction

3D Motion Adaptive

Privacy Zones

Four (4)

Image Flip

Yes

Video Specifications

 

Resolution

690 HTVL Effective

Video Standards

PAL, NTSC

Minimum Illumination

0.1 lux at F1.2

AGC

Up to 50 dB

S/N Ratio

Up to 53 dB

Digital PTZ

Pan, Tilt, Zoom (1x‐8x)

Lens Properties

The table below lists the lens specifications of the DView camera.

Property

Measurement

Focal Length

2.5 mm

F–No.

F2.0

Iris Range

Fixed Range

Angle of View

 

Diagonal

122.1°

Horizontal

96.6°

Vertical

71.9°

Lens Focus

CAUTION

The lens focus is pre–set in the factory. Do not adjust the focus factory settings.

The lens focus is set to capture images within an object distance of 300 mm and 1000 mm from the lens.

White lines on the body and lens are aligned to determine that the focus is correctly set.

Power Requirements

The following table lists the power requirements for the DView camera.

Parameter

Value

Power Operating Range

24VAC+20%

 

12VDC + 10%

Power Consumption

4.2 W max.

Temperature Requirements

The table below lists the temperature requirements of the DView camera.

Parameter

Value

Operating Temperature

‐10o C to 50o C (14o F to 122o F)

Storage Temperature

‐30o C to 60o C (‐22o F to 140o F)

ERROR MESSAGES

Error

Possible root causes

Isolation

Resolution

Device disconnected

USB cable disconnected from MCRW

Check USB cable.

Reconnect cable.

USB cable disconnected from hub

Check USB cable.

Reconnect cable.

DIAGNOSTICS

For general diagnostic information see the Diagnostics Overview chapter in the Diagnostics Overview section.

STRAPPING

None.

ADJUSTMENTS

None.

FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

There are no field replaceable parts in the DView camera.

CABLING

Harness – CCTV Colour Camera – Safe

Harness Camera Power Top Box

Harness Camera PWR 12V Fascia

Harness 24V EXT

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS

Camera

The illustration below displays the connector assignments of the camera.

Dual Power Board

The illustration below displays the connector assignments of the dual power board.

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

None.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

For the preventive maintenance schedule and details of the required tasks for the Dview Camera, refer to the Preventive Maintenance section of this manual.


USB 2D Bar Code Reader

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

This chapter gives servicing information for the USB 2D bar code reader (UBAR).

Safety Compliance

The UBAR meets the requirements of paragraph 1.1 of IEC 60825‐1, and therefore no safety labels are required.

DESCRIPTION

The USB 2D bar code reader (UBAR) can be fitted to ATMs to extend banking services by automating bill payment and merchant deposit transactions otherwise handled by front office tellers. The UBAR has a USB 1.1 interface and can decode linear (such as Code 39), stacked linear (such as PDF 417) and matrix (such as Maxicode) bar code standards.

On exterior products only, illumination is provided by two IR LED pcb’s which are triggered via illumination controller board when the barcode reader is activated.

The hardware consists of an imager, interface board and two UBAR IR LED pcb assemblies.

The LEDs are controlled by the UBAR illumination IR LED driver board, shown below.

The UBAR interface board provides the USB interface between the bar code imager and the PC core and also supplies dc power to the bar code imager. The UBAR interface board provides the trigger signal to the UBAR illumination driver board.

The UBAR illumination driver board supplies the power and controls the firing of the UBAR IR LED pcbs.

Power Requirements

5V USB powered device.

Note:  The UBAR is plug‐and‐play (PnP) capable and is not ‘hot‐docking’ capable.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Module States

Condition

SOH Message

Action

Device disconnected

INSPECT_NOW

Check connections

30 consecutive read errors

INSPECT_SOON

Clean viewing window as described below

75 consecutive read errors

INSPECT_NOW

Replace bar code reader

Cleaning Viewing and Illumination Windows

If the UBAR is not successfully reading codes make sure the viewing and illumination windows on the outside of the facia is scrupulously clean and also free from scratches or abrasions. If a window is scratched a new moulding with window will have to be fitted.

DIAGNOSTICS

Reporting

The UBAR is a GO/NO GO device and either works or fails, therefore there are no extensive diagnostics.

Self Test

Selecting DEVICE SELF TEST from the System Application Main Menu and selecting bar code reader from the Device Self Test Menu will display a screen prompt to “Scan a Barcode”. If a test bar code has been successfully scanned within a 10 second period, the display will show that the self test was successful. If no bar code has been scanned within 10 seconds, the display will show that the test is incomplete.

Level 3 Diagnostics

               M_CODE             Meaning

                00H                       GOOD

                02H                      ERROR

               M_STAT              Meaning

00                                  Operation successful

01                                  Bar code type not supported or data error

02                                  Bar code read error

04                                  Device inoperative

05                                  USB communications error

               M_STAT              Meaning

06                                  Format error

STRAPPING

None.

ADJUSTMENTS

None.

Note:  The UBAR is factory configured to recognize all bar code symbologies.

MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

There are no serviceable parts within the UBAR.

CABLING

There is no internal cabling in the UBAR module but the following covers the barcode illumination harness.

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS

This section includes pinouts of the connectors on the UBAR Illumination IR LED Driver board shown below.

UBAR Illumination IR LED Driver Board

Connector J1

The connector (J1) carries the trigger signal from the UBAR interface board to the Illumination IR LED Driver board. The connector is a 2‐way right‐angled header, S‐ROW microfit with the following pinout:

1

2

TRIGGER

GND

Connector J2 (Power)

The connector (J2) supplies the 24Vpower to the Illumination IR LED Driver board. The connector is a 2‐way right‐angled header, mini‐fit jnr with the following pinout:

1

2

+24V GND

Connector J3

The connector (J3) carries the signals from the UBAR Illumination driver board to the IR LED board. The connector is a 4‐way right‐angled header, microfit with the following pinout:

3

1

GND DIODE CONTROL (D1)

4

2

GNDDIODE CONTROL (D2)

Connector J4

The connector (J4) carries the signals from the UBAR Illumination driver board to the IR LED board. The connector is a 4‐way right‐angled header, microfit with the following pinout:

3

1

4

2

GNDDIODE CONTROL (D3)

GNDDIODE CONTROL (D4)

UBAR Interface PCB

Connector J3

The connector (J3) carries the trigger signal from the UBAR interface board to the Illumination IR LED Driver board. The connector is a Molex Microfit type with the following pinout:

1

2

TRIGGER

GND

Connector J2

The connector (J2) is the USB connector which carries the signals from the PC Core to the UBAR interface board. The connector is a Molex PTH Mini‐B USB type with the following pinout:

1

2

3

4

5

6

VCC

DD+

ID

GND

S1

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

The Barcode Reader Test Document (atm Notes Part No. 009‐0017470).


Section Divider

Section 15 - Audio

February 2014

Section Divider

February 2014 Public/Private Audio with Volume Control         1

Public/Private Audio with Volume Control

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

Public/Private audio with volume control provides users of ATMs with access to controllable audio via a headset.

DESCRIPTION

The main components of the feature are shown below:

The four levels of audio volume can be user adjusted using the audio volume control button located on the facia adjacent to the headset jack socket. Pressing the button iatm Noteseases the volume level in three steps up to its maximum and a fourth press returns it to its original volume.

The volume level is reset to the lowest level each time a headset is inserted into the jack socket. Overall volume level is set from within the application software.

STRAPPING

None.

ADJUSTMENTS

The volume of the audio line input signal is controlled via the Sound menu, from the Set Device Configuration menu under Self Service Configuration in System Application.

TEST TOOLS

A pair of suitable headphones with a 3.5 mm jack.

November 2007

2        Public/Private Audio with Volume Control

CABLE INFORMATION

The cabling from the facia audio jack socket to the miscellaneous interface is shown below:

DIAGNOSTICS

The Sound menu is found under the Device Diagnostics menu of System Application. The sound tests allow you to verify the operation of the enhanced audio system. The following test are displayed:

?          Master Volume Control Test ?                 Waveform Audio Volume Control Test ?           MIDI Sequencer Volume Control Test.

If you select a sound test, enter the volume level and then OK, the selected test plays for approximately 10 seconds.

The volume range offered is from 0 to 255. The default value is 127 for the master volume and 255 for both the waveform and midi files.

Looping is allowed on these tests. The test plays repeatedly until cancelled.

The test returns a Fail if the file containing the test piece is not found.

Level 3 Diagnostics

The level 3 diagnostics returned for the digital audio are:

S_DATA

The S_DATA returned for the digital audio are:

       S_DATA     Meaning

00                     GOOD (No error).

01                     ROUTINE (Minor fault).

       04                FATAL (Requires immediate attention).

November 2007

                                                                                                             Public/Private Audio with Volume Control                                                                                                                                                             3

TROUBLESHOOTING

Ensure that the line out connector is connected correctly on the motherboard and the miscellaneous interface board, and that the speaker and private audio connectors are connected correctly on the miscellaneous interface board. Refer to the Terminal Core & Comms and the Miscellaneous Devices and Interfaces sections of this manual.

November 2007

4        Public/Private Audio with Volume Control

November 2007


 1

Section Divider

Section 16 - Environmental Management

February 2014

1

Section Divider

February 2014

 1

                                                                                                                               Product Environment Heaters                                                                                                                                                                      1

Product Environment Heaters

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

This chapter describes the product environment heaters. The heater assembly is designed to keep the internal temperature of an enclosure regulated above a minimum temperature of 10o Centigrade.

DESCRIPTION

A product environment heater consists of a fan heater assembly, a control thermostat plus associated harnessing and connectors. Also included is a product mounting plate and a thermostat mounting bracket.

Product environment heaters are available in the following voltages:

                     ?        240 V and 120 V ATMs ‐ 200 W

                     ?        240 V and 120 V ATMs ‐ 300 W

                     ?        240 V and 120 V ATMs ‐ 400 W.

Temperature Control

The heater is thermostatically controlled to keep the temperature inside the ATM within normal operating limits. When the temperature at the thermostat drops below 15oC +/_ 4oC, the thermostat will close and switch on the heater. The heater heats the air being drawn into the fan which then transfers the warm air throughout the ATM. The thermostat will switch the heater off when the temperature rises above 24oC +/_ 3oC.

June 2008

1

2        Product Environment Heaters

TROUBLESHOOTING

None.

DIAGNOSTICS

None.

STRAPPING

None.

ADJUSTMENTS

None.

MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

There are no field replaceable modules within the heater assembly.

CABLING

There is no field replaceable internal cabling.

TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

No information available.

June 2008


Section Divider

Section 17 - Special Procedures

February 2014

Section Divider

February 2014


SelfServ 23 Module Removal

Note:  To play the video clips in this chapter in Adobe Reader XI onwards, you need to have all media players set to ‘Always’ in the trust options in Edit menu > Preferences > Multimedia Trust (legacy).

ACCESS TO LOWER FACIA ITEMS

1.     Remove the screws securing the motorised card reader and/or the receipt printer as appropriate then move the device(s) further back in the tray.

2.     Remove the two screws on each side securing the facia to the brackets.

3.     Lift the facia off the two bracket hooks, lower it slightly and replace on the bracket with the lower hook in the upper slot on the facia. Make sure that harnessing is not snagged or strained.

REMOVE KEYPAD

1.     Lower the facia to gain access to the rear of the keypad assembly (see ‘Access to Lower Facia Items’ instructions).

2.     Remove the two screws securing the keypad assembly, then lever the tangs on the bracket off the clips to allow the assembly to be removed.

3.     Disconnect the keypad harness and remove the four screws securing the keypad to the bracket.

4.     When replacing the keypad assembly, make sure the bracket is correctly snapped into place on the clips on the facia before replacing the screws.

KEYPAD MEI

1.     Lower the facia to gain access to the rear of the keypad assembly (see ‘Access to Lower Facia Items’ instructions).

2.     Unclip the MEI and disconnect the harness.

MCRW MEI/FACIA INSERT/DECAL INSERT

1.     Lowering the facia is optional (see ‘Access to Lower Facia Items’ instructions).

2.     Remove the screw securing the motorised card reader, then remove the card reader.

3.     Remove the two screws securing the MCRW MEI bracket.

4.     Remove and replace the required part: MCRW MEI: Remove the MEI from the bracket and disconnect the harness.

b       MCRW decal holder: Slide the decal holder out of the facia.

c        MCRW facia insert: Remove the four screws securing the insert.

5.     When the required part has been replaced, re‐secure the MCRW MEI bracket assembly with the two screws. Note that there is a choice of 4 screw holes in case of thread wear.

RECEIPT FACIA INSERT & MEI

1.     Lowering the facia is optional (see ‘Access to Lower Facia Items’ instructions).

2.     Remove the two screws securing the receipt printer, then remove the printer.

3.     Remove the four screws securing the receipt facia insert.

4.     Remove the insert and then either replace the whole assembly, the inner or outer parts of the insert or unclip and disconnect the MEI on the facia.

MISCELLANEOUS INTERFACE

1.     Loosen the screw securing the miscellaneous interface (misc. i/f.) to the facia. Then slide the misc. i/f. to the right and remove it.

2.     Disconnect the harnesses. Then remove and retain the four screws securing the misc. i/f. to the bracket. Re‐fit the bracket to the replacement misc. i/f.

DISPLAY

1.     Disconnect the three harness connectors (USB, power and signal) on the display.

2.     If the ATM is fitted with a touchscreen, the touchscreen controllers can be removed from the back of the display without disconnecting the ribbon cables. Loosen the screws securing the touchscreen controllers in the keyhole slots then carefully lift the controller assemblies off the display. (Tip: Use a loose screw in the facia frame to hold the smaller board in place, use tape to hold the larger board to the camera mounting.)

If it is necessary to disconnect the controllers: carefully open the white clamps retaining the ribbon cable connectors on the touchscreen controllers: two cables at the top and one on the right‐hand side of the display. (Tip: Use a small flat head screwdriver to gently prise open the clamps.)

3.     Loosen the four screws (two each side) securing the display to the facia. Then lift the display off the screws and slide it out from behind the top‐box latch bracket. Note: on early units, the screws may have to be removed completely, not just loosened.

4.     If the touchscreen controllers have been disconnected, loosen the screws securing them in the keyhole slots then lift the controller assemblies off the display. Retain the controllers and their covers and harnesses, to be fitted to the replacement display.

Note:  When re‐fitting the ribbon connectors make sure that the white stripes on the ribbon cables are level and only just visible once the white retaining clamps have been pushed back into place. The right‐hand ribbon is particularly difficult to reconnect, so to make access easier, try removing the controller from the display and bending open the cover.

TOUCHSCREEN

1.     Remove the screws securing the motorised card reader and the receipt printer then move them further back in the tray.

2.     Loosen the screw securing the miscellaneous interface (misc. i/f.) to the facia. Then slide the misc i/f to the right and remove it.

3.     Remove the two screws securing the camera (if fitted) to the top of the facia, and leave the camera hanging from the harnessing.

4.     Carefully open the white clamps retaining the ribbon cables on the touchscreen controllers: two cables at the top and one on the right‐hand side of the display. Tip: Use a small flat head screwdriver to gently prise open the clamps.

5.     Remove and the four screws securing the touchscreen.

6.     NOTE: Some earlier units have an additional screw securing the facia on each side, visible through an access hole in the facia bracket. If these screws are present: a   Remove the two screws on each side securing the facia to the brackets.

b     Lift one side of the facia only off the bracket and remove the screw securing the touchscreen through the access hole. Replace the facia onto the bracket and resecure it with the two screws. Then repeat this step on the bracket on the other side. Note that the two touchscreen screws do not need to be refitted later.

7.     From the front of the ATM, slide the touchscreen up slightly to release it then lift it off the facia.

8.     Follow the reverse of these instructions to fit the new touchscreen.

Note 1:  When replacing the touchscreen take care to feed the ribbon cables through the holes in the facia without trapping or folding them.

Note 2:  Make sure there is no gap between the refitted touchscreen and the lower facia. Apply pressure to all edges to ensure a tight fit.

Note 3:  When re‐fitting the ribbon connectors make sure that the white stripes on the ribbon cables are level and only just visible once the white retaining clamps have been pushed back into place. The right‐hand ribbon is particularly difficult to reconnect, so to make access easier, try removing the controller from the display and bending open the cover.

FDKS AND SCREEN

1.     Disconnect the FDK harness from the miscellaneous interface. Loosen the screw securing the miscellaneous interface to the facia, then slide the misc. i/f. to the right and remove it.

2.     Remove the thirteen screws securing the rear of the facia: four each side, three at the top and two in the lower edge.


Move the rear of the facia back and rest it over the module tray.

4.     Remove the upper four screws on each side of the facia frame (leave the lower two which secure the shelf).

5.     Remove the three screws above the display.

6.     From the front of the ATM, lift the screen off the facia.

7.     You can now replace the screen or gain access to the FDK assemblies.

FACIA

1.     Disconnect all facia to top‐box harnessing, including to MEEIs, facia hub, display power and USB. The audio and misc. i/f USB should be disconnected at the core and the dispenser MEI should be disconnected so that they remain with the facia when it is removed.

2.     Remove the two screws on each side securing the facia to the brackets.

Lift the entire facia off the brackets.

               4.     Remove functioning facia devices and re‐fit them to the replacement facia.

FACIA SHELF

1.     Disconnect all lower facia to top‐box harnessing, including to MEIs.

2.     Remove the thirteen screws securing the rear of the facia: four each side, three at the top and two in the lower edge.

3.     Remove the lower two screws on each side of the facia frame, securing the shelf.

4.     Remove the shelf, then remove any undamaged device inserts and re‐fit them to the replacement shelf.

PC CORE

1.     Disconnect the DC power harness from the rear of the PC core.

2.     Disconnect the USB retaining clips and unplug all the USB connectors and audio jack from the side of the core. Take careful note of the order of the connections as they must be plugged back into the same ports.

Remove the two screws securing the PC core cover and the single screw securing the PC core to the mounting bracket.

4.     Slide the whole core towards you slightly to disengage it from the slots in the module tray, then tilt it up so that you can slide the cover off.

5.     Disconnect the two LVDS harnesses and feed them carefully out through the back of the PC core, one at a time.

6.     The PC core can now be lifted out of the ATM along with the mounting and USB retention assembly, which can be separated from the core by removing the two screws.

7.     Refer to the Mini PC Core service chapter for instructions on how to remove the FRUs within the PC core.

DISPENSER

?        S1 dispenser: Refer to the S1 Bill Alignment Dispenser Removal and Replacement chapter in this section.

?        S2 dispenser: Refer to FRU Removal and Replacement in the S2 Dispenser chapter in the Dispense section.


S1 Bill Alignment Dispenser Removal and

Replacement

Chapter Contents

INTRODUCTION

This chapter describes the removal and replacement of the Front and Rear Access currency dispensers.

As this type of dispenser has been developed and manufactured to meet EU RoHS compliance guidelines it should only be serviced using appropriate RoHS compliant parts.

Presenter Options

The following variants of presenter are available:

               ?        Rear Access (short transport)

?                  Rear Access (mid transport) ?         Rear Access (long transport) ? Front Access.

Pick Modules

The Dispenser can use the Aria or the 56XX enhanced single and double pick modules. The Aria pick modules are described in the Aria pick module chapter of the dispense section of this manual. The description of the 56XX type is in the Aria Pick Module section of the Dispense chapter of this manual.

MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

The dispenser can be configured as either Single or Dual Dispenser. The removal instructions are the same for single and dual configurations.

It is advisable that prior to the removal of any pick module that the currency cassettes be removed so as to reduce the weight of the module.

The currency dispenser is removed by dismantling it into manageable sections as described below.

1.     Removal of In Service Replenishment Covers.

2.     Removal of Lower Pick Module.

3.     Removing the Electronics Box (Rear Access).

4.     Removing the ICS Module.

5.     Removing the Control Board.

6.     Removal of Upper Pick Module.

7.     Removing the Presenter Module.

The dispenser replacement is described below.

1.     Replacing the Presenter Module.

2.     Replacing the Upper Pick Module. 3.         Replacing the Electronics Box

4.     Replacing the Lower Pick Module.

5.     Replacing the Control Board.

6.     Replacing the ICS Module.

7.     Control Board Authentication.

8.     Dispense Protection Configuration.

9.     Replacing the In Service Replenishment Covers

10.  Currency Evaluation Qualification Procedure.

11.  Diagnostics.

12.  Adjustments.

Removal of In Service Replenishment Covers

It may be necessary to remove in service replenishment covers as appropriate to gain access to the various parts of the dispenser prior to removal. Any cover and fixing screws removed should be retained for refitting after the dispenser has been reassembled.

Removal of Lower Pick Module

1.     The lower pick module for either front or rear access presenters is removed by firstly disconnecting the inter pick harness between the two pick modules as shown below.

2.     Disconnect the vacuum tubing which supplies the lower pick unit by pushing the upper vertical tube fully home and squeezing the yellow ring and then pulling the vertical tube out of the tee connector.

3.     Loosen the four toggle latches on the lower pick module by inserting a flat bladed screw driver and lifting in the direction of the arrow to release the latches.

4.     Carefully disengage both latches on one side and allow the pick module to swing down and hang on the other two.

5.     The next step is to carefully lift the pick module off the two remaining latches.

Replacing the Lower Pick Module

Fitting a replacement lower pick module is the reverse of the removal procedure.

Removing the Electronics Box (Rear Access)

On the rear access currency dispenser the electronics box contains the main motor and pump assembly, solid state relay, and motor run capacitor. It also provides a mounting place for the dispenser control board. Its removal gives access to these components and also to the LVDT assembly.

Remove the electronics box as follows:

1.     Disconnect the cable at the bottom left‐hand side of the control board.

2.     Push out the cable ties holding the harness to the top and left‐hand side of the control board cover.

3.     Loosen the two screws on the left‐hand side of the control board cover.

4.     Unscrew and remove the screw at the bottom right‐hand side of the control board cover.


5.     Remove       control board cover from the electronics box.

6.     Push out the cable ties holding the dispenser harness on to the electronics box.

7.     Disconnect the cables from the lower right‐hand side of the electronics box.

8.     Disconnect the remaining cables from the control board. The strain relief fixing for the USB cable must be carefully released prior to removal.

9.     Unscrew and remove the two screws securing the green turning wheel in position.

10.  Remove the green turning wheel from the presenter drive wheel and then ease off the timing belt.

11.  Remove and retain the two plastic rivets securing the timing disk sensor in position by pushing rivet centre on the timing disk side of sensor. Move the sensor clear of the timing disk.

12.  Loosen the four main motor mounting screws and ease the timing belt off the rear of the timing disk gear towards the presenter side frame.

13.  Lift the timing belt over the timing disk.

14.  At the upper left‐hand side of the electronics box remove the screw attaching the earth strap to the presenter.

15.  Remove       air hose from the pump.

16.  Remove the two top screws (1 each side) holding the electronics box to the presenter.

17.  Remove the two bottom screws (1 each side) holding the electronics box to the upper pick module.

18.  Lift the electronics box to release its hooks from the presenter tie shaft and lift it clear


of the dispenser.

Replacing the Electronics Box

Fitting a replacement electronics box is the reverse of the removal procedure.

Removing the Control Board

Dispenser Control Board ‐ Rear Access Remove the control board as follows:

1.     Loosen the two screws on the left‐hand side of the control board cover.

2.     Disconnect the cable at the bottom left‐hand side of the control board.

3.     Unscrew and remove the screw on the bottom right‐hand side securing the control board cover to the electronics box

4.     Remove the control board cover from the electronics box.

5.     Push out the cable ties holding the dispenser harness on to the electronics box.

6.     Disconnect the remaining cables from the control board. The strain relief fixing for the USB cable must be released prior to removal.

7.     Unscrew and remove the two screws securing the IC heat sink to the mounting bracket.

8.     Unscrew and remove the four screws securing the control board to the electronics box and then remove the control board.

Removal of Fluiditi Security Module

If the dispenser is fitted with a Fluiditi security system (also known as ICS) then it must be decommissioned prior to its removal. The decommisioning information is contained in the Fluiditi Replenishment Security and Fluiditi ATM Security chapters in the security sections of these manuals.

The Fluiditi module should be removed and refitted as per agreed procedures.

The system should be commissioned at the appropriate time during the replacement of the dispenser.

Dispenser Control Board ‐ Front Access

Remove the control board as follows:

1.     Loosen the two screws on the left‐hand side of the control board cover.

2.     Disconnect the cable at the bottom left‐hand side of the control board.

3.     Unscrew and remove the screw on the bottom right hand side securing the control board cover to the pick module.

4.     Remove the control board cover from the pick module.

5.     Push out the cable ties holding the dispenser harness.

6.     Disconnect the remaining cables from the control board. The strain relief fixing for the USB cable must be released prior to removal.

7.     Unscrew and remove the two screws securing the IC heat sink to the mounting bracket.

8.     Unscrew and remove the four screws securing the control board to the mounting bracket and then remove the control board.

Replacing the Control Board

Re‐fitting the existing control board is the reversal of the removal procedure.

The only additional actions required to verify the new board are: Control Board Authentication, Control Board Authorisation and Currency Evaluation Qualification procedures.

Removal of Upper Pick Module

Rear Access

1.     The upper pick module for the rear access presenter is removed by firstly disconnecting the inter pick harness between the presenter and the pick module as shown below.

2.     Disconnect the vacuum tubing which connects the pick module to the presenter at the first tee connector as shown below by pushing the pushing the yellow ring towards the Tee‐piece while pulling the filter in the opposite direction.

3.     Loosen the four toggle latches on the upper pick module by inserting a flat bladed screwdriver and lifting in the direction of the arrow to release the latches.

4.     Carefully disengage both latches on one side and allow the pick module to swing down and hang on the other two.

5.     The next step is to carefully lift the pick module off the two remaining latches.

On the front access ATM the control board is attached to the upper pick module.

1.     The interpick harness and the vacuum tubing are disconnected in the same manner as the rear access version.

2.     Disconnect the harness connectors from the control board as described in the Removing the Control Board section to release the control board from both the harness and the presenter module. Remove the two fixing screws that hold the control board mounting assembly to the upper pick module and then remove the control board and mounting assembly.

3.     Loosen the four toggle latches on the upper pick module by inserting a flat bladed screwdriver and lifting in the direction of the arrow to release the latches.

4.     Carefully disengage both latches on one side and allow the pick module to swing down and hang on the other two.

5.     The next step is to carefully lift the pick module off the two remaining latches.

Replacing the Upper Pick Module

Fitting a replacement upper pick module is the reverse of the removal procedure.

Removing the Presenter Module

Rear Access

The presenter module is removed as follows:

1.     Remove the two securing screws that lock the presenter slides to the presenter module as shown by the two arrows below.

2.     Carefully slide the presenter module location studs off the slides and remove.

Front Access

The presenter module is removed as follows:

1.     Remove the two securing screws that lock the presenter slides to the presenter module as shown by the two arrows below.

2.     Carefully slide the presenter module location studs off the slides and remove.

Replacing the Presenter Module

Fitting a replacement presenter module is the reverse of the removal procedure.

Control Board Authorisation

The following procedure must be carried out if the control board is replaced as part of the dispenser unit or separately as an FRU item. The following steps require the Parts Replacement Service Key for activation.

1.     Select the DEVICE STATUS LIST option from the SYSTEM APPLICATION menu.

2.     Select the device status reporting AUTHORISATION REQUIRED on the Cash Dispenser option.

3.     Select the required part to be authorised.

4.     The system will display a screen confirming the test is being performed.

5.     If the part is authorised the following screen is displayed.

6.     Once authorisation is complete the DEVICE STATUS LIST screen is redisplayed.

7.     If the part is not authorised the system will display a summary report screen stating the test has failed.

8.     If the authorisation fails then repeat steps 1 to 6 after ensuring that the service key being used is correctly inserted and has appropriate authorisation security level.

Control Board Authentication

The dispenser has the following levels of dispense protection:

               ?        USB

? Logical ? Physical.

To authenticate a control board when configuration is physical or command is accessed through System Application via the Parts Replacement Service Key with a logical configuration. The following procedure must be carried out if the control board is replaced as part of the dispenser unit or separately as an FRU item. The procedure must also be carried out if the PC Core and/or hard disk are replaced or if the hard disk has been reformatted or ghosted.

NOTE: If configuration is logical use all steps except 5 and 6. If the configuration is physical use all steps. If the configuration is USB no action is required. 

1.     Select the SELF‐SERVICE CONFIGURATION option from the SYSTEM APPLICATION menu.

2.     Then select the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION option.

3.     Then select the USB CASH DISPENSER option.

4.     Then select the AUTHENTICATE option.

5.     The AUTHENTICATE option will display the following screen.

6.     The user should change the state of the dispenser security toggle switch or remove/ replace the cassette located in the lowest configured and populated position of the dispenser unit, or insert a cassette into the lowest possible configured position of the dispenser unit within 1 minute to make the system attempt to authenticate the board.

7.     If the system fails to verify the control board the following screen is displayed.

8.     The user should select the OK button which will return them back to the USB CASH DISPENSER menu and repeat steps 4,5 and 6.

9.     If the system verifies the board the following screen is displayed.

10.  Once the board has been verified the user should return to the SYSTEM APPLICATION menu and proceed with the Currency Evaluation Qualification Procedure if required.

Dispense Protection Configuration

The following procedure must be carried out if the control board is replaced as part of the dispenser unit or separately as an FRU item. The procedure must also be carried out if the PC Core and/or hard disk are replaced, or if the hard disk has been reformatted or ghosted.

Note:  Dispense configuration comes in three versions ie: USB dispense, logical dispense and physical dispense.

To change dispense configurations as listed below use all the following steps except 7:

               ?        USB to logical

               ?        logical to physical

               ?        USB to physical

To change security configurations as listed below use all the following steps:

               ?        physical to logical

               ?        logical to USB

               ?        physical to USB

1.     Select the SELF‐SERVICE CONFIGURATION option from the SYSTEM APPLICATION menu.

2.     Then select the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION option.

3.     Then select the USB CASH DISPENSER option.

4.     Then select the DISPENSE PROTECTION CONFIGURATION option.

5.     The system will display the following screen.

6.     Use the toggle option to select the appropriate dispense protection level required. Once the correct option has been selected use OK option to display the following screen.

7.     The user should change the state of the dispenser security toggle switch or remove the cassette located in the lowest configured and populated position of the dispenser unit, or insert a cassette into the lowest possible configured position of the dispenser unit within 1 minute to change configuration.

8.     If the system fails to verify the control board the following screen is displayed.

9.     The user should select the OK button which will return them back to the USB CASH DISPENSER menu and repeat steps 4 to 7 inclusive.

10.  Once the configuration has been verified the user should return to the SYSTEM APPLICATION menu and proceed with the Currency Evaluation Qualification Procedure if required.

Currency Evaluation Qualification Procedure

NOTE: The currency dispenser is calibrated in the same way as the other dispensers in the 58XX and 56XX ranges of ATMs and singularity values previously calculated for these are valid. 

When the first dispenser is received in each country the local Field Engineering organization must establish the singularity values for each type of currency to be dispensed. These singularity values must then be entered to every ATM dispensing that currency, upon initial installation or whenever the dispenser control board or the LVDT has been changed or repaired.

The currency evaluation qualification procedure can only be performed on a calibrated dispenser. Attempting the procedure on an uncalibrated or incorrectly calibrated dispenser will give incorrect results.

Calibrating the Dispenser

NOTE: Dispensers are shipped pre‐calibrated by the manufacturing plant. Calibration is required if the LVDT or control board are replaced or NVRAM is corrupted or a new version of firmware is down loaded. 

The dispenser maintains an internal compensation factor in NVRAM on the dispenser control board. This compensation factor allows for differences that exist between the singularities calculated by different LVDT assemblies because of mechanical tolerances. The dispenser adjusts the LVDT compensation factor automatically as bills of a known singularity value are dispensed. While bills are dispensed the actual average of good single bill singularities is measured over 255 bills. This average is compared to the singularity figure typed in at installation time and the compensation factor is adjusted accordingly. Initially the compensation factor is set to 80H (equivalent to 1.00) and this is changed automatically by the dispenser and updated every 255 bills.

To achieve dispenser calibration at least 255 bills of a known singularity must be dispensed. This may be local currency or test media.

The following procedure describes how to calibrate a dispenser on a terminal running on the XP platform using SYSTEM APPLICATION. If configuring dual dispensers you will use the SYSTEM APPLICATION on NT and should refer, for details to the publication B0066167‐A000, “Self‐Service Platform Software, Personas (PLATFORM For Windows XP), System Application User Guide”.

Level 1 diagnostic tests are required to dispense cash and for this reason you need to insert the field engineer’s Service key.

The procedure is as follows:

1.     For each cassette type, adjust the cassette guides if necessary to accept the test currency, and set the cassette magnets for the required cassette type. Refer to currency cassette chapter in the dispense section of this manual for details.

2.     Load the test currency into the cassettes.

3.     Insert the cassettes into the dispenser.

4.     Put the ATM into supervisor mode.

5.     Select the SELF‐SERVICE CONFIGURATION option from the SYSTEM APPLICATION MAIN MENU.

6.     Then select the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION option.

7.     Then select the USB CASH DISPENSER option. The system will then instruct the CE to wait while the dispenser transport is cleared.

8.     The system with display the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu.

9.     Then choose the SET option.

10.  The system will then display the NOTE CONFIGURATION set up menu as shown below.

The menu is spread over two pages which is navigated using page up and page down options.

11.  To start changing the note configuration, select the Reset option.

12.  Enter note size for type 1. This is repeated for types 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7.

13.  Enter the singularity for type 1. This is repeated for types 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7.

14.  To accept all the changes made, select OK.

15.  The system will redisplay the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu shown below.

16.  To finally confirm the changes activate the Toggle option to change the NO option to YES.

17.  Return to the SYSTEM APPLICATION main Menu and select the DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC option.

18.  Select the CASH HANDLER option from the DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC menu.

19.  Operate the dispenser security switch.

20.  Select SET NOTES option from the USB CASH DISPENSER menu. The number of notes to be picked is 40 from cassette type 1

21.  Change the Loop Off option to Loop On.

22.  Select the DISPENSE option and allow the loop count to reach at least 7 before stopping the command.

The dispenser is now calibrated and you can evaluate the currency to be dispensed as described in the next section.

Establishing Singularity and Size

In this procedure you have to cause the ATM to calculate the singularity and size of 40 dispensed bills five times for each currency you wish to evaluate. Due to the nature of the currency the singularity calculated may vary for each attempt. Add the five figures and take the average (divide by five and round to the nearest whole number) and the answers are the singularity and size values you enter to the ATM and to all ATMs using the same currency.

To achieve a good singularity figure the currency loaded for this procedure should comprise of new bills. Load the currency so that the same side of each bill is facing the truck door of the cassette. Put the bills into the cassette in 50 bill bunches, alternately right way up and upside down (see the following illustration). This makes sure that variations in inking are allowed for.

The singularity procedure is as follows:

1.     Prepare cassettes to accept the denominations of currency you will normally be dispensing from the ATMs. Refer to currency cassette chapter in the dispense section of this manual for the method of adjusting cassettes to currency size.

2.     Set the cassette magnets to indicate cassette types 1, 2, 3 and 4 as required. Refer to currency cassette chapter in the dispense section of this manual for this setting

3.     Load at least 200 bills of each denomination of the currency into the cassettes

4.     Insert the cassettes into the dispenser

5.     Put the ATM into supervisor mode

6.     Select the SYSTEM APPLICATION option from the ATM opening menu.

7.     Select the SELF‐SERVICE CONFIGURATION option from the SYSTEM APPLICATION menu.

8.     Then choose the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION option.

9.     Then choose the USB CASH DISPENSER option from the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION menu. The system will display the following screen.

10.  Select the NOTE CONFIGURATION option.

11.  Then choose the LEARN option.

12.  Select the SET NOTES option to change the number of bills to be dispensed during the LEARN process.

13.  The system will display the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu showing the types available as shown below.

NOTE: The menus only show the cassette types present in the ATM. 

14.  Select Type 1 from the menu shown below and the system will display the menu below which allows you to change the number of bills to be dispensed.

15.  Return to NOTE CONFIGURATION menu and activate Type 1.

16.  The system will perform a test and return the message shown below.

17.  The system will return to the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu.

18.  Make a note of the singularity and size figures on the screen against the cassette and type selected or all cassette types if applicable.

19.  Empty the purge bin as necessary.

20.  Repeat steps 11 to 18 until you have five readings of singularity and size for each cassette type loaded.

21.  Add each set of five figures and divide the total by five to obtain an average singularity and size for each cassette type.

22.  Select the PARAMETER option from the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu

23.  Modify as appropriate the parameters you require to change.

24.  To accept all the changes made select OK and the changes will be accepted.

25.  The system will redisplay the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu shown below.

26.  To finally confirm the changes activate the Toggle option to change the NO option to YES.

27.  Return the system to the SYSTEM APPLICATION MAIN menu.

The procedure is now complete. From the UTILITIES menu you can now enter level 1 diagnostics and dispense notes to test the validity of the singularity values. A minimum of one cassette full of used notes and one cassette full of new notes of each denomination should be dispensed. New notes must be loaded with alternate packs right way up and then upside down. Bowed notes must be loaded with the bow towards the note pusher.

A reject rate less than 1.5% must be achieved when dispensing an average of 2.5 notes per transaction. If the reject rate is greater than this the singularity and size values should be recalculated.

Calculation of Reject Rate

The reject rate is calculated using the following formula. The numbers for rejected bills and total bills picked are taken from tallies.

Total Number of Rejected Bills

                                        Reject Rate      =     x 100%

Total Bills Picked + Total Number of Rejected Bills

Error Messages

Errors occurring during bill configuration procedures result in the error messages described below.

Dispenser Clear Transport Error

When the DISPENSER BILL CONFIG option is selected from the CONFIGURATION menu a CLEAR command is sent to clear the transport of any bills. If the clear operation fails then the following error screens shown below are displayed. Each screen is displayed for five seconds before the next one is displayed. You return to the CASH HANDLER menu via the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION menu.

Change Parameter Errors

The currency parameters are checked for errors as they are entered. If an error is detected then the error message shown below is displayed. The incorrect entry is highlighted and you can re‐enter a correct value in the error position.

The message is shown for five seconds and then you are prompted to enter the new parameter value again. Once all the parameter values have been changed and checked, the main dispenser screen reappears with the new parameter values. If a mistake becomes apparent at this point then the user can select CHANGE again.

The dispenser parameter error messages are as follows:

?        ERROR ‐ VALID RANGE XX ‐ XXX ‐ Parameter value is outside the permissible range. This applies to bill sizes and singularity values

?        DUPLICATE VALUE IN SEQUENCE ‐ A duplicate value has been entered in the presentation order

?        ERROR ‐ INVALID SEQUENCE ‐ The user has input fewer than four values for the presentation order.

Learn Parameter Errors

Cassette Errors During Learn - If an attempt to learn the parameters from a particular cassette type fails then, providing the error is not fatal, the operation will be tried repeatedly until successful, or a fatal error occurs. Should a fatal error occur then the error screen shown below appears, and after five seconds, you are returned to the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu.

Dispenser Error During Learn - The following screen appears if a fatal dispenser error occurs while learning parameters from the dispenser. Any changes made up to this point can not be written to the dispenser therefore you are returned to the CASH HANDLER menu via the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION menu.

Dispenser Read/Write Errors - If, while communicating with the dispenser, an error occurs which is not fatal, then the operation is tried repeatedly until it is successful or until a fatal error occurs. When a fatal error is encountered then a DISPENSER COMMS ERROR screen showing one of the following messages is displayed. The CONFIG MENU activator on the screen returns you to the configuration menu.

?        UNABLE TO READ PARAMETERS ‐ A fatal error has occurred while reading data from the dispenser. Unable to read the currently configured dispenser parameters so can not continue with configuration.

?        CONFIGURATION NOT COMPLETED ‐ Fatal error while writing data to the dispenser. The configuration data is written to the dispenser NVRAM using three separate dispenser calls. One sets the new bill sizes, one sets the new singularity values and the third sets the new presentation order. Because the data is split into three parts, if this type of error occurs then the dispenser configuration is incomplete.

Pick Module Timing

The dispenser does not require any timing relationship to be set between the action of the pick modules and the presenter. The pick module to pick module relationship does, however, still require to be set. The adjustment procedures are described in Aria pick module chapter of the dispense section of this manual.

DIAGNOSTICS

None

STRAPPING

None

ADJUSTMENTS

Drive Belt Tension

Proceed as follows to adjust the tension of the drive belt from the main motor to the intermediate pulley. Refer to the illustrations following the procedure for each type of dispenser

?        Check for a deflection of 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) when a force of 1.0 N (0.21 lb.) is applied to the mid span of the drive belt.

               ?        If the tension is wrong, loosen the four motor mounting screws.

               ?        Move the main motor to adjust the belt tension.

               ?        Tighten the screws and check the tension again.

               ?         Repeat the adjustment until the correct tension is achieved.

Drive Belt Arrangement ‐ Rear Access

Drive Belt Arrangement ‐ Front Access

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT

None.

 


SelfServ 27 Module Removal

ACCESS TO FASCIA ITEMS

1.     Open the topbox rear door. (Remove the door if access is restricted)

2.     Disengage the module tray latch and fully extend the module tray.

KEYPAD

1.     Remove the two screws securing the keypad assembly, then lever the tangs on the bracket off the clips to allow the assembly to be removed.

2.     Disconnect the keypad DC and USB cables. Remove the four screws securing the keypad to the bracket.

3.     When replacing the keypad assembly, make sure the bracket is correctly snapped into place on the clips on the fascia before replacing the screws.

KEYPAD MEI

               1.    Unclip the MEI and disconnect the harness.

MCRW MEI/FASCIA INSERT/DECAL INSERT

1.     Remove the two screws securing the MCRW MEI bracket.

2.     Remove and replace the required part: a        MCRW MEI: Remove the MEI from the bracket and disconnect the harness.

b       MCRW decal holder: Slide the decal holder out of the fascia.

c        MCRW fascia insert: Remove the four screws securing the insert.

3.    When the required part has been replaced, re‐secure the MCRW MEI bracket assembly with the two screws. Note that there is a choice of 4 screw holes in case of thread wear.

RECEIPT FASCIA INSERT & MEI

1.     Remove the four screws securing the receipt fascia insert.

2.     Remove the insert and then either replace the whole assembly, the inner or outer parts of the insert or unclip and disconnect the MEI on the fascia.

MIDI MISCELLANEOUS INTERFACE

1.     Loosen the screw securing the Midi Miscellaneous Interface (Midi Misc. I/F.) to the fascia. Then slide the Midi Misc. I/F to the right and remove it.

2.     Disconnect the harnesses. Then remove and retain the four screws securing the Midi Misc. I/F. to the bracket. Re‐fit the bracket to the replacement Midi Misc. I/F.

PC CORE

1.                            Disconnect the LVDS and LVDS Power connections from the rear of the display.

Detach the cables from any strain relief and anchor point on the rear of the display.

2.                            Disconnect the Audio Jack Socket from the front of the core. Note the position and disconnect all the USB cables from the front of the Core.

3.                            Remove the USB cables from their strain relief clips on the front of the core.

4.                            Unscrew and disconnect the DVI cable from the front of the core.

5.                            Disconnect the LAN cable from the front of the core.

6.                            Disconnect the DC cable from the underneath the core.

7.                            Remove the cables bundles from the cable management clips under the core.


8.                            and retain the M4 shipping screw from the core top bracket.

9.                            Partially remove the other M4 screw in the core top bracket (keyhole slot).

10.                         Unhook the screw from the top bracket, lower the front of the core to clear, then disengage from the two rear locating brackets.

11.                         Refer to the Mini PC Core service chapter for instructions on how to remove the FRUs within the PC core.

PSU

1.     Turn the PSU switch to the off position (0).

2.     Disconnect all of the AC and DC cables from the rear of the PSU.

3.     Partially remove the two M4 nuts from the PSU.

4.     Remove the PSU.

SHUTTER

Note: If access to inside the safe is available, then rack out the cash dispenser for better access to the shutter.

1.     Remove the cowl M6 screw from the top of the safe.

2.     Remove the cowl and remove the harnessing from the cable management clips.

3.     the Card Reader MEI assembly. (see ‘MCRW Fascia Insert and MEI’ instructions).

4.     Disconnect the shutter I2C and DC cables from the shutter.

5.     Remove and retain the three M4 screws securing the shutter.

Note:  Older versions of the shutter assemblies have open slots and the screws need only be partially removed.

6.     Remove the shutter from the fascia.

Fitting is the reverse except leave the shutter screws loose. Run diagnostics to establish the shutter blade home position before fully tightening the shutter screws to the fascia.

CCTV CAMERA

1.     Disconnect the cables from the camera.

2.     Partially remove the two M4 screws from the CCTV camera mounting bracket.

3.     Remove the camera and mounting bracket from the fascia.

FASCIA

From the rear of the unit:

1.                            Disconnect the LVDS (USB, Power and Comms) cables from the rear of the display.

2.                            the cables from the clips on the rear of the display.

3.                            Disconnect the Audio Jack Socket from the front of the core.

4.                            Disconnect the Midi Misc I/F USB from the front of the core (USB port 2).

5.                            Remove the Audio and Midi Misc I/F USB from the cable management clips underneath the core.

6.                            Disconnect the Cash Dispenser MEI.

7.                            Remove the Keypad (See ‘Keypad Removal’ instructions)

8.                            Remove the CCTV, CCR and Biometric devices.

9.                            Disconnect the SPS cables from the device, if installed.

10.                         Disconnect the RIO and Alarms to Midi Misc I/F cables, if installed.

11.                         Disconnect the Autosupervisor cables from the switch.

12.                         Disconnect the Display Air Duct Tube from the airflow cover.

13.                         Check harnessing is not tied in to prevent fascia removal.

14.                         Remove the six M4 nuts from the rear of the fascia. Three down the left‐hand side and three down the right‐hand side.

15.                         Partially remove the M4 screw from the fascia retaining bracket.


16.                         Turn the retaining bracket 180 degrees to allow fascia removal.

From the front of the unit:

17.                         Use the keypad aperture and the top edge of the fascia as hand holds and pull the fascia carefully outwards and clear of the unit. Take care not to snag any harnessing.

18.                         Place the fascia on a clean flat surface.

DISPLAY

1.     Disconnect the three harness connectors (USB, power and signal) on the display.

2.     If the ATM is fitted with a touchscreen, carefully open the Zero Insertion Force connector (ZIF) retaining the ribbon cable connectors on the touchscreen controllers:

two cables at the top and one on the right‐hand side of the display.

Tip: Use a small flat head screwdriver to gently prise open the connector.

3.     Loosen the four screws (two each side) securing the display to the fascia. Then lift the display off the screws and slide it out from behind the top‐box.

Note: on early units, the screws may have to be removed completely, not just loosened.

4.     Loosen the screws securing the touchscreen controllers in the keyhole slots. Then lift the controller assemblies off the display. Retain the controllers and their covers and harnesses, to be fitted to the replacement display.

Note:  When re‐fitting the ribbon connectors make sure that the white stripes on the ribbon cables are level and only just visible once the white retaining clamps have been pushed back into place. The right‐hand ribbon is particularly difficult to reconnect, so to make access easier, try removing the controller from the display and bending open the cover.

TOUCHSCREEN

1.     Remove the fascia and place on a clean flat surface. (See ‘Fascia Removal’ instructions).

2.     Remove the display assembly from the fascia. (See ‘Display Removal’ instructions) Note: Take care not to leave finger prints or debris on the display and or filter surfaces.

3.     Remove the two pan head plastite screws from the airflow cover.

4.     Remove airflow cover moulding.

5.     Partially remove the two pan head plastite screws from the top corners of the fascia.

6.     Remove the eight pan head plastite screws from the top and sides of the fascia.

7.     Remove the six M4 screws from the insides of the fascia brace.

8.     Disengage the bezel tabs and screws from the locating slots. Separate the touchscreen bezel from the shelf by first sliding up and then out.

9.     Follow the reverse of these instructions to fit the new touchscreen.

Note 1:  When replacing the touchscreen take care to feed the ribbon cables through the holes in the fascia without trapping or folding them.

Note 2:  Make sure there is no gap between the refitted touchscreen and the lower fascia. Apply pressure to all edges to ensure a tight fit.

Note 3:  When re‐fitting the ribbon connectors make sure that the white stripes on the ribbon cables are level and only just visible once the white retaining clamps have been pushed back into place. The right‐hand ribbon is particularly difficult to reconnect, so to make access easier, try removing the controller from the display and bending open the cover.

FDK BEZEL

1.                                      Remove the fascia and place on a clean flat surface. (See ‘Fascia Removal’ instructions).

2.                                      Remove the display assembly from the fascia. (See ‘Display Removal’ instructions)

3.                                      Remove the two pan head plastite screws and the airflow cover.

4.                                      Partially remove the four pan head plastite screws (keyholes slots) from the left and right hand side of the mounting plate.

5.                                      Partially remove the three pan head plastite screws (keyholes slots) from along the top of the mounting plate.

6.                                      Remove the pan head plastite screw from along the top of the mounting plate (below the speaker).

7.                                      Remove the three M4 screws from along the left‐hand side of the mounting plate edge.


8.                                      three M4 screws from along the right‐hand side of the mounting plate edge.

9.                                      Remove the display mounting bracket.

10.                                   FDK bezel.

11.                                   Place the bezel on a clean flat surface.

12.                                   You can now replace the screen or gain access to the FDK assemblies.

FASCIA SHELF

1.                                      Remove the Fascia from the unit. (see ‘Fascia Removal’ instructions).

2.                                      Remove the Receipt Printer Interface moulding and MEI. (see ‘Receipt Fascia Insert and MEI’ instructions).

3.                                      Remove the Card Reader Interface moulding and MEI. (see ‘MCRW Fascia Insert and MEI’ instructions).

4.                                      Remove the Cash Camera device if fitted.

5.                                      Remove the Bar‐code reader device if fitted.

6.                                      Remove the Contactless Card Reader module if fitted.

7.                                      Remove the three pan head plastite screws from the top, the five pan head plastite screws from the bottom and the four pan head plastite screws from the sides.

8.                                      airflow cover moulding.

9.                                      Remove the shelf from the fascia assembly.

CASH DISPENSER

Please refer to the FRU removal section of S2 Dispenser chapter in the Dispense section of this manual.


 


 


For problems with this publication please email:

FinancialHWL3.Support@atm Notes.com

For technical queries please contact your local atm Notes support.



[1] 1. Remove and retain the four screws securing the rear cover. Remove the cover.